V-ClassOperating Instructions

Mercedes-BenzOrder no. 6463 7351 02 Part no. 447 584 17 03 Z102 Edition 03-17

É4475841703Z1028ËÍ4475841703Z102

V-Clas

s

Legal informationInternet

Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehi-cles and about Daimler AG can be found on thefollowing websites:http://www.mercedes-benz.comhttp://www.daimler.com

Editorial office

You are welcome to forward any queries or sug-gestions you may have regarding these Operat-ing Instructions to:Daimler AG, HPC: CAC, Customer Service,70546 Stuttgart, Germany© Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated orotherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, with-out the written permission of Daimler AG.

Vehicle manufacturer

Daimler AGMercedesstraße 13770327 StuttgartGermany

SymbolsG WARNINGWarning notes make you aware of dangerswhich could pose a threat to your health orlife, or to the health and life of others.

H Environmental noteEnvironmental notes provide you with infor-mation on environmentally aware actions ordisposal.

! Notes on material damage alert you to dan-gers that could lead to damage to your vehi-cle.

i These symbols indicate useful instructionsor further information that could be helpful toyou.

X This symbol designates an instruc-tion you must follow.

X Several consecutive symbols indi-cate an instruction with severalsteps.

(Y page) This symbol tells you where you canfind further information on a topic.

Y Y This symbol indicates a warning or aninstruction that is continued on thenext page.

Display This text indicates a message on thedisplay.

Parts of the software in the vehicle are protectedby copyright © 2005 The Free Type Projecthttp://www.freetype.org. All rights reserved.

As at 27.10.2016

Welcome to the world of Mercedes-BenzBefore you first drive off, read these OperatingInstructions carefully and familiarise yourselfwith your vehicle. Please adhere to the informa-tion and warning notes in these OperatingInstructions for your own safety and to ensure alonger operating duration of the vehicle. Failureto observe the instructions may lead to damageto the vehicle or personal injury.The equipment or model designation of yourvehicle may differ according to:RmodelRorderRcountry specificationRavailabilityThe illustrations in this manual show a left-hand-drive vehicle. The location of vehicle parts andcontrols for right-hand drive vehicles differaccordingly.Mercedes-Benz is constantly updating its vehi-cles to the state of the art.Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right tointroduce changes in:RdesignREquipmentRtechnical featuresTherefore, the descriptions provided may occa-sionally differ from your own vehicle.The following are components of the vehicle:ROperating InstructionsRMaintenance or Service BookletREquipment-dependent supplementsKeep these printed documents in the vehicle atall times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass thedocuments on to the new owner.

i You can get to know some of the importantfeatures of your vehicle in German and Eng-lish in the interactive Operating Instructionson the Internet at:www.mercedes-benz.de/betriebsanleitung-transporter

You can also use the Mercedes-Benz Guidesmartphone app:

Please note that the Mercedes-Benz Guide appmay not yet be available in your country.The technical documentation team at DaimlerAG wishes you safe and pleasant motoring.

4475841703Z102 É4475841703Z1028ËÍ

Index ....................................................... 4

Digital Operating Instructions ........... 27Introduction ........................................... 27Operation ............................................... 27

Introduction ......................................... 28Operating Instructions ........................... 28Correct use ............................................ 28Protection of the environment ............... 29Operating safety and vehicle approval ............................................................... 30Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ............... 33QR code for rescue card ........................ 33Data stored in the vehicle ...................... 34Copyright information ............................ 34

At a glance ........................................... 35Cockpit .................................................. 35Instrument cluster ................................. 36Steering wheel with buttons .................. 38Centre console ...................................... 39Overhead control panel ......................... 43Door control panel ................................. 44

Safety ................................................... 45Useful information ................................. 45Occupant safety .................................... 45Children in the vehicle ........................... 59Pets in the vehicle ................................. 68Driving safety systems ........................... 69Anti-theft systems ................................. 72

Opening and closing ........................... 75Useful information ................................. 75Key ........................................................ 75Central locking ...................................... 79Driver's door and co-driver's door ......... 81Sliding door ........................................... 82Electric sliding door ............................... 82Tailgate .................................................. 85EASY-PACK tailgate ............................... 86Separately-opening rear window ........... 88Side windows ......................................... 89

Panorama sliding sunroof ...................... 91

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 96Useful information ................................. 96Seats ..................................................... 96Steering wheel ..................................... 121Mirrors ................................................. 122Memory function ................................. 124

Lights and windscreen wipers ......... 126Useful information ............................... 126Exterior lighting ................................... 126Interior lighting .................................... 131Replacing bulbs: interior lighting andambient lamps ..................................... 132Replacing bulbs: vehicles with LEDheadlamps ........................................... 134Replacing bulbs: vehicles with halo-gen headlamps .................................... 134Windscreen wipers .............................. 138

Climate control ................................. 143Useful information ............................... 143Overview of climate control systems ... 143Operating the climate control system .. 146Operating the auxiliary heating sys-tem ...................................................... 157Adjusting the air vents ......................... 169

Driving and parking .......................... 171Useful information ............................... 171Running-in notes .................................. 171Driving ................................................. 171Automatic transmission ....................... 178Refuelling ............................................. 184Parking ................................................ 189Driving tips .......................................... 191Driving systems ................................... 197Towing a trailer .................................... 239

On-board computer and displays .... 245Useful information ............................... 245Important safety notes ........................ 245Display and operation .......................... 245Menus and submenus ......................... 248

2 Contents

Display messages ................................ 260Warning and indicator lamps on theinstrument cluster ............................... 283

Multimedia systems ......................... 293Introduction ......................................... 293Overview .............................................. 294Touchpad ............................................. 296Favourites ............................................ 300Calling up vehicle settings ................... 301Navigation ........................................... 301Telephone ............................................ 303Establishing and ending an Internetconnection ........................................... 309Radio ................................................... 310

Stowing and features ....................... 312Useful information ............................... 312Stowage spaces and stowage com-partments ............................................ 312Sun visors ............................................ 314Folding table ........................................ 314Cup holder ........................................... 318Bottle holder ........................................ 320Ashtray ................................................ 320Cigarette lighter ................................... 32012 V socket ......................................... 321230 V socket ....................................... 322Coolbox in the centre console ............. 323Mercedes-Benz emergency call sys-tem ...................................................... 324MB Contact/Mercedes me connect .... 324Mobile phone ....................................... 325iPad® attachment ................................ 327Additional communications equip-ment .................................................... 327

Transporting loads with the vehi-cle ....................................................... 328Useful information ............................... 328Loading guidelines ............................... 328Load distribution ................................. 329Securing loads ..................................... 330Load-securing aids .............................. 331Carrier systems ................................... 334

Maintenance and care ...................... 336Useful information ............................... 336Engine compartment ........................... 336Maintenance ........................................ 343Battery ................................................. 345Care ..................................................... 350

Breakdown assistance ..................... 357Useful information ............................... 357Where will I find...? .............................. 357Flat tyre ............................................... 358Jump-starting ....................................... 358Tow-starting and towing away ............. 360Fuses ................................................... 364

Wheels and tyres .............................. 365Useful information ............................... 365Important safety notes ........................ 365Operation ............................................ 366Winter operation .................................. 367Tyre pressure ....................................... 369Changing a wheel ................................ 376Wheel and tyre combinations .............. 380Spare wheel ......................................... 382

Technical data ................................... 385Useful information ............................... 385Vehicle electronics .............................. 385Identification plates ............................. 386Service products and capacities .......... 386Vehicle data ......................................... 394

Contents 3

1, 2, 3 ...4MATIC (permanent four-wheeldrive) .................................................. 20912 V socket

see Sockets230 V power socket .......................... 322360° camera

Cleaning ......................................... 354Function/notes ............................. 234

AABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Display message ............................ 261Function/notes ................................ 69Important safety notes .................... 69Warning lamp ................................. 286

Accelerationsee Kickdown

AccidentAutomatic measures after an acci-dent ................................................. 59

Activating/deactivating air-recir-culation mode .................................... 155Activating/deactivating coolingwith air dehumidification ................. 146Active light function ......................... 129Active Light System

Display message ............................ 269Active Parking Assist

Cancelling/stopping active park-ing assistance ................................ 229Detecting parking spaces .............. 226Display message ............................ 276Exiting a parking space .................. 228Function/notes ............................. 225Important safety notes .................. 225Parking .......................................... 227Towing a trailer .............................. 225

Active Service Systemsee Service interval display

Adaptive brake lights .......................... 72Adaptive Highbeam Assist

Display message ............................ 269Function/notes ............................. 130Switching on/off ........................... 130

AdBlue®

Additive ......................................... 390Display message ............................ 271Displaying the level ........................ 256Driving abroad ............................... 194Exhaust gas aftertreatment ............. 32Filler cap ........................................ 187Filling capacity ............................... 390Filling pump ................................... 187Important safety notes .................. 389Low outside temperatures ............. 390Notes ............................................. 389Purity ............................................. 390Refill bottles .................................. 188Refill canisters ............................... 188Topping up ..................................... 186

Additional speedometer ................... 259Additives

Diesel ............................................ 389Engine oil ....................................... 391

Adjusting the headlamp range ......... 128Adjusting the seat sliders ................ 115Air filter (white display message) .... 273Air pressure

see Tyre pressureAir vents

Important safety notes .................. 169Setting the centre air vents ........... 169Setting the rear-compartment airvents .............................................. 169Setting the side air vents ............... 169

Air-conditioning systemsee Climate control

AirbagAutomatic front-passenger frontairbag deactivation .......................... 52Introduction ..................................... 49PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indica-tor lamp ........................................... 46

AirbagsDisplay message ............................ 262Front airbag (driver, frontpassenger) ....................................... 51Important safety guidelines ............. 50Sidebag ............................................ 51Triggering ......................................... 57Windowbag ...................................... 52

4 Index

Alertness assistantsee ATTENTION ASSIST

All-wheel driveDisplay message (brake) ................ 264Downhill Speed Regulation ............ 209DSR ............................................... 209Function/notes ............................. 209

Ambient lampChanging a bulb (front door) .......... 133Changing a bulb (vanity mirror) ...... 133

Ambient lighting ................................ 132Anti-lock braking system

see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)Anti-skid chains

see Snow chainsAquaplaning ....................................... 195Armrest

Stowage compartment .................. 313Armrests ............................................ 119Ashtray ............................................... 320Assistance display (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 255Assistance menu (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 256ASSYST

Service interval display .................. 344ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

Interior motion sensor ..................... 73Tow-away protection ........................ 73

Attachments/add-on equipment ....... 32ATTENTION ASSIST

Activating/deactivating ................. 258Display message ............................ 274Function/notes ............................. 219

Audio 10Important safety notes .................. 293

Audio 15Important safety notes .................. 293

Authorised workshopsee Qualified specialist workshop

AUTO lightsDisplay message ............................ 269see Lights

Automatic engine start (ECO start/stop function) .................................... 176Automatic engine switch-off (ECOstart/stop function) .......................... 175

Automatic front-passenger frontairbag deactivation system

Operation ......................................... 53Problems ......................................... 56System self-test ............................... 55

Automatic headlamp mode .............. 126Automatic locking ............................... 81Automatic transmission

Accelerator pedal position ............. 182Changing gear ............................... 180DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 178Display message ............................ 281Drive program display .................... 180Driving tips .................................... 182DYNAMIC SELECT switch .............. 181Emergency running mode .............. 184Engaging drive position .................. 178Engaging neutral ............................ 178Engaging reverse gear ................... 178Engaging the park position ............ 178Gearshift recommendation ............ 183Important safety notes .................. 178Kickdown ....................................... 182Manual shifting .............................. 182Overview ........................................ 178Problem (fault) ............................... 184Rocking free .................................. 182Shift ranges ................................... 180Starting the engine ........................ 173Steering wheel gearshift paddles ... 182Trailer towing ................................. 182Transmission position display(DIRECT SELECT lever) ................... 180Transmission positions .................. 179

Automatic transmission emer-gency running mode ......................... 184Auxiliary heater

see Auxiliary warm-air heatersee Hot-water auxiliary heater

Auxiliary heatingsee Auxiliary warm-air heatersee Hot-water auxiliary heater

Auxiliary ventilationsee Hot-water auxiliary heater

Auxiliary warm-air heaterFunction/notes ............................. 162Heater booster function (Immedi-ate heating mode) .......................... 165

Index 5

Immediate heating mode ............... 165Important safety notes .................. 157Problem (malfunction) ................... 167Remote control .............................. 163Setting departure time ................... 165Switching on/off (remote con-trol) ................................................ 163Switching on/off (Timer) ............... 164Timer ............................................. 164

Axle load, permissible (trailer tow-ing) ...................................................... 396

BBack button ....................................... 296Ball coupling

Fitting ............................................ 241Removing ....................................... 242

BAS (Brake Assist System)Function/notes ................................ 69

Basic settingssee Settings

Battery (auxiliary heating remotecontrol)

Changing (auxiliary warm-airheater) ........................................... 166Replacing (hot-water auxiliaryheater) ........................................... 160

Battery (key)Checking .......................................... 78Important safety notes .................... 77Replacing ......................................... 78

Battery (vehicle)Care ............................................... 349Charging ........................................ 349Connecting and fitting ................... 348Disconnecting and removing ......... 346Display message ............................ 271Important safety notes .................. 345Jump starting ................................. 358Location ......................................... 346

Bedsee Rear bench seat

Before pulling awayImportant safety notes .................. 172

Beltsee Seat belts

Belt tensionerActivation ......................................... 57

Belt warning ......................................... 49Bench berth

see Rear bench seatBio-diesel ........................................... 388Bleeding the fuel system .................. 177Blind Spot Assist

Activating ....................................... 215Activating/deactivating (on-board computer) ............................ 257Collision warning ........................... 215Display message ............................ 278Important safety notes .................. 214Monitoring range of the sensors .... 214Notes/function .............................. 213Trailer towing ................................. 215Warning display ............................. 215

Blowersee Climate control

BlueTECTopping up AdBlue® ....................... 186

BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreat-ment

Notes ............................................... 32BlueTEC®

AdBlue® service product ................ 389Exhaust gas aftertreatment notes .... 32

Bluetooth®

Connecting a different mobilephone ............................................ 306Entering the passcode ................... 305Searching for a mobile phone ........ 304Telephony ...................................... 303

BonnetClosing ........................................... 337Display message ............................ 282Important safety notes .................. 336Opening ......................................... 337

Bottle holders .................................... 320Brake

Display message (all-wheel drive) .. 264EBD .................................................. 70

Brake Assistsee BAS (Brake Assist System)

Brake assistancesee BAS (Brake Assist System)

6 Index

Brake fluidChecking the level ......................... 342Display message ............................ 264Notes ............................................. 392

Brake force distributionsee EBD (electronic brake forcedistribution)

Brake lampReplacing bulbs ............................. 137Trailer display message ................. 269

Brake lampsAdaptive ........................................... 72Display message ............................ 270

Brake pads/liningsNew ............................................... 195

BrakesABS .................................................. 69Adaptive Brake Assist .................... 212BAS .................................................. 69Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 392Checking brake fluid level .............. 342Display message ............................ 261Driving tips .................................... 194Hill start assist ............................... 175HOLD function ............................... 221Important safety notes .................. 194New brake pads/linings ................ 195Parking brake ................................ 189Warning lamp ................................. 285

BreakdownFire extinguisher ............................ 358Vehicle tool kit ............................... 357see Towing away

Buttons and controller ...................... 295Buttons on the steering column ...... 246

CCalling up a fault

see Display messagesCamera

see 360° camerasee Reversing camera

Carsee Vehicle

Car washsee Care

Car wash (care) ................................. 350

Care360° camera ................................. 354Automatic car wash ....................... 350Carpets .......................................... 356Chrome parts ................................. 352Display ........................................... 355Exterior lighting ............................. 353Gear or selector lever .................... 356High-pressure cleaner .................... 351Interior ........................................... 355Notes ............................................. 350Paint .............................................. 351Plastic trim .................................... 355Reversing camera .......................... 353Roof lining ...................................... 356Seat belt ........................................ 356Seat cover ..................................... 356Sensors ......................................... 353Sliding door ................................... 354Steering wheel ............................... 356Tail pipes ....................................... 352Trim pieces .................................... 356Washing by hand ........................... 351Washing the engine ....................... 351Wheels ........................................... 352Windows ........................................ 352Wiper blades .................................. 352

CD player/CD changer(on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 253Central locking

Automatic locking ............................ 81Emergency unlocking ....................... 77Locking/unlocking (buttons) ........... 79Locking/unlocking (key) .................. 76

Central locking systemsee Central locking

Centre consoleBetween the driver's and co-driv-er's seats ......................................... 42Lower section .................................. 41Middle section ................................. 40Upper section .................................. 39

Changing a bulbAmbient lamp in the front door ...... 133Boot lamp in the side trim panel .... 133Halogen headlamps ....................... 134LED light sources ........................... 134Mirror lamp in the roof lining ......... 133

Index 7

Rear interior light in the roof lining .. 132Signal and ambient light in the tail-gate ............................................... 133

Changing bulbsDipped-beam headlamps ............... 135Fitting/removing a rear lamp clus-ter .................................................. 137Fitting/removing the cover in thefront wheel arch ............................. 135Fitting/removing the tail lamp ....... 137Overview of lamp types (frontbulbs) ............................................. 135Overview of lamp types (rearbulbs) ............................................. 136Parking lamp (front) ....................... 136Parking lamp (rear) ........................ 137Side lamp ....................................... 136Turn signals (front) ......................... 136Turn signals (rear) .......................... 137see Changing light bulbs

ChildRestraint system .............................. 60

Child seatForward-facing restraint system ...... 63ISOFIX .............................................. 61On the front-passenger seat ............ 62Rearward-facing restraint system .... 63Recommendations ........................... 66Suitable positions ............................ 63Top Tether ....................................... 61

Child-proof lockHinged window ................................ 68Sliding door ..................................... 68

Child-proof locksImportant safety notes .................... 67

Children in the vehicleImportant safety notes .................... 59

Chrome parts (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 352Cigarette lighter ................................ 320Cleaning

Mirror turn signal ........................... 353Trailer tow hitch ............................. 354

Climate controlAdjusting airflow ............................ 149Auxiliary heater .............................. 157Auxiliary heating/ventilation .......... 157Auxiliary warm-air heater ............... 162

Controlling automatically ............... 149Convenience opening/closing(air-recirculation mode) ................. 155Cooling with air dehumidification .. 146Demisting the windows .................. 154Demisting the windscreen ............. 154Hot-water auxiliary heater ............. 157Important safety notes .................. 143Indicator lamp ................................ 148Information on TEMPMATIC (air-conditioning system) ..................... 144Information on THERMOTRONIC(3-zone automatic climate con-trol) ................................................ 146Problem with the rear windowheating .......................................... 155Problems with cooling with airdehumidification ............................ 148Rear control panel ......................... 144Setting the air distribution ............. 152Setting the air vents ...................... 169Setting the airflow ......................... 153Setting the climate mode ............... 149Setting the temperature ................ 152Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ............................................ 155Switching on/off ........................... 146Switching residual heat on/off ...... 156Switching the rear window heat-ing on/off ...................................... 155Switching the synchronisationfunction on and off ........................ 153Systems overview .......................... 143TEMPMATIC control panel (air-conditioning system) ..................... 143THERMOTRONIC control panel (3-zone automatic climate control) .... 144

Co-driver's seatsee Seats

CockpitOverview .......................................... 35see Instrument cluster

Coffee cup symbolsee ATTENTION ASSIST

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTActivating/deactivating the dis-tance warning function .................. 257Adaptive Brake Assist .................... 212

8 Index

Display message ............................ 276Distance warning function ............. 211Operation/notes ............................ 211

Collision warningsee COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST

COMAND displayCleaning ......................................... 355

Combination switch .......................... 127Communications devices

Type approval/frequency .............. 385Communications equipment

Operation ....................................... 327Components

Multimedia system ........................ 294Constant headlamp mode

see Daytime driving lightsConsumption statistics (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 249Control panel

above the windscreen ...................... 43Centre console ................................ 39Climate control ................................ 39Driver's door .................................... 44

Controller ........................................... 296Convenience closing feature .............. 91Convenience opening feature ............ 91Convenience opening/closing (air-recirculation mode) ........................... 155Conversions/equipment .................... 32Coolant (engine)

Checking the level ......................... 340Display message ............................ 273Filling capacity ............................... 393Notes ............................................. 392Temperature display in the instru-ment cluster .................................. 246Topping up ..................................... 341Warning lamp ................................. 289

Coolbox .............................................. 323Cooling

see Climate controlCopyright ............................................. 34Cornering light function

Display message ............................ 268Function/notes ............................. 129

Crosswind Assist ................................. 72

Cruise controlActivating ....................................... 198Activation conditions ..................... 198Calling up the stored speed ........... 198Cruise control lever ....................... 198Deactivating ................................... 199Display message ............................ 278Displaying the speed ..................... 198Driving system ............................... 197Important safety notes .................. 197LIM indicator lamp ......................... 198Problem (malfunction) ................... 199Selecting ........................................ 198Setting a speed .............................. 199Storing and maintaining currentspeed ............................................. 198

Cup holderCentre console .............................. 318Important safety notes .................. 318Rear compartment ......................... 319Temperature controlled ................. 319

DDashboard

see CockpitDashboard lighting

see Instrument cluster lightingData

see Technical dataDate

Setting (auxiliary warm-airheater) ........................................... 165

Daytime driving lightsDisplay message ............................ 271Replacing bulbs ............................. 136Switching on/off (switch) .............. 126

Declarations of conformity ................. 30Diagnostics connection

Operating safety and vehicleapproval ........................................... 31

Dialling a number (telephone) .......... 307Diesel .................................................. 388Diesel additives

see AdditivesDiesel particle filter

Short-distance driving .................... 193Digital Operating Instructions ........... 28

Index 9

Digital Owner's ManualHelp ................................................. 27Introduction ..................................... 27

Digital speedometer ......................... 249Dimensions ........................................ 395Dipped-beam headlamps

Display message ............................ 268Driving abroad ............................... 194Replacing bulbs ............................. 135Setting for driving on the right/left ................................................. 258Switching on/off ........................... 126

DIRECT SELECT leverAutomatic transmission ................. 178

DisplayFunction/notes ............................. 248Notes about cleaning ..................... 295see Display messagesee Warning and indicator lamps

Display messageDriving systems ............................. 274Important safety notes .................. 260

Display messagesCalling up (on-board computer) ..... 260Engine ............................................ 271Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 260Introduction ................................... 260Key ................................................ 283Lights ............................................. 268Safety systems .............................. 261Service interval display .................. 344Tyres .............................................. 280Vehicle ........................................... 281

Display overview (multimedia sys-tem) .................................................... 294Distance control

see DISTRONIC PLUSDistance recorder

see Trip meterDistance warning function ............... 211Distance warning signal (warninglamp) .................................................. 291DISTRONIC PLUS

Activating ....................................... 204Activation conditions ..................... 204Cruise control lever ....................... 203Deactivating ................................... 207

Display message ............................ 274Displays in the instrument cluster .. 207Driving tips .................................... 204Front-end collision warning ............ 202Function/notes ............................. 202Important safety notes .................. 202Selecting ........................................ 203Setting the specified minimumdistance ......................................... 206Setting the speed .......................... 206Storing and maintaining the cur-rent speed ..................................... 206

DoorCentral locking/unlocking (key) ...... 76Changing bulbs (ambient lamp) ..... 133Control panel ................................... 44Display message ............................ 282Emergency locking ........................... 77Emergency unlocking ....................... 77

Downhill Speed Regulation .............. 209Drive program

Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 180Drive programs

Automatic transmission ................. 181Drive system

DSR ............................................... 209Driver's door and co-driver's door ..... 81Driver's seat

see SeatsDriving abroad

AdBlue® ......................................... 194Dipped-beam headlamps ............... 194Fuel ................................................ 194Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 193

Driving on flooded roads .................. 196Driving safety system

EBD (electronic brake force distri-bution) ............................................. 70

Driving safety systemsABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 69Adaptive brake lights ....................... 72BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 69ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram) ............................................... 70Important safety guidelines ............. 69Overview .......................................... 69

10 Index

Driving systemCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST .. 211

Driving systems4MATIC .......................................... 209360°camera .................................. 234Active Parking Assist ..................... 225ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 219Blind Spot Assist ............................ 213Cruise control ................................ 197Display message ............................ 274Distronic Plus ................................ 202HOLD function ............................... 221Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 215PARKTRONIC ................................. 222Reversing camera .......................... 229SPEEDTRONIC ............................... 199Traffic Sign Assist .......................... 217

Driving tipsAquaplaning ................................... 195Automatic transmission ................. 182Brakes ........................................... 194DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 208Downhill gradient ........................... 194Driving abroad ............................... 193Driving in mountainous areas ........ 197Driving in winter ............................. 196Driving on flooded roads ................ 196Driving on wet roads ...................... 195General .......................................... 191Icy road surfaces ........................... 196Important safety notes .................. 171Limited braking efficiency on sal-ted roads ....................................... 195New brake disks ............................ 195New brake pads/linings ................ 195Overrun mode ................................ 191Running-in tips ............................... 171Short journeys ............................... 193Snow chains .................................. 368Speed limitation ............................. 193Towing a trailer .............................. 239Wet road surface ........................... 195

DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)Display message ............................ 275Function/notes ............................. 209

DVD videoOperating (on-board computer) ..... 253

DYNAMIC SELECT switchAutomatic transmission ................. 181

EE/e mark ............................................ 385EASY PACK tailgate

Changing bulbs (signal and ambi-ent light) ........................................ 133

EASY-PACK tailgateDisplay messages .......................... 282Important safety notes .................... 86Obstacle detection with reversingfeature ............................................. 86Opening dimensions ...................... 395Opening/closing .............................. 87Problems with the tailgate ............... 88Programming the key button ........... 87Resetting ......................................... 88Setting the opening angle of thetailgate ............................................. 88

EBD (electronic brake force distri-bution)

Display message ............................ 265Function/notes ................................ 70

ECO displayFunction/notes ............................. 191

ECO start/stop functionAutomatic engine start .................. 176Automatic engine switch-off .......... 175Deactivating/activating ................. 177General information ....................... 175Important safety notes .................. 175

Electric sliding doorFunction ........................................... 83important safety notes ..................... 82Obstacle detection ........................... 83Opening/closing from the out-side .................................................. 83Problem (malfunction) ..................... 85Programming the key button ........... 85Resetting ......................................... 85Reversing feature ............................. 83

Electric tailgatesee EASY-PACK tailgate

Electrical fusessee Fuses

Index 11

Electrical sliding doorOpening/closing from the inside ..... 84

Electromagnetic compatibilityDeclaration of conformity ................ 30

Electronic brake force distributionsee EBD (electronic brake forcedistribution)

Electronic Stability Programsee ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

EmergencyAutomatic measures after an acci-dent ................................................. 59

Emergency brakingsee BAS (Brake Assist System)

Emergency key elementFunction/notes ................................ 77Inserting .......................................... 77Locking vehicle ................................ 77Removing ......................................... 77

Emergency unlockingVehicle ............................................. 77

EngineAltitude limit (diesel engine) .......... 197Changing the power output ............. 31Cleaning instructions ..................... 351Display message ............................ 271ECO start/stop function ................ 175Engine number ............................... 386Jump-starting ................................. 358Operating safety .............................. 31Running irregularly ......................... 177Starting .......................................... 173Starting problems .......................... 177Stopping ........................................ 190Technical data ............................... 394Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 363Warning lamp (engine diagnos-tics) ............................................... 289

Engine electronicsNotes ............................................. 385Problem (fault) ............................... 177

Engine jump startingsee Jump starting (engine)

Engine oilAdditives ........................................ 391Checking the oil level (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 338

Checking the oil level using thedipstick .......................................... 339Display message ............................ 274Filling capacity ............................... 391Information about oil consump-tion ................................................ 392Notes about oil grades ................... 390Oil change ...................................... 392Oil level (note) ............................... 338Topping up ..................................... 340Viscosity ........................................ 391

Environmental protectionReturning an end-of-life vehicle ....... 29

ESC (Electronic Stability Control)see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram)

Activating/deactivating ................... 71Activating/deactivating (on-board computer) ............................ 256Crosswind Assist ............................. 72Display message ............................ 265Function/notes ................................ 70Important safety guidelines ............. 70Trailer stabilisation .......................... 71Warning lamp ................................. 287

Exhaust filtersee Diesel particle filter

Exhaust tail pipe (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 352Exterior lighting

see LightsExterior mirrors

Adjusting ....................................... 122Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) ........ 123Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 123Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 123Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 123Resetting ....................................... 123Storing settings (memory func-tion) ............................................... 124

FFault message

see Display messagesFavourites

Adding ........................................... 300

12 Index

Deleting ......................................... 300Displaying and calling up ............... 300Overview ........................................ 300

Fire extinguisher ............................... 358First-aid kit ......................................... 358Fitting a wheel

Fitting a wheel ............................... 379Lowering the vehicle ...................... 379Preparing the vehicle ..................... 377Raising the vehicle ......................... 378Removing a wheel .......................... 378Removing and fitting the sparewheel ............................................. 383Securing the vehicle against roll-ing away ........................................ 377

Flat tyreChanging a wheel/fitting thespare wheel ................................... 377

Foglamps (extended range) .............. 129Folding table

In the rear compartment ................ 314Frequencies

Mobile phone ................................. 385Two-way radio ................................ 385

Front-passenger front airbag deac-tivation system

Operation ......................................... 53Problems ......................................... 56System self-test ............................... 55

FuelAdditives (diesel) ........................... 389Consumption information .............. 389Consumption statistics .................. 249Diesel at very low outside temper-atures ............................................ 388Diesel particle filter ....................... 193Displaying the current consump-tion ................................................ 249Displaying the range ...................... 249Driving abroad ............................... 194Flow improver ................................ 389Fuel gauge ....................................... 36Important safety notes .................. 387Problem (malfunction) ................... 186Quality (diesel) ............................... 388Refuelling ....................................... 184Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 387

Fuel filter (white display message) .. 272

Fuel levelCalling up the range (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 249Gauge .............................................. 36

Fuel tankProblem (malfunction) ................... 186

Function overviewMultimedia system ........................ 294

Fuses .................................................. 364

GGenuine Mercedes-Benz parts ........... 33Glove compartment .......................... 312Guide rail

Maximum tensile strength ............. 395Guide rails

Fitting lashing eyelets .................... 331

HHandbrake

see Parking brakeHandle for seat sliders ..................... 115Handling control system

see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)Handwriting recognition

Switching text reader functionon/off ............................................ 298Touchpad ....................................... 298

Hazard warning lamps ...................... 128Head restraints

Adjusting (electrically) ................... 119Adjusting (manually) ...................... 118Important safety notes .................. 118Removing/fitting ........................... 118

HeadlampsChanging bulbs (halogen head-lamps) ............................................ 134Changing bulbs (LED headlamps) .. 134Misting up ...................................... 131see Automatic headlamp mode

Heater booster functionsee Auxiliary warm-air heatersee Hot-water auxiliary heater

Heatingsee Climate control

High-pressure cleaners .................... 351

Index 13

Hill start assist .................................. 175Hinged window

Child-proof lock ............................... 68Hinged windows

Opening/closing .............................. 90HOLD function

Activating ....................................... 221Activation conditions ..................... 221Deactivating ................................... 221Display message ............................ 279Function/notes ............................. 221General notes ................................ 221

Hot-water auxiliary heaterDisplay message ............................ 282Function/notes ............................. 157Heater booster function ................. 157Important safety notes .................. 157Problem (malfunction) ................... 161Remote control .............................. 159Setting a departure time (remotecontrol) .......................................... 160Switching on/off ........................... 158Switching on/off (control panel inthe centre console) ........................ 158Switching on/off (remote con-trol) ................................................ 159

IImmobiliser .......................................... 72Implied warranty ................................. 28Indicator and warning lamps

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST .. 291Coolant .......................................... 289Engine diagnostics ......................... 289

Indicator lampsDisplay message ............................ 269see Warning and indicator lamps

Indicatorssee Turn signals

Insect protection on the radiator ...... 33Inspection

see ASSYSTInstrument cluster

Overview .......................................... 36Warning and indicator lamps ........... 37

Instrument cluster lighting .............. 245

Intelligent Light SystemActivating/deactivating ................. 258Display message ............................ 270Overview ........................................ 128Setting the dipped-beam head-lamps for driving on the right/left .. 258

Interior lightingAmbient lighting ............................. 132Automatic control system .............. 131Changing bulbs .............................. 132General notes ................................ 131Manual control ............................... 132Notes on changing bulbs ............... 132Overview ........................................ 131Reading lamp ................................. 131Rear interior light in the grab han-dle ................................................. 132Repacing bulbs .............................. 132Switching the rear compartmentlighting on centrally ....................... 132

Interior motion sensorDeactivating ..................................... 74Function ........................................... 73Priming ............................................ 73Switching off .................................... 73

Interrupting a traffic announce-ment ................................................... 311iPad® attachment .............................. 327ISOFIX child seat securing system .... 61

JJack

Declaration of conformity ................ 30Jacking points ................................ 378Storage location ............................ 357Using ............................................. 378

Jump starting (engine) ...................... 358

KKey

Changing the battery ....................... 78Checking the battery ....................... 78Convenience closing feature ............ 91Convenience opening feature .......... 91Display message ............................ 283Door central locking/unlocking ....... 76

14 Index

Emergency key element ................... 77Important safety notes .................... 75Loss ................................................. 79Modifying the programming ............. 76Position in the ignition lock ............ 172Problem (malfunction) ..................... 79

Key positions (ignition lock) ............ 172Kickdown ........................................... 182

LLamps

see Warning and indicator lampsLane detection (automatic)

see Lane Keeping AssistLane Keeping Assist

Activating/deactivating ................. 216Display message ............................ 277Function/information .................... 215Setting sensitivity (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 258Setting the sensitivity .................... 216

Lashing eyeletsFitting ............................................ 331

Lashing points and lashing materi-als

Permissible tensile load ................. 395LED light sources

Replacing ....................................... 134Licence plate lamp

Display message ............................ 270Licence plate lighting

Changing bulbs .............................. 134Light sensor (display message) ....... 269Lighting

see LightsLights

Activating/deactivating the Intel-ligent Light System ........................ 258Active light function ....................... 129Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 130Automatic headlamp mode ............ 126Changing bulbs (halogen head-lamps) ............................................ 134Changing bulbs (interior lights) ...... 132Cornering light function ................. 129Dipped-beam headlamps ............... 126Display message ............................ 268

Driving abroad ............................... 194Foglamps (extended range) ........... 129Hazard warning lamps ................... 128Headlamp flasher ........................... 128Headlamp range ............................ 128Important safety notes .................. 126Intelligent Light System (func-tion) ............................................... 128Light switch ................................... 126Main-beam headlamps ................... 128Motorway mode ............................. 129Parking lamps ................................ 126Rear foglamp ................................. 127Replacing bulbs (halogen head-lamps) ............................................ 134Replacing bulbs (LED headlamps) .. 134Side lamps ..................................... 126Switching the daytime drivinglights on/off (switch) ..................... 126Turn signals ................................... 127

LIM indicator lampCruise control ................................ 198DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 203Variable SPEEDTRONIC ................. 200

Limiting the speedsee SPEEDTRONIC

Load compartmentOptions .......................................... 330Seating .......................................... 100

Load distribution ............................... 329Load protection net ........................... 331Load securing aids

Load protection net ....................... 331Load-securing aids

Load compartment partition .......... 333Loading guidelines ............................ 328Loads

Securing ........................................ 330Transporting .................................. 328

Lockingsee Central locking

Locking (doors)Emergency locking ........................... 77

Locking centrallysee Central locking

Lubricant additivessee Additives

Index 15

Luggage compartment partitionFolding up/down ........................... 333Important safety notes .................. 333Removing/fitting ........................... 334Storage compartments .................. 333

Lumbar support ................................... 98

MM+S tyres ........................................... 367Main-beam headlamps

Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 130Display message ............................ 270Replacing bulbs ............................. 136Switching on/off ........................... 128

Maintenance ...................................... 343Maintenance points under the bon-net ...................................................... 338Making a call

Using the call lists ......................... 307Using the phone book .................... 307Using the telephone menu ............. 307

Manual transmissionEngaging reverse gear ................... 174Gear lever ...................................... 173Pulling away ................................... 173Shift recommendation ................... 174Starting the engine ........................ 173

Maximum speedSpeed limitation ............................. 193

MB ContactBreakdown assistance call but-ton ................................................. 325Info call button .............................. 325

Media InterfaceConnections .................................. 313

Memory card (audio) ......................... 253Memory function

Seats, steering wheel, exteriormirrors ........................................... 124

Mercedes me connectAccident management ................... 308Audio 20 ........................................ 308Breakdown assistance call but-ton ................................................. 325Breakdown management ............... 309Calling the Mercedes-Benz Cus-tomer Centre ................................. 308

COMAND Online ............................ 308General notes ................................ 308Info call button .............................. 325Requirements ................................ 308

Mercedes-Benz ContactCalling the Mercedes-Benz Cus-tomer Centre ................................. 308

Mercedes-Benz emergency callsystem

Switch in the overhead controlpanel .............................................. 324

Mercedes-Benz Service Centresee Qualified specialist workshop

Mercedes-Benz Service24h .............. 358Message memory (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 260Messages

see Display messagessee Warning and indicator lamps

MirrorsExterior mirrors .............................. 122Important safety notes .................. 122Rear-view mirror ............................ 122see Vanity mirror

Misted-up windowssee Climate control

Mobile phoneAuthorising .................................... 305Connecting (Bluetooth® inter-face) .............................................. 303Connecting another mobilephone ............................................ 306De-authorising ............................... 306Menu (on-board computer) ............ 254Notes/placing in the bracket ......... 325Type approval/frequency .............. 385

Modelsee Vehicle identification plate

Modifying the programming (key) ..... 76Motor oil additives

see AdditivesMotorway mode ................................ 129MP3

Operating ....................................... 253Multimedia system

Display ........................................... 294Important safety notes .................. 293

16 Index

Overview ........................................ 294

NNavigation

Important safety notes .................. 301Menu (on-board computer) ............ 250Overview ........................................ 301Showing/hiding the menu ............. 301

Notes on running in a new vehicle .. 171

OOccupant safety

Airbags ............................................ 49Automatic front-passenger frontairbag deactivation .......................... 52Automatic measures after an acci-dent ................................................. 59Belt warning ..................................... 49Children in the vehicle ..................... 59Important safety notes .................... 45PASSENGER AIRBAG indicatorlamp ................................................. 46Pets in the vehicle ........................... 68PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu-pant protection) ............................... 58Restraint system introduction .......... 45Restraint system warning lamp ........ 45Seat belts ........................................ 46

OdometerDisplaying ...................................... 248

Oilsee Engine oil

On-board computerAssistance graphic menu ............... 255Assistance menu ........................... 256Checking the oil level ..................... 338Display messages .......................... 260Displaying a service message ........ 344DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 207Factory settings ............................. 260Important safety notes .................. 245Instrument cluster menu ............... 259Light menu ..................................... 258Media menu ................................... 252Menu overview .............................. 248Message memory .......................... 260

Navigation menu ............................ 250Operating video DVD ..................... 253Operation ....................................... 246Radio menu ................................... 252Service menu ................................. 256Settings menu ............................... 256Standard display ............................ 248Telephone menu ............................ 254Trip menu ...................................... 248Vehicle menu ................................. 259

Online and Internet functionsCalling up ....................................... 309Connection status ......................... 309Ending the connection ................... 309Establishing/ending a connec-tion ................................................ 309

Operating InstructionsBefore the first journey .................... 28Digital and printed operatinginstructions ...................................... 28General notes .................................. 28Implied warranty .............................. 28Vehicle equipment ........................... 28

Operating safetyImplied warranty .............................. 28

Operating safety and registrationAttachments/add-on equipment ..... 32Changes in engine performance ...... 31Installations and conversions ........... 32Notes on body/equipmentmounting directives ......................... 32

Operating safety and vehicleapproval

BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreat-ment ................................................ 32Correct use ...................................... 28Declaration of conformity ................ 30Notes on operating the vehicle ........ 30Qualified specialist workshops ........ 31Registering your vehicle ................... 31

Operating systemsee On-board computer

OperationDigital Owner's Manual .................... 27

Outside temperature display ........... 246Overhead control panel ...................... 43Overrevving range ............................. 246Overrun mode .................................... 191

Index 17

PPaint code .......................................... 386Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 351Panorama sliding sunroof

Important safety information ........... 91Opening/closing the roller sun-blind ................................................. 94Operating ......................................... 92Operating the roller sunblinds forthe sliding sunroof ........................... 93Problem (malfunction) ..................... 94Rain closing feature ......................... 93Reversing feature ............................. 92

Parking360° camera ................................. 234Important safety notes .................. 189Parking brake ................................ 189Reversing camera .......................... 229see Active Parking Assistsee PARKTRONIC

Parking aidActive Parking Assist ..................... 225see 360° camerasee PARKTRONICsee Reversing camera

Parking brakeApplying automatically ................... 190Applying or releasing manually ...... 190Display message ............................ 266Electric parking brake .................... 189Emergency braking ........................ 190Releasing automatically ................. 190Warning lamp ................................. 288

Parking lampsDisplay message ............................ 270Replacing bulbs (front) ................... 136Replacing bulbs (rear) .................... 137Switching on/off ........................... 126

PARKTRONICDeactivating/activating ................. 224Display message ............................ 276Driving system ............................... 222Function/notes ............................. 222Important safety notes .................. 222Problem (fault) ............................... 224Roll-back warning .......................... 224Sensor range ................................. 222

Trailer towing ................................. 224Warning display ............................. 223

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFIndicator lamp .................................. 46

Passenger compartment air-condi-tioning system

see Climate controlPassenger compartment heating

see Climate controlPets in the vehicle ............................... 68Phone call

Dialling ........................................... 307Plastic trim (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 355Power windows

see Side windowsPRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupantprotection)

Operation ......................................... 58PRE-SAFE® (preventive occupantsafety system)

Display message ............................ 267Preparing for a journey

Checks in the vehicle ..................... 172Visual check of the vehicle exte-rior ................................................. 172

Preventative passenger protectionsee PRE-SAFE® (anticipatoryoccupant protection)

Protection of the environmentGeneral notes .................................. 29

Pulling awayAutomatic transmission ................. 174Hill start assist ............................... 175Manual transmission ...................... 173

QQR code

Rescue card ..................................... 33Qualified specialist workshop ........... 31

RRadiator cover ..................................... 33Radio

Displaying radio text ...................... 311Important safety notes .................. 293

18 Index

Menu overview .............................. 310Overview ........................................ 310Selecting a station ......................... 252Switching on .................................. 310see separate operating instructions

Radio text ........................................... 311Radio-based vehicle components

Declaration of conformity ................ 30Radio/navigation

Important safety notes .................. 293Rain closing feature

Panorama sliding sunroof ................ 93Rain sensor

Setting the sensitivity .................... 138Reading lamp ..................................... 131Rear bench seat

Adjusting the backrest ................... 103Basic position ................................ 103Bed extension (seat/berth combi-nation) ........................................... 117EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature ............. 102Face-to-face position ..................... 106Fitting options ................................ 100Folding up/down ........................... 105General notes .................................. 99General notes (seat/berth combi-nation) ........................................... 112Moving (seat/bunk combination) .. 113Removing/fitting ........................... 106Removing/fitting (seat/berthcombination) .................................. 115Retainer loops (seat/berth com-bination) ........................................ 112Seat anchorage ................................ 99Seat rails .......................................... 99Seating variants ............................. 100Setting up/folding away the berth(seat/berth combination) .............. 117Sliding ............................................ 103Stowage compartments (seat/bunk combination) ......................... 313

Rear compartmentActivating/deactivating the airconditioning ................................... 146Seating variants ............................. 100Setting the air vents ...................... 169Setting the temperature ................ 152Switching interior lighting on/off ... 132

Rear foglampDisplay message ............................ 270Switching on/off ........................... 127

Rear foglampsReplacing bulbs ............................. 137

Rear lampsReplacing bulbs ............................. 137

Rear seatAdjusting the backrest ................... 108EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature ............. 107Rear seat heating ........................... 120Rear seat ventilation ...................... 120Seat anchorage ................................ 99Seat rails .......................................... 99

Rear seatsFace-to-face position ..................... 111Folding down/up ........................... 109General notes .................................. 99Removing/fitting ........................... 111Sliding ............................................ 108Turning .......................................... 108

Rear view cameraImportant safety notes .................. 229

Rear window (which can be openedseparately)

Important safety notes .................... 88Opening/closing .............................. 88Problem (malfunction) ..................... 89Programming the key button ........... 89

Rear window heatingProblem (fault) ............................... 155Switching on/off ........................... 155

Rear window wiperReplacing the wiper blade .............. 141Switching on/off ........................... 139

Rear-compartment air-condition-ing system

see Climate controlRear-compartment heating

see Climate controlRear-view mirror

Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) ........ 123Dipping (manual) ........................... 122

Recuperation display ........................ 249Recycling

see Protection of the environmentReducing agent

see AdBlue®

Index 19

RefuellingAdBlue® ......................................... 186Fuel filler flap ................................. 185Fuel gauge ....................................... 36Refuelling process ......................... 185see Fuel

Regenerationsee Diesel particle filter

Remote controlAuxiliary warm-air heater ............... 163Changing battery (auxiliary warm-air heater) ...................................... 166Hot-water auxiliary heater ............. 159Replacing the battery (hot-waterauxiliary heater) ............................. 160see Key

Replacing bulbsBrake lamps ................................... 137Daytime driving lights .................... 136important safety notes ................... 134Interior lighting .............................. 132Main-beam headlamps ................... 136Rear foglamps ................................ 137Rear lamps ..................................... 137Reversing lamp .............................. 137

Rescue card ......................................... 33Reserve (fuel tank)

see FuelReserve fuel

Display message ............................ 274Warning lamp ................................. 289

Residual heat (climate control) ........ 156Restraint system

Display message ............................ 268Introduction ..................................... 45Warning lamp ................................. 288Warning lamp (function) ................... 45

Rev counter ........................................ 246Reversing camera

Cleaning instructions ..................... 353Coupling up a trailer function ........ 233Function/notes ............................. 229General notes ................................ 229Messages in the display ................. 231Reverse parking ............................. 232Switching on/off ........................... 230Wide-angle function ....................... 234

Reversing featureElectric sliding door ......................... 83Panorama sliding sunroof ................ 92Roller sunblinds ............................... 93Side windows ................................... 89

Reversing lampReplacing bulbs ............................. 137

Reversing lampsDisplay message ............................ 270

Roller sunblindPanorama sliding sunroof ................ 93

Roof carrierMaximum payload .......................... 395Notes ............................................. 334

Roof lining and carpets (cleaninginstructions) ...................................... 356Roof load (roof carrier) ..................... 395

SSafety

Children in the vehicle ..................... 59Operating safety .............................. 30see Occupant safety

Safety systemsee Driving safety systems

SeatSwivel seat ....................................... 98

Seat beltCorrect usage .................................. 48

Seat beltsAdjusting the driver's and front-passenger seat belt ......................... 49Adjusting the height ......................... 48Cleaning ......................................... 356Fastening ......................................... 48Important safety guidelines ............. 47Introduction ..................................... 46Releasing ......................................... 49Warning lamp ................................. 284Warning lamp (function) ................... 49

Seat/berth combinationRear bench seat ............................. 112

SeatsAdjusting (electrically) ..................... 98Adjusting (manually) ........................ 97Adjusting lumbar support ................ 98Adjusting the head restraint .......... 118

20 Index

Armrest .......................................... 119Cleaning the cover ......................... 356Correct driver's seat position ........... 96Important safety notes .................... 96Seat heating .................................. 119Seat ventilation .............................. 120Storing settings (memory func-tion) ............................................... 124

Securing loadsFitting lashing eyelets .................... 331

Selecting stationsRadio ............................................. 310

Selector leversee Automatic transmission

Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 353Service interval display

ASSYST (active Service System) .... 344Calling up the service due date ...... 344Hiding a service message .............. 344Notes ............................................. 344

Service menu (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 256Service phone number ...................... 358Service products

AdBlue® special additives .............. 389Bio-diesel ....................................... 388Brake fluid ..................................... 392Coolant (engine) ............................ 392Engine oil ....................................... 390Fuel ................................................ 387Important safety notes .................. 386Washer fluid ................................... 393

Setting the air distribution ............... 152Setting the airflow ............................ 153Settings

Factory (on-board computer) ......... 260On-board computer ....................... 256

Shift recommendation ...................... 248Short journeys (diesel particle fil-ter) ...................................................... 193Side lamps

Replacing bulbs ............................. 136Side window

Child-proof lock ............................... 68Side windows

Convenience closing ........................ 91Convenience opening ...................... 91

Hinged side windows ....................... 89Important safety notes .................... 89Opening/closing .............................. 90Opening/closing the hinged win-dow .................................................. 90Overview .......................................... 89Problem (malfunction) ..................... 91Resetting ......................................... 91

Sidebag ................................................ 51Signal and ambient light

Changing a bulb ............................. 133Sliding door

Child-proof lock ............................... 68Cleaning ......................................... 354Important safety notes .................... 82Opening/closing from outside ......... 82Opening/closing from the inside ..... 82see Electrical sliding door

Sliding sunroofsee Panorama sliding sunroof

Snow chains ...................................... 368Socket (230 V) ................................... 322Sockets

Centre console .............................. 321General notes ................................ 321Rear compartment ......................... 322

Spare wheelGeneral notes ................................ 383Important safety notes .................. 382Removing/fitting ........................... 383

Specialist workshop ............................ 31Spectacles compartment ................. 312Speed, controlling

see Cruise controlSpeedometer

Activating/deactivating the addi-tional speedometer ........................ 259Digital ............................................ 249General notes ................................ 245In the Instrument cluster ................. 36Segments ...................................... 245Selecting the unit of measure-ment .............................................. 259

SPEEDTRONICActivating variable ......................... 201Calling up the last speed stored .... 201Deactivating variable ..................... 201

Index 21

Display message ............................ 277Displaying the speed ..................... 200Function/notes ............................. 199Important safety notes .................. 200LIM indicator lamp ......................... 200Permanent ..................................... 201Problem (malfunction) ................... 202Selecting ........................................ 200Setting the speed .......................... 201Storing the current speed .............. 201Switching variable SPEEDTRONICto passive ...................................... 201

Start/stop functionsee ECO start/stop function

Startingsee Starting (engine)

Starting (engine) ................................ 173Steering

Display message ............................ 283Warning lamps ............................... 292

Steering wheelAdjusting ....................................... 121Button overview ............................... 38Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 246Cleaning ......................................... 356Gearshift paddles ........................... 182

Steering wheel gearshift paddles .... 182Stickers

General safety notes ........................ 28Stowage compartments

Armrest (under) ............................. 313see Stowage spaces and compartments

Stowage net ....................................... 313Stowage spaces and compart-ments

Glove compartment ....................... 312Important safety notes .................. 312Spectacles compartment ............... 312Stowage compartment in thecentre console ............................... 313

Stowage spaces and stowage com-partments

Folding table .................................. 317Luggage net ................................... 313Seat/bunk combination stowagecompartments ............................... 313

Summer openingsee Convenience opening feature

Summer tyres .................................... 367Sun visor

Changing a bulb (mirror lamp) ....... 133Overview ........................................ 314

Switching off the alarm (ATA) ............ 72Switching traffic announcementson/off

Radio ............................................. 310Swivel seat ........................................... 98

TTail lamp

Trailer display message ................. 269Tail lamps

Display message ............................ 270Tailgate

Changing bulbs (signal and ambi-ent light) ........................................ 133Display message ............................ 282Important safety notes .................... 85Opening dimensions ...................... 395Opening/closing from the out-side .................................................. 86Problem (malfunction) ..................... 86see EASY-PACK tailgate

Technical dataCapacities ...................................... 386Engine ............................................ 394Guide rail ....................................... 395Lashing points ............................... 395Roof carrier .................................... 395Trailer tow hitch ............................. 396Tyres/wheels ................................. 380Vehicle data ................................... 394Vehicle dimensions ........................ 395

TelephoneAccepting a call ............................. 254Accepting a call (multimedia sys-tem) ............................................... 307Authorising a mobile phone (con-necting) ......................................... 305Automatically reconnectingmobile phone ................................. 306Connecting a Mobile phone (gen-eral information) ............................ 303De-authorising (disconnecting) amobile phone ................................. 306

22 Index

Display message ............................ 283Ending an active call ...................... 308Entering a number ......................... 307Entering phone numbers ................ 307Establishing the connection fromthe mobile phone ........................... 305Important safety notes .................. 325Introduction ................................... 254Making a call ................................. 307Menu (on-board computer) ............ 254Number from the phone book ........ 254Redialling ....................................... 255Rejecting a call (multimedia sys-tem) ............................................... 307Rejecting/ending a call ................. 254Switching between mobilephones ........................................... 306Using the telephone ....................... 307

Telephone numberEntering ......................................... 307

TemperatureCoolant (display in the instrumentcluster) .......................................... 246Outside temperature ...................... 246Setting (auxiliary warm-airheater) ........................................... 166Setting (climate control) ................ 152

TEMPOMATFunction/notes ............................. 197

Theft-deterrent systemATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 72Immobiliser ...................................... 72

TimeSetting (auxiliary warm-airheater) ........................................... 165Setting the time (auxiliary warm-air heater) ...................................... 165

Timer (auxiliary warm-air heater)Activating ....................................... 165Overview ........................................ 164Setting departure time ................... 165Setting the heating level ................ 166Setting the operating duration ....... 165Setting the temperature ................ 166Setting the time ............................. 165

Tiredness assistantsee ATTENTION ASSIST

Toolsee Vehicle tool kit

Top Tether ............................................ 61Total distance recorder

Displaying ...................................... 248Setting the display unit .................. 259

TouchpadCalling up quick access for audio .. 297Changing the station/musictrack .............................................. 299Character suggestions ................... 299Deleting characters ....................... 299Entering a space ............................ 299Entering characters ....................... 298Gesture control .............................. 296Handwriting recognition ................ 298Operating the touchpad ................. 296Overview ........................................ 296Quick access for audio .................. 299Switching ....................................... 296Switching input line ....................... 299

Tow-away protectionActivating ......................................... 73Deactivating ..................................... 73Function ........................................... 73

Tow-startingEmergency engine starting ............ 363Important safety notes .................. 360

TowingFitting/removing the towing eye ... 362If the vehicle is stuck ..................... 363Important safety notes .................. 360With the rear axle raised ................ 362

Towing a trailerActive Parking Assist ..................... 225Axle load, permissible .................... 396Mounting dimensions .................... 396

Towing awayWith both axles on the ground ....... 362

Towing eye ......................................... 357Traffic Sign Assist

Activating ....................................... 218Activating/deactivating the warn-ing function .................................... 257Display message ............................ 279Function/notes ............................. 217Important safety notes .................. 218Instrument cluster display ............. 218

Index 23

Trailer couplingsee Towing a trailer

Trailer towing7-pin connector ............................. 244Blind Spot Assist ............................ 215Bulb failure indicator for LEDlights .............................................. 244Cleaning the trailer tow hitch ......... 354Coupling up a trailer ...................... 243Decoupling a trailer ....................... 243Driving tips .................................... 239ESP® ................................................ 71Fitting the ball coupling ................. 241Lights display message .................. 269Parktronic ...................................... 224Power supply ................................. 243Removing the ball coupling ............ 242Trailer loads ................................... 396

Transmissionsee Automatic transmissionsee Manual transmission

Transmission positionsAutomatic transmission ................. 179Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 180

TransportFitting lashing eyelets .................... 331Loading guidelines ......................... 328Vehicle ........................................... 363

Transport by rail ................................ 194Transportation

Rail ................................................ 194Transporting

Load compartment variations ........ 330Load distribution ............................ 329Securing a load .............................. 330

Trim pieces (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 356Trip computer

Displaying ...................................... 249Selecting the display unit ............... 259

Trip meterCalling up ....................................... 248Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 250Setting the display unit .................. 259

Turn signal lampTrailer display message ................. 269

Turn signalsReplacing bulbs (front) ................... 136

Replacing bulbs (rear) .................... 137Switching on/off ........................... 127

Two-way radiosType approval/frequency .............. 385

Type identification platesee Vehicle identification plate

Tyre pressureCalling up (on-board computer) ..... 370Display message ............................ 280Important safety notes .................. 370Recommended ............................... 369Tables ............................................ 373

Tyre pressure monitorChecking the tyre pressure elec-tronically ........................................ 371Function/notes ............................. 370General notes ................................ 370Important safety notes .................. 371Radio type approval for the tyrepressure monitor ........................... 372Restarting ...................................... 372Warning lamp ................................. 292Warning message .......................... 372

Tyre pressure table ........................... 373Tyres

Changing a wheel .......................... 376Checking ........................................ 366Direction of rotation ...................... 377Display message ............................ 280Important safety notes .................. 365Information on driving .................... 366M+S tyres ...................................... 367Replacing ....................................... 376Service life ..................................... 367Snow chains .................................. 368Storing ........................................... 377Summer tyres ................................ 367Tyre tread ...................................... 367Wheel and tyre combinations ........ 381Wheel/tyre combinations .............. 380

UUnlocking

Emergency unlocking ....................... 77From inside the vehicle (centralunlocking button) ............................. 79With emergency key element ........... 77

24 Index

Upshift indicator ............................... 248

VVanity mirror

Changing a bulb (mirror lamp) ....... 133Sun visor ........................................ 314

Variable SPEEDTRONICsee SPEEDTRONIC

VehicleData acquisition ............................... 34Display message ............................ 281Electronics ..................................... 385Emergency unlocking ....................... 77Equipment ....................................... 28Implied warranty .............................. 28Individual settings .......................... 256Leaving parked up ......................... 191Locking (in an emergency) ............... 77Locking (key) ................................... 76Lowering ........................................ 379Operating safety .............................. 30Pulling away ................................... 173Raising ........................................... 378Registration ..................................... 31Securing from rolling away ............ 189Towing away .................................. 360Transporting .................................. 363Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 77Unlocking (key) ................................ 76

Vehicle batterysee Battery (vehicle)

Vehicle bodies ..................................... 32Vehicle check

see Preparing for a journeyVehicle data ....................................... 394Vehicle dimensions ........................... 395Vehicle emergency locking ................ 77Vehicle identification number

see VINVehicle identification plate .............. 386Vehicle settings ................................. 301Vehicle tool kit .................................. 357Ventilation

see Climate controlVideo

Operating the DVD ......................... 253

VINEngine compartment ..................... 386Type plate ...................................... 386

WWarning and indicator lamps

ABS ................................................ 286Brakes ........................................... 285Distance warning signal ................. 291ESP® .............................................. 287ESP® OFF ....................................... 287Fuel tank ........................................ 289General notes ................................ 283LIM (cruise control) ........................ 198LIM (DISTRONIC PLUS) .................. 203LIM (variable SPEEDTRONIC) ......... 200Overview .......................................... 37Parking brake ................................ 288PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ............... 46Reserve fuel ................................... 289Restraint system ............................ 288Seat belt ........................................ 284Steering ......................................... 292Tyre pressure monitor ................... 292

Warning triangle ................................ 358Warnings

Stickers ........................................... 28Washer fluid

Display message ............................ 283Filling capacity ............................... 394Notes ............................................. 393Topping up ..................................... 342

Wheel and tyre combinationssee Tyres

Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 379Wheels

Changing a wheel .......................... 376Changing/replacing ....................... 376Checking ........................................ 366Cleaning ......................................... 352Fitting a new wheel ........................ 379Fitting a wheel ............................... 377Important safety notes .................. 365Removing a wheel .......................... 378Removing and fitting the sparewheel ............................................. 383Snow chains .................................. 368

Index 25

Storing ........................................... 377Tightening torque ........................... 379Wheel size/tyre size ...................... 380Wheel/tyre combinations .............. 380

WindowbagDisplay message ............................ 268Operation ......................................... 52

WindowsCleaning ......................................... 352see Side windows

WindscreenCleaning ......................................... 352Demisting ...................................... 154

Windscreen washer fluidTopping up ..................................... 342

Windscreen wipersProblem (malfunction) ................... 142Rear window wiper ........................ 139Replacing the wiper blades ............ 139Switching on/off ........................... 138

Winter diesel ..................................... 388Winter driving

General notes ................................ 367Winter operation

Radiator cover ................................. 33Slippery road surfaces ................... 196Snow chains .................................. 368

Winter tyresLimiting the speed (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 259M+S tyres ...................................... 367Setting a limit speed ...................... 193

Wiper bladesCleaning ......................................... 352Important safety notes .................. 139Replacing (rear window) ................ 141Replacing (windscreen) .................. 140Service indicator ............................ 139

Workshopsee Qualified specialist workshop

26 Index

Introduction

You will not incur any costs when calling up theDigital Operating Instructions. The Digital Oper-ating Instructions work without connecting tothe Internet.There are three ways to access the topics of theDigital Operating Instructions:RVisual search

The visual search allows you to explore yourvehicle "virtually". Starting from either thevehicle exterior view or interior view, you canaccess many of the different topics coveredby the Digital Operating Instructions. Toaccess the vehicle interior section, select the"Interior" view.RContents

You can select individual sections in the con-tents.

The Digital Operating Instructions is deactivatedfor safety reasons while driving.

Operation

Operating the Digital OperatingInstructions

General notesObserve the information on operating the con-troller (Y page 296).Observe the information on operating the touch-pad (Y page 296).

Content pagesYou can access the content pages by means ofa visual search, a keyword search or using thecontents.

X To scroll forward and back: turn 3 thecontroller.

X To display in full screen/animation: slide8 the controller to the left :.

X To select note texts/save bookmarks:slide 9 the controller to the right ;.

X To select a link: slide 6 the controllerdownwards =.

X To exit a content page: actuate the %symbol ?.

X To call up the basic menu of the Digital Operating Instructions: actuate the Þsymbol A.

X The selected menu opens. The Digital Oper-ating Instructions remain open in the back-ground.

X To close the Digital Operating Instruc-tions: press and hold the % button next tothe controller.

X Confirm 7 the message about whether thebrowser should be closed.

Digital Operating Instructions 27

Operating Instructions

Before the first journeyThese Operating Instructions, the Maintenanceor Service Booklet and the additional equip-ment-specific instructions are integral parts ofthe vehicle. Always keep these documents inthe vehicle. If you sell the vehicle, always passon all documents to the new owner.Before you first drive off, read these documentscarefully and familiarise yourself with your vehi-cle.For your own safety and a longer vehicle life,follow the instructions and warning notices inthese Operating Instructions. Failure to observethe instructions may lead to damage to the vehi-cle or personal injury.

Implied warranty! Follow the instructions in this manual about

the proper operation of your vehicle as well asabout possible vehicle damage. Damage toyour vehicle that arises from culpable contra-ventions against these instructions are notcovered either by Mercedes-Benz impliedwarranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle War-ranty.

Vehicle equipmentThese Operating Instructions describe all mod-els as well as standard and optional equipmentof your vehicle that was available at the time ofgoing to print. Country-specific variations arepossible. Note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all of the described functions.This also applies to safety-relevant systems andfunctions. Therefore, your vehicle's equipmentmay differ from certain descriptions and illus-trations.The original purchase contract documentationfor your vehicle contains a list of all of the sys-tems in your vehicle.Should you have any questions concerningequipment and operation, consult anyMercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Digital and printed Operating Instruc-tions

The Digital Operating Instructions are not upda-ted electronically. Amendments are only bemade by means of Supplements to the printedOperating Instructions.Always observe the printed Operating Instruc-tions as well as the supplements to the Operat-ing Instructions.

Correct use

Observe the following information when drivingyour vehicle:Rthe safety notes in these Operating Instruc-

tionsRthe technical data in these Operating Instruc-

tionsRtraffic rules and regulationsRlaws and safety standards pertaining to motor

vehiclesVarious warning stickers are attached to thevehicle. If you remove any warning stickers, youor others could fail to recognise certain dangers.Leave warning stickers in position.

G WARNINGModifications to electronic components, theirsoftware as well as wiring could affect theirfunction and/or the operation of other net-worked components. This could in particularalso be the case for systems relevant tosafety. They might not function properly any-more and/or jeopardise the operationalsafety of the vehicle. There is an increasedrisk of an accident and injury.Do not attempt to modify the wiring as well aselectronic components or their software.Always have work on electrical and electroniccomponents carried out at a qualified special-ist workshop.

If you carry out modifications to electronic com-ponents, their software or wiring, this couldresult in the invalidation of your vehicle's oper-ating permit.

28 Correct useIn

trod

uctio

n

G WARNINGGases and liquids from substances that con-stitute a health hazard or react aggressivelycan escape, even from securely closed con-tainers. If you transport these substancesinside the vehicle, this may affect your healthand impair your concentration while you aredriving. It may also cause malfunctions orelectrical component system failures. There isa risk of fire and accident.Do not store or transport any substances inthe vehicle that are hazardous to health orreact aggressively.

Substances that constitute a health hazard orreact aggressively include, for example:RsolventsRfuelRoil and greaseRcleaning agentsRacid

Protection of the environment

Economical and environmentallyaware driving

H Environmental noteDaimler's declared policy is one of compre-hensive environmental protection.Our objectives are to use the natural resour-ces which form the basis of our existence onthis planet sparingly and in a manner whichtakes the requirements of both nature andhumanity into consideration.You too can help to protect the environmentby operating your vehicle in an environmen-tally-responsible manner.Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,transmission, brake and tyre wear depend onthe following factors:Roperating conditions of your vehicleRyour personal driving styleYou can influence both factors. Therefore,please bear the following in mind:

Operating conditions:Ravoid short trips, as these increase fuel

consumption.Robserve the correct tyre pressure.Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight in the

vehicle.Rremove the roof rack once you no longer

need it.Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute

to environmental protection. You shouldtherefore adhere to the service intervals.Rall maintenance work should be carried out

at a qualified specialist workshop.Personal driving style:Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when

starting the engine.Rdo not warm up the engine when the vehicle

is stationary.Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance

from the vehicle in front.Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration and

braking.Rchange gear in good time and use each gear

only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed.Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.Rmonitor the vehicle's fuel consumption.

Returning a used vehicleOnly for EU countries:Mercedes-Benz will take back your end-of-lifevehicle for environment-friendly disposal inaccordance with the European Union (EU) End-of-Life Vehicles Directive.A network of vehicle collection points and dis-assembly plants has been established for you toreturn your vehicle. You can leave it at any ofthese points free of charge. This makes animportant contribution to closing the recyclingcircle and conserving resources.For further information about recycling and dis-posing of end-of-life vehicles, and the take-backconditions, please visit the national Mercedes-Benz website for your country.

Protection of the environment 29

Intr

oduc

tion

Z

Operating safety and vehicle approval

Notes on drivingThere is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high kerb

or an unpaved roadRyou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a

kerb, a speed bump or a pothole in the roadRa heavy object strikes the underbody or parts

of the chassisIn such situations, the body/frame, the under-body, chassis parts, wheels or tyres could bedamaged without the damage being visible.Components damaged in this way can unex-pectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, nolonger withstand the strain they are designedfor. If the underbody panelling is damaged, com-bustible materials such as leaves, grass or twigscan gather between the underbody and theunderbody panelling. If these materials come incontact with hot parts of the exhaust system foran extended period, they can catch fire.

G WARNINGFlammable material such as leaves, grass ortwigs may ignite if they come into contact withhot parts of the exhaust system. There is a riskof fire.When driving off road or on unpaved roads,check the vehicle's underside regularly. Inparticular, remove parts of plants or otherflammable materials which have becometrapped. In the case of damage, contact aqualified specialist workshop.

Have the vehicle checked and repaired immedi-ately at a qualified specialist workshop. If, oncontinuing your journey, you notice that drivingsafety is impaired, pull over and stop the vehicleimmediately, paying attention to road and trafficconditions. In such cases, consult a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Declarations of conformity

Vehicle components which receiveand/or transmit radio wavesThe following note refers to all components ofthe vehicle which receive and/or transmit radio

waves and the integrated information systemsand communications equipment in the vehicle:The components of the vehicle which receiveand/or transmit radio waves are compliant withthe basic requirements and all other relevantregulations stipulated by Directive 1999/5/EC.You can obtain further information from anyMercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Electromagnetic compatibilityThe electromagnetic compatibility of the vehiclecomponents has been checked and certifiedaccording to the currently valid version of Direc-tive ECE-R 10.

JackTranscript and translation of the original decla-ration of conformity:EC declaration of conformity1. We, the undersigned, being representa-

tives ofManufacturer:BRANO a.s.74741 Hradec nad Moravicí, Opav-ská 1000,Czech RepublicId. No.: 64-387-5933VAT. Id. No.: CZ64-387-5933hereby declare under our sole responsi-bility that the product:

2 .a) Designation:JackType, number:A) A 164 580 02 18, A 166 580 01 18B) A 240 580 00 18C) A 639 580 02 18Year of manufacture: 2015Fulfils all relevant conditionsDirective no. 2006/42/EC

b) Description and intended use:The jack is intended only for raising thespecified vehicle according to the operat-ing instructions affixed to the jack.

3. Reference to harmonised standards orspecificationsA) ISO 4063, EN ISO 14341-A, DBL7382.20, MBN 10435, AS 2693

30 Operating safety and vehicle approvalIn

trod

uctio

n

B) ISO 4063, ISO 14341-A, DBL 7392.10,MBN 10435C) DBL 7392.10, DBL 8230.10Technical documentation for the productis held by the manufacturer. Authorisedrepresentative responsible for the compi-lation of the technical documentation:manager of the engineering departmentof Brano a.s.

4. Hradec nad MoravicíPlace

5. 5 May 2015Date

Signed by:Director of Quality

Diagnostics connectionThe diagnostics connection is used for connect-ing diagnostic equipment at a qualified special-ist workshop.

G WARNINGIf you connect equipment to a diagnosticsconnection in the vehicle, it may affect theoperation of vehicle systems. As a result, theoperating safety of the vehicle could be affec-ted. There is a risk of an accident.Only connect equipment to a diagnostics con-nection in the vehicle, which is approved foryour vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

Modifying the engine output! Increased power could:Rchange emission levelsRcause malfunctionsRlead to consequential damageThe operating safety of the engine cannot beguaranteed in all situations.

Any tampering with the engine managementsystem in order to increase the engine poweroutput will lead to the loss of warranty entitle-ments.

If the vehicle's engine power output isincreased:Rtyres, suspension, brake and engine cooling

systems must be adapted to the increasedengine power outputRhave the vehicle recertifiedRreport changes in power output to the vehicle

insurersThis will otherwise lead to the invalidation of thevehicle's general operating permit and its insur-ance cover.If you sell the vehicle, inform the buyer of anyalterations to the vehicle's engine power output.If you do not inform the buyer, this may consti-tute a punishable offence under national legis-lation.

Qualified specialist workshopA qualified specialist workshop has the neces-sary specialist knowledge, tools and qualifica-tions to carry out the work required on the vehi-cle correctly.This is particularly applicable to work relevant tosafety. Observe the notes in the Maintenance orService booklet.You should always have the following work onyour vehicle carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop:Rsafety-relevant workRservice and maintenance workRrepair workRmodifications as well as installations and con-

versionsRwork on electronic componentsMercedes-Benz recommends that you use aMercedes-Benz Service Centre.

! Only have work carried out on the engineelectronics and its associated parts, such ascontrol units, sensors, actuating componentsand connector leads, at a qualified specialistworkshop. Vehicle components may other-wise wear more quickly and the vehicle'soperating permit may be invalidated.

Vehicle registrationMercedes-Benz may ask its Service Centres tocarry out technical inspections on certain vehi-cles. This is always the case if it is possible to

Operating safety and vehicle approval 31

Intr

oduc

tion

Z

improve quality or safety levels. Mercedes-Benzcan only inform you about vehicle checks if ithas your registration data.Your registration data are not available if:Ryour vehicle was not purchased at an author-

ised specialist dealerRyour vehicle has not yet been inspected at a

Mercedes-Benz Service CentreIt is advisable to register your vehicle with aMercedes-Benz Service Centre. InformMercedes-Benz as soon as possible about anychange in address or vehicle ownership.

Exhaust gas aftertreatmentThe vehicle must be operated in conjunctionwith the reducing agent AdBlue® if the exhaustgas aftertreatment system in a BlueTEC® vehi-cle is to function correctly.If you operate the vehicle without AdBlue® orwith emissions-relevant malfunctions, the oper-ating permit is invalidated. The legal conse-quence of this is that the vehicle may no longerbe operated on public roads.Engine management monitors the exhaust gasaftertreatment components for compliance withemissions laws and regulations. If you attemptto operate the vehicle without AdBlue®, withdiluted AdBlue® or with a different reducingagent, this will be detected by the engine man-agement system. Other emissions-relevant mal-functions, e.g. dosage malfunctions or sensorerrors, are also detected and logged.Engine management prevents a further enginestart after it has issued warning messages.Therefore, top up the AdBlue® tank regularlyduring vehicle operation or at the latest whenthe first warning message is displayed in the on-board computer (Y page 186).When the AdBlue® supply has dropped to areserve level of approximately 2.4 l, the displayshows the Refill AdBlue See Owner’s Man‐ual message.When the AdBlue® supply is almost empty, thedisplay shows the Refill AdBlue Emer. oper. in ... mi See Owner's Manual orEmer. oper.: 20km/h No start in: ... mi See Owner's Manual message in duecourse. If you do not top up AdBlue®, you canonly travel the maximum distance that is dis-played.

If the display shows the Refill AdBlue Eng. start not possible message, the AdBlue®

supply is empty. After parking the vehicle with-out topping up AdBlue® no further engine startsare possible.To start the engine you must first top up with atleast 4 l of AdBlue® and then switch on the igni-tion for approximately one minute. If, after this,the new fluid level has been recognised byengine management, you can then start theengine.If there is a malfunction with the exhaust gasaftertreatment components, have themchecked and repaired at a qualified specialistworkshop.Before driving your vehicle outside Europecheck the AdBlue® supply (Y page 256) andconsult a qualified specialist workshop.You will find information on topping up AdBlue®

in the "Refuelling" (Y page 186) section.You will find further information on AdBlue® inthe "Service products and capacities"(Y page 389) section.

Attachments, bodies, equipment andconversions

Notes on body/equipment mountingdirectives! For safety reasons, have bodies manufac-

tured and fitted in accordance with the appli-cable Mercedes-Benz body/equipmentmounting directives. These body/equipmentmounting directives ensure that the chassisand the body form one unit and that maximumoperating and road safety is achieved.For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that:Rno other modifications should be made to

the vehicle.Rapproval should be obtained from

Mercedes-Benz in the event of deviationsfrom approved body/equipment mountingdirectives.

Approval from certified inspection agenciesor official approvals cannot rule out risks toyour safety.

Observe the information on genuine Mercedes-Benz parts (Y page 33).

32 Operating safety and vehicle approvalIn

trod

uctio

n

The Mercedes-Benz body/equipment mountingdirectives can be found on the Internet athttps://bb-portal.mercedes-benz.com.There you can also find information on pinassignment and fuse replacement.You can obtain further information from anyMercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Notes on the engine radiatorEven seemingly small changes to the vehicle,such as attaching a radiator trim for winter driv-ing or as protection against insects, are not per-mitted. Do not cover the radiator. Do not usethermal mats, insect protection covers or any-thing similar.Doing so can cause the diagnostics system todisplay inaccurate values. In some countries,the recording of engine diagnostics data is alegal requirement, and must always be verifiableand accurate.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts

! Airbags and seat belt tensioners, as well ascontrol units and sensors for these restraintsystems, may be installed in the followingareas of your vehicle:RdoorsRdoor pillarsRdoor sillsRseatsRdashboardRinstrument clusterRcentre consoleDo not install accessories such as audio sys-tems in these areas. Do not carry out repairsor welding. You could impair the operatingefficiency of the restraint systems.Have accessories retrofitted at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

H Environmental noteDaimler AG also supplies reconditionedassemblies and parts which are of the samequality as new parts. For these, the same war-ranty applies as for new parts.

If you use parts, tyres, wheels or safety-relevantequipment which has not been approved by

Mercedes-Benz, the operational safety of thevehicle may be jeopardised. Safety-relevant sys-tems, e.g. the brake system, may malfunction.Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or partsof an equivalent quality standard. Only usetyres, wheels and accessory parts that areapproved for your type of vehicle.Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts and conversionparts and accessories that have been approvedfor your vehicle are tested by Mercedes-Benzfor:RreliabilityRsafetyRsuitabilityDespite ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is unable to assess other parts. Mercedes-Benz accepts no responsibility for the use ofsuch parts in Mercedes-Benz vehicles, even ifthey have been independently or officiallyapproved.In Germany, certain parts are only officiallyapproved for installation or modification if theycomply with legal requirements. This alsoapplies to some other countries. All genuineMercedes-Benz parts meet the approvalrequirements. The use of non-approved partsmay invalidate the vehicle's general operatingpermit.This is the case if:Rit results in a change to the vehicle type from

that for which the vehicle's general operatingpermit was grantedRthey pose a possible risk for road usersRthey adversely affect the emission or noise

levelsAlways specify the vehicle identification number(VIN) (Y page 386) and engine number whenordering genuine Mercedes-Benz parts(Y page 386).

QR code for rescue card

The QR code stickers are affixed to the B-pillaron the driver's and co-driver's side.In the event of an accident, rescue services canuse the QR code to quickly determine the cor-responding rescue card for your vehicle. Thecurrent rescue card contains, in compact form,the most important information about your vehi-cle e.g. the routing of electric cables.

QR code for rescue card 33

Intr

oduc

tion

Z

Further information can be found at http://www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code.

Data stored in the vehicle

A wide range of electronic components in yourvehicle contain data memories.These data memories temporarily or perma-nently store technical information about:Rthe vehicle's operating statusReventsRmalfunctionsIn general, this technical information docu-ments the state of a component, a module, asystem or the surroundings.This includes, for example:Roperating conditions of system components.

For example, fluid levelsRthe vehicle's status messages and those of its

individual components, e.g. number of wheelrevolutions/speed, deceleration in move-ment, lateral acceleration, accelerator pedalpositionRmalfunctions and defects in important system

components, e.g. lights, brakes.Rambient conditions, e.g. outside temperatureThis data is exclusively technical in nature andcan be used to:Rassist in the detection and rectification of

faults and defectsRanalyse vehicle functions, e.g. after an acci-

dentRoptimise vehicle functionsThe data cannot be used to trace the vehicle'smovements.When you use one of the available services,technical information may be read from theevent data memory and fault data memory.Services include, for example:Rrepair servicesRservice processesRwarranty claimsRquality assuranceIt is read by service network employees (includ-ing the manufacturer) using special diagnostictesters. Further information is available there ifrequired.

After a fault has been rectified, the informationis deleted from the fault memory or is continu-ally overwritten.When operating the vehicle, situations are con-ceivable in which this technical data, in connec-tion with other information - if necessary, underconsultation with an authorised expert - couldbe traced to a person.Examples include:Raccident reportsRdamage to the vehicleRwitness statementsFurther additional functions which are contrac-tually agreed upon with the customer likewiseallow specific vehicle data to be obtained fromthe vehicle. Such additional functions includevehicle locating in an emergency, for example.

Copyright information

General notesInformation on licences for free and open-source software used in your vehicle and itselectronic components is available on the fol-lowing website:http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource

34 Copyright informationIn

trod

uctio

n

Cockpit

Function Page

: Steering wheel gearshift pad-dles (automatic transmis-sion) 182

; Combination switch 127

= Horn

? Instrument cluster 36

A DIRECT SELECT selectorlever (automatic transmis-sion) 178

B Rear-view mirror 122

C Multimedia system display;see the separate operatinginstructions

D Overhead control panel 43

E Glove compartment 312

F Centre console control panel 39Gear lever (manual transmis-sion) 173

Function Page

G Ignition lock 172

H Adjusts the steering wheel 121

I Diagnostics connection 31Opens the bonnet 337

J Parking brake 189

K Door control panel 44

L Light switch 126

M • Coin/card holder• Control panelÇ Activates/deactivatesLane Keeping Assist 215Ã Deactivates/activatesDSR 209Ô Activates 360° camera 234

N Cruise control lever 198

Cockpit 35

At a

gla

nce

Instrument cluster

Displays and controls

Function Page

: Speedometer 245

; Display 248

= Rev counter 246

Function Page

? Coolant temperature gauge 246

A Fuel level

i Information on the outside temperature dis-play can be found under "Outside tempera-ture display" (Y page 246).

36 Instrument clusterAt

a g

lanc

e

Indicator and warning lamps

Function Page

: å ESP® OFF 287

; ÷ ESP® 287

= · Distance warning sig-nal 291

? Ð Power steering 292

A #! Turn signal 127

B ! Parking brake (yellow) 288

C ! ABS 286

D ; Engine diagnostics 289

E % Preglow 173

F ! Parking brake (red) 288

G J Brakes (red) 285

H ? Coolant 289

Function Page

I J Brakes (yellow)inoperative

J 6 Restraint system 45

K ü Seat belt 284

L K Main-beam headlamps 128

M L Dipped-beam head-lamps 126

N æ Reserve fuel 289

O T Side lamps, licenceplate and instrument clusterlighting 126

P R Rear foglamp 127O Inoperative

Q h Tyre pressure monitor 292

i Corresponding messages may also beshown in the display (Y page 260).

Instrument cluster 37

At a

gla

nce

Steering wheel with buttons

Function Page

: Display 248

; ~

Rejects or ends a call 254Exits the telephone book/redial memory6

Makes or accepts a call 254Switches to the redial mem-oryW XAdjusts the volume8

Mutesó

For vehicles with Audio 20:switches on voice-operatedcontrol of the navigation sys-tem (see the manufacturer'soperating instructions)For vehicles with COMANDOnline: switches on LINGUA-

Function PageTRONIC (see the separateoperating instructions)

= ò

Calls up the main menu9 :Selects a menu or submenuor scrolls through lists 246a

Confirms a selection 246Hides display messages 260%

Back 246ñ

For vehicles with Audio 20:switches off voice-operatedcontrol of the navigation sys-tem (see the manufacturer'soperating instructions)For vehicles with COMANDOnline: switches off LINGUA-TRONIC (see the separateoperating instructions)

38 Steering wheel with buttonsAt

a g

lanc

e

Centre console

Centre console, upper section

Function Page

: Multimedia system display;see the separate operatinginstructions

; Air-conditioning controlpanel 143

= Multimedia system CD/DVDdrive; see the separate oper-ating instructions

? £ Switches hazard warn-ing lamps on and off 128

A Ø Vehicle functions but-ton; see the separate operat-ing instructions

B % Telephone button; seethe separate operatinginstructions

C PASSENGER AIR BAG indica-tor lamps 46

Function Page

D Õ Media button; see theseparate operating instruc-tions

E $ Radio button; see theseparate operating instruc-tions

F ß Navigation button; seethe separate operatinginstructions

G þ Ejects a CD; see theseparate operating instruc-tionsV Loads a DVD; see theseparate operating instruc-tions

Centre console 39

At a

gla

nce

Centre console, middle section

Vehicle with automatic transmissionFunction Page

: Back button; see the sepa-rate operating instructions

; Multimedia system control-ler; see the separate operat-ing instructions

= Favourites button; see theseparate operating instruc-tions

? Adjusts/mutes the volume;see the separate operatinginstructions

A Switches the multimedia sys-tem on/off; see the separateoperating instructions

B Æ Opens and closes theelectric sliding door on theright side of the vehicle 84

Function Page

C Touchpad (see the separateoperating instructions)

D è Activates and deacti-vates the ECO start/stopfunction 175

E Å Opens and closes theelectric sliding door on theleft side of the vehicle 84

F c Deactivates and acti-vates PARKTRONIC 224

G DYNAMIC SELECT switch 181

40 Centre consoleAt

a g

lanc

e

Centre console, lower section

Stowage compartment with coverFunction Page

: Cover 313

; 12 V socket 321Cigarette lighter 320

= Fitting for the mobile phonebracket 325

? Media Interface with twoUSB ports or with two USBports and one SD card slot 313

Function Page

A Cup holder 318

B Ashtray 320

C • Stowage compartment• Timer for the auxiliarywarm-air heater 162• Device mounting bracketfor an auxiliary device, e.g. atachograph

Centre console 41

At a

gla

nce

Centre console between the driver's and co-driver's seats

Centre console between the driver's and co-driver's seatsFunction Page

: Stowage compartment

; Cup holder 318

= Stowage compartment 313Media Interface with twoUSB ports and an SD cardslot 313Coolbox

? Temperature-controlled cupholder 319

Function Page

A Stowage compartment

B Stowage compartment

C Cigarette lighter 320Ashtray 320or12 V socket 321230 V socket 322

42 Centre consoleAt

a g

lanc

e

Overhead control panel

Function Page

: Ì Deactivates the interiormotion sensor 73

; p Switches the left-handreading lamp on/off 131

= | Switches the automaticinterior lighting controlon/off 131

? c Switches the front inte-rior lighting on/off 132

A w Switches the rear inte-rior lighting on/off 132

B p Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off 131

Function Page

C Ë Deactivates tow-awayprotection 73

D ï Info call button 325

E 3 Opens/closes the pan-orama sliding sunroof 92Opens/closes the roller sun-blinds 94

F ATA indicator lamp

G Spectacles compartment 312

H G SOS button 324

I F Breakdown assistancecall button 325

Overhead control panel 43

At a

gla

nce

Door control panel

d Vehicles with electrically adjustable front seats e Vehicles with manually adjustable front seatsFunction Page

: Opens the door 81

; r45= Savesthe seat and exterior mirrorsettings 124

= Í Seat heating 119

? Î Seat ventilation 120

A % & Unlocks/locksthe vehicle 79

B Adjusts the seat electrically 98

Function Page

C 7Zö\Adjusts and folds the exteriormirrors out/in electrically 122

D W Opens/closes the frontside windows 89

E W Opens/closes rearhinged windows 89

F n Disables/enables rear-compartment hinged windowcontrols (override feature) 68

44 Door control panelAt

a g

lanc

e

Useful information

These Operating Instructions describe all mod-els as well as standard and optional equipmentof your vehicle that were available at the time ofgoing to print. Country-specific variations arepossible. Note that your vehicle may not be fit-ted with all of the described functions. This alsoapplies to safety-relevant systems and func-tions.Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops: (Y page 31).

Occupant safety

Restraint system introductionThe restraint system can reduce the risk of vehi-cle occupants coming into contact with parts ofthe vehicle's interior in the event of an accident.The restraint system can also reduce the forcesto which vehicle occupants are subjected duringan accident.The restraint system includes the:Rseat belt systemRairbagsRchild restraint systemRchild seat securing systemThe components of the restraint system work inconjunction with each other. They can only offerprotection if all vehicle occupants always:Rhave the seat belt correctly fastened

(Y page 48)Rhave the seat and head restraint adjusted

properly (Y page 96)As the driver, you must also make sure that thesteering wheel is also adjusted properly.Observe the information on the correct driver'sseat position (Y page 96).In addition, you must make sure that the airbagscan inflate properly if they are deployed(Y page 50).An airbag supplements a correctly worn seatbelt. As an additional safety device, the airbagincreases the level of protection for vehicleoccupants in the event of an accident. The air-bags are not deployed, for example, in the eventof an accident in which sufficient protection isoffered by the seat belt. In addition, only thoseairbags, which in the applicable accident situa-tions offer additional protection, are deployed in

the event of an accident. However, the seat beltand airbag generally do not protect againstobjects penetrating the vehicle from the out-side.Information on how the restraint system oper-ates can be found under "Deployment of belttensioners and airbags" (Y page 57).See "Children in the vehicle" for information onchildren travelling with you in the vehicle as wellas on child restraint systems (Y page 59).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the restraint system is modified, it may nolonger work as intended. The restraint systemmay then not perform its intended protectivefunction by failing in an accident or triggeringunexpectedly, for example. There is anincreased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.Never modify parts of the restraint system. Donot attempt to modify the wiring as well aselectronic components or their software.

If it is necessary to adjust the vehicle to accom-modate a person with disabilities, contact aqualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benzrecommends that you use a Mercedes-BenzService Centre for this.

Restraint system warning lampThe functions of the restraint system arechecked after the ignition is switched on and atregular intervals while the engine is running.Therefore, malfunctions can be detected ingood time.The 6 restraint system warning lamp on theinstrument cluster lights up when the ignition isswitched on. It goes out no later than a few sec-onds after the vehicle is started. The compo-nents of the restraint system are in operationalreadiness.

Occupant safety 45

Safe

ty

Z

A malfunction has occurred if the 6 restraintsystem warning lamp:Rdoes not light up after the ignition is switched

onRdoes not go out after a few seconds with the

engine runningRlights up again while the engine is running

G WARNINGIf the restraint system is malfunctioning,restraint system components may be trig-gered unintentionally or may not deploy asintended during an accident. This may affectthe seat belt tensioner or airbag, for example.This poses an increased risk of injury or evenfatal injury.Have the restraint system checked andrepaired immediately at a qualified specialistworkshop.

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp : andPASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp ; arepart of the automatic deactivation system of thefront-passenger front airbag.The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampinforms you about the status of the front-passenger front airbag.If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp:Rlights up, the front-passenger front airbag is

disabled. It will then not be deployed in theevent of an accident.Rdoes not light up, the front-passenger front

airbag is enabled. If, in the event of an acci-

dent, all deployment criteria are met, thefront-passenger front airbag is deployed.

The PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp isinoperative. When the ignition is switched on, itlights up briefly and then goes out again.Depending on the person in the front-passengerseat, the front-passenger front airbag must beeither disabled or enabled; see the followingpoints. You must make sure of this both beforeand during a journey.RChildren in a rearward-facing child

restraint system: the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp must be lit. The front-passenger front airbag is disabled. Make surethat you read the notes on the "Automaticfront-passenger front airbag deactivation sys-tem" (Y page 52) and on "Children in thevehicle" (Y page 59).RChildren in a forward-facing child

restraint system: depending on the installedchild restraint system and the age and size ofthe child, the front-passenger front airbag iseither disabled or enabled. Therefore, makesure that you read the notes on the "Auto-matic front-passenger front airbag deactiva-tion system" (Y page 52) and on "Children inthe vehicle" (Y page 59).RAll other persons: the PASSENGER AIR BAG

OFF indicator lamp must be off. The front-passenger front airbag is enabled. Dependingon the build of the person on the front-passenger seat, the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp may light up. The front-passenger front airbag is disabled. It will thennot be deployed in the event of an accident. Inthis case, the front-passenger seat should notbe used.Make sure that you read the notes on the"Automatic front-passenger front airbagdeactivation system" (Y page 52) as well ason "Seat belts" (Y page 46) and "Airbags"(Y page 49). There, you can also find infor-mation on the correct seat position.

Seat belts

IntroductionA correctly worn seat belt is the most effectivemeans of restraining the movement of vehicleoccupants in the event of a collision or if thevehicle overturns. This reduces the risk of vehi-cle occupants coming into contact with parts of

46 Occupant safetySa

fety

the vehicle interior or being ejected from it. Theseat belt also helps to keep the vehicle occu-pants in the best position in relation to the air-bag being deployed.The seat belt system consists of:Rseat beltsRbelt tensioners for the front seat beltsRbelt force limitersIf the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply fromthe belt outlet, the inertia reel locks. The beltstrap cannot be pulled out any further.The belt tensioner tightens the seat belt in theevent of a collision so that it fits tightly acrossyour body. However, it does not pull the vehicleoccupants back in the direction of the seatbackrest.The belt tensioner does not, however, correct anincorrect seat position or correct the routing ofa seat belt that is worn incorrectly.When triggered, seat belt force limiters help toreduce the peak force exerted by the seat belton the vehicle occupant.The belt force limiters on the front seats aresynchronised with the front airbags, which takeon a part of the deceleration force. This canreduce the forces to which the vehicle occu-pants are subjected during an accident.

! If the co-driver's seat is not occupied, do notengage the seat belt tongue in the buckle onthe co-driver's seat. Otherwise, the belt ten-sioner could be triggered in the event of anaccident and would have to be replaced.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the seat belt is worn incorrectly, it cannotperform its intended protective function. Fur-thermore, an incorrectly worn seat belt cancause additional injuries, e.g. in the event ofan accident, heavy braking or suddenchanges of direction. There is an increasedrisk of injury, possibly even fatal.Always ensure that all vehicle occupants havetheir seat belts fastened correctly and are sit-ting properly.

The components of the restraint system work inconjunction with each other. They can only offerprotection if all vehicle occupants always:Rhave the seat belt correctly fastened

(Y page 48)Rhave the seat and head restraint adjusted

properly (Y page 96)

G WARNINGThe seat belt does not offer the intended levelof protection if you have not moved the back-rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-ing or in the event of an accident, you couldslide underneath the seat belt and sustainabdomen or neck injuries, for example. Thisposes an increased risk of injury or even fatalinjury.Adjust the seat properly before beginningyour journey. Always ensure that the backrestis in an almost vertical position and that theshoulder section of your seatbelt is routedacross the centre of your shoulder.

G WARNINGPersons under 1.50 m tall cannot wear theseat belts correctly without an additional suit-able restraint system. If the seat belt is wornincorrectly, it cannot perform its intendedprotective function. Furthermore, an incor-rectly worn seat belt can cause additionalinjuries, e.g. in the event of an accident, heavybraking or sudden changes of direction. Thereis an increased risk of injury, possibly evenfatal.Always secure persons less than 1.50 m tall inadditional suitable restraint systems.

If a child younger than twelve years old andunder 1.50 m in height is travelling in the vehi-cle:RAlways secure the child in a child restraint

system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehi-cle. The child restraint system must be appro-priate to the age, weight and size of the childRBe sure to observe the instructions and safety

notes on the "Automatic front-passenger

Occupant safety 47

Safe

ty

Z

front airbag deactivation system"(Y page 52)RBe sure to observe the instructions and safety

notes on "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 59) in addition to the manufactur-er's operating and installation instructions forthe child restraint system

G WARNINGSeat belts cannot protect as intended, if:Rthey are damaged, have been modified, are

extremely dirty, bleached or dyedRthe seat belt buckle is damaged or

extremely dirtyRmodifications have been made to the belt

tensioners, belt anchorages or inertia reelsSeat belts may sustain non-visible damage inan accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Modi-fied or damaged seat belts can tear or fail, forexample in the event of an accident. Modifiedseat belt tensioners may be deployed unin-tentionally or not function as intended. Thereis an increased risk of injury, possibly evenfatal.Never modify seat belts, seat belt tensioners,seat belt anchorages and inertia reels. Ensurethat seat belts are not damaged or worn andare clean. After an accident, have the seatbelts checked immediately at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only useseat belts that have been approved specificallyfor your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Otherwise,your vehicle's general operating permit could beinvalidated.

Correct use of the seat beltsObserve the safety notes on the seat belt(Y page 47).All vehicle occupants must be wearing the seatbelt correctly before beginning the journey. Alsomake sure that all vehicle occupants are alwayswearing the seat belt correctly while the vehicleis in motion.

When fastening a seat belt, always make surethat:Rthe seat belt buckle tongue is inserted only

into the belt buckle belonging to that seatRthe seat belt is pulled tight across the body

Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a wintercoat.Rthe seat belt is not twisted

Only then can any forces that occur be dis-tributed across the surface of the seat belt.Rthe shoulder section of the belt is routed

across the centre of the shoulderThe shoulder section of the seat belt shouldnot touch your neck or be routed under yourarm or behind your back. If possible, adjustthe seat belt to the appropriate height.Rthe lap belt is taut and passes across the lap

as low down as possibleThe lap belt must always be routed acrossyour hip joints and never across your abdo-men. This applies particularly to pregnantwomen. If necessary, press the lap belt downinto your hip joints and pull tight with theshoulder section of the belt.Rthe seat belt is not routed across sharp, poin-

ted or fragile objectsIf you have such items located on or in yourclothing, e.g. pens, keys or spectacles, storethese in a suitable place.Ronly one person is using a seat belt

Infants and children must never travel sittingon the lap of a vehicle occupant. In the eventof an accident, they could be crushedbetween the vehicle occupant and seat belt.Robjects are never secured with a seat belt if

the seat belt is also being used by one of thevehicle's occupantsAlso ensure that no objects are placedbetween a person and the seat. e.g. a cush-ion.

Seat belts are intended only to secure andrestrain vehicle occupants. Always observe the"Loading guidelines" for securing objects, lug-gage or loads (Y page 328).

Fastening and adjusting the seat beltsObserve the safety notes on the seat belt(Y page 47) and the information on the correctuse of the seat belt (Y page 48).

48 Occupant safetySa

fety

Basic illustrationX Adjust the seat (Y page 96).

The seat backrest must be in an almostupright position.

X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt outletand engage belt tongue ; in belt buckle :.The seat belt on the driver's seat and thefront-passenger seat may be tightened auto-matically; see "Belt adjustment"(Y page 49).

X If necessary, pull upwards on the seat belt infront of your chest so that the belt sits tightlyacross your body.

The shoulder section of the seat belt mustalways be routed across the centre of the shoul-der. Adjust the belt outlet if necessary.X To raise: slide the belt outlet upwards.

The belt outlet will engage in various posi-tions.

X To lower: hold belt outlet release = and slidethe belt outlet downwards.

X Let go of belt outlet release = in the desiredposition and make sure that the belt outletengages.

Releasing the seat belts! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up.

Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will betrapped in the door or in the seat mechanism.This could damage the door, the door trimpanel and the seat belt. Damaged seat beltscan no longer fulfil their protective functionand must be replaced. Visit a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

X Press release button in belt buckle, hold belttongue firmly and guide the seat belt back.

Seat belt adjustmentSeat-belt adjustment is an integral part of thePRE-SAFE® convenience function. With thisfunction, the driver's and co-driver's seat beltsare adjusted to the upper body of the vehicleoccupant.The belt strap is tightened slightly when:Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle andRthe ignition is switched onThe seat belt adjustment will apply a certaintightening force if any slack is detected betweenthe vehicle occupant and the seat belt. Do nothold on to the seat belt tightly while it is adjust-ing.You can switch the seat belt adjustment on andoff using the multimedia system. Information onswitching the seat belt adjustment function onand off can be found in the Digital OperatingInstructions or in the separate multimedia sys-tem operating instructions.

Belt warning for driver and co-driverThe 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instru-ment cluster is a reminder that all vehicle occu-pants must wear their seat belts. It may light upcontinuously or flash. In addition, a warning tonemay sound.The 7 seat belt warning lamp goes out andthe warning tone ceases when the driver and thefront passenger have fastened their seat belts.For certain countries only: regardless ofwhether the driver and front passenger havealready fastened their seat belts, the 7 seatbelt warning lamp lights up for 6 seconds aftereach time the ignition is switched on. After theengine has been started, it goes out once thedriver and front passenger have fastened theirseat belts.

Airbags

IntroductionThe installation location of an airbag is identifiedby the AIRBAG symbol.An airbag supplements a correctly worn seatbelt. It is not a replacement for the seat belt. Theairbag offers additional protection in corre-sponding accident situations.

Occupant safety 49

Safe

ty

Z

Not all airbags are deployed in an accident. Thedifferent airbag systems work independently ofeach other (Y page 57).However, no system available today can com-pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities.It is also not possible to completely rule out arisk of injury caused by an airbag due to thespeed at which the airbag must be deployed.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you deviate from the correct seat position,the airbag cannot perform its intended pro-tective function and can even cause addi-tional injuries when deployed. There is anincreased risk of serious or even fatal injuries.In order to avoid such risks, always ensurethat all vehicle occupants:Rfasten their seatbelts correctly, including

pregnant womenRare seated correctly and maintain the fur-

thest possible distance from the airbagsRobserve the following notesAlways ensure that there are no objects loca-ted between the airbag and the vehicle occu-pant.

RAdjust the seats properly before beginningyour journey. Always make sure that the seatis in an almost upright position. The centre ofthe head restraint must support the head atabout eye level.RMove the driver's and front-passenger seats

as far back as possible. The driver's seat posi-tion must allow the vehicle to be driven safely.RHold the steering wheel only by the rim. This

allows the airbag to be fully deployed.RAlways lean against the backrest while driv-

ing. Do not lean forwards or lean against thedoor or side window. You may otherwise be inthe deployment area of the airbags.RAlways keep your feet in the footwell in front

of the seat. Do not put your feet on the dash-board, for example. Your feet may otherwisebe in the deployment area of the airbag.RAlways secure persons less than 1.50 m tall in

suitable restraint systems. Up to this height,the seat belt cannot be worn correctly.

If a child is travelling in your vehicle, also observe the following notes:RAlways secure children under twelve years of

age and less than 1.50 m tall in suitable childrestraint systems.RChild restraint systems should preferably be

fitted to the rear seats.RSecure a child to the front-passenger seat

only when the front-passenger front airbag isdisabled, and then only in a rearward-facingchild restraint system. If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is permanently lit, thefront-passenger front airbag is disabled(Y page 46).RBe sure to observe the instructions and safety

notes on the "Automatic front-passengerfront airbag deactivation system"(Y page 52) and on "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 59) in addition to the manufactur-er's operating and installation instructions forthe child restraint system.

Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent the airbag from functioning correctly. Beforestarting your journey and to avoid risks resultingfrom the speed of the airbag as it deploys, makesure that:Rthere are no people, animals or objects

between the vehicle occupants and an airbagRthere are no objects between the seat, door

and B-pillarRthere are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers,

hanging on the grab handles or coat hooksRno accessories, such as cup holders, are

attached to the vehicle within the deploymentarea of an airbag, e.g. to doors or side win-dowsRno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects are in

the pockets of your clothing. Store suchobjects in a suitable place.

G WARNINGIf you modify an airbag cover or affix objectssuch as stickers to it, the airbag can no longerfunction correctly. There is an increased riskof injury.Never modify an airbag cover or affix objectsto it.

Vehicles with windowbags for all seat rows:

50 Occupant safetySa

fety

G WARNINGSensors to control the airbags are located inthe doors. Modifications or work not per-formed correctly to the doors or door panel-ling, as well as damaged doors, can lead to thefunction of the sensors being impaired. Theairbags might therefore not function properlyany more. Consequently, the airbags cannotprotect vehicle occupants as they aredesigned to do. This poses an increased riskof injury.Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.Always have work on the doors or door pan-elling carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop.

Front airbags! Do not place heavy objects on the front-

passenger seat. This could cause the systemto identify the seat as being occupied. In theevent of an accident, the restraint systems onthe front-passenger side may be triggeredand have to be replaced.

Driver's airbag : deploys in front of the steer-ing wheel. Front-passenger front airbag ;deploys in front of and above the glove com-partment and centre console.When deployed, the front airbags offer addi-tional head and thorax protection for the occu-pants in the front seats.The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampinforms you about the status of the front-passenger front airbag (Y page 46).The front-passenger front airbag will deploy onlyif:Rthe automatic front-passenger front airbag

deactivation system has detected that the

front-passenger seat is occupied(Y page 52). The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp is not lit (Y page 53)Rthe restraint system control unit predicts a

high accident severity

Sidebags

G WARNINGUnsuitable seat covers may obstruct or evenprevent deployment of the airbags integratedinto the seats. The airbags may then fail toprotect the vehicle occupants as intended.Operation of the automatic co-driver's frontairbag deactivation system may also beimpaired. There is an increased risk of injury,possibly even fatal.Use only seat covers which have been specif-ically approved for the respective seat byMercedes-Benz.

Sidebags : deploy next to the outer bolster ofthe seat backrest.When deployed, the sidebag offers additionalthorax and pelvis protection. However, it doesnot protect the:RheadRneckRarmsWhen the restraint system control unit detects aside impact, the sidebag is deployed on the sideon which the impact occurs.

Occupant safety 51

Safe

ty

Z

Vehicles with the automatic front-passengerfront airbag deactivation system: the sidebag onthe front-passenger side deploys under the fol-lowing conditions:Ran occupant is detected in the front-

passenger seat orRthe seat belt buckle tongue is engaged in the

belt buckle of the front-passenger seatIf the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle,the sidebag on the front-passenger side deploysif an appropriate accident situation occurs. Inthis case, deployment is independent ofwhether the front-passenger seat is occupied ornot.

Windowbags

Example: windowbag above the front door

Example: windowbag for all seat rowsWindowbags : or ; are integrated in the sideof the roof frame. Windowbags for all seatrows ; deploy in the area from the front door(A-pillar) to the rear side window (D-pillar).When deployed, the windowbag enhances thelevel of protection for the head. However, it doesnot protect the chest or arms.

When the restraint system control unit detects aside impact, the windowbag is deployed on theside on which the impact occurs.If the system determines that it can offer addi-tional protection to that provided by the seatbelt, a windowbag may be deployed in otheraccident situations (Y page 57).

Automatic co-driver airbag deactiva-tion

IntroductionIn order to recognise a child restraint system onthe front-passenger seat, the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system cat-egorises the person in the front-passenger seat.Depending on that result, the front-passengerfront airbag is either enabled or disabled. If arearward-facing child restraint system is fittedto the front-passenger seat, the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must light up afterthe system self-test and remain lit. The front-passenger front airbag is disabled.The system does not disable:Rthe sidebagRthe windowbagRthe seat belt tensionerMake sure that your vehicle is equipped with theautomatic front-passenger front airbag deacti-vation system (Y page 62). If this is not thecase, always install a child restraint system on asuitable rear seat (Y page 63).If it is absolutely necessary to install a childrestraint system on the front-passenger seat, besure to observe the correct positioning of thechild restraint system. Never place objectsunder or behind the child restraint system, e.g. acushion. The entire base of the child restraintsystem must always rest on the seat cushion ofthe front-passenger seat. The backrest of aforward-facing child restraint system must, asfar as possible, rest flat against the backrest ofthe front-passenger seat. The child restraint sys-tem must not touch the roof or be put understrain by the head restraint. Adjust the angle ofthe seat backrest and the head restraint posi-tion accordingly. Only then is the correct func-tion of the automatic front-passenger front air-bag deactivation system guaranteed. Alwaysobserve the information on suitable positioningof the child restraint system (Y page 63) in

52 Occupant safetySa

fety

addition to the child restraint system manufac-turer's installation instructions.

Operation of automatic front-passengerfront airbag deactivation

: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp; PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lampThe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampshows you whether the front-passenger frontairbag is disabled.X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the igni-

tion lock.The system carries out a self-diagnosis.

The PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp isinoperative. When the ignition is switched on, itlights up briefly and then goes out again.The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampmust light up for approximately six seconds.The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampthen displays the status of the front-passengerfront airbag. If the status of the front-passengerfront airbag changes while the vehicle is inmotion, an airbag display message may appearin the instrument cluster (Y page 262). Whenthe front-passenger seat is occupied, alwayspay attention to the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp. Be aware of the status of thefront-passenger front airbag both before andduring the journey.If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp:Rlights up, the front-passenger front airbag is

disabled. It will then not be deployed in theevent of an accident.Rdoes not light up, the front-passenger front

airbag is enabled. If, in the event of an acci-dent, all deployment criteria are met, thefront-passenger front airbag is deployed.

If a person sits in the front-passenger seat, theymust be:Rseated with the seat belt fastened correctlyRin an almost upright position with their back

against the seat backrestRwith their feet resting on the floor, if possibleIf the front passenger does not observe theseconditions, the automatic front-passenger frontairbag deactivation system may be influenced,e.g. because the front passenger:Rtransfers their weight by supporting them-

selves on a vehicle armrestRsits in such a way that their weight is raised

from the seat cushionThe front-passenger front airbag may be disa-bled by mistake as a result of these or similaractions. In this case, the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp lights up permanently. Thefront-passenger front airbag then does notdeploy during an accident.

G WARNINGIf the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lampis lit, the front-passenger front airbag is disa-bled. It will not be deployed in the event of anaccident and cannot perform its intended pro-tective function. A person in the front-passenger seat could then, for example, comeinto contact with the vehicle's interior, espe-cially if the person is sitting too close to thedashboard. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.When the front-passenger seat is occupied,always make sure that:Rthe classification of the person in the front-

passenger seat is correct and that the front-passenger front airbag is enabled or disa-bled in accordance with the person in thefront-passenger seat.Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved

back as far back as possible.Rthe person is seated correctly.Make sure, both before and during the jour-ney, that the status of the front-passengerfront airbag is correct.

Occupant safety 53

Safe

ty

Z

G WARNINGIf you secure a child in a child restraint systemon the front-passenger seat and thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp isoff, the front-passenger front airbag candeploy in the event of an accident. The childcould be struck by the airbag. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Make sure that the front-passenger front air-bag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIR-BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.

G WARNINGIf you secure a child in a forward-facing childrestraint system on the front-passenger seatand you position the front-passenger seat tooclose to the dashboard, the child could, in theevent of an accident:Rcome into contact with the vehicle's inte-

rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-cator lamp is lit, for exampleRbe struck by the airbag if the PASSENGER

AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is offThis poses an increased risk of injury or evenfatal injury.Move the front-passenger seat as far back aspossible. Always make sure that the shoulderbelt strap is correctly routed from the vehiclebelt sash guide to the shoulder belt guide onthe child restraint system. The shoulder beltstrap must be routed forwards and down-wards from the vehicle belt sash guide. If nec-essary, adjust the vehicle belt sash guide andthe front-passenger seat accordingly. Alwayscomply with the child restraint system manu-facturer's installation instructions.

Always observe the vehicle-specific informationfor the correct positioning of the child restraintsystem (Y page 63).If the automatic front-passenger front airbagdeactivation system detects that:Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied, the

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamplights up after the system self-test and

remains lit. This indicates that the front-passenger front airbag is disabled.Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a

child in a rearward-facing child restraint sys-tem, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp lights up after the system self-test andremains lit. This indicates that the front-passenger front airbag is disabled.But in the case of a child in a rearward-facingchild restraint system, the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp can also go out afterthe system self-test. This indicates that thefront-passenger front airbag is enabled. Theresult of the classification is dependent on,among other factors, the child restraint sys-tem and the child's build. It is recommendedthat you fit the child restraint system to asuitable rear seat.Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a

child in a forward-facing child restraint sys-tem, either the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp lights up and remains lit afterthe system self-test depending on the resultof the classification, or it goes out. The resultof the classification is dependent on, amongother factors, the child restraint system andthe child's build.Move the front-passenger seat as far back aspossible. Always observe the information in"Child restraint systems on the front-passenger seat" (Y page 62) and in "Suita-ble positioning of the child restraint system"(Y page 63). Alternatively, you can fit thechild restraint system to a suitable rear seat.Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a per-

son with a smaller build (e.g. a teenager orsmall adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp lights up and remains lit afterthe system self-test depending on the resultof the classification or, alternatively, goes out.- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator

lamp is off, move the front-passenger seatas far back as possible. Alternatively, a per-son with a small build can sit on a rear seat.

- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp is lit, a person with a smaller buildshould not use the front-passenger seat.

Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by anadult or a person with the build of an adult, thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampgoes out after the system self-test. This indi-cates that the front-passenger front airbag isenabled.

54 Occupant safetySa

fety

If children are travelling in the vehicle, be sure toobserve the notes on "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 59).If the automatic front-passenger front airbagdeactivation system is malfunctioning, the red6 restraint system warning lamp on theinstrument cluster and the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp light up simultaneously.The front-passenger front airbag is disabled inthis case and does not deploy during an acci-dent. Have the automatic front-passenger frontairbag deactivation system checked andrepaired immediately at a qualified specialistworkshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends thatyou use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for thispurpose.If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or theseat cushion are damaged, have the necessaryrepair work carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends thatyou use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for thispurpose.For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you use only a child restraint systemthat has been tested and approved byMercedes-Benz in combination with the auto-matic front-passenger front airbag deactivationsystem.

System self-test

G DANGERIf the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp does not light up during the system self-test, then the system is malfunctioning. Thefront-passenger front airbag might be trig-gered unintentionally or might not be trig-gered at all in the event of an accident withhigh deceleration. This poses an increasedrisk of injury or even fatal injury.In this case the front-passenger seat may notbe used. Do not install a child restraint systemon the front-passenger seat. Have the auto-matic front-passenger front airbag deactiva-tion system checked and repaired immedi-ately at a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lampremains lit after the system self-test, the

front-passenger front airbag is disabled. It willnot be deployed in the event of an accident. Inthis case, the front-passenger front airbagcannot perform its intended protective func-tion, e.g. when a person is seated in the front-passenger seat.That person could, for example, come intocontact with the vehicle's interior, especiallyif the person is sitting too close to the dash-board. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.When the front-passenger seat is occupied,always ensure that:Rthe classification of the person in the front-

passenger seat is correct and the front-passenger front airbag is enabled or disa-bled in accordance with the person in thefront-passenger seat.Rthe person is seated properly with a cor-

rectly fastened seat belt.Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved

as far back as possible.If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp remains lit when it should not, the front-passenger seat may not be used. Do notinstall a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. Have the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation systemchecked and repaired immediately at a quali-fied specialist workshop.

G WARNINGObjects between the seat surface and thechild restraint system could affect the func-tion of the automatic front-passenger frontairbag deactivation system. This could resultin the front-passenger front airbag not func-tioning as intended during an accident. Thisposes an increased risk of injury or even fatalinjury.Do not place any objects between the seatsurface and the child restraint system. Theentire base of the child restraint system mustalways rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the forwards-facing child restraint system must, as far as

Occupant safety 55

Safe

ty

Z

possible, be resting on the backrest of therear reclining seat. Always comply with thechild restraint system manufacturer's instal-lation instructions.

After the system self-test, the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp displays the status ofthe front-passenger front airbag (Y page 53).

Further information can be found under "Prob-lems with the automatic front-passenger frontairbag deactivation system" (Y page 56).

Problems with automatic co-driver airbag deactivationBe sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Y page 55).

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamplights up and remains lit,even though the front-passenger seat is occu-pied by an adult or a per-son with a build corre-sponding to that of anadult.

The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat is false.X Make sure the conditions for a correct classification of the person

on the front-passenger seat are met (Y page 53).X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit, the front-

passenger seat may not be used.X Have the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation sys-

tem checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lampdoes not light up and/ordoes not stay on.The front-passenger seatis:RemptyRoccupied with a rear-

ward-facing childrestraint system

The automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system ismalfunctioning.X Make sure there is nothing between the seat and the child restraint

system.X Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system rests on

the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat.X When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the seat

belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight with the front-passengerseat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt and the childrestraint system being pulled too tightly.

X Check that the child restraint system is installed correctly.X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight to the

seat.X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off, do not

install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. It isrecommended that you fit the child restraint system to a suitablerear seat.

X Have the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation sys-tem checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

56 Occupant safetySa

fety

Deployment of belt tensioners and air-bags

Important safety notes

G WARNINGAfter the airbag deploys, the airbag parts arehot. There is a risk of injury.Do not touch the airbag parts. Have adeployed airbag replaced at a qualified spe-cialist workshop as soon as possible.

G WARNINGPyrotechnical belt tensioners which havebeen triggered are no longer operational andtherefore cannot protect as intended. There isan increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.Have pyrotechnic belt tensioners which havebeen triggered replaced at a qualified special-ist workshop immediately.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have thevehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshopafter an accident. Take this into account, par-ticularly if a seat belt tensioner was triggered oran airbag was deployed.An electric motor is used by PRE-SAFE® to trig-ger the tightening of the seat belt in hazardoussituations. This procedure is reversible.If the belt tensioners are triggered or an airbag isdeployed, you will hear a bang, and a smallamount of powder may also be released. The6 restraint system warning lamp lights up.Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hear-ing. In general, the powder released is not haz-ardous to health but may cause short-termbreathing difficulties to persons suffering fromasthma or other pulmonary conditions. Providedit is safe to do so, you should leave the vehicleimmediately or open the window in order to pre-vent breathing difficulties.

OperationDuring the first stage of a collision, the restraintsystem control unit evaluates important physi-cal data relating to vehicle deceleration or accel-eration, such as:RdurationRdirectionRintensityBased on the evaluation of this data, therestraint system control unit triggers the seatbelt tensioners in the event of a head-on or rearcollision.A seat belt tensioner can be triggered only if:Rthe ignition is switched onRthe components of the restraint system are

operational. You can find further informationunder: "Restraint system warning lamp"(Y page 45)Rthe seat belt buckle tongue has engaged in

the belt buckle of the respective front seatIf the restraint system control unit detects ahigh-severity accident, in certain head-on colli-sions, additional components of the restraintsystem are deployed independently of eachother:Rfront airbagsRwindowbag, if the system determines that

deployment can offer additional protection tothat provided by the seat belt

On vehicles with the automatic front-passengerfront airbag deactivation system: depending onthe person in the front-passenger seat, thefront-passenger front airbag is either disabled orenabled. The front-passenger front airbag canbe deployed in an accident only if thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off.Observe the information on the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp (Y page 46).Your vehicle has two-stage front airbags. In thefirst deployment stage, the front airbag is filledwith propellant gas. The front airbag is fullydeployed if the second deployment stage is acti-vated within a few milliseconds.The activation threshold for the seat belt ten-sioners and airbags is determined based on theevaluation of the vehicle's rate of decelerationor acceleration at various points in the vehicle.This process is pre-emptive in nature. The trig-gering/deployment process should take placein good time at the start of the collision.

Occupant safety 57

Safe

ty

Z

The rate of vehicle deceleration or accelerationand the direction of the force are essentiallydetermined by:Rthe distribution of forces during the collisionRthe collision angleRthe deformation characteristics of the vehicleRthe characteristics of the object with which

the vehicle has collidedFactors that can be seen and measured onlyafter a collision has occurred do not play a deci-sive role in the deployment of an airbag. Nor dothey provide an indication of airbag deployment.The vehicle may be deformed significantly with-out an airbag being deployed. This is the case ifonly parts that are relatively easily deformed areaffected and the rate of deceleration is not high.Conversely, an airbag may be deployed eventhough the vehicle suffers only minor deforma-tion. This is the case if, for example, very rigidvehicle parts such as longitudinal body mem-bers are hit, and sufficient deceleration occursas a result.If the restraint system control unit detects a sideimpact, the applicable components of therestraint system are activated independently ofeach other.RSidebag on the side on which an impact

occurs, independently of the seat belt ten-sioner and seat belt usageVehicles with the automatic front-passengerfront airbag deactivation system: the sidebagon the front-passenger side deploys under thefollowing conditions:- an occupant is detected in the front-

passenger seat or- the seat belt buckle tongue is engaged in

the belt buckle of the front-passenger seatRWindowbag on the side on which an impact

occurs, independently of seat belt usage andregardless of whether the front-passengerseat is occupiedRSeat belt tensioners, if the system determines

that deployment can offer additional protec-tion for the vehicle occupants in this situation

i Not all airbags are deployed in an accident.The different airbag systems work independ-ently of each other.

How the airbag system works is determinedby the severity of the accident detected,especially the vehicle deceleration or accel-eration, and the apparent type of accident:Rfrontal collisionRside impact

PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupantprotection)

IntroductionIn certain hazardous situations, PRE-SAFE®

takes pre-emptive measures to protect the vehi-cle occupants.

Important safety notes! Make sure that there are no objects in the

footwell or behind the seats. There is a riskthat the seats and/or the objects could bedamaged when PRE-SAFE® is activated.

Although your vehicle is equipped with PRE-SAFE®, the possibility of injury in the event of anaccident cannot be ruled out. Always adapt yourdriving style to the prevailing road and weatherconditions and maintain a sufficient, safe dis-tance from other road users. Drive carefully.

FunctionPRE-SAFE® can detect certain hazardous situa-tions and take pre-emptive measures to protectthe vehicle occupants. PRE-SAFE® can activatethe following components independently ofeach other:Rthe front seat belts are pre-tensionedRif the vehicle skids, the side windows and the

panorama sliding sunroof are closedRvehicles with the memory function: the co-

driver's seat is adjusted if it is in an unfavour-able position

If the hazardous situation passes without result-ing in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackens the beltpre-tensioning. All settings made by PRE-SAFE®

can then be reversed.

58 Occupant safetySa

fety

If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced:X Move the seat backrest or seat back slightly

when the vehicle is stationary.Seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced and thelocking mechanism is released.

The seat belt adjustment is an integral part ofthe PRE-SAFE® convenience function. Informa-tion about the convenience function can befound under "Belt adjustment" (Y page 49).

Automatic measures after an acci-dent

Immediately after an accident, the followingmeasures may be implemented, depending onthe type and severity of the impact:Rthe hazard warning lamps are activatedRthe emergency lighting in the vehicle interior

is activatedRthe vehicle doors are unlockedRthe front side windows are loweredRair-recirculation mode is switched onRclimate control is switched offRthe engine is switched off and the fuel supply

is cut off

Children in the vehicle

Important safety notesAccident statistics show that children securedon the rear seats are safer than children securedon the front-passenger seat. For this reason,Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you installthe child restraint system on a rear seat. Chil-dren are generally better protected there.If a child younger than twelve years old andunder 1.50 m in height is travelling in the vehi-cle:Ralways secure the child in a child restraint

system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.The child restraint system must be appropri-ate to the age, weight and size of the child.Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety

notes in this section in addition to the childrestraint system manufacturer's installationinstructions.Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety

notes on the automatic front-passenger frontairbag deactivation system (Y page 52).

G WARNINGIf you leave children unattended in the vehi-cle, they may be able to set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brakeRshift the automatic transmission out of park

position P or shift manual transmission intoneutralRstart the engineIn addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take the keywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leavechildren unattended in the vehicle.

G WARNINGIf persons (particularly children) are exposedto heat or cold for a prolonged period, there isa risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Neverleave persons (particularly children) unatten-ded in the vehicle.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is placed in directsunlight, the parts could become very hot.Children could be suffer burns by touchingthese parts, in particular on the metallic partsof the child restraint system. There is a risk ofinjury.If you and your child leave the vehicle, alwaysmake sure that the child restraint system isnot in direct sunlight. Cover it with a blanket,for example. If the child restraint system hasbeen exposed to direct sunlight, leave it tocool down before securing the child in it.Never leave children unattended in the vehi-cle.

Always ensure that all vehicle occupants havetheir seat belts fastened correctly and are sittingproperly. Particular attention must be paid tochildren.Observe the safety notes on the seat belt(Y page 47) and the information on the correctuse of the seat belt (Y page 48).

Children in the vehicle 59

Safe

ty

Z

Child restraint systemObserve the instructions for correct use of thechild restraint system (Y page 63).For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you use only a child restraint systemrecommended by Mercedes-Benz(Y page 66).

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is incorrectly fit-ted on the seat position suitable for this pur-pose, it cannot perform its intended protec-tive function. In the event of an accident,sharp braking or a sudden change in direction,the child may not be held securely. There is anincreased risk of serious or even fatal injuries.Observe the manufacturer's installationinstructions and the correct use for the childrestraint system. Make sure that the entiresurface of the child restraint system is restingon the seat surface. Never place objectsunder or behind the child restraint system,e.g. cushions. Only use child restraint sys-tems with the original cover designed forthem. Only replace damaged covers with gen-uine covers.

G WARNINGIf a rearward-facing child restraint system ismounted facing forwards by mistake, it can-not provide the intended protection. This can,for example, be the case if a rearward-facingchild restraint system is fitted on a rear seatwhich is facing backwards. The child cannotbe restrained in the event of an accident, forinstance. There is an increased risk of injury,possibly even fatal.Always ensure the rear seat is facing forwardsbefore fitting a rearward-facing child restraintsystem on it.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is fitted incor-rectly or is not secured, it can come loose inthe event of an accident, heavy braking or asudden change in direction. The childrestraint system could be thrown about, strik-

ing vehicle occupants. There is an increasedrisk of injury, possibly even fatal.Always fit child restraint systems properly,even if they are not being used. Make surethat you observe the child restraint systemmanufacturer's installation instructions.

You will find further information on stowingobjects, luggage and loads securely under"Loading guidelines" (Y page 328).

G WARNINGChild restraint systems or their securing sys-tems that have been damaged or subjected toa load in an accident cannot perform theirintended protective function. In the event ofan accident, sharp braking or a suddenchange in direction, the child may not be heldsecurely. There is an increased risk of seriousor even fatal injuries.Immediately replace child restraint systemsthat have been damaged or subjected to aload in an accident. Have the child restraintsecuring systems checked in a qualified spe-cialist workshop before fitting a child restraintsystem again.

The securing systems of child restraint systemsare:Rthe seat belt systemRthe ISOFIX securing ringsRthe Top Tether anchoragesIf circumstances require you to fit a childrestraint system to the front-passenger seat, besure to observe the information on "Childrestraint systems on the front-passenger seat"(Y page 62).Observe the warning labels in the vehicle inte-rior and on the child restraint system.

i It is advisable to use Mercedes-Benz careproducts to clean child restraint systems rec-ommended by Mercedes-Benz. Informationcan be obtained at a qualified specialist work-shop.

60 Children in the vehicleSa

fety

ISOFIX child seat securing system

G WARNINGISOFIX child restraint systems do not offersufficient protective effect for children whoseweight is greater than 22 kg who are securedusing the safety belt integrated in the childrestraint system. The child could, for example,not be restrained correctly in the event of anaccident. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.If the child weighs more than 22 kg, only useISOFIX child restraint systems with which thechild is also secured with the vehicle seat belt.Also secure the child restraint system with theTop Tether belt, if available.

When fitting a child restraint system, be sure toobserve the manufacturer's installation andoperating instructions and the instructions forcorrect use of the child restraint system(Y page 63).Before installing the child seat, move the rearseat backrests to an upright position. Do notadjust the backrest of a seat with an ISOFIXchild restraint system installed.Before every trip, make sure that the ISOFIXchild restraint system is engaged correctly inboth ISOFIX securing rings.

! When fitting the child restraint system invehicles with a rear bench seat, make surethat the seat belt for the middle seat does notget trapped. Otherwise, the seat belt could bedamaged.

: ISOFIX securing ring (example: individualseat)

X Install the ISOFIX child restraint system onboth ISOFIX securing rings :.

ISOFIX is a standardised securing system forspecially designed child restraint systems oncertain rear seats. ISOFIX securing rings : foran ISOFIX child restraint system are fittedbetween the seat cushion and the seat backrest.Child restraint systems without ISOFIX childseat securing system should be fitted using theseat belts in the vehicle. When fitting a childrestraint system, be sure to observe the manu-facturer's installation and operating instruc-tions and the instructions for correct use of thechild restraint system (Y page 63).

Top Tether

IntroductionTop Tether provides an additional connectionbetween the child restraint system secured withISOFIX and the vehicle. It helps reduce the riskof injury even further. If the child restraint sys-tem is fitted with a Top Tether belt, this shouldalways be used.

Top Tether anchorages

Example: individual seatTop Tether anchorage ; is located at the bot-tom of the rear side of the rear seat on the crossbrace between the seat or bench seat leg.X Move head restraint : upwards.X Fit the ISOFIX child restraint system with Top

Tether. Always comply with the child restraintsystem manufacturer's installation instruc-tions when doing so.

Children in the vehicle 61

Safe

ty

Z

X Route Top Tether belt ? under headrestraint : between the two head restraintbars.

X Hook Top Tether hook = of Top Tetherbelt ? into Top Tether anchorage ;.Make sure that Top Tether belt ? is not twis-ted.

X Tension Top Tether belt ?. Always complywith the child restraint system manufactur-er's installation instructions when doing so.

X If necessary, move the head restraint : backdown again slightly (Y page 118). Make surethat you do not interfere with the correct rout-ing of Top Tether belt ?.

Child restraint system on the co-driv-er's seat

General notesAccident statistics show that children securedon the rear seats are safer than children securedon the front-passenger seat. For this reason,Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you installa child restraint system on a rear seat.Vehicles with the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system:if it is absolutely necessary to fit a child restraintsystem to the front-passenger seat, alwaysobserve the information on the "Automaticfront-passenger front airbag deactivation sys-tem" (Y page 52).

You can thus avoid the risks that could arise asa result of:Ra child restraint system that is not detected

by the automatic front-passenger front airbagdeactivation systemRunintentional disabling of the front-passenger

front airbagRunsuitable positioning of the child restraint

system, e.g. too close to the dashboard

Please observe the warning notice on thefront-passenger sun visor; see illustration.

G WARNINGIf you secure a child in a child restraint systemon the front-passenger seat and thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp isoff, the front-passenger front airbag candeploy in the event of an accident. The childcould be struck by the airbag. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Make sure that the front-passenger front air-bag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.NEVER use a rearward-facing child restrainton a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG infront of it; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to thechild can occur.

62 Children in the vehicleSa

fety

Vehicles without the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivationsystem

If the front-passenger seat of your vehicle is notequipped with the automatic front-passengerfront airbag deactivation system, this is indica-ted by a special sticker. The sticker is affixed tothe side of the dashboard on the front-passenger side. The sticker is visible when youopen the front-passenger door.If you turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF andPASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps lightup briefly. However, they have no function anddo not indicate that there is an automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system.In this case, never fit a rearward-facing childrestraint system on the front passenger seat(Y page 63).Observe the following information under "Rear-ward-facing child restraint system"(Y page 63) and "Forward-facing childrestraint system" (Y page 63) as well as infor-mation on the suitable positioning of the childrestraint system (Y page 63).

Rearward-facing child restraint systemIf it is absolutely necessary to fit a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, always make sure that thefront-passenger front airbag is disabled. Only ifthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp islit continuously (Y page 46) is the front-passenger front airbag disabled.Always observe the information on suitablepositioning of the child restraint system(Y page 63) in addition to the child restraintsystem manufacturer's installation and operat-ing instructions.

Forward-facing child restraint systemIf it is absolutely necessary to fit a forward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, always move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. Theentire base of the child restraint system mustalways rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the childrestraint system must, as far as possible, lie flatagainst the backrest of the front-passengerseat. The child restraint system must not touchthe roof or be put under strain by the headrestraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrestand the head restraint position accordingly.Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap iscorrectly routed from the vehicle belt outlet tothe shoulder belt guide on the child restraintsystem. The shoulder belt strap must be routedforwards and downwards from the vehicle beltoutlet. If necessary, adjust the vehicle belt out-let and the front-passenger seat accordingly.Always observe the information on suitablepositioning of the child restraint system(Y page 63) in addition to the child restraintsystem manufacturer's installation and operat-ing instructions.

Suitable positioning of the childrestraint system

IntroductionOnly child restraint systems which are approvedin accordance with the ECE standard ECE R44are permitted for use in the vehicle.Child restraint systems belonging to the "Uni-versal" category can be recognised by theirorange approval label and the word "Universal".

Example: approval label on the child restraint sys-tem

Children in the vehicle 63

Safe

ty

Z

"Universal" category child restraint systems canbe used on the seats indicated with U, UF or IUFaccording to the tables "Suitability of the seatsfor attaching belt-secured child restraint sys-tems" or "Suitability of the seats for attaching anISOFIX child restraint system".Semi-universal child restraint systems are indi-cated by the text "Semi-universal" on theapproval label. These can be used if the vehicleand the seat are listed in the child restraint sys-tem manufacturer's vehicle model list. For moreinformation, contact the child restraint systemmanufacturer or visit their website.Child restraint system on the co-driver's seat – if it is absolutely necessary to secure achild in a child restraint system on the co-driv-er's seat:X Always pay attention to the instructions under

"Child restraint system on the co-driver'sseat" (Y page 62).There you will find instructions on how to cor-rectly route the shoulder belt strap from the

vehicle belt sash guide to the shoulder beltguide on the child restraint system(Y page 63).

X Move the co-driver's seat as far back as pos-sible.If you secure a child in a forward-facing childrestraint system on the co-driver's seat, youmust also move the co-driver's seat to thelowest position.

X Move the backrest to an almost upright posi-tion.The base of the child restraint system must liefully on the co-driver's seat cushion. Thebackrest of a forwards-facing child restraintsystem must, as far as possible, rest on thebackrest of the co-driver's seat.The child restraint system may not touch theroof or be put under strain by the headrestraint. Adjust the angle of the seat back-rest and the head restraint position accord-ingly. Also observe the child restraint systemmanufacturer's installation instructions.

Suitability of the seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint systemsLegend for the table:X Seat that is not suitable for children of this weight category.U Suitable for child restraint systems in the "Universal" category that are approved for use in this

weight category.UF Suitable for forward-facing child restraint systems that belong to the "Universal" category and

are approved for use in this weight category.L Suitable for child restraint systems as recommended; see the table of "Recommended child

restraint systems" (Y page 66). Suitable for semi-universal child restraint systems if thevehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.

Co-driver's seat

Weight category Co-driver's front air-bag activated

Co-driver's front airbag deactivated1

0 up to 10 kg X U2, L

0+ up to 13 kg X U2, L

I 9 kg to 18 kg UF2, L U2, L

II 15 kg to 25 kg UF2, L U2, L

III 22 kg to 36 kg UF2, L U2, L

1 The vehicle is fitted with automatic co-driver front airbag deactivation. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-cator lamp must be lit.

2 In combination with a long belt buckle (police seat) not suitable for child restraint systems.

64 Children in the vehicleSa

fety

Rear seats

Weight category Rear seat Rear bench seat:

0 up to 10 kg U3 U3, L3

0+ up to 13 kg U3 U3, L3

I 9 kg to 18 kg U3, L3 U3, L3

II 15 kg to 25 kg U, L U, L

III 22 kg to 36 kg U, L U, L

Suitability of the seats for attaching an ISOFIX child restraint systemIf you use a baby car seat of category 0 or 0+ or a rearward-facing child restraint system of categoryI on a rear seat, the rear seat must be installed in the direction of travel. Adjust the rear seat and/or the front seat so that the front seat does not come into contact with the child restraint system.Legend for the table:X Seat that is not suitable for children of this weight category.IUF Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX child seat securing systems that belong to the "Universal"

category which are approved for use in this weight category.IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems as recommended; see the following table of "Rec-

ommended child restraint systems" (Y page 66).The manufacturer will also recommend a suitable ISOFIX child restraint system. For this, yourvehicle and the seat must be listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's model list. Formore information, contact the child restraint system manufacturer or visit their website.

Weight category Size cate-gories

Equipment Individualseat

Rear benchseat:

Carrycot F ISO/L1 X IL4

G ISO/L2 X IL5, 6

0 up to 10 kgup to approximately6 months

E ISO/R1 IL5, 6

0+ up to 13 kgup to approximately15 months

E ISO/R1 IL5, 6

D ISO/R2 IL5, 6

C ISO/R3 IL5, 6, 7

3 The seat must be installed in the direction of travel.4 Only in the first rear seat row on a rear bench seat.5 The seat must be installed in the direction of travel.6 A seat in the second rear seat row may only be used if there is the maximum distance between the two rear

seat rows. For this, the seat on the second rear seat row must be installed in the rearmost permitted positionand the seat in front of it on the first rear seat row must be installed in the foremost permitted position. If youuse the middle seat on the second rear seat row, all the seats on the first rear seat row must be in the foremostpermitted position.

7 If you are using a child restraint system of size category C (ISO/R3), make sure that the backrest of the frontseat does not rest against the child restraint system. If possible, move the front seat to the highest positionand the front-seat backrest to an upright position.

Children in the vehicle 65

Safe

ty

Z

Weight category Size cate-gories

Equipment Individualseat

Rear benchseat:

I 9 to 18 kgbetween approximately9 months and 4 years

D ISO/R2 IL5, 6

C ISO/R3 IL5, 6, 7

B ISO/F2 IUF

B1 ISO/F2X IUF

A ISO/F3 IUF

The child restraint system must not touch the roof or be subjected to a load by the head restraint.If possible, adjust the angle of the seat backrest and the head restraint position accordingly. Alsoobserve the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.

Recommended child restraint systems

General notesAlways observe the information on "Child restraint systems on the co-driver's seat" (Y page 62) andon "Suitable positioning of the child restraint system" (Y page 63).You can obtain further information about the correct child restraint system from any Mercedes-BenzService Centre.

Recommended child restraint systems for securing with vehicle seat belts

Weight categories Manufac-turer

Type Approval number (E1 ...)

Order number(A 000 ...)8

Category 0:up to 10 kgup to approximately6 months

Britax Römer BABY SAFEplus II

04 301146 970 36 00970 57 00

Category 0+:up to 13 kgup to approximately15 months

Britax Römer BABY SAFEplus II

04 301146 970 36 00970 57 00

5 The seat must be installed in the direction of travel.6 A seat in the second rear seat row may only be used if there is the maximum distance between the two rear

seat rows. For this, the seat on the second rear seat row must be installed in the rearmost permitted positionand the seat in front of it on the first rear seat row must be installed in the foremost permitted position. If youuse the middle seat on the second rear seat row, all the seats on the first rear seat row must be in the foremostpermitted position.

7 If you are using a child restraint system of size category C (ISO/R3), make sure that the backrest of the frontseat does not rest against the child restraint system. If possible, move the front seat to the highest positionand the front-seat backrest to an upright position.

8 Colour code 9H95

66 Children in the vehicleSa

fety

Weight categories Manufac-turer

Type Approval number (E1 ...)

Order number(A 000 ...)8

Category I:9 kg to 18 kgbetween approx-imately 9 months and4 years

Britax Römer DUO plus 04 301133 970 37 00970 58 00

Category II/III:15 kg to 36 kgbetween approx-imately 4 years and12 years

Britax Römer KIDFIX 04 301198 970 38 00970 59 00

Britax Römer KIDFIX XP 04 301304 970 61 00

Suggested "Universal"/"Semi-Universal" category ISOFIX child restraint systems

Weight cate-gories

Size cat-egories

Manufac-turer

Type Approval number(E1 ...)

Order number8

Category 0+:up to 13 kg

E Britax Römer BABY-SAFEplus

04 301146 B6 6 86 8224

Category I:9 kg to 18 kg

B1 Britax Römer DUO plus 04 301133 A 000 970 37 00A 000 970 58 00

Child-proof locks

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are travelling in the vehicle, theycould:Ropen doors, thus endangering other people

or road usersRexit the vehicle and be caught by oncoming

trafficRoperate vehicle equipment and become

trapped, for exampleThere is a risk of an accident and injury.Always activate the child-proof locks andoverride feature if children are travelling in thevehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always takethe key with you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unattended in the vehicle.

Child-proof locks for:RSliding doors (Y page 68)RElectric hinged windows in the rear compart-

ment (Y page 68)

G WARNINGIf you leave children unattended in the vehi-cle, they may be able to set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brakeRshift the automatic transmission out of park

position P or shift manual transmission intoneutralRstart the engineIn addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take the keywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leavechildren unattended in the vehicle.

8 Colour code 9H95

Children in the vehicle 67

Safe

ty

Z

G WARNINGIf persons (particularly children) are exposedto heat or cold for a prolonged period, there isa risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Neverleave persons (particularly children) unatten-ded in the vehicle.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is placed in directsunlight, the parts could become very hot.Children could be suffer burns by touchingthese parts, in particular on the metallic partsof the child restraint system. There is a risk ofinjury.If you and your child leave the vehicle, alwaysmake sure that the child restraint system isnot in direct sunlight. Cover it with a blanket,for example. If the child restraint system hasbeen exposed to direct sunlight, leave it tocool down before securing the child in it.Never leave children unattended in the vehi-cle.

Child-proof locks for sliding door

Sliding door (example: left side of the vehicle): Child safety bolt2 Sliding door released3 Sliding door secured – then make sure that

the child-proof locks are working properly.You can secure each sliding door individuallywith the child-proof locks on the sliding doors.With the exception of the electric sliding door, asecured sliding door cannot be opened from theinside. When the vehicle is unlocked, the slidingdoor can be opened from the outside. If theelectric sliding door is secured, only the sliding

door rear controls are deactivated. You canopen the electric sliding door at any time usingthe corresponding Å or Æ sliding doorbutton in the centre console (Y page 84).

Child-proof locks for hinged windows

X To activate/deactivate: press button :.If the indicator lamp on the button is lit, oper-ation of the rear-compartment electricalhinged windows is disabled. Operation is thenonly possible using the buttons in the driver'sdoor.

Pets in the vehicle

G WARNINGIf you leave animals unsupervised or unse-cured in the vehicle, they may push a buttonor a switch, for example.They could:Ractivate vehicle equipment and become

trapped, for exampleRswitch vehicle systems on or off, thus

endangering other road usersIn the event of an accident, sudden braking orabrupt changes of direction, unsecured ani-mals could be flung around the vehicle, injur-ing the vehicle occupants. There is a risk of anaccident and injury.Never leave animals unattended in the vehi-cle. Always secure animals correctly during ajourney, e.g. in an animal transport box.

68 Pets in the vehicleSa

fety

Driving safety systems

OverviewThis section contains information on the follow-ing driving safety systems:REBD (Electronic Brake Force Distribution)RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)RBAS (Brake Assist System)RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)RAdaptive brake lights

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style or if you areinattentive, the driving safety systems can nei-ther reduce the risk of an accident nor overridethe laws of physics. Driving safety systems aremerely aids designed to assist driving. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed, braking in good timeand for staying in your lane. Always adapt yourdriving style to the prevailing road and weatherconditions and maintain a sufficient, safe dis-tance from other road users. Drive carefully.Please note that the driving safety systemsdescribed only work optimally when:Rthere is adequate contact between the tyres

and the road surfaceRyou use winter tyres (M+S tyres), with snow

chains if necessary, when the road conditionsare wintryRthe speed information determined by the

vehicle is within the legally prescribed displayaccuracy

Pay particular attention to the informationregarding tyres, coding of the wheel size groups,tyre tread and winter operation under "Wheelsand tyres" (Y page 365).

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

General notesABS controls the braking pressure so that thewheels do not lock when braking. This maintainsthe steerability of your vehicle while braking.The ! warning lamp in the instrument clusterlights up when the ignition is switched on. Thelamp goes out when the engine starts running.

Important safety notesObserve the important safety guidelines for thedriving safety system (Y page 69).ABS works from a speed of about 8 km/hupwards, regardless of road surface conditions.On a slippery road surface, ABS intervenes evenif you only brake gently.

G WARNINGIf ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock whenbraking. The steerability and braking charac-teristics may be severely impaired. Addition-ally, further driving safety systems are deac-tivated. There is an increased danger of skid-ding and accidents.Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme-diately at a qualified specialist workshop.

If ABS is malfunctioning, the ! warning lamp(Y page 286) lights up while the engine is run-ning and the display shows a message(Y page 261). BAS, Hill Start Assist and ESP ®and its driving safety systems and other drivingsystems also fail. Observe the notes on the !warning lamp and the display messages.

BrakingIf ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel apulsating in the brake pedal.The pulsating brake pedal can be an indicationof hazardous road conditions and functions as areminder to take extra care while driving.X If ABS intervenes: keep the brake pedal

firmly depressed until the braking situationhas passed.

X To make a full brake application: depressthe brake pedal with full force.

BAS (Brake Assist)

General notesBrake Assist operates in emergency braking sit-uations. If you depress the brake pedal quickly,BAS automatically boosts the braking force,thus shortening the stopping distance.

Driving safety systems 69

Safe

ty

Z

Important safety notesObserve the important safety guidelines for thedriving safety system (Y page 69).

G WARNINGIf BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distancein an emergency braking situation isincreased. There is a risk of accident.In an emergency braking situation, depressthe brake pedal with full force. ABS preventsthe wheels from locking.

If BAS is malfunctioning, the ÷ warning lamplights up while the engine is running(Y page 287) and the display shows a message(Y page 265).

BrakingX Keep the brake pedal depressed firmly until

the emergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents any of the wheels from locking.

When you release the brake pedal, the brakesfunction as usual again. BAS is deactivated.

EBD (electronic brake force distribu-tion)

General notesEBD monitors and controls the brake pressureto the rear wheels. This enables EBD to improvehandling during braking.

Important safety notesObserve the important safety guidelines for thedriving safety system (Y page 69).

G WARNINGIf EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels canlock, e.g. under full braking. This increases therisk of skidding and an accident.You should therefore adapt your driving styleto the different handling characteristics. Havethe brake system checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

If EBD is malfunctioning, the J warning lamp(Y page 285) lights up while the engine is run-ning and the display shows a message

(Y page 265). Other driving systems and drivingsafety systems then also fail.

ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

General notesESP® monitors driving stability and detectsundersteering or oversteering (skidding) in goodtime. If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviat-ing from the direction desired by the driver, oneor more wheels are braked to stabilise the vehi-cle. The engine output is also modified to keepthe vehicle on the desired course within physicallimits. ESP® can also stabilise the vehicle duringbraking.ESP® also monitors traction, i.e. power trans-mission between the tyres and the road surface.The integrated traction control supports youwhen pulling away or accelerating on wet, slip-pery or slick roads. Should the drive wheels spin,traction control brakes them individually. Inaddition, greater drive torque is transmitted tothe wheel or wheels with traction. If traction onthe road surface is not sufficient, even ESP® willnot allow you to pull away without difficulty. Thetype of tyres and total weight of the vehicle aswell as the gradient of the road also play a cru-cial role. Traction control remains active if youdeactivate ESP®.If the h warning lamp in the instrument clus-ter goes out before beginning the journey, ESP®

is automatically active.The h warning lamp in the instrument clusterflashes when ESP® intervenes:X Do not deactivate ESP® under any circum-

stances.X when pulling away, only depress the acceler-

ator pedal as far as requiredX Adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing

road and weather conditions.

Important safety notesObserve the important safety guidelines for thedriving safety system (Y page 69).

G WARNINGIf ESP® is malfunctioning it will not provideany vehicle stabilisation. There is anincreased risk of skidding or of an accident.

70 Driving safety systemsSa

fety

Exercise caution when continuing to drive.Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

! Do not operate the vehicle on a roller dyna-mometer (e.g. for performance testing). If youhave to operate the vehicle on a roller dyna-mometer, please consult a specialist work-shop beforehand. You could otherwise dam-age the drivetrain or the brake system.

If ESP® is malfunctioning, the h warninglamp (Y page 287) lights up continuously whilethe engine is running and the display shows amessage (Y page 265).ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lamp inthe instrument cluster is lit when the engine isrunning.Use only wheels with the recommended tyresizes. Only then will ESP® function properly.

Deactivating or activating ESP®

G WARNINGIf you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta-bilises the vehicle. There is an increased riskof skidding and an accident.Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri-bed in the following.

It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the follow-ing situations:Rif snow chains are being usedRin deep snowRon sand or gravelActivate ESP® as soon as the situations descri-bed above no longer apply. Otherwise, ESP®

assistance for stabilising the vehicle will remainsignificantly reduced, even if the vehicle startsto skid.If you deactivate ESP®:Rthe å warning lamp in the instrument clus-

ter lights upRthe ÷ warning lamp in the instrument clus-

ter flashes if the wheels are spinningRESP® assistance for stabilising the vehicle in

the lower speed range up to approximately60 km/h is significantly reducedRengine torque is no longer limited and the

drive wheels are able to spin. The spinning of

the wheels results in a cutting action for bet-ter traction on loose surfacesRtraction control is still activatedRESP® still provides support when you brake.You can activate or deactivate ESP® via the on-board computer when the engine is running(Y page 256).

Trailer stabilisationObserve the important safety guidelines for thedriving safety system (Y page 69).

G WARNINGIf road and weather conditions are poor,trailer stabilisation will not be able to preventthe vehicle/trailer combination from swerv-ing. Trailers with a high centre of gravity cantip over before ESP® can detect this. There isa risk of an accident.Always adapt your driving style to the prevail-ing road and weather conditions.

ESP® trailer stabilisation counteracts criticaldriving situations in good time and thereby pro-vides considerable assistance when driving witha trailer. Trailer stabilisation is part of ESP®.If the sensor system and evaluation logic detecttrailer swinging movements, ESP® trailer stabi-lisation firstly brakes individual vehicle wheels ina targeted manner. It thus counteracts swingingmovements. If the swinging movements do notstop, the vehicle is braked until the vehicle/trailer combination is stabilised. If necessary,the vehicle's engine output is limited.If your vehicle with trailer (vehicle/trailer com-bination) starts to swerve, you will be able tostabilise the vehicle/trailer combination only bybraking. ESP® trailer stabilisation helps you tostabilise the vehicle/trailer combination in thissituation.ESP® trailer stabilisation is active above speedsof about 65 km/h.If ESP® is switched off or deactivated because ofa malfunction, the trailer stabilisation systemwill not function.

Driving safety systems 71

Safe

ty

Z

Crosswind AssistObserve the important safety guidelines for thedriving safety system (Y page 69).Strong crosswind gusts can impair the road-holding of your vehicle when driving straightahead. The Crosswind Assist function integra-ted in ESP® reduces these impairments.Depending on the direction and intensity of theside wind, Crosswind Assist intervenes auto-matically. ESP® intervenes with stabilising brak-ing to assist you in keeping the vehicle in thelane. When Crosswind Assist intervenes, thedisplay shows the traffic sign for strong sidewinds and the Crosswind Assist message.Crosswind Assist is activated automaticallyabove a speed of approximately 80 km/h whendriving straight ahead or cornering gently.Crosswind Assist does not react:Rin the event of severe jolts and vibrations, e.g.

when driving over uneven surfaces or pot-holesRwhen grip is reduced, e.g. on snow or ice or

when aquaplaningCrosswind Assist does not work if ESP® is deac-tivated or disabled because of a malfunction.

Adaptive brake lightsIn an emergency braking situation, the adaptivebrake lights warn following traffic:Rby flashing brake lampsRthe hazard warning lamps are activatedIf you brake sharply from a speed of more than50 km/h or if braking is assisted by BAS, thebrake lamps flash rapidly.If you brake sharply from a speed of more than70 km/h to a standstill, the hazard warninglamps are activated automatically. The brakelamps light up again constantly when youdepress the brake pedal. The hazard warninglamps switch off automatically if you travelfaster than 10 km/h. You can also switch off thehazard warning lamps with the hazard warninglamp button (Y page 128).

Anti-theft systems

ImmobiliserX To activate: remove the key from the ignition

lock.X To deactivate: turn the key to position 2 in

the ignition lock.The immobiliser prevents your vehicle frombeing started without the correct key.Always take the key with you and lock the vehi-cle when leaving the vehicle. If you leave the keyin the vehicle, anyone can start the engine.

i Starting the engine always deactivates theimmobiliser.

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

X To prime: lock the vehicle with the key.Indicator lamp : in the overhead controlpanel flashes.

X To deactivate: unlock the vehicle with thekey.

orX Insert the key into the ignition lock.If the alarm system is primed, a visual and audi-ble alarm is triggered when the following areopened:Ra doorRthe vehicle with the emergency key elementRthe tailgateRthe bonnetX To stop the alarm: press the % or &

button on the key.orX Insert the key into the ignition lock.

The alarm stops.

72 Anti-theft systemsSa

fety

The alarm is not switched off, even if you imme-diately close the open door that had triggered it,for example.

Tow-away protection

FunctionA visual and audible alarm is triggered if theinclination of the vehicle changes when tow-away protection is primed. This can be the caseif the vehicle is raised on one side, for example.

ActivatingX Make sure that:Rthe doors are closedRthe tailgate is closedOnly then is the tow-away protection primed.

X Lock the vehicle with the key.Tow-away protection is primed after approx-imately 50 seconds.

Switching offX Unlock the vehicle with the key.orX Insert the key into the ignition lock.

Tow-away protection is switched off automat-ically.

Deactivating

X Remove the key from the ignition lock.X Press button :.

When the button is released, the indicatorlamp in the button lights up for about threeseconds.

X Lock the vehicle.Tow-away protection is deactivated.

Tow-away protection remains deactivated untilyou lock the vehicle again.Deactivate tow-away protection when lockingyour vehicle and:Rloading and/or transporting the vehicle, on a

ferry or car transporter, for exampleRparking on a movable surface, such as split-

level garageThis will prevent false alarms.

Interior motion sensor

FunctionIf the primed interior motion sensor detectsmotion in the vehicle interior, a visual and acous-tic alarm is triggered. This can happen if some-one reaches into the vehicle interior, for exam-ple.

ActivatingX Make sure that:Rthe side windows are closedRthere are no objects, e.g. mascots, hanging

on the rear-view mirror or on the grab han-dles on the roof trim.

This will prevent false alarms.X Make sure that:Rthe doors are closedRthe tailgate is closedOnly then is the interior motion sensorprimed.

X Lock the vehicle with the key.The interior motion sensor is primed afterapproximately 20 seconds.

Switching offX Unlock the vehicle with the key.orX Insert the key into the ignition lock.

The interior motion sensor automaticallyswitches off.

Anti-theft systems 73

Safe

ty

Z

Deactivating

X Remove the key from the ignition lock.X Press button :.

When the button is released, the indicatorlamp in the button lights up for about threeseconds.

X Lock the vehicle.The interior motion sensor is deactivated.

The interior motion sensor remains deactivateduntil you lock the vehicle again.Deactivate the interior motion sensor whenlocking your vehicle:Rwith people or animals remaining insideRwhen transporting it on a ferry or car trans-

porter, for exampleThis will prevent false alarms.

74 Anti-theft systemsSa

fety

Useful information

These Operating Instructions describe all mod-els as well as standard and optional equipmentof your vehicle that were available at the time ofgoing to print. Country-specific variations arepossible. Note that your vehicle may not be fit-ted with all of the described functions. This alsoapplies to safety-relevant systems and func-tions.Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops: (Y page 31).

Key

Important safety notesUnited Kingdom only:

G WARNINGWhen the double locks are activated, thedoors can no longer be opened from theinside. People in the vehicle can no longer getout, e.g. in hazardous situations. There is arisk of injury.Therefore, do not leave any people unsuper-vised in the vehicle, particularly children, eld-erly people or people in need of special assis-tance. Do not activate the double lock whenpeople are in the vehicle.

If the vehicle has been locked from the outside,the double-lock function is activated as stand-ard. It is then not possible to open the doorsfrom inside the vehicle. You can deactivate thedouble lock function by deactivating the interiormotion sensor (Y page 74). The doors can thenbe opened from the inside after the vehicle hasbeen locked from the outside. The anti-theftalarm system is triggered if a door is openedfrom the inside. Switch off the alarm(Y page 72).All countries:

G WARNINGIf you leave children unattended in the vehi-cle, they may be able to set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brakeRshift the automatic transmission out of park

position P or shift manual transmission intoneutralRstart the engineIn addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take the keywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leavechildren unattended in the vehicle.

G WARNINGIf you attach heavy or large objects to the key,the key could be unintentionally turned in theignition lock. This could cause the engine tobe switched off. There is a risk of an accident.Do not attach any heavy or large objects to thekey. Remove any bulky keyrings before insert-ing the key into the ignition lock.

! Keep the key away from strong magneticfields. Otherwise, the remote control functioncould be affected.Strong magnetic fields can occur in the vicin-ity of powerful electrical installations.

Do not keep the key:Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone

or another keyRwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foilRin metallic objects, e.g. metal casesThis can affect the key's functionality.

Key 75

Open

ing

and

clos

ing

Z

Key functions

Key (example: vehicles with an EASY-PACK tailgateand/or rear window which can be opened sepa-rately): Battery check lamp; q To open or close the EASY-PACK tail-

gate or unlock the rear window which can beopened separately

= & To lock the vehicle centrally? 5 To unlock the EASY-PACK tailgate and

sliding doors or to unlock and open or closethe electric sliding door

A Emergency key elementB % To unlock the vehicle centrally or

unlock the front door(s) onlyThe vehicle's equipment includes two keys.There is an emergency key element in each key.The key can be used to unlock the vehicle froma distance. To prevent theft, only use the key inthe immediate vicinity of the vehicle.Change the batteries immediately if batterycheck lamp : does not light up briefly withevery press of a button (Y page 78).X To unlock centrally: press the % button.

The turn signals flash once.X To unlock the sliding doors and the tail-

gate only: press the 5 button.The turn signals flash once.

If you do not open the vehicle within approx-imately 40 seconds of unlocking:Rthe vehicle is locked againRthe anti-theft protection is primed againX To lock centrally: press the & button.

The turn signals flash three times if:

Rthe anti-theft protection is primedRall the doors and the tailgate are closed

X Check the locking knobs on all the doors.The locking knobs must all be in the loweredposition.

The key's factory setting enables you to cen-trally lock and unlock the following:Rthe driver's and the co-driver's doorRthe sliding doorsRthe tailgateIn an emergency, the driver's door can also beunlocked manually using the emergency keyelement (Y page 77).You can also set an audible signal to confirmthat the vehicle has been locked. The audiblesignal can be activated and deactivated via themultimedia system. Information on activatingand deactivating the audible locking-verificationsignal can be found in the separate operatinginstructions.When the surround lighting is activated in themultimedia system, it comes on when it is darkafter the vehicle is unlocked using the remotecontrol. Information on activating and deacti-vating the surround lighting can be found in theseparate operating instructions.X To open or close the EASY-PACK tailgate

automatically from the outside: press theq button until the tailgate opens or closes.

Changing the settings of the lockingsystem

If you predominantly travel alone, you may wishto change the settings of the locking system.Press the % button to unlock the driver'sdoor.X To change the setting: press and hold down

the % and & buttons simultaneouslyuntil the battery check lamp flashes twice(Y page 76).

If the setting of the locking system is changedwithin the signal range of the vehicle, press the& or % button to:Rlock orRunlock the vehicle

76 KeyOp

enin

g an

d cl

osin

g

The key now functions as follows:X To unlock the driver's door: press the %

button once.X To unlock centrally: briefly press the %

button twice.X To lock centrally: press the & button.X To restore factory settings: press and hold

down the % and & buttons simultane-ously until the battery check lamp flashestwice (Y page 76).The key unlocks the vehicle centrally again.

Emergency key element

General notesIf the vehicle can no longer be locked orunlocked with the key, use the emergency keyelement.The anti-theft alarm system (ATA) is triggeredwhen you unlock and open the vehicle using theemergency key element (Y page 72).The alarm can be stopped in the following twoways:X Press the % or & button on the key.orX Insert the key into the ignition lock.

Removing the emergency key element

X Slide release catch : in the direction of thearrow and, at the same time, remove emer-gency key element ; from the key com-pletely.

Inserting the emergency key elementX Push emergency key element ; completely

into the key until it engages and releasecatch : is back in its basic position.

Locking/unlocking the vehicle usingthe emergency key elementThe door lock for unlocking in an emergency ison the driver's door.X To unlock the driver's door: insert the emer-

gency key element fully into the driver's doorlock and turn it anti-clockwise.The driver's door is unlocked.

X To lock the vehicle: lock all doors except thedriver's door from the inside. To do this, pushdown the door-locking knobs.

X Insert the emergency key element fully intothe driver's door lock and turn it clockwise.On right-hand-drive vehicles, turn the emer-gency key element anti-clockwise.The driver's door is locked.

Battery of the key

Important safety notes

G WARNINGBatteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result insevere health problems. There is a risk of fatalinjury.Keep batteries out of the reach of children. Ifa battery is swallowed, seek medical attentionimmediately.

H Environmental noteBatteries contain pollutants.It is illegal to dispose of themwith the household rubbish.They must be collected sep-arately and disposed of in anenvironmentally responsiblerecycling system.Dispose of batteries in anenvironmentally responsiblemanner. Take discharged

Key 77

Open

ing

and

clos

ing

Z

batteries to a qualified spe-cialist workshop or to a col-lection point for used batter-ies.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have thebattery changed at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Checking the battery

X Press the & or % button.If battery check lamp : lights up briefly, thebattery is sufficiently charged.If battery check lamp : does not light upbriefly, the battery is empty.

X Change the battery (Y page 78).If the key battery is checked within the signalrange of the vehicle, pressing the & or %button results in:Rlocking orRunlocking the vehicle

i The battery may be obtained at any qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Changing the batteryYou need a type CR 2025 3 V cell battery.X Pull out the emergency key element from the

key (Y page 77).

X Push emergency key element ; into theopening in the key in the direction of the arrowuntil battery compartment cover : opens.When doing so, do not hold battery compart-ment cover : shut.

X Remove battery compartment cover :.

X Tap the key against the palm of your hand sothat battery = falls out of the battery com-partment.

X Insert the new battery into the battery traywith the positive pole facing upwards. Use alint-free cloth to do so.

X Fit battery compartment cover : to the keycasing with the front lugs first and pushclosed.

X Slide emergency key element ; back intothe key (Y page 77).

X Check the function of all key buttons on thevehicle.

78 KeyOp

enin

g an

d cl

osin

g

Problems with the key

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

It is no longer possible tolock the vehicle usingthe key.The turn signals do notflash when the vehicle islocked.

The doors are not closed properly.X Close the doors properly and lock the vehicle again.

The central locking system has malfunctioned.X Lock the vehicle using the emergency key element (Y page 77) or

press down the locking knob and then close the doors.X Have the central locking system checked as soon as possible at a

qualified specialist workshop.

It is no longer possible tolock or unlock the vehi-cle using the key.

The key battery is weak or discharged.X Point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle from very close

range and press the % or & button.If this does not work:X Replace the key battery (Y page 78).orX Lock or unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element

(Y page 77).

The key is faulty.X Lock the vehicle with the emergency key element (Y page 77).X Have the key checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine cannot bestarted using the key.

The on-board voltage is too low.X Switch off all non-essential consumers, such as interior lighting, and

try to start the engine again.If this does not work:X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 349).orX Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 358).orX Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

You have lost a key. X Have the key deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the mechanical locks replaced.

You have lost the emer-gency key element.

X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the mechanical locks replaced.

Central locking

Important safety notesUnited Kingdom only:

G WARNINGWhen the double locks are activated, thedoors can no longer be opened from theinside. People in the vehicle can no longer get

Central locking 79

Open

ing

and

clos

ing

Z

out, e.g. in hazardous situations. There is arisk of injury.Therefore, do not leave any people unsuper-vised in the vehicle, particularly children, eld-erly people or people in need of special assis-tance. Do not activate the double lock whenpeople are in the vehicle.

If the vehicle has been locked from the outside,the double-lock function is activated as stand-ard. It is then not possible to open the doorsfrom inside the vehicle. The doors can beopened from the inside after the vehicle hasbeen locked from the outside. The anti-theftalarm system is triggered if a door is openedfrom the inside. Switch off the alarm(Y page 72).All countries:

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen doors, thereby endangering other per-

sons or road usersRget out and be struck by oncoming trafficRoperate vehicle equipment and become

trapped, for exampleIn addition, the children could also set thevehicle in motion, for example, if they:Rrelease the parking brakeRshift the automatic transmission out of park

position P or shift manual transmission intoneutralRstart the engineThere is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take the keywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leavechildren and animals unattended in the vehi-cle. Keep the keys out of the reach of children.

G WARNINGIf persons (particularly children) are exposedto heat or cold for a prolonged period, there isa risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Neverleave persons (particularly children) unatten-ded in the vehicle.

For all countries except the United Kingdom:You can open a locked door from the inside atany time. For the sliding doors, the child-prooflocks must be deactivated.

Centrally locking and unlocking thevehicle from the inside

You can centrally lock and unlock the wholevehicle from the inside using the central lockingbuttons on the driver's door.

Central locking buttons (vehicles with manuallyadjustable front seats)

Central locking buttons (vehicles with electricallyadjustable front seats)X To unlock: press the % button.X To lock: press the & button.

If the driver's or co-driver's door is open, theopen door is not locked.All other doors and the tailgate are locked.If a sliding door or the tailgate is open, only thedriver's and co-driver's doors are locked.

You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from theinside if the vehicle has been locked with thekey.If the vehicle has been locked using the lockingbutton for the central locking and a door is

80 Central lockingOp

enin

g an

d cl

osin

g

opened from the inside, only the door that hasbeen opened is unlocked.For all countries except the United Kingdom:If the vehicle has previously been locked withthe key, opening a door from the inside will trig-ger the anti-theft alarm system. Switch off thealarm (Y page 72).

Automatic locking feature

Central locking buttons (vehicles with manuallyadjustable front seats)

Central locking buttons (vehicles with electricallyadjustable front seats)X To switch on: press and hold the % button

until an acoustic tone sounds.X To switch on: press and hold the & button

until an acoustic tone sounds.When the ignition is switched on, your vehiclewill lock automatically from a speed of approx-imately 15 km/h.You could therefore be locked out if:Rthe vehicle is being pushed.Rthe vehicle is being towed.Rthe vehicle is being tested on a dynamometer.

If the vehicle has been automatically locked anda front door is opened from the interior while thevehicle is stationary, the vehicle unlocks cen-trally.

i You can also switch the automatic lockingfunction on and off using the multimedia sys-tem (see the separate operating instructions).

Driver's door and co-driver's door

United Kingdom only: if the vehicle has beenlocked with the key, the double lock function isactivated as standard. It is then not possible toopen the doors from inside the vehicle. You candeactivate the double lock function by deacti-vating the interior motion sensor (Y page 74).The doors can then be opened from the insideafter the vehicle has been locked from the out-side. You can then only open the sliding doorsfrom inside the vehicle if they are not secured bythe child-proof locks (Y page 68). The anti-theftalarm system is triggered if a door is openedfrom the inside. Switch off the alarm(Y page 73).For all countries except the United Kingdom:You can open the driver's or co-driver's doorfrom the inside at any time, even if it is locked. Ifthe vehicle has previously been locked with thekey, opening a door from the inside will triggerthe anti-theft alarm system. Switch off the alarm(Y page 73).

Door handle (example driver's door)You can open the driver's or co-driver's doorfrom the inside at any time, even if it is locked.X Pull door handle ;.

If a front door is locked, locking knob : popsup. The door is unlocked and opens.

Driver's door and co-driver's door 81

Open

ing

and

clos

ing

Z

Sliding door

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen you open the sliding door, the slidingdoor could hit other people as it moves back-wards. There is a risk of injury.Only open the sliding door when traffic con-ditions permit.

G WARNINGIf the open sliding door is not engaged, it couldmove on its own if the vehicle is on a slope.This could trap you or other persons. There isa risk of injury.Always make sure that the open sliding door isengaged.

! Do not use the lower guide on the slidingdoor (carriage) as a step. You could otherwisedamage its trim and/or the mechanism of thesliding door

Opening and closing from the outside

The sliding door is equipped with an activeretainer, which engages the door at the end stopwhen opened.X To open: pull door handle : in the direction

of the arrow.The sliding door opens.

X Push back the sliding door using door han-dle : until it engages.

X Check the sliding door detent.

X To close: pull door handle : in the directionof the arrow.The sliding door is released from its detent.

X Push the sliding door forwards using doorhandle : and close.

Opening and closing from the inside

The sliding door is equipped with an activeretainer, which engages the door at the end stopwhen opened.X To open: pull back rocker switch :.

If the door is locked, locking knob = pops up.The sliding door unlocks and opens.

X Push back the sliding door using door han-dle ; until it engages

X Check the sliding door detent.X To close: press rocker switch : forwards.

The sliding door is released from its detent.X Push the sliding door forwards using door

handle ; and close.

Electric sliding door

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen you open the sliding door, the slidingdoor could hit other people as it moves back-wards. There is a risk of injury.Only open the sliding door when traffic con-ditions permit.

! Do not use the lower guide on the slidingdoor (carriage) as a step. You could otherwisedamage its trim and/or the mechanism of thesliding door

82 Electric sliding doorOp

enin

g an

d cl

osin

g

You must reset the electric sliding door if therehas been a malfunction or an interruption in thevoltage supply (Y page 85).

Obstacle detection with reversingfunction

The sliding door is equipped with automaticobstacle detection with reversing feature. If asolid object blocks or restricts the sliding doorduring the automatic closing process, the slid-ing door opens again automatically. If the slidingdoor is obstructed during the opening proce-dure, it moves back a few centimetres in theopposite direction and stops.Automatic obstacle detection with reversingfeature is only an aid. It is not a substitute foryour attentiveness when closing the electricalsliding door.If an obstacle is detected, the display shows theLeft-hand electric sliding door Obstruction detected message for example,and five warning tones sound.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-

gersRover the last 8 mm of the closing movementThe reversing feature therefore cannot pre-vent someone being trapped in these situa-tions. There is a risk of injury.When closing, make sure that no-one has anyparts of the body within the closing area.If someone is trapped:Rpress the 5 button on the key orRpull the exterior door handle orRpress the respective sliding door button in

the centre console orRpress the button on the door frame orRpull the rocker switch on the door handle

Opening/closing from the outside

The sliding door is equipped with an activeretainer, which engages the door at the end stopwhen opened.If the vehicle is fitted with two sliding doors; the5 button on the key can only be used to openor close one of the two sliding doors(Y page 85).X To open: pull door handle : in the direction

of the arrow.orX Press the 5 button on the key for longer

than 0.5 seconds.The sliding door unlocks, automatic operationis started and the sliding door opens. In addi-tion, you will hear two warning signals.

X To close: pull door handle : in the directionof the arrow.

orX Press the 5 button on the key for longer

than 0.5 seconds.The sliding door is released from its lock andautomatic operation is started. The slidingdoor closes.If you press the 5 button on the key, youwill hear two warning signals while the doorsclose.

X To interrupt automatic operation: pull doorhandle : again.

orX Press the 5 button on the key again.

i In unfavourable operating conditions, e.g.frost, ice or heavy soiling, you can press andhold the relevant sliding door button. Theelectric sliding door moves with increasedforce. Observe that, in such circumstances,the obstacle detection is less sensitive. To

Electric sliding door 83

Open

ing

and

clos

ing

Z

stop the movement, release the sliding doorbutton.

Opening/closing from the insideYou can open and close the sliding door from theinside with these controls:Rthe Å or Æ sliding door button in the

front on the lower centre consoleRthe sliding door button on the B-pillar next to

the door sillRthe rocker switch on the door handle

: Sliding door button for the sliding door onthe left-hand side

; Sliding door button for the sliding door onthe right-hand side

= Rocker switch? Locking knobA Sliding door button in the door frameYou can only open a sliding door with slidingdoor button A in the door sill or with rockerswitch = on the door handle if the child-prooflock has not been activated.The sliding door is equipped with an activeretainer, which engages the door at the end stopwhen opened.

X To open: briefly press the respective Å orÆ sliding door button in the centre con-sole.

orX Briefly press sliding door button A in the

door frame.orX Briefly pull back rocker switch =.

If the door is locked, locking knob ? pops up.The sliding door unlocks, automatic operationis started and the sliding door opens.If you use the Å or Æ sliding door but-ton in the centre console you will hear twowarning signals during the opening proce-dure.The indicator lamp in the Å or Æ slidingdoor button in the centre console flashes forthe duration of automatic operation.The indicator lamp in the Å or Æ slidingdoor button in the centre console is lit when-ever the respective sliding door is open.Depending on the vehicle equipment, the dis-play can also show the Sliding door openmessage.

X To close: briefly press the respective Å orÆ sliding door button in the centre con-sole.

orX Briefly press sliding door button A in the

door frame.orX Briefly press rocker switch = forwards.

The sliding door is released from its lock andautomatic operation is started. The slidingdoor closes.If you use the Å or Æ sliding door but-ton in the centre console you will hear twowarning signals during the opening proce-dure.The indicator lamp in the respective Å orÆ sliding door button in the centre consolegoes out whenever the sliding door is closed.

X To interrupt automatic operation: pressthe respective Å or Æ sliding door but-ton in the centre console again.

orX Press sliding door button in the door frameA.

orX Briefly pull back rocker switch =.

84 Electric sliding doorOp

enin

g an

d cl

osin

g

i In unfavourable operating conditions, e.g.frost, ice or heavy soiling, you can press andhold the relevant sliding door button. Theelectric sliding door moves with increasedforce. Observe that, in such circumstances,the obstacle detection is less sensitive. Tostop the movement, release the sliding doorbutton.

Programming the key button for thesliding door

If the vehicle is fitted with two electric slidingdoors, the 5 sliding door button on the keycan only be programmed for one of the two slid-ing doors. You can then open or close the selec-ted sliding door with the 5 button on the key.

: Sliding door button for sliding door on theleft-hand side

; Sliding door button for sliding door on theright-hand side

X Make sure that the sliding door to be pro-grammed is open.

X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.X Press and hold the Å or Æ sliding door

button in the centre console for the appropri-ate sliding door until the sliding door is closedand five tones have sounded.The display shows the Left-hand elec‐tric sliding door key programmed/Right-hand electric sliding door key programmed message.

Resetting the sliding doorYou must reset the sliding door if there has beena malfunction or an interruption in the voltagesupply.X If the sliding door is open: close it by hand.X Using the Å or Æ sliding door button on

the centre console, open the sliding door atleast 40 cm and then close the sliding doorcompletely.

X When the sliding door is closed, open the slid-ing door fully using the Å or Æ slidingdoor button on the centre console.The sliding door is reset and operational.

X Close the sliding door if required.

Problems with the sliding doorThe electric sliding door is locked in place.Unfavourable operating conditions, e.g. frost,ice or heavy soiling, may obstruct the slidingdoor.X Press and hold the sliding door button until

the sliding door has opened or closed.The sliding door moves with increased force.Observe that, in such circumstances, theobstacle detection is less sensitive. To stopthe movement, release the sliding door but-ton.

X Remove the cause of the blockage at the ear-liest opportunity.

Tailgate

Important safety notes

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgateis open when the engine is running, particu-larly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumescould enter the passenger compartment.There is a risk of poisoning.Turn off the engine before opening the tail-gate. Never drive with the tailgate open.

! When opening, the tailgate swings up andout. Therefore, make sure that there is suffi-

Tailgate 85

Open

ing

and

clos

ing

Z

cient clearance above and behind the tail-gate.

You will find details of the tailgate openingdimensions under "Technical data"(Y page 395).

Opening and closing

X To open: press button : on the handle.X Raise the tailgate.

X To close: pull the tailgate firmly downwardsby strap ; and close it from outside.

Problems with the tailgateThe tailgate cannot be opened.The voltage supply has been interrupted or thebattery charge is insufficient.Consult a qualified specialist workshop whichhas the necessary specialist knowledge andtools to carry out the work required.

In an emergency, you can open the tailgateusing the release catch for service purposes.X Prise off the cover on the lower part of the

tailgate with a suitable tool, e.g. the screw-driver from the vehicle tool kit.

X Insert the screwdriver into the opening andmove the release lever until the tailgateunlocks and opens.

X Swing the tailgate upwards.

EASY-PACK tailgate

Important safety notes

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgateis open when the engine is running, particu-larly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumescould enter the passenger compartment.There is a risk of poisoning.Turn off the engine before opening the tail-gate. Never drive with the tailgate open.

! When opening, the tailgate swings up andout. Therefore, make sure that there is suffi-cient clearance above and behind the tail-gate.

You can set the opening angle of the tailgate(Y page 88).You will find details of the maximum tailgateopening dimensions under "Technical data"(Y page 395).

Obstacle detection with reversingfunction

The tailgate is equipped with automatic obstacledetection with reversing feature. If a solid objectblocks or restricts the tailgate during the auto-matic closing process, the tailgate opens againautomatically. Automatic obstacle detectionwith reversing feature is only an aid. It is not asubstitute for your attentiveness when closingthe tailgate.

86 EASY-PACK tailgateOp

enin

g an

d cl

osin

g

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-

gersRover the last 8 mm of the closing movementThe reversing feature therefore cannot pre-vent someone being trapped in these situa-tions. There is a risk of injury.When closing, make sure that no-one has anyparts of the body within the closing area.If someone is trapped:Rpress the q button on the key orRpress the closing button on the tailgate orRpull the handle on the tailgate

Opening and closing

If your vehicle is equipped with a rear windowwhich can be opened separately, the q but-ton of the key must be programmed to open/close the tailgate (Y page 87).The rear window must be closed and the tailgateunlocked.X To open: briefly press button : in the handle

and step out of the swinging range of the tail-gate.

orX Check that there is nobody in the swinging

range of the tailgate and press the q but-ton on the key for longer than 0.5 seconds.Automatic operation is started. The tailgateopens and swings upwards. In addition, youwill hear two warning signals.You can set the opening angle of the tailgate(Y page 88).

X To close: press closing button ; in the tail-gate and step out of the swinging range of thetailgate.

orX Check that there is nobody in the swinging

range of the tailgate and press the q but-ton on the key for longer than 0.5 seconds.Automatic operation is started and the tail-gate closes. During closing, closing button ;flashes and two warning tones sound.

X To interrupt automatic operation: pressbutton : in the handle again.

orX Press closing button ; in the tailgate again.orX Press the q button on the key again for

longer than 0.5 seconds.

Programming the key button for tail-gate

If your vehicle is fitted with a rear window whichcan be opened separately, you can programmethe q button on the key either to open/closethe tailgate or to open the rear window.X Make sure that the tailgate and the rear win-

dow are closed.X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.X Press the buttons in the handle of the tailgate

and the handle of the rear window at the sametime for approximately 5 seconds.After successfully switching the function, theturn signal lamps flash once.

X Check function of the q button on the key.

EASY-PACK tailgate 87

Open

ing

and

clos

ing

Z

Setting the opening angleYou can set the opening angle of the tailgate bystoring the desired position as the stop position.X To set the stop position: open the tailgate

and halt the automatic process in the desiredposition.

orX Open the tailgate and swing manually into the

desired position.X Press the q closing button in the tailgate

until an acknowledgement tone sounds once.The current position of the tailgate is storedas the stop position.

X To reset to maximum opening angle: openthe tailgate.

X Press the q closing button in the tailgateuntil an acknowledgement tone sounds twice.The stored stop position is deleted and thetailgate opens again to its maximum position.

Resetting the tailgateYou must reset the tailgate if there has been amalfunction or an interruption in the voltagesupply.X If the tailgate is open: close the tailgate by

hand.X Briefly press the button in the handle of the

tailgate, step out of the swinging range of thetailgate and open the tailgate.

X When the tailgate is fully opened, press theq closing button in the tailgate and stepout of the swinging range of the tailgate.The tailgate closes. When the tailgate is fullyclosed, it is reset and operational.

When the q button of the key is programmedfor operating the tailgate (Y page 87), you canalso use the key to open and close the tailgate.

Problems with the tailgateThe tailgate cannot be opened.The voltage supply has been interrupted or thebattery charge is insufficient.Consult a qualified specialist workshop whichhas the necessary specialist knowledge andtools to carry out the work required.

In an emergency, you can open the tailgateusing the release catch for service purposes.X Prise off the cover on the lower part of the

tailgate with a suitable tool, e.g. the screw-driver from the vehicle tool kit.

X Insert the screwdriver into the opening andmove the release lever until the tailgateunlocks and opens.

X Swing the tailgate upwards.

Separately-opening rear window

Important safety notes

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases, such as carbon monoxide. Exhaustgases can enter the vehicle interior if the rearwindow is open when the engine is running,especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is arisk of poisoning.Always switch off the engine before openingthe rear window. Never drive with the rearwindow open.

Opening and closing

If your vehicle is equipped with the EASY-PACKtailgate, the q button of the key must beprogrammed to open the rear window(Y page 89).The vehicle or the luggage compartment mustbe unlocked and the tailgate must be closed.X To open: press the q button on the key.orX Press button : in the handle of the tailgate.

88 Separately-opening rear windowOp

enin

g an

d cl

osin

g

X Swing the rear window upwards using thehandle.

X To close: swing the rear window downwardsand push closed.

Programming the key button for therear window

If your vehicle is fitted with an EASY-PACK tail-gate, you can programme the q button onthe key either to open/close the tailgate or toopen the rear window.X Make sure that the tailgate and the rear win-

dow are closed.X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.X Press the buttons in the handle of the tailgate

and in the handle of the rear window at thesame time for approximately five seconds.After successfully switching the function, theturn signal lamps flash once.

X Check function of the q button on the key.

Problems with the rear windowThe tailgate cannot be opened.The voltage supply has been interrupted or thebattery charge is insufficient.Consult a qualified specialist workshop whichhas the necessary specialist knowledge andtools to carry out the work required.In an emergency, you can open the rear windowusing the release catch for service purposes.X Prise off the cover in the tailgate trim with a

suitable tool, e.g. the screwdriver from thevehicle tool kit.

X Insert the screwdriver into the opening andmove the release lever until the rear windowunlocks.

X Swing the rear window upwards.

Side windows

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhile opening the side windows, body partscould become trapped between the side win-

dow and the door frame as the side windowmoves. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that nobody touches the side win-dow during the opening procedure. If some-body becomes trapped, release the switch orpull the switch to close the side window again.

G WARNINGWhile closing the side windows, body parts inthe closing area could become trapped. Thereis a risk of injury.When closing make sure that no parts of thebody are in the closing area. If somebodybecomes trapped, release the switch or pressthe switch to open the side window again.

G WARNINGIf children operate the side windows theycould become trapped, particularly if they areleft unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.Activate the override feature for the rear sidewindows. When leaving the vehicle, alwaystake the key with you and lock the vehicle.Never leave children unattended in the vehi-cle.

G WARNINGIf persons (particularly children) are exposedto heat or cold for a prolonged period, there isa risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Neverleave persons (particularly children) unatten-ded in the vehicle.

Side window reversing featureThe front side windows are equipped with anautomatic reversing feature. If a solid objectblocks or restricts a side window from movingupwards during the automatic closing process,the side window opens again automatically. Dur-ing the manual closing process, the side windowonly opens again automatically after the corre-sponding switch is released. The automaticreversing feature is only an aid and is no substi-tute for your attention when closing a side win-dow.

Side windows 89

Open

ing

and

clos

ing

Z

G WARNINGThe reversing function does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-

gersRwhile resettingThis means that the reversing feature cannotprevent someone being trapped in these sit-uations. There is a risk of injury.When closing, make sure that no parts of thebody are in the closing area. If someonebecomes trapped, press the switch to openthe side window again.

Opening and closing the side win-dows

: Power window, left; Power window, rightThe switches on the driver's door take prece-dence.X To open manually: press and hold the cor-

responding switch.X To open fully: press the switch beyond the

point of resistance and release it.Automatic operation is started.

X To close manually: pull the correspondingswitch and hold it.

X To close fully: pull the corresponding switchbeyond the point of resistance and release it.Automatic operation is started.

X To interrupt automatic operation: press/pull the corresponding switch again.

You can continue to operate the side windowsafter switching off the engine or removing thekey. This function remains active for about fiveminutes or until you open a front door.

Opening and closing the hinged win-dows

Door control panel on the driver's door

Switch in the rear compartment (example: left-hand side of the vehicle): To operate the left hinged window in the rear; To operate the right hinged window in the

rear= Override switch for the electric hinged win-

dows in the rear (Y page 68)? To operate the hinged windowYou can only operate the hinged windows withswitch ? if the override feature has not beenactivated (Y page 68).X To open manually: press and hold the cor-

responding switch.X To open fully: press the switch beyond the

pressure point and release it.Automatic operation is started.

X To interrupt automatic operation: press/pull the corresponding switch again.

X To close manually: pull the correspondingswitch and hold it.

You can continue to operate the hinged win-dows after switching off the engine or removing

90 Side windowsOp

enin

g an

d cl

osin

g

the key. This function remains active for aboutfive minutes or until you open a front door.

Convenience opening featureYou can ventilate the vehicle before you startdriving. To do this, the key is used to carry outthe following functions simultaneously:Runlocking the vehicleRopening the side windowsRopening the sliding sunroofRopening the hinged windowsRswitching on the seat ventilation for the driv-

er's seatThe convenience opening feature can only beoperated using the key. The key must be close tothe driver's door handle.X Convenience opening: point the tip of the

key at the driver's door handle.X Press and hold the % button until the side

windows are in the desired position.X To interrupt convenience opening: release

the % button.

Convenience closing feature

G WARNINGWhen using convenience closing, you couldbecome trapped within the sweep of the clos-ing window. There is a risk of injury.Monitor the entire closing procedure whenusing convenience closing. When closing,make sure that no one has any parts of thebody within the closing area.

When you lock the vehicle, you can close theside windows at the same time.The key must be close to the driver's door han-dle.Observe the notes on the automatic reversingfeature for the side windows (Y page 89).X Convenience closing feature: point the tip

of the key at the driver's door handle.X Press and hold the & button until all the

side windows and the sliding sunroof are fullyclosed.

X Make sure that all side windows are closed.X To interrupt convenience closing feature:

release the & button.

Resetting the side windowsYou must reset the side windows if there hasbeen a malfunction or an interruption in the volt-age supply.X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.X Pull the two power window switches and hold

for approximately one second after closingthe side window.

X If the side windows remain closed after thebutton has been released, they have beenreset correctly. If this is not the case, repeatthe steps above for the open window.

Problems with the side windows

G WARNINGIf you close a side window again immediatelyafter it has been blocked or reset, the sidewindow closes with increased or maximumforce. The reversing function is then notactive. Parts of the body could be trapped inthe closing area in the process. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Make sure that no parts of the body are in theclosing area. To stop the closing process,release the switch or push the switch again toreopen the side window.

If you cannot completely open or close a sidewindow:If there are no objects or leaves in the windowguide that prevent the sliding sunroof from clos-ing, there has been a malfunction or the on-board voltage has been interrupted.X Reset the side window (Y page 91).

Panorama sliding sunroof

Important safety notesIn this section, the term "sliding sunroof" refersto the panorama sliding sunroof.

Panorama sliding sunroof 91

Open

ing

and

clos

ing

Z

G WARNINGWhile opening and closing the sliding sunroof,body parts in close proximity could becometrapped. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the opening and closing pro-cedures.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRduring automatic operation, press the

switch briefly in any directionThe opening or closing procedure will be stop-ped.

G WARNINGIf children operate the sliding sunroof theycould become trapped, particularly if they areleft unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take the keywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leavechildren unattended in the vehicle.

! Only open the panorama sliding sunroof if itis free of snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunc-tions may occur.Do not allow anything to protrude from thesliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could bedamaged.

! When the sliding sunroof is open, water canget into the vehicle and cause damage. Thevehicle electronics can be damaged if waterenters the vehicle interior. Only clean the slid-ing sunroof when it is closed.

i When the sliding sunroof is open, resonancenoise can occur, as well as the usual airflownoise. These are caused by low-pressure fluc-tuations in the vehicle interior. Change theposition of the sliding sunroof or open a sidewindow slightly to reduce or eliminate thesenoises.

Sliding sunroof reversing featureThe sliding sunroof is equipped with an auto-matic reversing feature. If an object blocks orrestricts the sliding sunroof during the closingprocess, the sliding sunroof opens again auto-

matically. The automatic reversing feature isonly an aid and is no substitute for your attentionwhen closing the sliding sunroof.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-

gersRover the last 4 mm of the closing movementRduring resettingRwhen closing the sliding sunroof again man-

ually immediately after automatic reversingThis means that the reversing feature cannotprevent someone being trapped in these sit-uations. There is a risk of injury.When closing make sure that no body partsare in the closing area.If someone is trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately orRpress the switch in any direction during the

automatic closing processThe closing process is stopped.

Operating the sliding sunroof

Opening and closing

: To raise (ventilation position); To open= To close/lower

92 Panorama sliding sunroofOp

enin

g an

d cl

osin

g

X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignitionlock.

X Press or pull the 3 button in the corre-sponding direction.

X Press the 3 button in direction :.The sliding sunroof opens or closes to theventilation position.

If you press or pull the 3 button beyond thepoint of resistance and then release it, auto-matic operation is started in the correspondingdirection. You can stop automatic operation bypressing or pulling again.You can continue to operate the sliding sunroofafter switching off the engine or removing thekey. This function remains active for 30 secondsor until you open a front door.

Rain-closing feature when the engine isswitched offWhen the key is in position 0 in the ignition lockor is removed, the sliding sunroof closes auto-matically:Rif it starts to rainRat extreme outside temperaturesRafter six hoursRif there is a malfunction in the power supplyThe sliding sunroof remains raised at the rear inorder to allow ventilation of the vehicle interior.The sliding sunroof does not close if:Rit is raised at the rear.Rit is blocked.Rno rain is falling on the area of the windscreen

being monitored by the rain sensor, e.g.because the vehicle is under a bridge.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed when beingclosed by the rain-closing feature, it opens againslightly. The rain-closing feature is then deacti-vated.

Operating the roller sunblinds of thesliding sunroof

Important safety notes

G WARNINGParts of the body could become trappedbetween the roller sunblind and frame or slid-

ing sunroof during automatic opening or clos-ing. There is a risk of injury.When opening or closing, make sure that nobody parts are in the sweep of the roller sun-blind.If someone is trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately orRpress the switch in any direction during the

automatic opening/closing processThe opening/closing process is stopped.

The roller sunblinds shield the vehicle interiorfrom sunlight. The roller sunblinds can only beopened and closed when the sliding sunroof isclosed.

Roller sunblind reversing featureThe roller sunblinds are equipped with an auto-matic reversing feature. If a solid object blocksor restricts the roller blind during the closingprocess, the roller blind opens again automati-cally. The automatic reversing feature is only anaid, not a substitute for your attention whenclosing the roller sunblind.

G WARNINGThe reversing function does not react in par-ticular to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. smallfingers. This means that the reversing featurecannot prevent someone being trapped inthese situations. There is a risk of injury.When closing the roller sunblind, make surethat no body parts are in the sweep.If someone is trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately orRpress the switch in any direction during the

automatic closing processThe closing process is stopped.

Panorama sliding sunroof 93

Open

ing

and

clos

ing

Z

Opening and closing roller sunblinds

You can only close the roller sunblinds when thesliding sunroof is closed.X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition

lock.X Press the 3 button in direction :.

The roller sunblinds open, then the slidingroof is raised to the ventilation position.

X Pull the 3 button in direction ;.The sunblinds open.

X Pull the 3 button in direction =.The roller sunblinds close when the slidingsunroof is closed.

If you press or pull the 3 button beyond thepoint of resistance and then release it, auto-

matic operation is started in the correspondingdirection. You can stop automatic operation bypressing or pulling again.

Operating from the rear compartment

X To open/close manually: press or pull but-ton : to the point of resistance and hold ituntil the roller sunblinds or the sliding sunroofhave reached the desired position.

X To open/close fully: press or pull button :beyond the point of resistance and release it.

When the sliding sunroof is opening or closingfully, it always moves to the fixed intermediateposition ("ventilation position") first. To open orclose the sliding sunroof fully, button : mustbe pressed twice.

Problems with the sliding sunroof

G WARNINGIf you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the slidingsunroof closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Partsof the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.If someone is trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately orRpress the switch in any direction during the automatic closing processThe closing process is stopped.

94 Panorama sliding sunroofOp

enin

g an

d cl

osin

g

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The sliding sunroof can-not be closed and youcannot see the cause.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens againslightly:X Immediately after it blocks, pull the 3 button down again to the

point of resistance until the sliding sunroof is closed.The sliding sunroof is closed with increased force.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again during closing and reopensagain slightly:X Immediately after it blocks, pull the 3 button down again to the

point of resistance until the sliding sunroof is closed.The sliding sunroof is closed without the automatic reversing fea-ture.

Panorama sliding sunroof 95

Open

ing

and

clos

ing

Z

Useful information

These Operating Instructions describe all mod-els as well as standard and optional equipmentof your vehicle that were available at the time ofgoing to print. Country-specific variations arepossible. Note that your vehicle may not be fit-ted with all of the described functions. This alsoapplies to safety-relevant systems and func-tions.Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops: (Y page 31).

Seats

Driver's and co-driver's seats

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children adjust the seats, they couldbecome trapped, especially if they are unat-tended. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take the keywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leavechildren unattended in the vehicle.

G WARNINGYou could lose control of the vehicle whiledriving if you:Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or

mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel and mirrors and fasten your seatbelt before starting the engine.

G WARNINGWhen adjusting a seat, you or another vehicleoccupant could become trapped by the guiderail of the seat, for instance. There is a risk ofinjury.Make sure that no one has any part of theirbody within the sweep of the seat whenadjusting it.

G WARNINGIf the driver's seat is not correctly engaged, itcould unexpectedly move while driving. Thiscould cause you to lose control of the vehicle.There is a risk of an accident.Always ensure that the driver's seat isengaged before starting the vehicle.

G WARNINGIf the front seats are positioned too closely tothe dashboard or steering wheel, the frontairbags could cause additional injuries tovehicle occupants in the front. There is anincreased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.Always adjust the front seats so that they areas far away as possible from the front airbags.In addition, observe the instructions on how toadjust the seats correctly.

G WARNINGThe seat belt does not offer the intended levelof protection if you have not moved the back-rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-ing or in the event of an accident, you couldslide underneath the seat belt and sustainabdomen or neck injuries, for example. Thisposes an increased risk of injury or even fatalinjury.Adjust the seat properly before beginningyour journey. Always ensure that the backrestis in an almost vertical position and that theshoulder section of your seatbelt is routedacross the centre of your shoulder.

G WARNINGThe head restraints cannot provide the inten-ded protection unless they are fitted andadjusted correctly. There is an increased riskof injury to the head and neck in the event ofan accident or sudden braking, for example.Always drive with the head restraints fitted.Ensure that the centre of the head restraintssupport the back of each vehicle occupant'shead at eye level before driving off.

96 SeatsSe

ats,

ste

erin

g w

heel

and

mirr

ors

G WARNINGVehicles with amplifiers under the driver'sseat:The amplifier can become hot during opera-tion. You could burn yourself if you touch theamplifier. There is a risk of injury.Do not reach underneath the driver's seat.Adjust the driver's seat carefully.

! To avoid damage to the seats and the seatheating, observe the following information:Rdo not spill any liquids on the seats. If liquid

is spilled on the seats, dry them as soon aspossible.Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not

switch on the seat heating. The seat heat-ing should also not be used to dry the seats.Rclean the seat covers as recommended;

see the "Interior care" section.Rdo not transport heavy loads on the seats.

Do not place sharp objects on the seatcushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. Theseats should only be occupied by passen-gers, if possible.Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do

not cover the seats with insulating materi-als, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat covers,child seats or booster seats.

You can adjust the seats electrically or man-ually, depending on the vehicle's equipment.Your seat must be adjusted in such a way thatyou can wear the seat belt correctly.Observe the following points:Rposition the backrest in an almost vertical

position so that you are sitting virtuallyupright. Do not drive with the backrestreclined too far back.Ryour arms should be slightly bent when you

are holding the steering wheel.Ravoid seat positions that prevent the seat belt

from being correctly routed. The shouldersection of the belt must be routed over themiddle of your shoulder and be pulled tightagainst your upper body. The lap belt mustalways pass across your lap as low down aspossible, i.e. over your hip joints.Radjust the head restraint so that it supports

the back of the head at eye level.Rthe distance from the pedals should be such

that you can depress them fully.

Please also observe the important safety noteson "Airbags" (Y page 50), "Seat belts"(Y page 47) and "Child restraint systems"(Y page 60).

Adjusting the seat manually

: Seat fore-and-aft adjustment; Seat cushion angle adjustment= Seat height adjustment? Seat backrest adjustmentX To adjust the seat fore-and-aft position:

pull lever : up.For front swivel seats, the lever in position :is used to release the swivel seat. The lever toadjust the fore-and-aft position is in the formof a bar in front of the seat (Y page 98).

X Slide the seat forwards or back until you candepress the pedals.

X Release lever :.X Slide the seat forwards or back until you hear

it engage.X To adjust the seat height: press or pull lever= repeatedly until you have reached thedesired seat height.

X To adjust the backrest: turn handwheel ?towards the front.The seat backrest moves to a vertical posi-tion.

X Turn handwheel ? towards the rear.The seat backrest tilts towards the rear.

X To adjust the seat angle: turn handwheel ;towards the front.The front of the seat cushion tilts down.

X Turn handwheel ; towards the rear.The front of the seat cushion tilts up.

Seats 97

Seat

s, s

teer

ing

whe

el a

nd m

irror

s

Z

Adjusting the seat electrically

G WARNINGIf children adjust the seats, they couldbecome trapped, especially if they are unat-tended. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take the keywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leavechildren unattended in the vehicle.

The seats can be adjusted when the key isremoved and the door is open.

Buttons for electric seat adjustment on the doortrim: Head restraint height adjustment; Seat backrest adjustment= Seat height adjustment? Seat cushion angle adjustmentA Seat fore-and-aft adjustmentX Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.orX Open the door.X Adjust the seat using the buttons on the door

trim.If the ignition is not switched on, you can adjustthe seat within 30 seconds of unlocking thevehicle.If you wish to adjust the seat electrically after30 seconds:X Pull the key out of the ignition lock and press

the % button.X Adjust the seat using the buttons on the door

trim.

i Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: if PRE-SAFE®

intervenes, the co-driver's seat is automati-cally adjusted from a less favourable positioninto one which offers better protection. The

co-driver's seat can only be readjusted afterthe hazardous situation is over. Informationabout the system can be found under "PRE-SAFE®" (Y page 58).

i You can save the settings for the seats withthe memory function (Y page 124).

Adjusting lumbar supportTo support the lumbar region, you can set thebackrest contour of each front seat (4-way lum-bar support) electrically.

Electrically adjustable lumbar support: To raise the backrest contour; To soften the backrest contour= To lower the backrest contour? To harden the backrest contour

Turning the seats

G WARNINGIf the driver's and co-driver's seats are notengaged facing the direction of travel whiledriving, the restraint systems may not be ableto provide the intended protection. There is anincreased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.Engage the driver's and co-driver's seats sothey are facing the direction of travel beforestarting the engine.

! When rotating the seats, make sure thatthere is sufficient space to do so.Move the seat forward or back first. This willhelp to avoid contact with other parts of theinterior.

98 SeatsSe

ats,

ste

erin

g w

heel

and

mirr

ors

Swivelling front seat (example: driver's seat): Unlocks the swivelling seat; Seat fore-and-aft adjustmentYou can rotate the front seats by 50° and 180°.The seats engage when facing in the direction oftravel as well as when facing in the oppositedirection and also engage at an angle of 50° tothe door.X When rotating the seat, open the respective

front door in order to avoid scraping againstthe door trim.

X Adjust the steering wheel to provide the nec-essary space to rotate and adjust the frontseat (Y page 121).

X To turn the seat: push release handle : inthe direction of the arrow.

X Turn the seat about 50° towards the outsideor inside to the desired position.If there is a risk of collision with the centreconsole or the B-pillar, pull lever ; upwardsand move the front seat forwards or back tothe desired position. Then release lever ;again.

X In the desired position, make sure that thefront seat has engaged.The front seat must not be able to turn ormove forwards or backwards.

Rear seats and rear bench seat:

General notesYour vehicle may be fitted with rear seats and/or a rear bench seat or with a seat/berth com-bination. For a variable configuration of the vehi-cle interior in the rear, you can:

Rear seats and rear bench seat:Radjust the seat backrests (Y page 103)Rmove the rear seats (Y page 108) and rear

bench seat (Y page 103) forwards or back-wardsRfold each backrest forward individually to the

table position (Y page 109)Rfold the rear seats (Y page 109) and rear

bench seat (Y page 105) forwardsRremove the rear seats (Y page 111) and rear

bench seat (Y page 106) by releasing thequick-locking mechanismRfit the rear seats and the rear bench seat in

the face-to-face positionSeat/berth combinationRshift the seat/berth combination forwards

and backwards (Y page 113)Rremove the seat/berth combination by

releasing the quick-locking mechanism(Y page 115)Rset up the bed to accommodate two people

(Y page 117)Rfold up or remove the bed extension of the

seat/berth combination (Y page 117)

Seat anchorage

G WARNINGIf a seat is not engaged, it may be thrownabout while the vehicle is moving. There is arisk of an accident and injury.Always make sure that all seats are engagedas described.

G WARNINGIf the rear bench seat is not fully engaged, itmay be thrown about while the vehicle is mov-ing. There is a risk of an accident and injury.Always make sure that the rear bench seat isfully engaged as described.

Seats 99

Seat

s, s

teer

ing

whe

el a

nd m

irror

s

Z

Example: seat rail system with quick-locking mech-anismGuide rails : of the seat rail system allow youto:Rfit up to two rows of rear seatsRfit both rows of rear seats facing each otherRfit rear seats and rear bench seatsRslide rear seats and rear bench seatsThe only way to ensure that the rear seats andrear bench seats will engage securely is toalways keep the seat anchorages clean and freeof foreign objects.

Seating variants

G WARNINGIf the rear seats are not fitted as described,the safety precautions integrated in the rearseats may not perform their intended protec-tive function. There is an increased risk ofinjury.Only fit the rear seats as described. Only userear seats approved for the vehicle.

G WARNINGIf the rear bench seats are not installed asdescribed, the safety precautions integratedinto the rear bench seats cannot protect asintended. There is an increased risk of injury.Only install the rear bench seats as described.Only use rear bench seats approved for thevehicle.

Depending on the type of seat anchorage in thevehicle floor, you can install the following seat-ing variants:

Rrear bench seats with two or three seatsRsingle rear seatsRseat/bunk combination with three seatsDepending on the vehicle equipment, you can fitthe rear bench seats and the rear seats in thefirst and/or in the second row of seats.The seating variants shown are only permitted ifthe conditions named below for safe rear seat-ing are met. Other seating variants are not per-mitted and can endanger the occupants.When using only the single seats, the rear seatscan be installed facing forwards in all combina-tions and configurations.

Seating variants for the rear bench seats facingforwards

100 SeatsSe

ats,

ste

erin

g w

heel

and

mirr

ors

Seating variants for the rear seats and rear benchseats facing forwards, part 1

Seating variants for the rear seats and rear benchseats facing forwards, part 2

Seating variants in the face-to-face position, part 1

Seats 101

Seat

s, s

teer

ing

whe

el a

nd m

irror

s

Z

Seating variants in the face-to-face position, part 2EE EASY-ENTRY/EXIT featureS/L Seat/berth combinationBV Bed extensionPlease observe the following conditions for saferear seating:Ronly use rear seats and rear bench seats

approved for the vehicleRa rear seat or rear bench seat may only be

fitted facing the rear if each seat has a seatopposite it – face-to-face positionRVehicles with a seat rail system in the

vehicle floor:- the seat/bunk combination may not be

installed in combination with bench seats- Passengers may only use the seats if the

rear seat and/or rear bench seat hasengaged correctly (Y page 106).

Rear bench seat EASY-ENTRY/EXIT fea-ture

G WARNINGIf the rear bench seat is not fully engaged, itmay be thrown about while the vehicle is mov-ing. There is a risk of an accident and injury.Always make sure that the rear bench seat isfully engaged as described.

G WARNINGWhen adjusting a seat, you or another vehicleoccupant could become trapped by the guiderail of the seat, for instance. There is a risk ofinjury.Make sure that no one has any part of theirbody within the sweep of the seat whenadjusting it.

G WARNINGThe rear bench seat will not engage when fol-ded forward. The rear bench seat may inad-vertently fold backward while accelerating,braking, changing direction suddenly or in theevent of an accident, for example. Peoplewithin the sweep of the rear bench seat maybecome trapped. There is a risk of injury.Before driving off, always fold back the rearbench seat if it is folded forward. Make surethat the rear bench seat is fully engaged.

The only way to ensure that the rear bench seatwill engage securely is to always keep the seatanchorages clean and free of foreign objects.The rear seat leg is only engaged when the redindicator tab is no longer visible and is fullyretracted into the seat leg.

102 SeatsSe

ats,

ste

erin

g w

heel

and

mirr

ors

Rear bench seat with EASY-ENTRY: Handle; EASY-ENTRY release handle= Indicator tab for seat leg locking mechanism? Release handle for front seat legsIf you fold the EASY-ENTRY section of the rearbench seat forwards, it is simpler and easier toget into or out of the second row of seats.X To fold the EASY-ENTRY section forwards:

pull EASY-ENTRY release handle ; upwards.X Fold the EASY-ENTRY section forwards with

the aid of release handle ;.X To fold the EASY-ENTRY section back: fold

the EASY-ENTRY section back until it engagesin the seat anchorages.Indicator tab = is no longer visible.The EASY-ENTRY section has engaged cor-rectly if:Rthe seat leg engages audiblyRindicator tab = is no longer visible and is

fully retracted into the seat legX To remove the EASY-ENTRY section: fold

the backrest forwards (Y page 103).X Pull EASY-ENTRY release handle ; upwards.X Fold the EASY-ENTRY section forwards.X Pull the release handle for front seat legs ?

upwards.X Fold the EASY-ENTRY section further for-

wards.X Lift the EASY-ENTRY section up and out of the

anchorage.X To fit the EASY-ENTRY section: place the

front seat leg of the EASY-ENTRY section onthe seat anchorage and allow to engage.

X Fold the EASY-ENTRY section back.The rear seat leg of the EASY-ENTRY sectionengages audibly. Indicator tab = on the seatleg is no longer visible.

The EASY-ENTRY section has engaged cor-rectly if:Rthe seat leg engages audiblyRindicator tab = is no longer visible and is

fully retracted into the seat legX Fold the seat backrest backwards to the

upright position.If the EASY-ENTRY section has not engaged cor-rectly:X Fold the EASY-ENTRY section forwards.X Fold the EASY-ENTRY section backwards

again and check the locking mechanism.

Adjusting the rear bench seat backrest

X Pull backrest release handle : up and hold itthere.

X Move the seat backrest to the desired posi-tion.

X Let go of backrest release handle : andmove the backrest slightly.The seat backrest engages.

Sliding the rear bench seat

Important safety notesG WARNINGWhen adjusting a rear bench seat, you oranother vehicle occupant could become trap-ped by the guide rail of the rear bench seat, forexample. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no one has any part of theirbody within the sweep of the rear bench seatwhen adjusting it.

Seats 103

Seat

s, s

teer

ing

whe

el a

nd m

irror

s

Z

G WARNINGIf you move a rear bench seat while driving,the seat may move in an unexpected or jerk-ing manner, for instance when braking. Youcould become trapped or could be thrownagainst parts of the vehicle interior or againstother vehicle occupants. There is a risk ofinjury.Only move the rear bench seat when the vehi-cle is stationary. Make sure that the rearbench seat engages fully after it is moved.

G WARNINGIf you move the seat position outside themarked area on vehicles with windowbags inthe rear compartment, then the windowbagscan no longer provide optimum protection.When moving the seat outside the specifiedoptimum area of protection, the protectiveeffect of the windowbag is gradually reducedand may in some positions no longer be pro-vided at all. As a result of reduced or no pro-tective effect from the windowbag, there is anincreased risk of injury.Engage the rear seats or the rear bench seatwithin the marked area on the guide rail toachieve optimum protection.

G WARNINGIf you position the rear seats or the rear benchseat outside the markings on the guide rail,the distance of a vehicle occupant to the seatin front may be insufficient. This could resultin the passenger striking their head on theseat, for example when braking or in the eventof an accident. There is then an increased riskof injury.Maintain a minimum distance of 5 cmbetween the knees of the respective vehicleoccupant and the seat in front of them.

Maintain a minimum distance of 5 cm :between the knees of the vehicle occupants andthe seat in front of them.

Positioning seats in the optimum area ofprotection

: Mark on the front seat leg of the rear benchseat

2 Basic positionStarting from basic position 2, the rear benchseat for passengers can be moved forwards orbackwards by 5 cm. In doing so, make sure thatpassengers have sufficient legroom to reducethe risk of injury during braking.

Increasing the load compartment capa-city by positioning the seats outside theoptimum area of protectionThe restraint systems, such as airbags and seatbelts, only provide optimum protection whenthe rear bench seat is positioned within thedefault markings on the guide rails (optimumarea of protection). It is recommended that therear bench seat is positioned within the mark-ings on the guide rails.If you slide the rear seat bench forwards orbackwards by more than 5 cm you can increasethe size of the load compartment.

104 SeatsSe

ats,

ste

erin

g w

heel

and

mirr

ors

If the rear bench seat is then being used by pas-sengers, make sure that there is always suffi-cient space for the knees of the respectivepassenger. A distance of at least 5 cm :between the knees of the passenger and frontseat must be maintained so that individuals ofvarious heights are afforded a minimum level ofsafety. Always maintain the minimum distancewhen the rear bench seat is occupied by apassenger. If the minimum distance is not main-tained, there is the risk of injury in the event ofan accident or when braking as a result of thepassenger's head striking the seat in front.

Sliding the rear bench seat

= Grab handles? Rear seat legs/EASY-ENTRY/EXIT release

handlesA Release handle for seat fore-and-aft adjust-

mentYou can only slide the rear bench seat when it isunoccupied. If possible slide the rear bench seatwith the assistance of a second person.X Pull up release handle A for fore-and-aft

adjustment.X Move the rear bench seat to the desired posi-

tion by grab handles =.

X Let go of release handle A.Release handle A folds down to its originalposition.

X Make sure that all carriages for fore-and-aftadjustment engage audibly on both sides.It should not be possible to move the rearbench seat.

Folding the rear bench seat forward andback

G WARNINGIf the rear bench seat is not fully engaged, itmay be thrown about while the vehicle is mov-ing. There is a risk of an accident and injury.Always make sure that the rear bench seat isfully engaged as described.

G WARNINGThe rear bench seat will not engage when fol-ded forward. The rear bench seat may inad-vertently fold backward while accelerating,braking, changing direction suddenly or in theevent of an accident, for example. Peoplewithin the sweep of the rear bench seat maybecome trapped. There is a risk of injury.Before driving off, always fold back the rearbench seat if it is folded forward. Make surethat the rear bench seat is fully engaged.

Seats 105

Seat

s, s

teer

ing

whe

el a

nd m

irror

s

Z

: Backrest release handles; Release handles for rear seat anchorage= Grab handlesYou can fold the rear bench seat fully forwards.X Remove the head restraints (Y page 118).X To fold down the seat backrest (table

position): pull backrest release handle : upand fold forward.

X Pull release handles for rear seat anchor-age ; up and tilt the rear bench seat.

X Grasp rear bench seat grab handles = andfold the seat forwards.

Removing and fitting the rear benchseat

G WARNINGIf the rear bench seat is not fully engaged, itmay be thrown about while the vehicle is mov-ing. There is a risk of an accident and injury.Always make sure that the rear bench seat isfully engaged as described.

The only way to ensure that the rear bench seatwill engage securely is to always keep the seatanchorages clean and free of foreign objects.Always observe the notes about the seating var-iants (Y page 100).

: Backrest release handles; Release handles for rear seat anchorage= Grab handles? Release handle for front seat legsA Seat anchoragesi Only carry out the release, removal and sub-

sequent replacement of the rear bench seatsat the basic position marked (Y page 108).

X To remove: make sure that all carriages forfore-and-aft adjustment are engaged on bothsides.It should not be possible to move the rearbench seat.

X Fold the rear bench seat forwards(Y page 105).

X Pull release handle ? upwards.X Hold the rear bench seat by grab handles =

and lift it out of seat anchorages A.X To fit: hold the rear bench seat by grab han-

dles = and guide it into front seat ancho-rages A at an angle from above.

106 SeatsSe

ats,

ste

erin

g w

heel

and

mirr

ors

X Tilt the rear bench seat back and allow it toengage.Release handles ; fold down towards thevehicle floor.

X Fold the rear bench seat back into the uprightposition.

The rear seat legs of the rear bench seat haveengaged correctly if:Rthe seat legs engage audiblyRthe indicator tab is no longer visible and is

fully retracted into the seat legsIf the rear seat legs of the rear bench seat havenot engaged correctly:X Release the rear seat legs again with release

handles ;.X Pull the rear bench seat back by grab handles= with force so that the seat legs engagecorrectly.The seat backrest can then be positioned ver-tically.

X Slide rear bench seat into the standard posi-tion (Y page 103).

Rear bench seat EASY-ENTRY/EXIT fea-ture

G WARNINGIf a seat is not engaged, it may be thrownabout while the vehicle is moving. There is arisk of an accident and injury.Always make sure that all seats are engagedas described.

G WARNINGWhen adjusting a seat, you or another vehicleoccupant could become trapped by the guiderail of the seat, for instance. There is a risk ofinjury.Make sure that no one has any part of theirbody within the sweep of the seat whenadjusting it.

G WARNINGThe seat will not engage when folded forward.The seat may inadvertently fold backwardwhile accelerating, braking, changing direc-tion suddenly or in the event of an accident,

for example. People within the sweep of theseat may become trapped. There is a risk ofinjury.Before driving off, always fold back the seat ifit is folded forward. Make sure that the seat isfully engaged.

The only way to ensure that the rear seatengages securely is to always keep the ancho-rages clean and free of objects.The rear seat anchorage is only engaged whenthe red indicator tab is no longer visible and isfully retracted into the seat anchorage.

Rear seat: Handle; EASY-ENTRY release handles= Indicator tab for seat anchorage locking

mechanismIf you fold the rear seat forwards, it is easier andsimpler to get into or out of the second row ofseats.X To fold the rear seat forwards: pull one of

the two EASY-ENTRY release handles ;upwards.

X Fold the rear seat forwards using release han-dle ;.

X To fold the rear seat back: fold the rear seatback until it engages in the anchorage.

The rear seat has engaged correctly if:Rthe seat anchorage engages audiblyRindicator tab = is no longer visible and is fully

retracted into the seat anchorage

Seats 107

Seat

s, s

teer

ing

whe

el a

nd m

irror

s

Z

Adjusting the rear bench seat backrest

Rear seatX Pull backrest release handle : up and hold it

there.X Move the seat backrest to the desired posi-

tion.X Let go of backrest release handle : and

move the backrest slightly.The seat backrest engages.

Moving a rear seat

Important safety notesG WARNINGWhen adjusting a seat, you or another vehicleoccupant could become trapped by the guiderail of the seat, for instance. There is a risk ofinjury.Make sure that no one has any part of theirbody within the sweep of the seat whenadjusting it.

G WARNINGIf you move a rear seat while driving, the seatmay move in an unexpected or jerking man-ner, for instance when braking. You couldbecome trapped or could be thrown againstparts of the vehicle interior or against othervehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury.Move a rear seat only when the vehicle is sta-tionary. Make sure that the rear seat isengaged after it is moved.

G WARNINGIf you move the seat position outside themarked area on vehicles with windowbags inthe rear compartment, then the windowbagscan no longer provide optimum protection.When moving the seat outside the specifiedoptimum area of protection, the protectiveeffect of the windowbag is gradually reducedand may in some positions no longer be pro-vided at all. As a result of reduced or no pro-tective effect from the windowbag, there is anincreased risk of injury.Engage the rear seats or the rear bench seatwithin the marked area on the guide rail toachieve optimum protection.

G WARNINGIf you position the rear seats or the rear benchseat outside the markings on the guide rail,the distance of a vehicle occupant to the seatin front may be insufficient. This could resultin the passenger striking their head on theseat, for example when braking or in the eventof an accident. There is then an increased riskof injury.Maintain a minimum distance of 5 cmbetween the knees of the respective vehicleoccupant and the seat in front of them.

Maintain a minimum distance of 5 cm :between the knees of the vehicle occupants andthe seat in front of them.

108 SeatsSe

ats,

ste

erin

g w

heel

and

mirr

ors

Positioning the seats in the optimum areaof protection

: Marking on the front seat leg of the rear seat2 Basic positionStarting from standard position 2, the rearseats for passengers can be moved forwards orbackwards by 5 cm. In doing so, make sure thatpassengers have sufficient legroom to reducethe risk of injury during braking.

Increasing the load compartment capa-city by positioning the seats outside theoptimum area of protectionThe restraint systems, such as airbags and seatbelts, only provide optimum protection whenthe rear seat is positioned within the defaultmarkings on the guide rails (optimum area ofprotection). It is recommended that the rearseats are positioned within the markings on theguide rails.If you slide the rear seats forwards or backwardsby more than 5 cm you can increase the size ofthe load compartment.If the rear seats are then being used by passen-gers, make sure that there is always sufficientspace for the passengers' knees. A distance ofat least 5 cm : between the knees of thepassenger and front seat must be maintained sothat individuals of various heights are afforded aminimum level of safety. Always maintain theminimum distance when a rear seat is occupiedby a passenger. If the minimum distance is notmaintained, there is the risk of injury in the eventof an accident or when braking as a result of thepassenger's head striking the seat in front.

Moving a rear seat

: Release handle for seat fore-and-aft adjust-ment

; Seat position mark3 Standard position markRear seats can be moved while being sat on.X To slide: pull release handle : in the direc-

tion of the arrow.X With the release handle pulled, slide the rear

seat to the desired position.X Let go of release handle :.X Slide the rear seat forwards and backwards

until the carriage is correctly engaged on bothsides.It should not be possible to move the seat.

Folding the rear seat forward and back

G WARNINGWhen adjusting a seat, you or another vehicleoccupant could become trapped by the guiderail of the seat, for instance. There is a risk ofinjury.

Seats 109

Seat

s, s

teer

ing

whe

el a

nd m

irror

s

Z

Make sure that no one has any part of theirbody within the sweep of the seat whenadjusting it.

G WARNINGIf a seat is not engaged, it may be thrownabout while the vehicle is moving. There is arisk of an accident and injury.Always make sure that all seats are engagedas described.

G WARNINGThe seat will not engage when folded forward.The seat may inadvertently fold backwardwhile accelerating, braking, changing direc-tion suddenly or in the event of an accident,for example. People within the sweep of theseat may become trapped. There is a risk ofinjury.Before driving off, always fold back the seat ifit is folded forward. Make sure that the seat isfully engaged.

! When folding a seat back, remove all objectsfrom the extended load surface and the flooranchorages. These or other objects could oth-erwise become trapped or damaged.

! If you fold the third-row rear seat forwards,you need to remove the cup holder in the rearfirst. Otherwise, the cup holder could be dam-aged when folding down the bench seat.

You can find information on removing the cupholder in the "Cupholder in the rear" section(Y page 319).The only way to ensure that the rear seats willengage securely is to always keep the seatanchorages clean and free of foreign objects.

: Backrest release handle (operation from thefront)

X To fold down the seat backrest (table position): fold the armrests up parallel withthe backrest (Y page 119).

X Pull backrest release handle : up.X Fold the seat backrest forwards.

; Handle= Pictogram? Release handle for seat anchoragesA Lock indicator tab for seat anchoragesYou can fold rear seats fully forwards.i Pictogram = on the seat reminds you not to

travel sitting behind a seat that has been fol-ded forwards.

X To fold the rear seat forwards: push thehead restraint completely down(Y page 118).

X Fold the seat backrest into the table position.X Pull release handle ? upwards.X Grasp grab handle ; and fold the seat for-

wards.X To fold back the rear seat: using grab han-

dle ;, pull the seat backwards with force.The rear seat anchorages engage.

110 SeatsSe

ats,

ste

erin

g w

heel

and

mirr

ors

The rear seat anchorages have engaged cor-rectly if:Rthe seat anchorages engage audiblyRindicator tab A is no longer visible and is fully

retracted into the seat anchoragesX Move the backrest to the desired position

(Y page 103).X Adjust the head restraint to the desired height

(Y page 118).If the rear seat anchorages have not engagedcorrectly:X Pull release handle ? upwards again.X Fold the seat forward slightly, hold handle ;

and pull it back with force so that the seatanchorages engage correctly.Indicator tab A must be fully retracted intothe seat anchorages and must not be visible.

Removing and fitting the rear seat

G WARNINGIf a seat is not engaged, it may be thrownabout while the vehicle is moving. There is arisk of an accident and injury.Always make sure that all seats are engagedas described.

G WARNINGIf you install the last row of rear seats whenrotated 180°, vehicle occupants in this row ofseats could be endangered by unsecuredloads. There is an increased risk of injury,possibly even fatal injury, particularly in theevent of an accident, sudden braking or asudden change in direction.Never install the last row of rear seats whenrotated 180° when transporting loads.Always store and secure objects and loadsproperly in the vehicle.

G WARNINGWhen adjusting a seat, you or another vehicleoccupant could become trapped by the guiderail of the seat, for instance. There is a risk ofinjury.

Make sure that no one has any part of theirbody within the sweep of the seat whenadjusting it.

The only way to ensure that the rear seats willengage securely is to always keep the seatanchorages clean and free of foreign objects.Pay attention to the cable guide when fitting andremoving rear seats with seat heating and seatventilation. You could otherwise damage thecable.Use only rear seats with seat heating and seatventilation that have been delivered with thevehicle.If the vehicle is equipped with a table, the but-tons for the seat heating and seat ventilationcannot be reached.

Face-to-face position of first row of rear seats

Rear seat folded forward (example: standard rearseat): Seat anchorage guide rails; Release handle= Handle

Seats 111

Seat

s, s

teer

ing

whe

el a

nd m

irror

s

Z

X To remove: make sure that all carriages forfore-and-aft adjustment are engaged on bothsides.It should not be possible to move the rearseat.

X Fold the seat forwards (Y page 109).

X Remove cover ? of the floor socket.X Remove the blind cap from the bracket on the

seat.

X Press in the sides of electrical connection Bin socket A and remove.

X Insert the blind cap into socket A and closethe floor socket with cover ?.

X Secure electrical connection B onto bracketC on the seat.

X Hold the seat by handle =.X Fold up both release handles ;.X Move the folded seat towards the front.X Lift the seat up and out.X To fit: hold the seat by handle =.X From above, guide the seat in a tilted position

into front floor anchorages : and allow toengage.The seat is correctly engaged only when thefront seat anchorages engage audibly.

X Remove cover ? of the floor socket.X Remove the blind cap from socket A.X Remove electrical connection B for the seat

heating and seat ventilation from bracket Cand insert into socket A.

X Attach the blind cap to bracket C on the seat.X Close the floor socket with cover ?.X Fold the seat back to the table or upright

position (Y page 109).X Slide the seat into the standard position

(Y page 108).

Seat/berth combination

General notes! If you pull the seat belts to adjust the back-

rest, the function of the belt retractor may beimpaired. The seat belts may then fail to pro-vide the intended protection.In particular, always grip the retainer loop onthe centre seat when adjusting the backrestto an upright position.

! If you grasp and push the seat/bunk com-bination on the stowage compartment plasticpanel only, the panel may break off. Alwaysgrasp therefore, the loop between the seatcushion and seat backrest to move the seat/bunk combination.Before moving the seat/bunk combination,make sure that the space in front of or behindthe seat/bunk combination is free and that noobjects can become trapped.The seat/bunk combination, trim or theobjects may become damaged.

112 SeatsSe

ats,

ste

erin

g w

heel

and

mirr

ors

Retainer loops: To adjust the seat backrest; Moving the seat/berth combinationThe seat/berth combination can accommodatethree persons. You can adjust the seat backrestto a vertical and horizontal position. If you adjustthe seat backrest to the horizontal position,together with the bed extension, you will have afull-length bed for two people.Passengers may only use the seats of the seat/berth combination when the seat backrest isupright. Only then do the seat belts provide theintended degree of protection.The seat/berth combination is fitted with tworemovable stowage compartments under theseat cushion (Y page 313). You can use thesestowage compartments to store bedding, forexample.

Moving the seat/berth combinationImportant safety notes

G WARNINGWhen adjusting a rear bench seat, you oranother vehicle occupant could become trap-ped by the guide rail of the rear bench seat, forexample. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no one has any part of theirbody within the sweep of the rear bench seatwhen adjusting it.

G WARNINGIf you move a rear bench seat while driving,the seat may move in an unexpected or jerk-ing manner, for instance when braking. Youcould become trapped or could be thrownagainst parts of the vehicle interior or against

other vehicle occupants. There is a risk ofinjury.Only move the rear bench seat when the vehi-cle is stationary. Make sure that the rearbench seat engages fully after it is moved.

G WARNINGIf you move the seat position outside themarked area on vehicles with windowbags inthe rear compartment, then the windowbagscan no longer provide optimum protection.When moving the seat outside the specifiedoptimum area of protection, the protectiveeffect of the windowbag is gradually reducedand may in some positions no longer be pro-vided at all. As a result of reduced or no pro-tection from the windowbag, there is anincreased risk of injury.Engage the seat/berth combination withinthe marked area on the guide rail to achieveoptimum protection.

G WARNINGIf you position the seat/berth combinationoutside the markings on the guide rail, thedistance between a vehicle occupant and theseat in front may be insufficient. This couldresult in the passenger striking their head onthe seat, for example when braking or in theevent of an accident. There is then anincreased risk of injury.Maintain a minimum distance of 5 cmbetween the knees of the respective vehicleoccupants and the seat in front of them.

Seats 113

Seat

s, s

teer

ing

whe

el a

nd m

irror

s

Z

Maintain a minimum distance of 5 cm :between the knees of the vehicle occupants andthe seat in front of them.

! If you grasp and push the seat/bunk com-bination on the stowage compartment plasticpanel only, the panel may break off. Alwaysgrasp therefore, the loop between the seatcushion and seat backrest to move the seat/bunk combination.Before moving the seat/bunk combination,make sure that the space in front of or behindthe seat/bunk combination is free and that noobjects can become trapped.The seat/bunk combination, trim or theobjects may become damaged.

Positioning the seats in the optimum area of protection

: Marking on the front seat leg of the seat/berth combination

2 Basic positionStarting from basic position 2, the seat/berthcombination for passengers can be moved for-wards or backwards by 5 cm. In doing so, makesure that passengers have sufficient legroom toreduce the risk of injury during braking.Increasing the load compartment capacity by positioning the seats outside the opti-mum area of protectionThe restraint systems, such as airbags and seatbelts, only provide optimum protection whenthe seat/berth combination is positioned withinthe default markings on the guide rails (optimumarea of protection). It is recommended that theseat/berth combination is positioned within themarkings on the guide rails.If you slide the seat/berth combination for-wards or backwards by more than 5 cm you canincrease the size of the load compartment.If the seat/berth combination is then being usedby passengers, make sure that there is always

sufficient space for the passenger's knees. Adistance of at least 5 cm : between the kneesof the passenger and front seat must be main-tained so that individuals of various heights areafforded a minimum level of safety. Alwaysmaintain the minimum distance when the seat/berth combination is occupied by passengers. Ifthe minimum distance is not maintained, thereis the risk of injury in the event of an accident orwhen braking as a result of the passenger'shead striking the seat in front.

Moving the seat/berth combination

: Release handle for seat fore-and-aft adjust-ment

If the seat sliders in the front row of rear seatsare too far back in the guide rails, the seat/berthcombination cannot be moved forward. In thiscase, use the handle for the seat sliders(Y page 115), in order to move the seat sliders(Y page 115).

114 SeatsSe

ats,

ste

erin

g w

heel

and

mirr

ors

You can only move the seat/berth combinationwhen it is unoccupied. Pull the seat/berth com-bination forwards using only the loop betweenthe seat cushion and seat backrest.X Pull fore-and-aft release handle : up to the

stop and hold in this position.X Grasp the loop between the seat cushion and

the seat backrest (Y page 112) and slide theseat/bunk combination.

X Let go of release handle for seat fore-and-aftadjustment :.The locking mechanism engages automati-cally.

X Make sure that all carriages for fore-and-aftadjustment engage audibly on both sides.It should not be possible to move the seat/berth combination.

Handle for seat sliders

When removing the seat/berth combination, arear bench seat or a seat, the seat sliders may bedisplaced in a guide rail. The seat sliders arethen no longer parallel in the guide rails. If theseat sliders in the guide rails are no longer in thesame position, you can no longer fit the respec-tive seating.Use handle : to move the seat sliders to thecorrect position. In addition, you can use theend of the handle to open and close the locks onthe sliders. The handle is in the stowage com-partment of the seat/berth combination(Y page 313).

Moving the seat sliders

X Place the tip of handle : on the middle of 3bolts ?.

X Swing handle : downwards onto seatslider ;.

X Press seat slider ; with handle : into guiderail =.Seat slider ; is unlocked.

X Move seat slider ; into the right position andengage.

X Remove handle : upwards from centrebolts ?.

Removing and installing the seat/berthcombinationG WARNINGIf the rear bench seat is not fully engaged, itmay be thrown about while the vehicle is mov-ing. There is a risk of an accident and injury.Always make sure that the rear bench seat isfully engaged as described.

Always keep the seat anchorages clean and freeof obstacles to ensure that the seat/berth com-bination engages securely.A seat/berth combination may not be fitted inthe face-to-face position.

Seats 115

Seat

s, s

teer

ing

whe

el a

nd m

irror

s

Z

Example: standard rear bench seat: Release handle for rear seat anchorage; Release handle for front seat legs= Seat anchoragesi Always carry out unlocking, removal and

subsequent refitting of the seat/berth com-bination at the marked basic position(Y page 108).

X To remove: if necessary, remove the bedextension (Y page 117).

X Remove the stowage compartments(Y page 313).

X Make sure that all carriages for fore-and-aftadjustment engage audibly on both sides.It should not be possible to move the seat/berth combination.

X Fold release handle for rear seat anchor-age : up.

X Tilt the seat/berth combination forward usingthe upper edge of the seat backrest.

X Pull release handle for front seat legs ; up.X Hold the seat/berth combination by the lower

edge of the seat cushion.X Fold the seat/berth combination forwards

and lift it out of seat anchorages =.

X To fit: remove the stowage compartments(Y page 313).

X Hold the seat/berth combination by the loweredge of the seat cushion.

X Place the seat/berth combination into frontseat anchorages = from above and makesure it engages.

X Fold release handle ; down towards thevehicle floor.

X Fold seat/berth combination back into theupright position.

The rear seat legs of the seat/berth combina-tion have engaged correctly if:Rthe seat legs engage audiblyRindicator tabs ? on the seat legs are no lon-

ger visible and have retracted fully into theseat legs

The rear seat legs of the seat/berth combina-tion have not engaged correctly if:X Press release handle for rear seat legs :

down until indicator tabs ? have fully retrac-ted into the rear seat legs.

The rear seat legs of the seat/berth combina-tion have not engaged correctly again if:X Fold the seat/berth combination forwards

again with a degree of force so that the seatlegs engage correctly.

X Fit the stowage compartments (Y page 313).

116 SeatsSe

ats,

ste

erin

g w

heel

and

mirr

ors

Bed extension

If you fold up the bed extension or remove it, youenlarge the luggage compartment.X To fold up: pull release lever : back and

move bed extension ; into an upright posi-tion.The bed extension engages in a vertical posi-tion.

X To remove: fold up bed extension ;.X Remove both thumbscrews = on both the

right and the left side.X Remove bed extension ; from the guide

rails.X To fit: align bed extension ; over the guide

rails and insert it.X Screw in both thumbscrews = on both the

right and the left side.

Setting up/folding away the berthG WARNINGA vehicle occupant on the bed while the vehi-cle is in motion cannot be restrained. There isa risk of serious or even fatal injuries.Only use the bed when the vehicle is station-ary.

G WARNINGWhen folding the seat backrest up or down,you or other vehicle occupants could becometrapped. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that the seat backrest swingingrange is not obstructed and that no one couldbecome trapped.

Rear view of the seat/berth combination: Recess for belt retractor; Bed extension= Holder for head restraintsThe berth can accommodate two persons.X To set up: fold up the short section of the bed

extension.

Seats 117

Seat

s, s

teer

ing

whe

el a

nd m

irror

s

Z

X Move the seat/berth combination forwardsto mark : on the guide rail (Y page 112).

X Remove the head restraints of the seat/berthcombination.

X Rotate the head restraints by 180° and insertthem into the brackets on the rear side of theseat backrest.

X Pull backrest release handle : up and adjustthe seat backrest to a horizontal position.When doing so, only hold on to the seat back-rest by the retainer loop (Y page 112).The seat cushion will lift up slightly.

X Fold down the short part of the bed extension.X To fold away: perform the steps to set up the

berth in reverse order.In the process, finish by moving the seat/berth combination back to the basic position(Y page 112) and ensure that the seat back-rest is in an upright position.

Head restraints

Important safety notes

G WARNINGYou could lose control of the vehicle whiledriving if you:Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or

mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel and mirrors and fasten your seatbelt before starting the engine.

G WARNINGThe head restraints cannot provide the inten-ded protection unless they are fitted andadjusted correctly. There is an increased riskof injury to the head and neck in the event ofan accident or sudden braking, for example.Always drive with the head restraints fitted.Ensure that the centre of the head restraintssupport the back of each vehicle occupant'shead at eye level before driving off.

Adjust the head restraint so that:Rthe centre of the head restraint supports the

back of the head at eye level and the headrestraint is engagedRwhen your head is relaxed the back of your

head rests as close as possible to the headrestraint

Adjusting the head restraints manually

X To raise: pull the head restraint up to thedesired position.

X To lower: press release knob : and slide thehead restraint down to the desired position.

X To move the driver's or co-driver's head restraint forwards: pull the head restraintforwards until it engages in the desired posi-tion.

X To move the driver's or co-driver's head restraint backwards: press and hold downrelease knob ; and slide the head restraintback to the desired position.

X Let go of release button ;.X Ensure that the head restraint has engaged

properly.

118 SeatsSe

ats,

ste

erin

g w

heel

and

mirr

ors

The head restraints can be removed and fittedas follows.X To remove: pull the head restraint up to the

stop.X Press release knob : and pull out the head

restraint.X To fit: insert the head restraint so that the rod

with the detents is on the left when viewed inthe direction of travel.

X Push the head restraint down until it engages.

Adjusting the head restraints electri-cally! Do not adjust the height of the electrically

adjustable head restraint by hand. You couldotherwise damage the head restraint's mech-anism.

Control panel on the door trim

X To adjust the height: turn the key in the igni-tion lock to position 2.

orX Open the door.X Slide switch : up or down in the direction of

the arrow.

i If the ignition is not switched on, you canadjust the head restraint height within30 seconds of unlocking the vehicle.

X To move forwards: pull the head restraintforwards until it engages in the required posi-tion.

X To move backwards: press and hold downrelease knob ; and slide the head restraintback to the desired position.

X Let go of release button ;.X Ensure that the head restraint has engaged

properly.

Armrests

X To adjust the armrest angle: fold the arm-rest upwards by more than 45° to position2.The armrest is released.

X Fold armrest forwards 3 to the stop.X Slowly fold the armrest upwards to the

desired position.X To fold the armrest up: if necessary, fold the

armrest upwards by more than 90° to posi-tion 1.

Seat heating

Seat heating for the front seats

G WARNINGIf you repeatedly switch on seat heating, theseat cushion and backrest padding maybecome very hot. The health of vehicle occu-pants with limited temperature sensitivity or alimited ability to react to high temperatures

Seats 119

Seat

s, s

teer

ing

whe

el a

nd m

irror

s

Z

may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury.Therefore, do not switch on the seat heatingrepeatedly.

! When you leave your seat, do not place any-thing on the seat and switch off the seat heat-ing. Do not switch the seat heating on whenthe seat is not occupied, e.g. when drivingwithout a co-driver.The seat heating may oth-erwise overheat, causing damage to the seat.

The three red indicator lamps in button : showthe activated heating level 1 to 3.The seat heating automatically switches downfrom level 3 to level 2 after approximately sevenminutes.The seat heating automatically switches downfrom level 2 to level 1 after approximately tenminutes.At level 1 the seat heating switches off auto-matically after approximately 20 minutes.X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or 2 in

the ignition lock.X To switch on: press button : repeatedly

until the desired heating level has been set.X To switch off: press button : repeatedly

until all indicator lamps go out.If the on-board voltage is too low, the seat heat-ing will either switch itself off prematurely or notcome on at all. In this case, too many electricalconsumers are switched on or the batterycharge is not sufficient. The seat heating willautomatically switch back to the current heatinglevel when enough on-board voltage is availableagain.

Rear seat heating

Button : for operating the seat heating is loca-ted on the right-hand side of the seat.Rear seat heating activation : is only possiblewith the engine running. Rear seat heating oper-ation is the same as for the seat heating for thefront seats.The rear seat heating can be switched off auto-matically in increments in the same way as thefront seat heating, if:Rthe on-board voltage is too low orRthe battery is not sufficiently charged

Seat ventilation

Switching seat ventilation on and offSeat ventilation for the front seats

Make sure that the air inlet grille on the back ofthe seat backrest is free and not covered(Y page 313).The three blue indicator lamps in button :show which fan setting 1 to 3 is active.

120 SeatsSe

ats,

ste

erin

g w

heel

and

mirr

ors

X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or 2 inthe ignition lock.

X To switch on: press the s button repeat-edly until the desired fan setting is set.When the vehicle is stationary, the fan settingcan be reduced automatically. This reducesthe noise of the seat ventilation.

X To switch off: press button : repeatedlyuntil all indicator lamps go out.

The convenience opening function automati-cally switches the seat ventilation for the driv-er's seat to the highest fan setting (Y page 91).If the indicator lamps of the current fan setting inbutton : flash, the seat ventilation hasswitched off automatically. In this case, toomany electrical consumers are switched on orthe battery charge is not sufficient. The seatventilation will automatically switch back to thecurrent fan setting when enough on-board volt-age is available again.Rear seat ventilation

Button : for operating the seat ventilation islocated on the right-hand side of the seat.Rear seat ventilation activation is only possiblewith the engine running. Rear seat ventilationoperation is the same as for the seat ventilationfor the front seats.The rear seat ventilation may be switched offautomatically in the same way as the front seatventilation if:Rthe on-board voltage is too low orRthe battery is not sufficiently charged

Steering wheel

G WARNINGYou could lose control of the vehicle whiledriving if you:Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or

mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel and mirrors and fasten your seatbelt before starting the engine.

G WARNINGThe steering wheel may move unexpectedly ifyou adjust it while driving. This could causeyou to lose control of the vehicle. There is arisk of an accident.Make sure that the steering wheel is lockedbefore driving off. Never unlock the steeringwheel when the vehicle is in motion.

G WARNINGChildren could become trapped by the steer-ing wheel if they adjust it. There is a risk ofinjury.When leaving the vehicle, always take the keywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leavechildren unattended in the vehicle.

The steering wheel can still be adjusted if thekey has been removed.

: Steering column fore-and-aft adjustment; Steering column height= Lever

Steering wheel 121

Seat

s, s

teer

ing

whe

el a

nd m

irror

s

Z

X To adjust the steering wheel: swing lever= down until it engages.The steering wheel is unlocked.

X Move the steering wheel to the desired posi-tion.

X Pull lever = up to the stop.The steering wheel is locked again.

Mirrors

Important safety notes

G WARNINGYou could lose control of the vehicle whiledriving if you:Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or

mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel and mirrors and fasten your seatbelt before starting the engine.

G WARNINGThe exterior mirrors reduce the size of theimage. Objects visible in the mirrors arecloser than they appear. You could misjudgethe distance from road users driving behindyou when changing lanes, for instance. Thereis a risk of an accident.You should therefore always look over yourshoulder to determine the actual distancefrom road users driving behind you.

Rear-view mirror

X Anti-dazzle mode: flick anti-dazzle switch :forwards or back.

Exterior mirrors

Adjusting electrically

X Before pulling away, turn the key to position 1or 2 in the ignition lock.

X Press button ; for the right exterior mirror orbutton = for the left exterior mirror.The indicator lamp for the button switches onand the selected exterior mirror can be adjus-ted.The indicator lamp goes out again after sometime.

X If the indicator lamp for button ; or = lightsup, press adjustment button : up or down,to the right or left.Adjust the exterior mirrors in such a way thatyou have a good overview of traffic condi-tions.

After the engine has been started, the exteriormirrors are automatically heated if the rear win-dow heating is switched on and the outside tem-perature is low.

122 MirrorsSe

ats,

ste

erin

g w

heel

and

mirr

ors

Folding in/out electrically! Only fold the electrical exterior mirrors in

and out electrically. If you fold the exteriormirrors in and out manually you could damagethe exterior mirrors or they may not engageproperly.In particular, make sure that the exterior mir-rors are folded in before washing the vehiclein an automatic car wash. The washingbrushes could otherwise force the exteriormirrors to fold in and damage them.

X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignitionlock.

X Briefly press button :.Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.

Make sure that the exterior mirrors are alwaysfolded out fully while driving. They could other-wise vibrate.If you are driving faster than 47 km/h, you canno longer fold in the exterior mirrors.Select the Automatic mirror-folding function function from the vehicle settingsmenu of the multimedia system (see the sepa-rate operating instructions). The exterior mir-rors then fold in automatically when the vehicleis locked. When you unlock the vehicle and opena front door, the exterior mirrors fold out againautomatically.

Disengaged exterior mirrorsIf an exterior mirror has been pushed out ofposition, proceed as follows:X Press and hold the ö button until you hear

a click and the mirror engages audibly intoposition.The mirror housing is engaged and you canadjust the exterior mirrors as usual.

Resetting the exterior mirrorsIf the battery has been disconnected or dis-charged, you need to reset the exterior mirrors.The exterior mirrors will otherwise not fold inautomatically when you have selected theAutomatic mirror-folding function func-tion in the multimedia system.X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or 2 in

the ignition lock.X Briefly press the ö button.

Exterior mirror heatingi Vehicles without rear window heating:

when the temperature is below 15 °C themirror heating switches on automaticallyafter engine start and remains on.

i Vehicles with rear window heating: attemperatures below 15 °C, the mirror heatingswitches on automatically after engine startfor 10 min. In addition, mirror heating can beswitched on together with rear window heat-ing.

X To switch the mirror heating on manually:turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.

X Press the ¤ rocker switch up or down.The indicator lamp above the ¤ rockerswitch lights up or goes out.

Automatic anti-dazzle mirrors

G WARNINGElectrolyte may escape if the glass of an auto-matic anti-dazzle mirror breaks. Electrolyte isharmful and causes irritation. It must notcome into contact with your skin, eyes, res-piratory organs or clothing or be swallowed.There is a risk of injury.If you come into contact with electrolyte,observe the following:Rimmediately rinse off electrolyte from your

skin with water.Rimmediately and thoroughly rinse electro-

lyte out of eyes using clean water.

Mirrors 123

Seat

s, s

teer

ing

whe

el a

nd m

irror

s

Z

Rif electrolyte is swallowed, immediatelyrinse out your mouth thoroughly. Do notinduce vomiting.Rif electrolyte comes into contact with skin

or eyes or is swallowed, seek medical atten-tion immediately.Rimmediately change out of clothing that has

been in contact with electrolyte.Rif an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical

attention immediately.

The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror onthe driver's side automatically go into anti-daz-zle mode if the following conditions are metsimultaneously:Rthe ignition is switched onRincident light from headlamps falls on the

sensor in the rear-view mirror.If incident light from headlamps cannot strikethe sensor in the rear-view mirror, for instancebecause it is blocked by objects in the vehicle,you will have to use manual anti-dazzle mode.The mirrors do not go into anti-dazzle mode ifreverse gear is engaged or if the interior lightingis switched on.

Memory function

General notesWith the memory function, you can store up tothree different settings, e.g. for three differentpeople.The following settings are stored as a singlememory preset:Rthe position of the seat, seat backrest and

head restraintRadditionally for the driver's side, the position

of both exterior mirrors

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you use the memory function on the driver'sside while driving, the adjustments couldcause you to lose control of the vehicle. Thereis a risk of an accident.

Only use the memory function on the driver'sside while the vehicle is stationary.

G WARNINGIf the memory function adjusts the seat, youand other vehicle occupants – particularlychildren – could become trapped. There is arisk of injury.While the memory function is making adjust-ments, make sure that no one has any part oftheir body within the sweep of the seat. Ifsomeone becomes trapped, immediatelyrelease the memory function position button.The adjustment is stopped.

G WARNINGIf children activate the memory function, theycould become trapped, especially if they areunattended. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take the keywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leavechildren unattended in the vehicle.

The memory function can be used at any time,for example even when the key has beenremoved from the ignition lock.

Storing settings

X Adjust the seat (Y page 98).X Adjust the exterior mirrors for the driver's

side (Y page 122).

124 Memory functionSe

ats,

ste

erin

g w

heel

and

mirr

ors

X Press the r memory button.X Press one of the storage position buttons4, 5 or = within three seconds.The settings are stored in the selected presetposition and a tone sounds when the settingshave been completed.

Calling up a stored setting! If you want to move the seat from the fully

reclined position to a stored seat position,first raise the backrest. The seat could other-wise be damaged.

X Press and hold the relevant storage positionbutton 4, 5 or = until the seat andexterior mirrors are in the stored position.The seat adjustment and exterior mirroradjustment procedure are interrupted assoon as you release the storage position but-ton.

Memory function 125

Seat

s, s

teer

ing

whe

el a

nd m

irror

s

Z

Useful information

These Operating Instructions describe all mod-els as well as standard and optional equipmentof your vehicle that were available at the time ofgoing to print. Country-specific variations arepossible. Note that your vehicle may not be fit-ted with all of the described functions. This alsoapplies to safety-relevant systems and func-tions.Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops: (Y page 31).

Exterior lighting

Important safety notesFor reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you drive with the lights switched oneven during the daytime. There may be differ-ences in operation due to legal requirementsand voluntary recommendations in some coun-tries.

Light switch

Operation

1 W Left-hand parking lamps2 X Right-hand parking lamps3 T Side lamps, licence plate and instru-

ment cluster lighting4 Ã Automatic headlamp mode, controlled

by the light sensor5 L Dipped-beam or main-beam head-

lampsB R Rear foglamp

If you hear a warning tone when you leave thevehicle, the lights may still be switched on.X Turn the light switch to the à position.The exterior lighting (except the side/parkinglamps) switches off automatically if you:Rremove the key from the ignition lockRopen the driver's door with the key in position

0 in the ignition lock

Dipped-beam headlampsWhen the ignition is switched on and the lightswitch is in position L, the side lamps anddipped-beam headlamps are switched on even ifthe light sensor does not sense dark ambientlight conditions. This is particularly useful whenthere is fog or rain.X To switch on: turn the key to position 2 in the

ignition lock or start the engine.X Turn the light switch to the L position.

The L indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up.

Daytime driving lightsX To switch on: turn the light switch to theà position.

Automatic headlamp mode

G WARNINGWhen the light switch is set to Ã, thedipped-beam headlamps may not be switchedon automatically if there is fog, snow or othercauses of poor visibility due to the weatherconditions such as spray. There is a risk of anaccident.In such situations, turn the light switch toL.

Automatic headlamp mode is only a driving aid.You are responsible for the vehicle lighting at alltimes.When the side lamps and dipped-beam head-lamps are switched on, the green T (sidelamps) and L (dipped-beam headlamps)indicator lamps in the instrument cluster lightup.

126 Exterior lightingLi

ghts

and

win

dscr

een

wip

ers

à is the preferred light switch setting. Thelight setting is automatically selected accordingto the brightness of the ambient light (excep-tion: poor visibility due to weather conditions,such as fog, snow or spray):RKey in position 1 in the ignition lock: the side

lamps are switched on or off automaticallydepending on the brightness of the ambientlight.RWhen the engine is on: depending on the

ambient light conditions, the daytime drivinglights or the side lamps and dipped-beamheadlamps are switched on or off automati-cally.

X To switch on automatic headlamp mode:turn the light switch to Ã.

Rear foglampThe rear foglamp improves visibility of your vehi-cle for the traffic behind in the event of heavyfog. Observe the legal requirements of the coun-try you are currently in when using the rear fog-lamps.X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock

or start the engine.X Turn the light switch to L or Ã.X To switch the rear foglamp on/off: press

the R button.When the green R indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster goes on, the rear foglampis switched on.

Parking lamps! If the battery charge is very low, the parking

lamps will switch off automatically to enablethe next engine start. Always park your vehi-cle in accordance with legal regulations, in asecure and adequately lit location. Avoid leav-ing the side lamps T on for several hours.If possible, switch on the right X or leftW parking lamp.

Switching on the parking lamps ensures that thecorresponding side of the vehicle is illuminated.

Switching on parking lampsX Turn the key to position 0 (Y page 172) in the

ignition lock or remove the key.X Right-hand parking lamp: turn the light

switch to position X.X Left-hand parking lamp: turn the light

switch to position W.

Combination switch

Turn signal

: Right turn signal; Left turn signalX To indicate: press the combination switch in

desired direction : or ; until it engages.The combination switch automatically returnsto its original position after large steeringmovements.

X To indicate briefly: press the combinationswitch briefly in desired direction : or ;.The corresponding turn signal flashes threetimes.

Exterior lighting 127

Ligh

ts a

nd w

inds

cree

n w

iper

s

Z

Main-beam headlamps and headlampflasher

: Main-beam headlamps; Headlamp flasherX To switch on the main-beam headlamps:

turn the light switch to L or Ã.X Press the combination switch forwards :.

The K indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up.

i In the à position, the main-beam head-lamps are only switched on when it is dark andthe engine is running.

X To switch off the main-beam headlamps:move the combination switch back to its nor-mal position.The K indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster goes out.

X To operate the headlamp flasher: turn thekey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.

X Pull the combination switch briefly in thedirection of arrow ;.

Headlamp range adjustment

X Turn headlamp range control : to the cor-responding position. The road should be illu-minated from 40 m to 100 m and the dipped-

beam headlamps must not dazzle oncomingvehicles.If the vehicle is unladen, select position g.

The headlamp range control allows you to adjustthe cone of light from the headlamps to suit thevehicle load. The cone of light changes if theseats are occupied or if the load compartment isloaded or unloaded. This can impair visibility anddazzle oncoming traffic.

Hazard warning lamps

Hazard warning lamp switchX To switch on/off: press the £ hazard

warning lamp switch.If you have indicated a turn while the hazardwarning lamps are switched on, only the turnsignal lamps on the side of the vehicle selectedwill light up.The hazard warning lamps automatically switchon if:Ran airbag is deployedRyou brake sharply and bring the vehicle to a

halt from a speed of more than 70 km/hThe hazard warning lamps switch off automati-cally if the vehicle reaches a speed of over10 km/h again after a full brake application.

i The hazard warning lamps still operate if theignition is switched off.

Intelligent Light System

General notesThe Intelligent Light System adapts the lightingof the front headlamps to the prevailing drivingand weather conditions. The system provides

128 Exterior lightingLi

ghts

and

win

dscr

een

wip

ers

additional functions for improved illumination ofthe road surface depending on the vehicle speedor the weather conditions, for example. The lightfunctions of the system include an active lightfunction, cornering light function, motorwaymode and extended-range foglamps. The sys-tem is only active when it is dark.You can activate or deactivate the "IntelligentLight System" function using the on-board com-puter (Y page 258).

Active light function

The active light function is a system that movesthe headlamps according to the steering move-ments. In this way, relevant areas remain illu-minated while you are driving. This allows you torecognise pedestrians, cyclists and animalssooner.Active: when the lights are switched on

Cornering light function

The cornering light function improves the illu-mination of the road over a wide angle in thedirection you are turning, enabling better visi-bility in tight bends, for example. It can only beactivated when the dipped-beam headlamps areswitched on.

Active:RIf you are driving at speeds below 40 km/h

and switch on the turn signal or turn the steer-ing wheel.RIf you are driving at speeds of between

40 km/h and 70 km/h and turn the steeringwheel.

The cornering lamp may remain lit for a shorttime, but is automatically switched off after nomore than three minutes.

Motorway mode

Active: if you are driving at speeds above110 km/h and do not make any large steeringmovements for at least 1000 m or if you aredriving at speeds above 130 km/h.Not active: if you are driving at speeds below80 km/h following activation

Extended range foglamps

The extended range foglamps reduce the glareexperienced by the driver and improve the illu-mination of the edge of the carriageway.Active: if you are driving at speeds below70 km/h and you switch on the rear foglamp

Exterior lighting 129

Ligh

ts a

nd w

inds

cree

n w

iper

s

Z

Not active: if, following activation, you are driv-ing at speeds above 100 km/h or if you switchoff the rear foglamp

Adaptive Highbeam Assist

General notes

You can use this function to set the headlampsto change between dipped beam and main beamautomatically. The system recognises vehicleswith their lights on, either approaching from theopposite direction or travelling in front of yourvehicle, and consequently switches the head-lamps from main beam to dipped beam.The system automatically adapts the dipped-beam headlamp range depending on the dis-tance to the other vehicle. Once the system nolonger detects any other vehicles, it switches onthe main-beam headlamps again.The system's optical sensor is located behindthe windscreen near the overhead controlpanel.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGAdaptive Highbeam Assist does not recogniseroad users:Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestriansRwho have poor lighting, e.g. cyclistsRwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrierOn very rare occasions, Adaptive HighbeamAssist may fail to recognise other road usersthat have lights, or may recognise them toolate. In this, or in similar situations, the auto-matic main-beam headlamps will not be deac-tivated or will be activated despite the pres-ence of other road users. There is a risk of anaccident.Always carefully observe the traffic conditionsand switch off the main-beam headlamps ingood time.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take intoaccount road, weather or traffic conditions.Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You areresponsible for adjusting the vehicle's lightingto the prevailing light, visibility and traffic con-ditions.In particular, the detection of obstacles can berestricted if there is:Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or

snowRdirt on the sensors or anything else covering

the sensors

Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assiston/off

: Main-beam headlamps; Headlamp flasher

130 Exterior lightingLi

ghts

and

win

dscr

een

wip

ers

X To switch on: turn the light switch to theà position.

X Press the combination switch beyond thepressure point in the direction of arrow :.If it is dark and the light sensor activates thedipped-beam headlamps, the _ symbolfor Highbeam Assist lights up in the display.If you are driving faster than 25 km/h:The headlamp range is set automaticallydepending on the distance between the vehi-cle and other road users.If you are driving at speeds above approx-imately 30 km/h and no other road users aredetected:The main-beam headlamps are switched onautomatically. The K indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster also lights up.If you are driving at speeds below 25 km/h orother road users are detected or the roads areadequately lit:The main-beam headlamps are switched offautomatically. The K indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out. The _ symbolfor Highbeam Assist stays on.

X To switch off: move the combination switchback to its normal position or move the lightswitch to another position.The _ symbol for Highbeam Assist goesout in the display.If the main beam function has been switchedon, the K indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster goes out.

Headlamps misted up on the insideThe headlamps may mist up on the inside ifthere is high atmospheric humidity.

X Switch on the dipped-beam headlamps anddrive off.The level of moisture diminishes, dependingon the length of the journey and the weatherconditions (humidity and temperature).

If the level of moisture does not diminish:

X Have the headlamps checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Interior lighting

Overview

: p Switches the front left-hand readinglamp on/off

; | Switches the automatic interior light-ing control on/off

= c Switches the front interior lighting on/off

? w Switches the rear interior lighting on/off

A p Switches the front right-hand readinglamp on/off

General notesIn order to prevent the vehicle's battery fromdischarging, the interior lighting functions areautomatically deactivated after some time,unless the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock.

Automatic interior lighting controlThe interior lighting is activated for a certainperiod of time when the key is removed from theignition lock. This delayed switch-off can beadjusted via the multimedia system; see theseparate operating instructions.X To switch on or off: press the | button.

When the automatic interior lighting control isactivated, the button is flush with the over-head control panel.

The interior lighting switches on automatically ifyou:Runlock the vehicleRopen a doorRremove the key from the ignition lock

Interior lighting 131

Ligh

ts a

nd w

inds

cree

n w

iper

s

Z

The boot lamp always switches on automaticallywhen the tailgate is opened.

Manual interior lighting controlX To switch the front interior lighting on/

off: press the c button.X To switch the rear interior lighting on/off:

press the w button.X To switch the front reading lamps on/off:

press the p button.

Ambient lightingThe ambient lighting also consists of:Rthe door handle illumination in the front doorsRthe ornamental strips in the dashboardRthe ornamental strips in the rear compart-

mentThe ambient lighting comes on if you:Runlock the vehicleRopen or close the driver's or the co-driver's

doorRhave switched on the automatic interior light-

ing controlRswitch on the ignition

When the ignition is switched on the ambientlighting is switched on permanently.

The colour, brightness, zone and display lampfor the ambient lighting are set via the multime-dia system; see the separate operating instruc-tions.

Rear interior light with reading lampin the handles

: Rear interior light and reading lamp; Switches the reading light on and off

Replacing bulbs: interior lighting andambient lamps

General notesIt is essential that the important safety notes onchanging light bulbs are observed(Y page 134).Have the bulbs of the following interior lightsreplaced at a qualified specialist workshop only:Rilluminated Mercedes-Benz letters in the door

sill trimRthe lights for the ambient lightingRlights for the footwell lightingRlights for the overhead control panel in the

dashboardRlamps in the rear compartment grab handlesRboot lamp in the roof liningOtherwise, the lamps, their brackets or the sidetrim panel and roof lining may be damaged.If you require help when changing bulbs of otherinterior lights, please visit a qualified specialistworkshop.

Rear interior lights in the roof liningYou cannot change the bulbs in the boot lamp inthe roof lining or in the rear interior lights in thegrab handles. Have these bulbs replaced in aqualified specialist workshop only.Information on changing the boot lamp bulb inthe side trim panel of vehicles with a load com-

132 Replacing bulbs: interior lighting and ambient lampsLi

ghts

and

win

dscr

een

wip

ers

partment stowage tray can be found under"Additional interior and ambient lighting"(Y page 133).

Rear interior light in the roof liningBulb type: T10 6W XenonX Switch off the interior light.X Press in the spring catch of lamp lens : with

a suitable object, e.g. a screwdriver, and thenprise off lamp lens : with lamp housing =.

X Press in spring catches ; and pull lamplens : off from lamp housing =.

X Remove bulb ? from lamp housing =.X Insert new bulb ?.X Position lamp lens : on lamp housing = and

engage.X Position lamp lens : with lamp housing =

on the left and engage.

Additional interior lighting and sur-round lighting

The scope of the additional interior and ambientlighting depends on your vehicle equipment. Thebulb change described here is valid for:Rthe mirror lamp in the sun visorRthe ambient lamp at the bottom of the front

doorRthe boot lamp in the side trim panelYou can find information on changing the bulb ofthe signal and ambient lamp at the bottom of thetailgate under “Signal and ambient lamp in thetailgate" (Y page 133).

Type of lamp: W 5 WX Press in the spring catch of lamp housing :

with a suitable object, e.g. a screwdriver, andprise off lamp housing :.

X Turn socket ; anti-clockwise and removefrom the lamp housing :.

X Remove bulb = from socket ;.X Press new bulb = into socket ;.X Screw socket ; clockwise into the lamp

housing :.X Position lamp housing : on the left-hand

side and engage.

Signal and ambient light in the tail-gate

Type of lamp: W 5 WX Press in the spring catch of the lamp housing

at the side of crystal clear lamp lens ; with asuitable object, e.g. with a screwdriver, andprise off the lamp housing.

X Turn socket = anti-clockwise and removefrom the lamp housing.

X Remove the bulb from socket =.X Press the new bulb into socket =.

Replacing bulbs: interior lighting and ambient lamps 133

Ligh

ts a

nd w

inds

cree

n w

iper

s

Z

X Screw socket = clockwise into the lamphousing.

X Position the lamp housing to the side of redlamp lens : and engage.

Replacing bulbs: vehicles with LEDheadlamps

General notesThe front and rear lamp units on your vehicle areequipped with LED light sources. Do not replacethe LED light sources of your vehicle yourself.Consult a qualified specialist workshop whichhas the necessary specialist knowledge andtools to carry out the work required.You can replace the light bulb of the reversinglight yourself (Y page 137).The lamp units are an important aspect of vehi-cle safety. You must therefore make sure thatthese function correctly at all times. Have theheadlamp setting checked regularly.

Replacing bulbs: vehicles with halo-gen headlamps

Important safety notes

G WARNINGBulbs, lamps and plug connectors canbecome very hot during use. When replacing abulb, you could burn yourself on these com-ponents. There is a risk of injury.Allow these components to cool down beforereplacing the bulb.

! Make sure bulbs are positioned securely.Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect ofvehicle safety. You must therefore make surethat these function correctly at all times. Havethe headlamp setting checked regularly.RAlways switch off the ignition before replacing

bulbs in the lighting system. This will preventa short circuit.RWear gloves and eye protection when chang-

ing a bulb.RDo not use a bulb that has been dropped or

that has scratches on its glass tube. The bulbmay explode.

RA bulb could explode if:- you touch it- it is hot- you drop it- you scratch or score itRMarks on the glass tube shorten the operating

life of a bulb. Do not touch the glass tube withyour bare hands. If necessary, clean the glasstube when cold with alcohol or spirit. Then ruboff the glass tube with a clean, lint-free cloth.RMake sure that bulbs are protected from

moisture when operating and that they do notcome into contact with liquids. Make surethat seals are seated correctly and replacedamaged seals.RCheck the contacts for signs of corrosion and

clean these if required.ROnly operate bulbs in closed lamps which

have been designed for this purpose.ROnly use spare bulbs of the same type, with

the prescribed voltage and the correct wat-tage.RIf the new bulb does not light up, consult a

qualified specialist workshop.RHave lamps with LED bulbs repaired at a quali-

fied specialist workshop only.RHave the bulbs of the following lamps

replaced at a qualified specialist workshoponly:- additional turn signals in the exterior mir-

rors- additional brake lamp- the licence plate lightingPlease also observe the notes on the interiorlights (Y page 132).

If you require assistance changing bulbs, con-sult a qualified specialist workshop.

134 Replacing bulbs: vehicles with halogen headlampsLi

ghts

and

win

dscr

een

wip

ers

Front lamp clusters

Overview of bulb types

Lights Bulb type

: Additional turn signals inthe exterior mirrors

LED

; Turn signal PY 21 W

= Dipped-beam headlamps H7 55 W

? Main-beam headlamp/side lamps/parkinglamps/daytime drivinglamps

H15 55 W/15 W

Fitting/removing the cover on the frontwheel arch

X To remove: switch off the lighting system.X To change a bulb set in the left headlamp, turn

the steering wheel clockwise as far as it willgo. To change a bulb in the right headlamp,turn the steering wheel anti-clockwise as faras it will go.The space in front of the cover in the frontwheel arch then becomes greater.

X Grip cover : in the middle.

X Slide cover : upwards, remove and let ithang from the strap.

X To fit: if necessary, remove dirt from cover :and the opening in the wheel arch.

X Insert cover : at the top and thread thecover strap through the opening in the wheelarch.

X Slide cover : down as far as it will go .

Dipped-beam headlamps

View from inside (example: left headlamp)X Remove the cover in the front wheel arch

(Y page 135).X Turn housing cover : anti-clockwise and

remove it.X Turn socket ; for dipped-beam headlamps

anti-clockwise and remove.X Remove the bulb from socket ;.X Insert a new bulb into socket ;.X Insert socket ; and tighten by turning clock-

wise.X Press on housing cover : and tighten by

turning clockwise.X Replace the cover in the front wheel arch

(Y page 135).

Replacing bulbs: vehicles with halogen headlamps 135

Ligh

ts a

nd w

inds

cree

n w

iper

s

Z

Main-beam headlamp/side lamps/parking lamps/daytime driving lamps

View from inside (example: left headlamp)X Switch off the lighting system.X Open the bonnet.X Turn housing cover : anti-clockwise and

remove.X Pull out the bulb together with socket ;.X Insert the new bulb with socket ; and

engage it as far as the stop.X Position housing cover : and tighten by turn-

ing clockwise.X Close the bonnet.

Turn signal

View from inside (example: left headlamp)X Switch off the lighting system.X Open the bonnet.X Turn socket : anti-clockwise and remove.X Pull bulb out of socket :.X Insert a new bulb into socket :.X Insert socket : and turn it clockwise until it

engages.X Close the bonnet.

Replacing the rear lamp clusters

Overview of bulb types

Standard tail lamp

Lights Bulb type

: Third brake lamp LED

; Turn signal P 21 W

= Brake lamp, tail lamp/parking lamp

P 21 W

? Reversing lamp P 21 W

A Rear foglamp (driver'sside)

P 21 W

B Licence plate illumina-tion

LED

LED tail lamp

Lights Bulb type

: Third brake lamp LED

; Turn signal LED

= Brake lamp, tail lamp/parking lamp

LED

? Reversing lamp W 16 W

A Rear foglamp (driver'sside)

LED

B Licence plate illumina-tion

LED

136 Replacing bulbs: vehicles with halogen headlampsLi

ghts

and

win

dscr

een

wip

ers

Tail lamps

Fitting/removing the tail lamp! Remove the tail lamp with care, so as not to

damage the paintwork.Due to their installation position, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have tail lampbulbs replaced at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Tail lamp (example: LED tail lamp)Please note that, for the LED tail lamp, you canonly change the bulb of the reversing lamp.X To remove: switch off the lighting system.X Open the tailgate.i The vehicle tool kit contains a screwdriver

(Y page 357).X Unscrew two side screws :.X Press tail lamp ; out as far as bolts =.X Prise tail lamp ; out from bolts =.X Pull the connector off the bulb holder of the

tail lamp.X To fit: press the connector into the bulb

holder of the tail lamp.X Press the tail lamp sideways onto bolts =

and slide onto the vehicle.X Tighten two side screws :.

Standard tail lamp

X Remove the tail lamp (Y page 137).X Unscrew three screws : and remove bulb

holder ; from the tail lamp.

Bulb holder= Turn signal? Brake lamp, tail lamp, parking lampA Reversing lampB Rear foglamp (driver's side only)X Apply light pressure to the corresponding

bulb, turning it anti-clockwise and remove itfrom the socket.

X Press the new bulb into the socket and screwit in clockwise.

X Insert bulb holder ; into the tail lamp andtighten all three screws :.

X Fit the tail lamp (Y page 137).

Replacing bulbs: vehicles with halogen headlamps 137

Ligh

ts a

nd w

inds

cree

n w

iper

s

Z

LED tail lamp

X Remove the tail lamp (Y page 137).X Unscrew housing cover : by turning anti-

clockwise.X Turn the socket anti-clockwise and remove.X Remove the bulb from the socket.X Insert a new bulb into the socket.X Insert the socket and tighten by turning clock-

wise.X Position housing cover : and tighten by turn-

ing clockwise.X Fit the tail lamp (Y page 137).

Windscreen wipers

Switching the windscreen wipers on/off

! Do not operate the windscreen wipers whenthe windscreen is dry, as this could damagethe wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has col-lected on the windscreen can scratch theglass if wiping takes place when the wind-screen is dry.If it is necessary to switch on the windscreenwipers in dry weather conditions, alwaysoperate them using washer fluid.

! If the windscreen wipers leave smears onthe windscreen after the vehicle has beenwashed in an automatic car wash, this may bedue to wax or other residue. Clean the wind-screen with washer fluid after an automaticcar wash.

! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due tooptical influences and the windscreen becom-ing dirty in dry weather conditions, the wind-screen wipers may be activated inadvertently.

This could damage the windscreen wiperblades or scratch the windscreen.For this reason, you should always switch offthe windscreen wipers in dry weather.

1 $ Windscreen wipers off2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor set

to low sensitivity)3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor

set to high sensitivity)4 ° Continuous wipe, slow5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fastB î1st pressure point – single wipe; 2nd

pressure point – wipe with washer fluidX Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition

lock.X Turn the í wiper switch to the corre-

sponding position.In the Ä or Å positions, the appropriatewiping frequency is set automatically accordingto the intensity of the rain. In the Å position,the rain sensor is more sensitive to precipitationthan in the Ä position, causing the wind-screen wipers to wipe more frequently.The windscreen will no longer be wiped properlyif the wiper blades are worn. This may preventyou from observing the traffic conditions. Infor-mation on replacing the wiper blades can befound under "Replacing wiper blades"(Y page 139).

138 Windscreen wipersLi

ghts

and

win

dscr

een

wip

ers

Switching the rear window wiper on/off

1 b Wipes with washer fluid2 ° Intermittent wipe3 $ Rear window wiper off4 b Wipes with washer fluidX Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition

lock.X Move the è switch to the corresponding

position.If the rear window wiper is activated, the èsymbol is shown in the Assistance graphicmenu in the on-board computer(Y page 255).

X To wipe with washer fluid: press the èswitch beyond the current position as far as itwill go to 1 or press and hold 4.When you release the è switch, the rearwindow wiper continues to wipe for aboutanother five seconds. The rear window wiperthen wipes according to the original position2 or 3.

The rear window wiper switches on automati-cally if you engage reverse gear and the wind-screen wipers are on.If the vehicle is stationary and you open the tail-gate, the rear window wiper will stop automati-cally. The rear window wiper will only resumewiping again when the tailgate is closed and youpull away again.The rear window will no longer be wiped properlyif the wiper blade is worn. This may prevent youfrom observing the traffic conditions. Informa-tion on replacing the wiper blade can be foundunder "Replacing wiper blades" (Y page 139).

Replacing the wiper blades

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the windscreen wipers begin to move whileyou are changing the wiper blades, you can betrapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windscreen wipers andignition before changing the wiper blades.

! Never open the bonnet/tailgate if a wiperarm is folded away from the windscreen/rearwindow.Never fold a windscreen wiper arm without awiper blade back onto the windscreen/rearwindow.Hold the windscreen wiper arm firmly whenyou change the wiper blade. If you release thewiper arm without a wiper blade and it fallsonto the windscreen/rear window, the wind-screen/rear window may be damaged by theforce of the impact.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe wiper blades changed at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

! Only touch the wiper blade on the wiperarm. Otherwise, you could damage the wiperblade.

Wiper blades are wear parts. The windscreenwill no longer be wiped properly if the wiperblades are worn. This may prevent you fromobserving the traffic conditions.Please observe the service indicator afterchanging the wiper blades of the windscreenwipers.

Service indicatorReplacement wiper blades for the windscreenwipers have a service indicator on the tip of thewiper blade.Depending on the amount of use, the serviceindicator will change colour from black to yel-low.Change the wiper blade if:Rthe wiper blade is damagedRthe service indicator has turned yellow

Windscreen wipers 139

Ligh

ts a

nd w

inds

cree

n w

iper

s

Z

In order to activate the service indicator, youhave to remove the protective film(Y page 140).

Windscreen wipers

X Fold the wiper arm away from the windscreen.X Hold the wiper arm and turn the wiper blade in

the direction of arrow : away from the wiperarm as far as it will go.

X Slide catch ; upwards in the direction of thearrow until you can feel and hear it engage inthe changing position.

X Remove wiper blade = from wiper arm bypulling it in the direction of the arrow.

X Insert new wiper blade = into the wiper armin the direction of the arrow.Please take the differing lengths of the twowiper blades into account:RDriver's side - long wiper bladeRCo-driver's side - short wiper blade

X Slide catch ; downwards in the direction ofthe arrow until you can feel and hear itengage.

X Fold the wiper arm back onto the windscreen.

X Remove protective film ? from the serviceindicator on the tip of the wiper blades.

140 Windscreen wipersLi

ghts

and

win

dscr

een

wip

ers

Rear window wiper

Tailgate

X Fold wiper arm : away from the rear windowuntil you hear it engage.

X Hold wiper arm : and pull wiper blade ; inthe direction of the arrow away from the wiperarm.

X Place new wiper blade ; onto wiper arm :.X Hold wiper arm : and push wiper blade ; in

the opposite direction to the arrow until itengages.

X Make sure that wiper blade ; is in the cor-rect position.

X Fold wiper arm : back onto the rear window.

Rear doors

Rear window wipers (example: left rear door)X Fold wiper arm = away from the rear window.X Press both retaining clips ; together in the

direction of the arrow and swing wiperblade : away from wiper arm =.

X Pull wiper blade : up and out of the retaineron wiper arm =.

X Slide new wiper blade : into the retainer onwiper arm =.

X Press new wiper blade : onto wiper arm =until you hear retaining clips ; engage.

X Fold wiper arm = back onto the rear window.

Windscreen wipers 141

Ligh

ts a

nd w

inds

cree

n w

iper

s

Z

Problems with the windscreen wipers

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The windscreen wiperjams.

Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windscreenwiper movement. The wiper motor has switched off.X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and

traffic conditions.X For safety reasons, you should remove the key from the ignition

lock.X Remove the cause of the obstruction.X Switch on the windscreen wipers again.

The windscreen wiperdoes not move at all.

There is a malfunction in the windscreen wiper drive.X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.X Have the windscreen wipers checked at a qualified specialist work-

shop.

The windscreen washerfluid from the spray noz-zles no longer hits thecentre of the wind-screen/ rear window.

The spray nozzles are misaligned.X Have the spray nozzles checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

142 Windscreen wipersLi

ghts

and

win

dscr

een

wip

ers

Useful information

These Operating Instructions describe all mod-els as well as standard and optional equipmentof your vehicle that were available at the time ofgoing to print. Country-specific variations arepossible. Note that your vehicle may not be fit-ted with all of the described functions. This alsoapplies to safety-relevant systems and func-tions.Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops: (Y page 31).

Overview of climate control systems

Important safety notesObserve the recommended settings on the fol-lowing pages. Otherwise, the windows couldmist up.To prevent the windows from misting up:Ronly switch off climate control brieflyRonly activate air-recirculation mode brieflyRactivate the cooling with air dehumidification

functionRswitch on the demisting function briefly, if

necessary

Climate control regulates the temperature andthe humidity in the vehicle interior and filtersundesirable substances from the air.Climate control is only operational when theengine is running. The system only functionsoptimally when the side windows are closed.Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period duringwarm weather. In order to cool the vehicle morerapidly, switch climate control to air-recircula-tion mode briefly. This will speed up the coolingprocess and the desired interior temperaturewill be reached more quickly.The integrated filter can filter out most particlesof dust and completely filters out pollen. Vehi-cles with THERMOTRONIC automatic climatecontrol: gaseous pollutants and odours will alsobe reduced. A clogged filter reduces the amountof air supplied to the vehicle interior. For thisreason, you should always observe the intervalfor replacing the filter, which is specified in theService Booklet. As the interval betweenchanges depends on environmental conditions,e.g. heavy air pollution, the interval may beshorter than stated in the Service Booklet.

Control panel for the TEMPMATIC air-conditioning system

: w Sets the temperature (Y page 152); _ Sets the air distribution (Y page 152)=H Sets the airflow (Y page 153)

Overview of climate control systems 143

Clim

ate

cont

rol

? ¿ Switches the cooling with air dehumidification function on/off (Y page 146)A ¬ Demists the windscreen (Y page 154)B Ù Calls up the multimedia system climate control menu; see the separate operating instruc-

tionsC ¤ Switches the rear window heating and mirror heating on/off (Y page 155)D & Switches the hot-water auxiliary heater (auxiliary heating) on/off (Y page 158)E g Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode manually (Y page 155)F Y Calls up the climate control menu of the multimedia system for rear-compartment heat-

ing/air conditioning; see the separate operating instructions

Optimum use of the TEMPMATIC air-conditioning system

Below, you can find a number of notes and rec-ommendations to help you use the air-condi-tioning system optimally.RSwitch on the cooling with air-dehumidifica-

tion function. The indicator lamp in the¿ rocker switch comes on when the func-tion is switched on.RSet the temperature to 22 †. Only change the

temperature in small increments.ROnly use the demisting function briefly, until

the windscreen is clear again. The indicator

lamp in the ¬ rocker switch comes onwhen the function is switched on.ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if

there are unpleasant outside odours or whenin a tunnel. The windows could otherwise mistup as no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle inair-recirculation mode. The indicator lamp inthe g rocker switch comes on when thefunction is switched on.

During automatic engine switch-off, the climatecontrol system only operates at a reduced capa-city. Further information on the automaticengine switch-off can be found under "ECOstart/stop function" (Y page 175).

Control panel for THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control

Vehicles with hot-water auxiliary heaterFront control panel

: w Sets temperature, left (Y page 152); _ Sets the air distribution (Y page 152)=H Sets the airflow (Y page 153)

144 Overview of climate control systemsCl

imat

e co

ntro

l

? Ã Regulates climate control automatically (Y page 149)A ¬ Demists the windscreen (Y page 154)B Ù Calls up the multimedia system climate control menu; see the separate operating instruc-

tionsB Ì Switches the residual heat utilisation on or off (Y page 156)C ¤ Switches the rear window heating and mirror heating on or off (Y page 155)D & Switches the hot-water auxiliary heater on or off (Y page 158)E g Activates or deactivates air-recirculation mode manually (Y page 155)F Y Calls up the climate control menu of the multimedia system for rear-compartment air

conditioning; see the separate operating instructionsG w Sets the temperature, right (Y page 152)

Rear control panelH w Sets the temperature (Y page 152)I DisplayJ K Sets airflow (Y page 153)

Vehicles without hot-water auxiliary heater (auxiliary heating)Front control panel

: w Sets the temperature, left (Y page 152); _ Sets air distribution (Y page 152)=H Sets the airflow (Y page 153)? Ã Regulates climate control automatically (Y page 149)A ¬ Defrosts the windscreen (Y page 154)B Ù Calls up the multimedia system climate control menu; see the separate operating instruc-

tionsB Ì Switches the residual heat utilisation on or off (Y page 156)C ¤ Switches the rear window heating and mirror heating on or off (Y page 155)D ¿ Switches the cooling with air dehumidification function on or off (Y page 146)E g Activates or deactivates air-recirculation mode manually (Y page 155)F Y Calls up the climate control menu of the multimedia system for rear-compartment air

conditioning; see the separate operating instructionsG w Sets the temperature, right (Y page 152)

Rear control panel

Overview of climate control systems 145

Clim

ate

cont

rol

H w Sets the temperature (Y page 152)I DisplayJ K Sets the airflow (Y page 153)

Optimum use of THERMOTRONICautomatic climate control

Below, you can find a number of notes and rec-ommendations to help you use climate controloptimally.RActivate climate control using the Ã

rocker switch. The indicator lamp above theà rocker switch lights up.RSet the temperature to 22 †.ROnly use the windscreen demisting function

briefly until the windscreen is clear again.ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if

there are unpleasant outside odours or whenin a tunnel. The windows could otherwise mistup as no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle inair-recirculation mode.

Approximately 60 minutes after parking thevehicle, THERMOTRONIC automatic climatecontrol can switch on automatically, dependingon the outside temperature. The vehicle is thenventilated for about 30 minutes at low fan set-ting and THERMOTRONIC automatic climatecontrol is dried out.During automatic engine switch-off, the climatecontrol system only operates at a reduced capa-city. Further information on the automaticengine switch-off can be found under "ECOstart/stop function" (Y page 175).

Operating the climate control system

Activating/deactivating climate con-trol

Important safety notesIf climate control is switched off, the air supplyand air circulation are also switched off. Onlyuse this setting for a brief period. Otherwise, thewindows could mist up.For vehicles with THERMOTRONIC automaticclimate control, switch on climate control pri-marily using the à rocker switch(Y page 149).Switch on climate control primarily using theà rocker switch (Y page 149).

Activating or deactivatingX Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.X To activate: press the Ù rocker switch up

or down.The multimedia climate control menu opens.

X Activate climate control using the multimediasystem (see the separate operating instruc-tions).

orX Increase airflow by setting the K rocker

switch to level 1 or higher.X To deactivate: press the Ù rocker switch

up or down.The multimedia climate control menu opens.

X Deactivate climate control using the multi-media system (see the separate operatinginstructions).

orX Set the airflow using the K rocker switch

to level 0.i When the climate control is switched off,

"OFF" appears in the display of the rear con-trol panel.

Activating/deactivating the coolingwith air dehumidification function

Important safety notesThe "Cooling with air dehumidification" functionof the air conditioning or automatic climate con-trol is only available when the engine is running.The air inside the vehicle is cooled and dehu-midified according to the temperature selected.Condensation may appear on the underside ofthe vehicle when in cooling mode. This is normaland not a sign that there is a malfunction.If you switch off the "Cooling with air dehumid-ification" function, the air inside the vehicle willnot be cooled (in warm weather) or dehumidi-fied. Therefore, only switch off the "Cooling withair dehumidification" function briefly. Other-wise, the windows will mist up more quickly.

146 Operating the climate control systemCl

imat

e co

ntro

l

Activating and deactivating

TEMPMATIC air-conditioning systemThe function can only be activated or deactiva-ted in the climate control menu and not in theclimate control menu for rear-compartment airconditioning (second menu level).X Press the ¿ rocker switch up or down.

If the indicator lamp above the ¿ rockerswitch lights up, the cooling with air dehu-midification function is switched on.

orX Activate and deactivate cooling with air dehu-

midification via the multimedia system (seethe separate operating instructions).

THERMOTRONIC automatic climate con-trolThe function can only be activated or deactiva-ted in the climate control menu and not in the

climate control menu for rear-compartment airconditioning (second menu level).X On vehicles without hot-water auxiliary heat-

ing, press the ¿ rocker switch up or down.If the indicator lamp above the ¿ rockerswitch lights up, the cooling with air dehu-midification function is switched on.

orX Activate and deactivate the cooling with air

dehumidification function via the multimediasystem; see the separate operating instruc-tions.

i For vehicles with a hot-water auxiliaryheater, there is no ¿ rocker switch. Youcan activate or deactivate the cooling with airdehumidification function via the multimediasystem.

i In automatic mode, the cooling with airdehumidification function is automaticallyactivated (Y page 149).

Operating the climate control system 147

Clim

ate

cont

rol

Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

THERMOTRONIC auto-matic climate control with hot-water auxili-ary heater: the coolingwith air dehumidificationfunction can no longerbe activated via the mul-timedia system; see theseparate operatinginstructions.

The cooling with air dehumidification function has been deactivateddue to a malfunction.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

TEMPMATIC air-condi-tioning system with hot-water auxiliary heater: the indicatorlamp above the¿ rocker switchflashes three times orremains off. The coolingwith air dehumidificationfunction can also no lon-ger be activated via themultimedia system; seethe separate operatinginstructions.

The cooling with air dehumidification function has been deactivateddue to a malfunction.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

TEMPMATIC air-condi-tioning system or THERMOTRONIC auto-matic climate control without hot-water aux-iliary heater: the indica-tor lamp above the¿ rocker switchflashes three times orremains off. The coolingwith air dehumidificationfunction can also no lon-ger be activated via themultimedia system; seethe separate operatinginstructions.

The cooling with air dehumidification function has been deactivateddue to a malfunction.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

148 Operating the climate control systemCl

imat

e co

ntro

l

Regulating climate control automati-cally

General notesWhen THERMOTRONIC automatic climate con-trol is in automatic mode, the set temperature isautomatically kept constant. The system auto-matically regulates the temperature of the dis-pensed air, the airflow and the air distribution.Automatic mode will achieve optimal operationif the cooling with air dehumidification functionis also activated. If desired, the cooling with airdehumidification function can be deactivated(Y page 146).

THERMOTRONIC automatic climatecontrolAutomatic mode can only be activated or deac-tivated in the climate control menu and not inthe climate control menu for rear compartmentair conditioning (second menu level).X To activate and deactivate automatic

mode: press rocker switch à up or down.When the indicator lamp above the rockerswitch à lights up, automatic mode is acti-vated.

In automatic mode, if you adjust the airflow orair distribution manually, the indicator lampabove the à rocker switch goes out. Thefunction which has not been changed manually,however, continues to be controlled automati-cally. When the manually set function isswitched back to automatic mode, the indicatorlamp above the à rocker switch lights upagain.If you change the airflow for the rear compart-ment via the rear control panel:RTHERMOTRONIC automatic climate control

remains in automatic mode for the front areaRthe indicator lamp above the à rocker

switch stays litIf you then press the rocker switch à up ordown once more, automatic mode is also reac-tivated for the rear compartment.

Setting the airflow with the TEMP-MATIC air-conditioning system

Important safety notesFor safety reasons, the side windows are sup-plied with air via the side air vents in all airflowsettings. Otherwise, the windows could mist up.

Recommended air distribution settingsCoolingmode

P direct climate controlb indirect/draught-free climatecontrol

Transi-tionalrangecooling/heatingmode

N transition cooling heatingb transition heating cooling

Heatingmode

¯ window demisting function,clear windows_ direct heatinga indirect/footwell heatingO footwell heating

Setting the climate mode withTHERMOTRONIC automatic climatecontrol

THERMOTRONIC automatic climatecontrolThe MEDIUM climate mode is the default set-ting.In automatic mode you can select the followingclimate modes for the driver's and co-driver'sareas:FOCUS climate modeHigh airflow. Very direct climate control in thevehicle interior directed at the head and body ofoccupants. Specified temperature reached veryquickly.

Operating the climate control system 149

Clim

ate

cont

rol

Cooling modeCooling via air vents only. Colder air, thereforevery fast and direct cooling in the vehicle inte-rior.

Heating modeHeating mainly directed at the body of occu-pants and into the footwells, with some warm airrouted through the side, centre and demistervents.MEDIUM climate modeDefault setting. Medium airflow. Balanced, evenclimate control in the vehicle interior and speci-fied temperature reached accordingly.

Cooling mode

Initial phase of cooling via air vents. Air subse-quently also distributed via the demister vents;efficient cooling in vehicle interior.

Heating modeIn the initial phase, heating mainly in the foot-wells with medium amounts of warm air directedthrough the side, centre and demister vents.Followed by airflow mainly in the footwell witheven warming of the vehicle interior.DIFFUSE climate modeIndirect, draught-free climate control in the vehi-cle interior. Low airflow, air vents have lesslocalised effect.

Cooling modeInitial phase of cooling via air vents. Subse-quently, air distribution through the demistervents with slightly cooled air, thereby reducedcooling in the vehicle interior.

150 Operating the climate control systemCl

imat

e co

ntro

l

Heating modeIndirect heating mainly in the footwells, withsmall amounts of warm air directed through theside and demister vents; no inflow of warm air inthe headroom.X To set: set the climate mode via the multi-

media system; see the separate operatinginstructions.

THERMOTRONIC automatic climatecontrol with improved performanceUse the recommended MEDIUM climate modeas the standard setting.In automatic mode you can select the followingclimate modes for the driver's and co-driver'sareas:FOCUS climate modeVery high airflow. Very direct climate control inthe vehicle interior directed at the head andbody of occupants. Specified temperaturereached very quickly.

Cooling modeCooling via air vents only. Cold air, so rapid anddirect cooling in the vehicle interior.

Heating modeHeating mainly directed at the body of occu-pants and into the footwells, with some warm airrouted through the side, centre and demistervents.MEDIUM climate modeHigh airflow. Direct climate control in the vehi-cle interior directed at the head and body ofoccupants. Specified temperature reachedquickly.

Cooling modeCooling via air vents only. Cold air, so rapid anddirect cooling in the vehicle interior.

Heating mode

Operating the climate control system 151

Clim

ate

cont

rol

In the initial phase, heating mainly in the foot-wells with medium amounts of warm air directedthrough the side, centre and demister vents.Followed by airflow mainly in the footwell witheven warming of the vehicle interior.DIFFUSE climate modeMedium airflow. Balanced, even climate controlin the vehicle interior and specified temperaturereached accordingly.

Cooling modeInitial phase of cooling via air vents. Followed byair distribution including via the demister vents,so good cooling in the vehicle interior.

Heating modeIndirect heating mainly in the footwells, withsmall amounts of warm air directed through theside, centre and demister vents; no inflow ofwarm air in the headroom.X To set: set the climate mode via the multi-

media system; see the separate operatinginstructions.

Setting the temperature

Increasing or reducing the temperaturevia the front control panelX To increase or reduce: press the w

rocker switch up or down.orX Set the temperature via the multimedia sys-

tem; see the separate operating instructions.Only change the temperature in small incre-ments. Start at 22 †.

Setting the temperature for the rearcompartment via the front control panelX To increase or reduce: set the temperature

via the multimedia system (see the separateoperating instructions).

orX Press the X button.X To increase or reduce: press the w

rocker switch up or down.Only change the temperature in small incre-ments. Start at 22 †.

Setting the temperature for the rearcompartment via the rear control panelX To increase or reduce: press the w

rocker switch on the rear control panel up ordown (Y page 144).Only change the temperature in small incre-ments. Start at 22 †.The rear control panel display indicates theset temperature.

Setting the air distribution

Important safety notesFor safety reasons, the side windows are sup-plied with air via the side air vents in all air dis-tribution settings. Otherwise, the windowscould mist up.

152 Operating the climate control systemCl

imat

e co

ntro

l

TEMPMATIC air-conditioning systemand THERMOTRONIC automatic climatecontrol

Air distribution settings¯ Directs air through the demister ventsP Directs air through the centre and side air

ventsO Directs air through the footwell ventsS Directs air through the centre, side and

footwell ventsa Directs air through the demister and foot-

well vents_ Directs air through the demister, centre,

side and footwell ventsb Directs air through the demister, centre

and side air ventsW Controls air distribution automatically

Setting the air distributionX Press the _ rocker switch up or down.

The various air distribution settings appear inthe multimedia system.

X Press the _ rocker switch up or down untilthe desired setting is reached.

orX Adjust the air distribution via the multimedia

system; see the separate operating instruc-tions.

i If the air distribution is set when in auto-matic mode, automatic control is deactiva-ted. The indicator lamp above the Ãrocker switch then goes out. The airflow con-tinues to be adjusted automatically, however.

Rear-compartment heating or rear-com-partment air conditioningWhen the rear-compartment heating is switchedon, the warm air is automatically directed to theair outlet on the left-hand side of the vehicle inthe rear-compartment footwell.When the rear-compartment air conditioningsystem is switched on, the air distribution set-ting on the control panel also applies to rear-compartment air conditioning.This also applies to the automatic mode ofTHERMOTRONIC automatic climate control. Theair is then automatically directed to the footwellor the headroom of the rear compartment.

Setting the airflow

Increasing or reducing the airflow viathe front control panelX To increase or reduce: press the K

rocker switch up or down.orX Adjust the airflow using the multimedia sys-

tem; see the separate operating instructions).i If the airflow is set when in automatic mode,

automatic control is deactivated. The indica-tor lamp above the à rocker switch thengoes out. The air distribution continues to beadjusted automatically, however.

Setting the airflow for the rear compart-ment via the front control panelX To increase or reduce: adjust the airflow via

the multimedia system (see the separateoperating instructions).

orX Press the X button.X To increase or reduce: press the K

rocker switch up or down.

Setting the airflow for the rear compart-ment via the front control panelX To increase or reduce: press the K

rocker switch on the rear control panel up ordown (Y page 144).

Activating/deactivating the synchro-nisation function

General notesThe temperature can be set centrally using thesynchronisation function. The temperature set-ting for the driver's side is then adopted for theco-driver's side and the rear compartment.

Operating the climate control system 153

Clim

ate

cont

rol

Activating/deactivating the synchroni-sation functionX Activate/deactivate the synchronisation

function via the multimedia system; see theseparate operating instructions.TEMPMATIC air-conditioning system: the syn-chronisation function switches off if the set-tings for the rear compartment are changed.THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control:the synchronisation function switches off ifthe settings for the co-driver's side or the rearcompartment are changed.

Demisting the windscreen

General notesYou can use this function to defrost the wind-screen or to demist the inside of the windscreenand the front side windows.Switch off the windscreen demisting function assoon as the windscreen is clear again.

Activating/deactivating the wind-screen demisting functionX Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.X To activate: press the ¬ rocker switch on

the front control panel up or down.The indicator lamp above the ¬ rockerswitch lights up. The current climate controlsettings are deactivated.The climate control system switches to thefollowing functions:Rincreased airflow as requiredRtemperature rise as requiredRair distribution towards the windscreen and

front side windowsRair-recirculation mode off

i If necessary the cooling with air dehumidi-fication function is switched on. In this case,the indicator lamp above the ¿ rockerswitch remains off.

X To deactivate: press the ¬ rocker switchup or down.The indicator lamp above the ¬ rockerswitch goes out. The previous settings are

reactivated. Air-recirculation mode remainsdeactivated.

orX On vehicles with automatic climate control:

press the à rocker switch up or down.

Demisting the windows

Windows misted up on the insideX Activate the cooling with air dehumidification

function with the ¿ rocker switch.orX Activate the "Cooling with air dehumidifica-

tion" function via the multimedia system; seethe separate operating instructions.For automatic climate control with hot-waterauxiliary heater, the cooling with air dehumid-ification function can only be activated via themultimedia system.

X If the windows continue to mist up, activatethe windscreen demisting function using the¬ rocker switch.You should only select this setting until thewindscreen is clear again.

Windows misted up on the outsideYou should only select this setting until thewindscreen is clear again.X Switch on the windscreen wipers

(Y page 138).X Switch on climate control (Y page 146).X Summer operation for vehicles with the

TEMPMATIC air-conditioning system: select air distribution without the DEFROST¯ function (Y page 149).

X Summer operation for vehicles with THERMOTRONIC automatic climate con-trol: select FOCUS climate mode(Y page 149).

X Winter operation for vehicles with the TEMPMATIC air-conditioning systemselect the following options if required:RDEFROST air distribution ¯

(Y page 152) orRMAX DEFROST ¬ (Y page 143)

X Winter operation for vehicles with THERMOTRONIC automatic climate con-trol select the following options if required:

154 Operating the climate control systemCl

imat

e co

ntro

l

RDEFROST air distribution ¯(Y page 152) orRMAX DEFROST ¬ (Y page 144)

X Close the side air vents if required(Y page 169).

Switching the rear window heatingon/off

General notesThe rear window heating consumes a lot ofpower. You should therefore switch it off as

soon as the window is clear. Otherwise, the rearwindow heating only switches off automaticallyafter several minutes.If the battery voltage is too low, the rear windowheating may switch off.

Switching on/offX Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.X Press the ¤ rocker switch up or down.

The indicator lamp above the ¤ rockerswitch lights up or goes out.

Problems with the rear window heating

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The rear window heatinghas switched off prema-turely or cannot be acti-vated.

The battery has not been sufficiently charged.X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps,

interior lighting or seat heating.When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window heatingcan be activated again.

Activating/deactivating air-recircula-tion mode

Important safety notesYou can deactivate the intake of fresh air ifunpleasant odours enter the vehicle from out-side. The air inside the vehicle is then circulated.When you activate air-recirculation mode, theside windows and windows could mist up morequickly, in particular at low outside tempera-tures. Only activate air-recirculation mode for ashort time.

Activating and deactivatingX Press the g rocker switch up or down.

When the indicator lamp above the grocker switch lights up, air-recirculation modeis activated.

Air-recirculation mode activates automatically:Rat high outside temperaturesRwhile driving in a tunnel (only vehicles with

THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control)

The indicator lamp above the g rockerswitch does not light up. Outside air is addedautomatically after about 30 minutes.Air-recirculation mode is deactivated automati-cally:Rafter approximately five minutes at outside

temperatures below about 7 †Rafter approximately five minutes when the

cooling with air-dehumidification function isdeactivatedRafter approximately 30 minutes at outside

temperatures above about 7 † and when thecooling with air-dehumidification function isactive

Convenience opening/closing featurevia the air recirculation button

G WARNINGWhen using convenience closing, you couldbecome trapped within the sweep of the clos-ing window. There is a risk of injury.

Operating the climate control system 155

Clim

ate

cont

rol

Z

Monitor the entire closing procedure whenusing convenience closing. When closing,make sure that no one has any parts of thebody within the closing area.

G WARNINGDuring convenience opening parts of the bodycould be drawn in or become trappedbetween the side window and window frame.There is a risk of injury.When opening, make sure that nobody istouching the side window. If someonebecomes trapped, immediately pressthe W switch in the door to stop the move-ment of the side windows. To continue closingthe side window, pull on the W switch.

X Convenience closing feature with the air recirculation rocker switch: press and holdthe g rocker switch up or down until theside windows start to close automatically.The indicator lamp above the g rockerswitch lights up. The start position of the sidewindow is saved. Air-recirculation mode isactivated.If you open the side windows manually afterclosing them with the convenience closingfeature, they will open automatically as far asthe start position before the convenienceclosing.

If parts of the body are in the closing area duringconvenience closing, proceed as follows:X Press the W button for opening or closing

the side windows.The side windows stop.

X To then open the side windows, press theW button again.

If there is a danger of being trapped:X Press the g rocker switch up or down

once more.X Convenience opening feature with the air

recirculation rocker switch: press and hold

the g rocker switch up or down until theside windows start to open automatically.The indicator lamp above the g rockerswitch goes out. Air-recirculation mode isdeactivated.

X Pre-entry climate control and conveni-ence opening with the key: press and holdthe % button on the key.The side windows open automatically and theblower of the climate control system is acti-vated.

X Release the % button.i At high interior temperatures, the blower is

also switched on when a door is opened. Thismeans that slightly cooled air enters the vehi-cle interior after the engine is started, to coolthe vehicle more rapidly.

Switching the residual heat functionon/off

General notesOnly vehicles with THERMOTRONIC automaticclimate control have the residual heat function.Once the engine is switched off, it is possible tomake use of the residual heat of the engine tocontinue heating or ventilating the front com-partment of the vehicle for approximately30 minutes. The heating or ventilation timedepends on the set interior temperature.

Switching on/offX Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock

or remove it.X To switch on: press the Ì rocker switch

up or down.The indicator lamp above the Ì rockerswitch lights up.The blower will run at a low speed regardlessof the airflow setting.If you activate the residual heat function athigh outside temperatures, only the auxiliaryventilation will be activated. The blower thenruns at medium speed.

156 Operating the climate control systemCl

imat

e co

ntro

l

X To switch off: press the Ì rocker switchup or down.The indicator lamp above the Ì rockerswitch goes out.

The residual heat function switches off auto-matically:Rafter approximately 30 minutesRif the starter battery's charge status is too lowRwhen you switch on the ignitionRif the hot-water auxiliary heater is switched on

Operating the auxiliary heating sys-tem

Important safety notes

G DANGERIf the exhaust pipe is blocked or sufficientventilation is not possible, toxic exhaustfumes may enter the vehicle, especially car-bon monoxide. This is the case in enclosedspaces or if the vehicle is stuck in snow, forexample. There is a risk of fatal injuries.Switch off the auxiliary heating in enclosedspaces without extraction systems, e.g. in agarage. If the vehicle is stuck in snow and youhave to leave the auxiliary heating running,keep the exhaust pipe and the area around thevehicle clear of snow. To guarantee a suffi-cient supply of fresh air, open a window on theside of the vehicle away from the wind.

G WARNINGParts of the vehicle, e.g. the exhaust system,may become very hot when the auxiliary heat-ing system is switched on.Flammable material, such as leaves, grass ortwigs, may ignite if it comes into contact with:Rhot parts of the exhaust systemRthe exhaust gas itselfThere is a risk of fire.

Make sure, when the auxiliary heating systemis switched on, that:Rhot vehicle components do not come into

contact with flammable materialRexhaust gases can emerge unobstructed

from the exhaust pipeRexhaust gases do not come into contact

with flammable material

The heating unit for the auxiliary heating is fittedat the front of the vehicle underbody. The emis-sions outlet is on the left side of the vehiclebelow the front door.

G WARNINGVehicles with an auxiliary warm-air heater:If work on the heat exchanger of the auxiliarywarm-air heater is not performed correctly,exhaust fumes could leak into the passengercompartment. There is a risk of poisoning,possibly even fatal.You should have all work on the auxiliarywarm-air heater carried out at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Your vehicle may be equipped with either a hot-water auxiliary heater or an auxiliary warm-airheater. Adjustment and operation of the:Rhot-water auxiliary heater can be activated via

the & rocker switch in the control panel ofthe climate control system and via the multi-media system or by using the remote control(Y page 159)Rauxiliary warm-air heater can be activated via

the timer in the lower centre console(Y page 164) or via the remote control(Y page 163)

Hot-water auxiliary heater

General notes! Operating the hot-water auxiliary heater

draws from the vehicle battery. For this rea-son, drive for a longer distance after using theheater or ventilating the vehicle twice, at thelatest.

Operating the auxiliary heating system 157

Clim

ate

cont

rol

Z

Always observe the important safety instruc-tions when operating the auxiliary heating(Y page 157)The hot-water auxiliary heater complements theclimate control system of your vehicle and has aheater booster function, an auxiliary heatingfunction and an auxiliary ventilation function. Inaddition, the auxiliary heating system heats theengine coolant to preserve the engine and savefuel during the warming-up phase.The auxiliary heating heats the air in the vehicleinterior to the set temperature. This occurs with-out using the heat of the running engine. Theauxiliary heating is operated directly using thevehicle's fuel. For this reason, the tank contentmust be at least at reserve fuel level to ensurethat the auxiliary heating functions.The auxiliary heating automatically adjusts tochanges in outside temperature and weatherconditions. For this reason, the auxiliary heatingcould switch from ventilation mode to heatingmode or from heating mode to ventilation mode.The auxiliary ventilation is not active if theengine is running.The auxiliary heating system switches off auto-matically after a maximum of 50 minutes.You cannot use the auxiliary ventilation to coolthe vehicle interior to a temperature lower thanthe outside temperature.The heater booster function supports the cli-mate control system when the engine is runningand the outside temperature is low.

Before switching onX Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.X Set the desired temperature using the w

rocker switch on the control panel of the cli-mate control system in the centre console.

orX Set the desired temperature via the multime-

dia system (see the separate operatinginstructions).

If you do not alter the temperature beforeswitching on the auxiliary heating, the last tem-perature setting will be adopted.The auxiliary heating can also be switched on ifthe manually set climate control is activated.Optimum comfort can be attained when the sys-tem is set to automatic mode. Set the temper-ature to 22 †.

You can activate or deactivate the auxiliary heat-ing:Rusing the & rocker switch in the control

panel of the climate control system located inthe centre console (Y page 158)Rusing the remote control (Y page 159)You can specify up to 3 departure times, one ofwhich may be preselected:Rusing the remote control (Y page 160)Rusing the multimedia system (see the sepa-

rate operating instructions)The auxiliary heater timer function calculatesthe switch-on time according to the outsidetemperature and the activated departure time.This means that the vehicle is preheated or pre-cooled by the departure time.If the departure time is reached and the engineis not started, the auxiliary heating system con-tinues to run for approximatelyfive more minutes. It then switches off automat-ically.When the auxiliary heating system is operatingand the engine is started at the end of theremaining time, the heater booster function ofthe auxiliary heating system is activated. Theheater booster function can be switched offusing the & rocker switch on the rear controlpanel as described above for the auxiliary heat-ing system.When the auxiliary heating system is ventilatingand the engine is started at the end of theremaining time, the heater booster functionswitches off automatically.

Switching the auxiliary heating on/offvia the front control panelThe coloured indicator lamps above the &rocker switch have the following meanings:Blue Auxiliary ventilation switched onRed Auxiliary heating switched onYellow Departure time preselected

158 Operating the auxiliary heating systemCl

imat

e co

ntro

l

X To switch on the auxiliary heating: pressrocker switch : up or down.The red or the blue indicator lamp aboverocker switch : lights up.

X To set the temperature: switch on auxiliaryheatingThe multimedia system is activated forapproximately one minute.

X Set the desired temperature via the multime-dia system (see the separate operatinginstructions).

X To switch off auxiliary heating: pressrocker switch : up or down.The red or the blue indicator lamp aboverocker switch : goes out.

If you switch on the auxiliary heating while theengine is running, you activate the heater boos-ter function of the auxiliary heating. The heaterbooster function then supports the climate con-trol system of your vehicle and helps to heat upthe vehicle interior as quickly as possible.At outside temperatures below Ò9 † the heaterbooster function is switched on automaticallywhen the engine is started. The red indicatorlamp above the & rocker switch lights up.Until the engine is switched on again, the heaterbooster function can be switched off as descri-bed for the auxiliary heating. When you switchoff the engine, the heater booster function isswitched off automatically.

Operating the auxiliary heating usingthe remote control

General notesThe auxiliary heating system can be operatedwith up to three remote controls. A remote con-trol must be synchronised to an auxiliary heatingsystem receiver. For more information, pleasecontact a qualified specialist workshop.

Store the remote control for the auxiliary heat-ing such that the auxiliary heating function can-not be switched on unintentionally. In particular,ensure that the remote control is kept out of thereach of children.The remote control has a range of approximately300 metres. This range is reduced by:Rsources of radio interferenceRsolid objects between the remote control and

the vehicleRthe remote control being in an unfavourable

position in relation to the vehicleRtransmitting from an enclosed spaceThe optimum range can be achieved if you holdthe remote control vertically, pointing upwardswhen you press one of the buttons.If the remote control battery is low, the batterysymbol on the left of the remote control displayis shown as empty. Replace the remote controlbattery (Y page 160).

Switching auxiliary heating on and off

: Display; u Switches the auxiliary heating/venti-

lation on and checks the status of the aux-iliary heating

= . Sets a departure time? ^ Switches off the auxiliary heating/

ventilationA , Sets a departure timeX To switch on: press and hold down the u

button.The remote control display shows ON.

X To switch off: press and hold the ^ but-ton.The remote control display shows OFF.

Operating the auxiliary heating system 159

Clim

ate

cont

rol

Z

Checking the status of the auxiliary heat-ingX Briefly press the u button.The following messages may appear in the dis-play:

Display Meaning

The auxiliary heating isswitched off.

The auxiliary ventilation isswitched on and the num-ber in the display showsthe remaining time inminutes.

The auxiliary heating isswitched on and the num-ber in the display showsthe remaining time inminutes.

A departure time has beenactivated. The departuretime appears in the dis-play.

A departure time has beenactivated. The auxiliaryventilation is switched onand the number in the dis-play shows the remainingtime in minutes. If thevehicle is not started afterthis remaining time, therunning time is increasedby five minutes.

A departure time has beenactivated. The auxiliaryheating is switched on andthe number in the displayshows the remaining timein minutes. If the vehicle isnot started after thisremaining time, the run-ning time is increased byfive minutes.

Setting a departure timeObserve the notes on the auxiliary heating timerfunction (Y page 158).Make sure that the time in the vehicle has beenset correctly before you set the departure time

(see the separate operating instructions). Oth-erwise, the auxiliary heating may switch on atthe wrong time and at an unsuitable location.When setting the departure time, also observethe important safety notes for operation of theauxiliary heating (Y page 157).X Briefly press the u button.X Press the , or . button repeatedly

until the display shows the time to bechanged.

X Press the u and ^ buttons simultane-ously.The Î symbol in the remote control displayflashes.

X Set the desired departure time using the ,or . button.

i The longer you press the , or . but-ton, the faster the time changes.

X Press the u and ^ buttons simultane-ously.The new departure time is stored.

Activating the set departure timeX Briefly press the u button.X Press the , or . button repeatedly

until the displays shows the desired departuretime.

X Press the u button.The display shows the Í symbol and thedeparture time with its code letters A, B or C.

Deactivating the set departure timeX Briefly press the u button.X Press the , or . button.

The display shows the status of the auxiliaryheating.

X Press the . button.The display shows the first departure timesaved.

X Press the ^ button.The display shows OFF

Replacing the remote control battery

G WARNINGBatteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result insevere health problems. There is a risk of fatalinjury.

160 Operating the auxiliary heating systemCl

imat

e co

ntro

l

Keep batteries out of the reach of children. Ifa battery is swallowed, seek medical attentionimmediately.

H Environmental noteBatteries contain pollutants.It is illegal to dispose of themwith the household rubbish.They must be collected sep-arately and disposed of in anenvironmentally responsiblerecycling system.Dispose of batteries in anenvironmentally responsiblemanner. Take dischargedbatteries to a qualified spe-cialist workshop or to a col-lection point for used batter-ies.

If the remote control display shows an emptybattery symbol, the battery needs to bereplaced.You need a CR 2450 lithium battery, which canbe obtained from any qualified specialist work-shop.

X Press a pointed object into recess :.X Slide battery cover ; backwards in the direc-

tion of the arrow.X Remove battery =.X Insert the new clean battery with the lettering

facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so.X Slide battery cover ; in the opposite direc-

tion to the arrow on the remote control until itengages.

X Check all the functions of the remote control.

Problems with the auxiliary heatingCorresponding messages may also be shown in the display of the on-board computer(Y page 282).

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The display of theremote control showsthe FAIL message and¨ symbol.

There is no connection between the remote control and the receiver inthe vehicle.X Change your position in relation to the vehicle, e.g. hold the remote

control higher or to the side.X Move closer.

The display of theremote control showsthe FAIL message and¯ symbol.

A malfunction has occurred. The auxiliary heating switches off auto-matically.X Have the auxiliary heating checked at a qualified specialist work-

shop.

Operating the auxiliary heating system 161

Clim

ate

cont

rol

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The display of theremote control showsthe FAIL message.

Lack of fuel.The fuel tank is less than Õ full. The auxiliary heating switches offautomatically.X Refuel at the nearest filling station.X Subsequently, start the auxiliary heating several times until the fuel

lines are full.

The display of theremote control showsthe FAIL message.

The on-board voltage is too low. The auxiliary heating has switcheditself off or cannot be switched on.X Drive for a considerable distance.

The battery charges. The auxiliary heating is operational again assoon as the on-board electrical system voltage is sufficient.

The auxiliary heating sys-tem switches off auto-matically and/or cannotbe switched on.

The fuel tank is less than Õ full. The auxiliary heating switches offautomatically.X Refuel at the nearest filling station.X Subsequently, start the auxiliary heating several times until the fuel

lines are full.

The auxiliary heating sys-tem switches off auto-matically and/or cannotbe switched on.

The on-board voltage is too low. The auxiliary heating has switcheditself off or cannot be switched on.X Drive for a considerable distance.

The battery charges. The auxiliary heating is operational again assoon as the on-board electrical system voltage is sufficient.

The auxiliary heating sys-tem switches off auto-matically and/or cannotbe switched on.

The fuse is malfunctioning.X Replace the fuse; see the "Fuse allocation" supplement.X Have the cause of the blown fuse determined at a qualified spe-

cialist workshop.

The auxiliary heating sys-tem switches off auto-matically and/or cannotbe switched on.

A malfunction has occurred.X Have the auxiliary heating checked at a qualified specialist work-

shop.

Auxiliary warm-air heater

General notes! Operating the auxiliary warm-air heater

draws from the vehicle battery. For this rea-son, drive for a longer distance after using theheater twice, at the latest.

! Make sure that the flow of hot air is notblocked. The auxiliary heating will otherwiseoverheat and switch off.

Always observe the important safety instruc-tions when operating the auxiliary heating(Y page 157)

The air-intake aperture for the auxiliary warm-airheater is located on the inner side of the leftfront seat base. The warm-air outlet is locatedon the rear side of this seat facing the rear com-partment.The auxiliary warm-air heater supplements theclimate control system of your vehicle and hasan auxiliary heating function.The auxiliary heating system heats the air in thevehicle interior to the set temperature (prese-lection temperature). This occurs without usingthe heat of the running engine. The auxiliaryheating is operated directly using the vehicle'sfuel. For this reason, the tank content must be at

162 Operating the auxiliary heating systemCl

imat

e co

ntro

l

least at reserve fuel level to ensure that the aux-iliary heating functions.The auxiliary heating switches off automaticallywhen the engine is switched off or when the setheating time has elapsed.The immediate heating mode of the auxiliaryheating supports the climate control systemwhen the engine is running and the outside tem-perature is low.You can operate the auxiliary heating:Rvia the timer in the lower centre console

(Y page 164)Rusing the remote control (Y page 163)You can use the timer to specify up to 3 depar-ture times, one of which may be preselected:

Operating the auxiliary heating usingthe remote control

General notesYou can switch the auxiliary heating on and offas well as set the operating duration with aremote control. The remote control must besynchronised with the auxiliary heating systemreceiver. For more information, please contact aqualified specialist workshop.Store the remote control for the auxiliary heat-ing such that the auxiliary heating function can-not be switched on unintentionally. In particular,ensure that the remote control is kept out of thereach of children.The remote control has a range of approximately300 metres. This range is reduced by:Rsources of radio interferenceRsolid objects between the remote control and

the vehicleRthe remote control being in an unfavourable

position in relation to the vehicleRtransmitting from an enclosed space

Overview of the remote control

: Indicator lamp; To confirm settings= To switch the remote control on or off,

change the operating duration or end orcancel settings

Indicator lamp : lights up in various ways toshow different operating modes:

Signalling Meaning

Lights up red Remote control switched on

Data transfer

Flashes red Auxiliary heating switchedoff

Lights upgreen

Auxiliary heating switchedon

Flashes green Change operating durationactive

Flashes alter-nately red andgreen

Remote control in synchro-nising mode

When the remote control battery is weak, indi-cator lamp : flashes red rapidly. Replace theremote control battery (Y page 166).You can find further information on the lampstatus under "Problems with the auxiliary heat-ing" (Y page 167).

Switching the remote control on and offThe remote control switches to standby modeafter 10 seconds. Indicator lamp : goes out.

Operating the auxiliary heating system 163

Clim

ate

cont

rol

Z

X To switch on: press and hold the Ü buttonuntil indicator lamp : lights up red.If a connection between the remote controland the receiver in the vehicle has been estab-lished and indicator lamp ::Rflashes red, the auxiliary heating is

switched off.Rlights up green, the auxiliary heating is

switched on.X To switch off: press and hold the Ü but-

ton until indicator lamp : goes out.

Switching auxiliary heating on and offX Switch on the remote control (Y page 163).X To switch on: when indicator lamp : flashes

red, press the b button.During data transmission, indicator lamp :lights up red.When indicator lamp : lights up green, theauxiliary heating is switched on.

X To switch off: when indicator lamp : lightsup green, press the b button.During data transmission, indicator lamp :lights up red.When indicator lamp : flashes red, the aux-iliary heating is switched off.

Changing the operating durationX Switch on the remote control (Y page 163).X When indicator lamp : flashes red, pressÜ and b simultaneously.Indicator lamp : flashes green.

X Press the Ü button repeatedly until thedesired operating duration is shown.R20 minutes

Indicator lamp : flashes green twice.R30 minutes

Indicator lamp : flashes green threetimes.R40 minutes

Indicator lamp : flashes green four times.X Press the b button.

During data transmission, indicator lamp :lights up red.If indicator lamp : emits two long, greenflashes, the selected operating duration isstored.If no adjustment is made, indicator lamp :flashes six times and the remote control goesinto standby mode.

Operating the auxiliary heating usingthe timer

Timer overview

Timer in the lower centre console: Program column

G Sets preset position 1 – 3 for depar-ture timesSets weekday (Mon. – Sun.)

; Menu bary Activates/deactivates immediateheating mode (heater booster function)B Sets the departure timesÑ Sets the day, time and the operatingdurationß Sets the heating level

= Display panel for: time, heating level and operating durationà Continuous operation activeß Heating level set

? Selects options in program column : ormenu bar ; (forwards)Increases values

A Confirms a selection or settingB Status bar

y Heating mode activatedC Activates the timer

Cancels or ends settings in a menuD Selects options in program column : or

menu bar ; (backwards)Reduces values

Use the timer to:Ractivate/deactivate immediate heating mode

(heater booster function) y(Y page 165)Rset up to three departure times B G

(Y page 165)

164 Operating the auxiliary heating systemCl

imat

e co

ntro

l

Rset the operating duration Ñ between 10and 120 minutes or to continuous operationà (Y page 165)Rset the heating level (preselected tempera-

ture) ß to a range between 10 and 30(Y page 166)

Activating the timerThe timer switches to standby mode after10 seconds. The display goes off.X Press and hold the Ü button until the

menu bar appears in the display and the timeis shown.

Setting the day, time and operating dura-tionYou must reset the day, time, and default valuefor the operating duration:Rduring initial operationRafter a voltage supply interruption (e.g. if the

battery has been disconnected)Rafter a malfunction.You can find further information on malfunc-tions in the "Problems with the auxiliary heating"section (Y page 167).X Press the Û or â button until the Ñ

symbol in menu bar ; flashes.X Press the b button.

In program column :, the day selectedflashes.

X Press the Û or â button to set thedesired day.

X Press the b button.The day selected is stored. The hour setting ofthe clock flashes.

X In the same way, set the hour and subse-quently the minutes, then confirm by pressingthe b button.The time is stored. Program column : dis-appears and the operating duration flashes.The operating duration set is the default set-ting for immediate heating mode. You can setthe operating duration from 10 to120 minutes or activate continuous opera-tion.

X Using the Û or â button, set theminute value or select the à symbol forcontinuous operation.

X Press the b button.The operating duration is stored. The time isshown.

Activating/deactivating immediate heat-ing mode (heater booster function)X To switch on: press the Û or â button

until the y symbol in the menu bar flashes.X Press the b button.

The operation duration flashes in the display.i You can preset the default value that is

shown (Y page 165).X Using the Û or â button, set the

minute value (10 to 120) or select the àsymbol for continuous operation.

X Press the b button.Immediate heating mode (heater boosterfunction) is activated. The time and the ysymbol appear.

X To switch off: press the Û or â buttonuntil the y symbol flashes in the menu bar,and then press the b button.Immediate heating mode (heater boosterfunction) is deactivated. The y symboldisappears.The auxiliary heating operates for another2 minutes and then switches off automati-cally.

i If you switch off the ignition while immediateheating mode (operating duration between10 to 120 minutes) is active, immediate heat-ing mode is also switched off. The auxiliaryheating operates for another two minutes andthen switches off automatically.If you have set continuous operation as theoperating duration and you switch off the igni-tion, the auxiliary heating switches off auto-matically after about 15 minutes. If, in theremaining time, the ignition is switched onagain, continuous operation of the auxiliaryheating continues.

Setting a departure timeYou can set three preselection times using thetimer.Make sure that the time and date set on thetimer are correct before setting the departuretime (Y page 165). Otherwise, the auxiliary heat-ing may switch on at the wrong time and at anunsuitable location. When setting the departuretime, also observe the important safety notes onoperating the auxiliary heating (Y page 157).Once the departure time is activated, the auxil-iary heating system starts up automatically andruns for the operating duration set prior todeparture.

Operating the auxiliary heating system 165

Clim

ate

cont

rol

Z

If you set identical departure times (time andday of the week) for the three preselectiontimes, only the last time set is saved.After a malfunction or if the battery has beendisconnected, you must set the departure timesagain. You can find further information on mal-functions in the "Problems with the auxiliaryheating" section (Y page 167).X Press the Û or â button until the B

symbol in the menu bar flashes.X Press the b button.

In the program column, the G preselectionmemory numbers appear. The selected pre-selection time flashes.

X Press the Û or â button to select thedesired preselection time.

X Press the b button.The preselection time is selected. The daysare shown.

X Set the day and time as described in the "Set-ting the day, time and operating duration"section (Y page 165).The departure time is stored. The programcolumn disappears. In the display panel, theon message and the y symbol appear.

X Press the b button.The operating duration flashes.

X Press the Û or â button to set theminute value (10 to 120).

X Press the b button.The operating duration for the preselectiontime is saved. The time and number of theselected preselection memory are shown.The preselection memory that will be activa-ted next is underlined. Additionally, the daythat is set appears.

Deactivating departure timesX Carry out the steps as described in the "Set-

ting the departure times" section(Y page 165).

If the y symbol in the status bar is shown:X Press the Û or â button until the off

message in the display panel is shown.X Press the b button.

The departure time is deactivated. The time isshown.

Setting the heating levelYou can set the heating level to a range between10 and 30.The heating level corresponds to a preselectiontemperature for the vehicle interior. This is aguide value and may, depending on the outsidetemperature, differ from the interior tempera-ture.X Press the Û or â button until the ß

symbol in the menu bar flashes.X Press the b button.

The heating level display flashes.X Using the Û and â buttons, set the

desired heating level to a range between 10and 30.

X Press the b button.The heating level is set and the y symbolappears.

Replacing the remote control battery

G WARNINGBatteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result insevere health problems. There is a risk of fatalinjury.Keep batteries out of the reach of children. Ifa battery is swallowed, seek medical attentionimmediately.

H Environmental noteBatteries contain pollutants.It is illegal to dispose of themwith the household rubbish.They must be collected sep-arately and disposed of in anenvironmentally responsiblerecycling system.Dispose of batteries in anenvironmentally responsiblemanner. Take dischargedbatteries to a qualified spe-cialist workshop or to a col-lection point for used batter-ies.

If the indicator lamp in the remote controlflashes red rapidly, the battery needs to bereplaced.

166 Operating the auxiliary heating systemCl

imat

e co

ntro

l

You need a CR 2430 lithium battery, which canbe obtained from any qualified specialist work-shop.

X Remove battery cover ; using a suitableimplement, e.g. a coin, by turning it anti-clockwise.

X Check the seal on battery cover ; for dam-age and, if necessary, replace.

X Remove battery =.X Insert new, clean battery = into the battery

tray with the positive pole facing upwards.Use a lint-free cloth to do so.

X Position battery cover ; so that mark : onthe raised area points between tworecesses ?.

X Turn battery cover ; using a suitable imple-ment, e.g. a coin, clockwise to the stop.

X Check all the functions of the remote control.

Problems with the auxiliary heating

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The display panel of thetimer shows the Errmessage.

Lack of fuel.The fuel tank is less than Õ full. The auxiliary heating switches offautomatically.X Refuel at the nearest filling station.X Subsequently, start the auxiliary heating several times until the fuel

lines are full.

The display panel of thetimer shows the Errmessage.

A malfunction has occurred. The auxiliary heating switches off auto-matically.X Have the auxiliary heating checked at a qualified specialist work-

shop.

The display panel of thetimer shows the Errmessage.

The power supply has been interrupted. All stored settings aredeleted.Automatic hardware recognition is currently active.X Once automatic hardware recognition is complete, set the week

day, time and operating duration (Y page 165).X Set a departure time (Y page 165).

The indicator lamp onthe remote controlflashes red rapidly.

The remote control battery is discharged. Data transmission is notpossible.X Replace the remote control battery (Y page 166).

Operating the auxiliary heating system 167

Clim

ate

cont

rol

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The indicator lamp onthe remote controlflashes red and green inrapid succession.

There is no connection between the remote control and the receiver inthe vehicle.X Change your position in relation to the vehicle, e.g. hold the remote

control higher or to the side.X Move closer.If you cannot make a connection and the auxiliary heating is switchedon, you can only switch off the auxiliary heating via the timer in thevehicle (Y page 164).

The indicator lamp onthe remote controlflashes red and green inrapid succession.

The remote control is not synchronised.X Have the remote control synchronised at a qualified specialist

workshop.

The indicator lamp onthe remote controlslowly flashes red andgreen alternately.

The remote control is not synchronised.X Have the remote control synchronised at a qualified specialist

workshop.

The auxiliary heating sys-tem switches off auto-matically and/or cannotbe switched on.

The fuel tank is less than Õ full. The auxiliary heating switches offautomatically.X Refuel at the nearest filling station.X Subsequently, start the auxiliary heating several times until the fuel

lines are full.

The auxiliary heating sys-tem switches off auto-matically and/or cannotbe switched on.

The low-voltage protection system integrated in the control unitswitches off the auxiliary heating because the on-board voltage isbelow 10 V.X Have the alternator and starter battery checked.

The auxiliary heating sys-tem switches off auto-matically and/or cannotbe switched on.

The fuse is malfunctioning.X Replace the fuse; see the "Fuse allocation" supplement.X Have the cause of the blown fuse determined at a qualified spe-

cialist workshop.

The auxiliary heating sys-tem switches off auto-matically and/or cannotbe switched on.

A malfunction has occurred.X Switch the ignition on and off twice.If the auxiliary heating system still cannot be switched on, the heatingunit is faulty.X Have the auxiliary heating checked at a qualified specialist work-

shop.

The auxiliary heating isoverheated.

The air ducts are blocked.X Make sure that the flow of hot air behind and next to the left front

seat is not blocked.X Have the auxiliary heating checked at a qualified specialist work-

shop.

168 Operating the auxiliary heating systemCl

imat

e co

ntro

l

Adjusting the air vents

Important safety notes

G WARNINGVery hot or very cold air can flow from the airvents. This could result in burns or frostbite inthe immediate vicinity of the air vents. Thereis a risk of injury.Make sure that all vehicle occupants alwaysmaintain a sufficient distance to the air out-lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow toanother area of the vehicle interior.

The centre and side air vents are adjustable.The air vents can also be adjusted on vehicleswith rear compartment air conditioning.In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh airthrough the air vents into the vehicle interior,please observe the following notes:Rkeep the air inlet between the windscreen and

the bonnet free of blockages, such as ice,snow or leaves.Rnever cover the vents or the ventilation grilles

in the vehicle interior.

Setting the centre air vents

X To open/close: turn control = or ? clock-wise or anti-clockwise as far as it will go.

X To adjust the air direction: hold centre airvent : or ; by control = or ? and move itup or down or to the left or right.

Setting the side air vents

: Side air vent; Control for side air ventX To open/close: turn control ; to the left or

right as far as it will go.X To adjust the air direction: hold side air

vent : by control ; and move it up or downor to the left or right.

Setting the rear-compartment airvents

Rear air vents (example: right-hand side of vehicle): Thumbwheel for vertical adjustment of the

airflow and air quantity control; Thumbwheel for horizontal adjustment of

the airflowThe air vents can only be adjusted on vehicleswith rear compartment air conditioning.Vehicles with rear-compartment air condition-ing: in heating mode, the air in the rear com-partment is automatically distributed in the foot-wells and roof area after the coolant hasreached the required temperature. In coolingmode, in the initial phase the air is distributed in

Adjusting the air vents 169

Clim

ate

cont

rol

Z

the footwells and roof area of the hot vehicle,and subsequently only in the roof area.X To open: turn thumbwheel : of the rear air

vent to the centre position.X To close: turn thumbwheel : to the upper or

lower end position.

170 Adjusting the air ventsCl

imat

e co

ntro

l

Useful information

These Operating Instructions describe all mod-els as well as standard and optional equipmentof your vehicle that were available at the time ofgoing to print. Country-specific variations arepossible. Note that your vehicle may not be fit-ted with all of the described functions. This alsoapplies to safety-relevant systems and func-tions.Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops: (Y page 31).

Running-in notes

Important safety notesIn certain driving and driving safety systems, thesensors adjust automatically while a certain dis-tance is being driven after the vehicle has beendelivered or after repairs. Full system effective-ness is not reached until the end of this teach-inprocedure.New or replaced brake pads and brake discsonly reach their optimal braking effect after afew 100 kilometres. Until then, compensate forthis by applying greater force to the brake pedal.

The first 1500 kmFor the service life and economy of your vehicleit is crucial that you run the engine in with duecare.RTherefore, protect the engine for the first

1500 km by driving at varying vehicle andengine speeds.RAvoid overstraining the vehicle and high

engine speeds during this period, e.g. drivingat full throttle. Do not exceed Ø of the per-missible maximum speed for each gear.RChange gear in good time.RDo not change down a gear manually in order

to brake.ROn vehicles with an automatic transmission,

try to avoid depressing the accelerator pedalbeyond the pressure point (kickdown).

After 1500 km, you may gradually acceleratethe vehicle to full road and engine speeds.

i You should also observe these notes on run-ning-in if the engine or parts of the drive trainon your vehicle have been replaced.

Driving

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFlammable materials introduced throughenvironmental influence or by animals canignite if in contact with the exhaust system orparts of the engine that heat up. There is a riskof fire.Carry out regular checks to make sure thatthere are no flammable foreign materials inthe engine compartment or in the exhaustsystem.

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not use theengine's full performance until it has reachedoperating temperature.Only set the automatic transmission to therespective drive positions when the vehicle isstationary.Where possible, avoid spinning the drivewheels when pulling away on slippery roads.Otherwise, you could damage the drive train.

Driving 171

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Key positions

g To insert/remove the key, to lock the steer-ing wheel

1 To unlock the steering wheel, power supplyfor some consumers (e.g. the radio)

2 To switch on the ignition, power supply forall consumers, preglow and drive position

3 To start the engine

i If the key does not belong to the vehicle, itcan still be turned in the ignition lock. How-ever, the ignition will not be switched on. Theengine cannot be started.

Preparing for a journey

Visual check of the vehicle exteriorX In particular, check the following components

on the vehicle, and on the trailer as necessary:Rlicence plates, vehicle lighting, turn signals,

brake lamps and wiper blades for dirt anddamageRtyres and wheels for firm seating, correct

tyre pressure and general conditionRtrailer tow hitch for play and security

The trailer tow hitch is one of the mostimportant components on the vehicle withregard to road safety. Observe the notes onoperation, care and maintenance of thetrailer tow hitch (see the manufacturer'soperating instructions).

X Rectify any noticeable defects before com-mencing the journey.

Checks in the vehicle

Emergency equipment/first-aid kitX Check the equipment to make sure that it is

accessible, complete and ready for use.The first aid and breakdown assistance equip-ment is in the front door stowage compart-ments, the glove compartment and in the rearstowage compartment on the right-hand side ofthe vehicle (Y page 357).

Vehicle lightingX Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.X Check with the help of another person that

the lighting system is working correctly.X Replace defective bulbs (Y page 134).

Before pulling away

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can impedepedal travel or block a pedal which isdepressed. This jeopardises safe operation ofthe vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Stow all objects in the vehicle safely, so thatthey cannot reach the driver's footwell. Makesure the floormats and carpets are properlysecured so that they cannot slip and obstructthe pedals. Do not lay several floormats orcarpets on top of one another.

G WARNINGUnsuitable footwear can hinder correct usageof the pedals, e.g.:Rshoes with thick solesRshoes with high heelsRslippersThere is a risk of an accident.Wear suitable footwear to ensure correctusage of the pedals.

X Stow luggage items securely. Secure the loadas per the loading guidelines (Y page 328).

X Make sure that the floormats and carpets areproperly secured so that they cannot slip andobstruct the pedals.

X Close all the doors.

172 DrivingDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Starting the engine

Important safety notes

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaces with-out sufficient ventilation.

! Do not depress the accelerator when start-ing the engine.

X Before starting the engine, make sure that:Rall the doors are closedRall the vehicle occupants are wearing their

seat belts correctly

i If you depress the brake pedal before start-ing the engine, the pedal travel may be shorterand pedal resistance higher.If you depress the brake pedal again afterstarting the engine, pedal travel and resist-ance will be back to normal again.

Manual transmission

Gearshift patternk Reverse gear1 – 6 Forward gearsC Reverse gear pull ringYou can only start the engine if the clutch pedalis depressed completely.X Depress the brake pedal and keep it

depressed.X Depress the clutch pedal completely.X Shift the manual transmission into neutral N.

When starting the engine, if you do not depressthe clutch or fail to depress it sufficiently, thedisplay shows the message To start the engine, operate the clutch.

Automatic transmissionX Shift the transmission to position P

(Y page 178).The transmission position indicator in the dis-play shows P.

You can also start the engine in neutral N.

Starting the engineX Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock

(Y page 172).The % preglow indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up briefly.

X Once the % preglow indicator lamp goesout, turn the key to position 3 in the ignitionlock and release it as soon as the engine isrunning.

You can start the diesel engine without preglowwhen the engine is warm.If the diesel engine is cold, the engine idlingspeed may be higher than normal after startingthe engine. The increased engine idling speedwill be automatically reduced to the normalengine idling speed within several seconds.The preglow system is malfunctioning if the% preglow indicator lamp lights up forapproximately one minute:Rafter the ignition is switched onRwhile the (diesel) engine is runningAt extremely low outside temperatures, you maythen no longer be able to start the diesel engine.Have the fault rectified at a qualified specialistworkshop.

Pulling away

Manual transmission

Pulling away! Change gear in good time and avoid spin-

ning the wheels. Otherwise, you could dam-age the vehicle.

Driving 173

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Depress the clutch pedal completely.X Shift to 1st gear or reverse gear.

The holding force of the parking brake is auto-matically reduced when the pulling-away gearis engaged. This ensures that you can pullaway comfortably and smoothly.

i The parking brake will only be released auto-matically if your seat belt is fastened.

X Release the brake pedal.Hill start assist automatically maintains thebrake pressure for about another two sec-onds after the brake pedal is released. Thismakes it possible to pull away without thevehicle immediately rolling (Y page 175).

X Release the clutch pedal slowly and acceler-ate carefully.The parking brake is released automatically.The red ! indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster goes out.

The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulledaway. The locking knobs in the doors drop down.You can open the doors from the inside at anytime.You can also deactivate the automatic lockingfeature (Y page 81).

Gearshift recommendation

Gearshift recommendations : provide tips foran economical driving style. The display indi-cates the recommended gear.

Engaging reverse gear! Only shift into reverse gear R when the vehi-

cle is stationary. Otherwise, you could dam-age the transmission.

X Draw the pull ring upwards and hold it in thisposition (Y page 173).

X Move the gear lever as far as possible to theleft and then pull it down.

X Release the pull ring.

The ECO start/stop function is not availablewhen reverse gear is engaged. Further informa-tion can be found under "ECO start/stop func-tion" (Y page 175).

Automatic transmission

G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D or R,the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There isa risk of an accident.When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.

! Only shift into reverse gear R when the vehi-cle is stationary. Otherwise, you could dam-age the transmission.

X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.The parking lock is released.

X Shift the transmission to position D or R.The parking brake is released automatically.The red ! indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster goes out.

i The parking brake will only be released auto-matically if your seat belt is fastened.

X Release the brake pedal.Hill start assist automatically maintains thebrake pressure for about another two sec-onds after the brake pedal is released. Thismakes it possible to pull away without thevehicle immediately rolling (Y page 175).

X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.It is only possible to shift the transmission fromposition P to the desired position if you depressthe brake pedal. Only then is the parking lockreleased. If the brake pedal is not depressed, theDIRECT SELECT lever can still be moved but theparking lock remains engaged.The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulledaway. The locking knobs in the doors drop down.You can open the doors from the inside at anytime.You can also deactivate the automatic lockingfeature (Y page 81).

174 DrivingDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Hill start assistHill start assist helps you when pulling away for-wards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. Hillstart assist automatically maintains the brakepressure for about another two seconds, afteryou have taken your foot off the brake pedal.This gives you enough time to move your footfrom the brake pedal to the accelerator pedaland depress it before the vehicle begins to roll.

G WARNINGAfter a while, hill start assist no longer holdsthe vehicle and it may roll away. There is a riskof an accident and injury.Therefore, quickly move your foot from thebrake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Neverleave the vehicle when it is held by hill startassist.

Hill start assist is not active if:Ryou are pulling away on a level road or a

downhill gradientRon vehicles with an automatic transmission

- the transmission is in position N- the parking brake is appliedRon vehicles with manual transmission, you

have shifted the transmission to neutralRESP® is malfunctioning

ECO start/stop function

General notesWhen the ECO start/stop function is opera-tional, it switches the engine off automatically ifthe vehicle is slowed to a stop under certainconditions.When pulling away again, it starts the engineautomatically. The ECO start/stop functionthereby helps you to reduce the fuel consump-tion and emissions of your vehicle.The ECO stop/start function is automaticallyactivated each time you start the engine with theignition key.On vehicles with an automatic transmission, theECO start/stop function is automatically deac-tivated in drive program M. You can manuallyactivate the ECO start/stop function if required.

If è ECO symbol : is shown in green, theECO start/stop function will switch the engineoff automatically when the vehicle is stopped.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the engine is switched off automatically andyou exit the vehicle, the engine is restartedautomatically. The vehicle may begin moving.There is a risk of accident and injury.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offthe ignition and secure the vehicle againstrolling away.

Automatic engine switch-off

General notesThe ECO start/stop function is operationalwhen the è ECO symbol is shown in green inthe display.For this to happen, various conditions, includingthe following, must be met:Rthe ECO start/stop function is switched on.

The indicator lamp in the è ECO button islit (Y page 177).Rthe outside temperature is above 0 †.Rthe engine has reached its operating temper-

ature.Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior

has been reached.Rthe charge status of the starter battery is suf-

ficient.Rthe system cannot detect misting up of the

windscreen while the air-conditioning systemor automatic climate control is switched on.Rthe bonnet is closed.Rthe driver's seat belt is fastened.Ron vehicles with automatic transmission, the

driver's door is closed.

Driving 175

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Ron vehicles with manual transmission, all thedoors and the tailgate are closed.Rthere is no danger of immediately rolling

backwards, e.g. when stopped on a steep gra-dient.If a trailer is attached and/or a rear carriersystem is fitted and connected electrically,such danger is even detected on less steepgradients.

If the conditions for automatic engine switch-offare not all fulfilled, the è ECO symbol isshown in yellow.All of the vehicle's systems remain active whenthe engine is switched off automatically.The engine can be switched off automatically amaximum of four times (initial stop, then threesubsequent stops) in succession. The displaythen shows the è ECO symbol in yellow.Automatic engine switch-off is not possibleagain until the è ECO symbol is shown ingreen again.If you open the bonnet after an automatic engineswitch-off, automatic engine start is deactiva-ted. Once the bonnet is closed, you have to startthe engine manually.

Vehicles with manual transmission

X Slow the vehicle to a complete stop.X Follow gearshift instruction : to shift to neu-

tral N and engage neutral.X Release the clutch pedal.

The engine is automatically switched off onceyou are no longer depressing the clutch pedal.

Vehicles with automatic transmissionIf the vehicle is stopped in D or N, the ECO start/stop function switches off the engine automat-ically once the vehicle is stationary.

Automatic engine start

General notesThe engine is started automatically if:Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function by

pressing the è ECO button The indicatorlamp in the è ECO button then goes out(Y page 177)Ryou depress the accelerator pedalRyou engage reverse gear RRyou unfasten your seat beltRyou open the driver's door on vehicles with an

automatic transmissionRyou open a door or the tailgate on vehicles

with a manual transmissionRthe vehicle begins to roll awayRthe brake system requires thisRthe temperature in the vehicle interior

increasingly deviates from the set valueRthe system detects moisture on the wind-

screen when the air-conditioning system isswitched onRthe battery's charge status is too low

Vehicles with manual transmission! Only engage gear when the clutch pedal is

depressed.The engine is started automatically when youdepress the clutch pedal.

Vehicles with automatic transmissionThe engine is started automatically if you:Rswitch to drive program M (Y page 181)Rrelease the brake pedal when in transmission

position D or NRswitch to transmission position PAfter shifting from transmission position R to D,the ECO start/stop function is not available untilthe è ECO symbol is shown in green.

176 DrivingDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Activating and deactivating the ECOstart/stop function

X Press the è ECO button.When the indicator lamp of the è ECObutton lights up and the display shows theè ECO symbol, the ECO start/stop func-tion is switched on.If all conditions for automatic engine switch-off are fulfilled, the è ECO symbol isshown in green (Y page 175). The engine isthen automatically switched off when thevehicle comes to a stop.

Problems with the engine

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The engine does notstart.

DISTRONIC PLUS is activated.X Deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 202).X Start the engine again.

The engine does notstart.The starter motor can beheard.

There is a malfunction in the fuel supply.X Turn the key back to position 0 in the ignition lock before attempting

to start the engine again.X Start the engine again.

Please bear in mind that lengthy and frequent starting attempts willdrain the battery.

If the engine does not start after several attempts:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine does notstart.The starter motor can beheard. The reserve fuelwarning lamp is lit andthe fuel gauge is at 0.

The fuel tank has run dry.X Refuel the vehicle.If you drive until the fuel tank is completely empty, air may get into thefuel system. If the engine does not start after refuelling, bleed the fuelsystem as follows:X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition for approximately ten sec-

onds.X Start the engine continuously for a maximum of 60 seconds.If the engine does not start:X Wait for approximately two minutes.X Restart the engine continuously for a maximum of 60 seconds.X If the engine still fails to start, do not continue trying to start it.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving 177

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The engine does notstart.The starter motor cannotbe heard.

The on-board voltage is too low. The battery is too weak or discharged.X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 358).If the engine cannot be jump-started, the starter motor is faulty.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine does notstart.The starter motor cannotbe heard.

The battery is discharged or faulty.X Check the battery for damage.X Charge the battery (Y page 349).

Automatic transmission

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D or R,the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There isa risk of an accident.When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.

G WARNINGWhen the engine is switched off, the auto-matic transmission shifts into neutral positionN. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk ofan accident.Always shift to parking position P beforeswitching off the engine. Secure the parkedvehicle against rolling away by applying theparking brake.

! When the engine is switched off, coasting inneutral N can damage the power transmis-sion and the transmission itself.

Always observe the instructions and safetynotes in the "Tow-starting and towing" section(Y page 360).Bear in mind that power transmission betweenthe engine and the transmission is interruptedwhen the engine is switched off. For this reason,shift the automatic transmission to P beforeswitching off the engine when the vehicle is sta-tionary. Apply the parking brake to prevent thevehicle from rolling away.

When you remove the key from the ignition lock,the parking brake is automatically applied.

DIRECT SELECT lever

Overview of the transmission shift sys-tem

j Park position with parking lockk Reverse geari Neutralh DriveThe DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of thesteering column.The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns to itsoriginal position. The display in the instrumentcluster shows the current transmission position,namely P, R, N or D (Y page 180).

Selecting transmission positions! If the engine speed is too high, do not shift

the automatic transmission directly from D toR, from R to D or directly to P. Otherwise, theautomatic transmission could be damaged.

178 Automatic transmissionDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

! Only shift the automatic transmission to Rwhen the vehicle is stationary.

X If park position P is selected, depress thebrake pedal to change the transmission posi-tion.

X Drive position D: push the DIRECT SELECTlever down beyond the 1st point of resist-ance.

X Reverse gear R: push the DIRECT SELECTlever up beyond the 1st point of resistance.

i The ECO start/stop function is not availablewhen reverse gear is engaged. Further infor-mation can be found under "ECO start/stopfunction" (Y page 175).

X Neutral N: push the DIRECT SELECT lever upor down as far as the 1st point of resistance.

i When you switch off the engine, the auto-matic transmission shifts to N automatically.

X Park position P: press the button of theDIRECT SELECT lever in the direction of arrowP.

Park position P is engaged automatically if you:Rremove the keyRopen the driver's door while the vehicle is sta-

tionary or travelling at very low speeds andthe transmission is in position D or R

If you want the automatic transmission toremain in neutral N after you switch off theengine, you must leave the key in the ignitionlock. This is necessary, for example, when wash-ing the vehicle in a car wash with a conveyor.

Transmission positions

B Park positionThis prevents the vehicle from rollingaway when stopped. Do not shift thetransmission into position P unlessthe vehicle is stationary.The automatic transmission shifts toP automatically if you:Rremove the keyRopen the driver's door while the

vehicle is stationary or travelling atvery low speeds and the transmis-sion is in position D or R

The parking lock should not be usedas a brake when parking. Alwaysapply the parking brake as well onceyou have parked the vehicle.

C Reverse gearOnly shift the transmission to R whenthe vehicle is stationary.

A NeutralNo power is transmitted from theengine to the drive wheels. Releasingthe brakes will allow you to move thevehicle freely, e.g. by pushing or tow-ing.If ESP® is deactivated or faulty: shiftthe transmission to position N if thevehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g.on icy roads.When you switch off the engine, theautomatic transmission automati-cally shifts into neutral N.

! When the engine is switched off,coasting in neutral N can damagethe power transmission and thetransmission itself.

7 DriveThe automatic transmission changesgear automatically. All forward gearsare available.You can influence gearshifts withyour choice of drive program. Youcan also restrict the shift range.

Automatic transmission 179

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Transmission position and drive pro-gram display

: Drive program; Current transmission position and= Shift range, if restricted, or current gear in drive program MThe transmission positions and current driveprogram : are shown at the top of the instru-ment cluster display. The current transmissionposition is highlighted.In drive program M, the transmission positionindicator shows the letter M plus the currentgear, e.g. M3, in position D (Y page 182).If you restrict the shift range, the transmissionposition indicator shows the current transmis-sion position plus restricted shift range =, e.g.D2 (Y page 180).The arrows in the transmission position displayshow how and into which transmission positionsyou can change using the DIRECT SELECT lever.

Changing gearThe 7-speed automatic transmission adapts toyour individual driving style by continuouslyadjusting its shift points. These shift pointadjustments take into account the current oper-ating and driving conditions. If the operating ordriving conditions change, the automatic trans-mission reacts by adjusting the gearshift pro-gram.The 7-speed automatic transmission shifts tothe individual gears automatically when it is intransmission position D. This depends on:Rthe drive program selected (Y page 181)Rwhether the shift range is restricted or not

(Y page 180)Rthe position of the accelerator pedalRthe road speedYou can also change gear manually if you selectdrive program M (Y page 182).

Shift ranges

: To shift down and restrict the shift range; To shift up and derestrict the shift rangeIn transmission position D and drive programs E,C and S, you can use the steering wheel gear-shift paddles to change gear yourself, to a limi-ted degree, and restrict or derestrict the shiftrange of the automatic transmission.X To shift down and restrict the shift range:

briefly pull left steering wheel gearshift pad-dle :.The automatic transmission shifts to the nextgear down, depending on the gear currentlyengaged. The shift range is also restricted.The transmission position indicator alsoshows the set shift range, e.g. D2. The auto-matic transmission shifts only as far as therelevant gear.

orX Pull and hold left steering wheel gearshift

paddle :.The automatic transmission will shift to arange which allows easy acceleration anddeceleration. To do this, the automatic trans-mission shifts down one or more gears andrestricts the shift range.The transmission position indicator alsoshows the set shift range, e.g. D2. The auto-matic transmission shifts only as far as therelevant gear.The automatic transmission does not shiftdown if you pull the left steering wheel gear-shift paddle whilst travelling at too high aspeed. If the maximum engine speed for therestricted shift range is reached and you con-tinue to depress the accelerator pedal, theautomatic transmission will shift up automat-ically. This protects against engine over-speed.

180 Automatic transmissionDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

X To shift up and extend the shift range:briefly pull right steering wheel gearshift pad-dle ;.The automatic transmission shifts to the nextgear up, depending on the gear currentlyengaged. This derestricts the shift range atthe same time.If the display shows only transmission posi-tion D, the shift range restriction is cancelled.

X To derestrict the shift range: pull and holdright steering wheel gearshift paddle ;.The automatic transmission shifts up one ormore gears depending on the gear currentlyengaged. At the same time, the shift rangerestriction is cancelled and the display showstransmission position D.

Shift ranges and driving situations

= Use the engine's braking effect.

5 Use the braking effect of the engineon downhill gradients and for driving:Ron steep mountain roadsRin mountainous terrainRin arduous conditions

4 Use the braking effect of the engineon extremely steep downhill gradi-ents and long downhill stretches.

Drive programs

General notesYou can choose between various drive programsfor the automatic transmission with theDYNAMIC SELECT switch. Engine managementand the gearshifting characteristics of the auto-matic transmission change depending on whichdrive program is selected. As a result, either asportier, a more comfort-oriented or an eco-nomical driving style is supported, depending onwhat the driver wishes. Selecting drive programM also deactivates automatic gearshifting,requiring that you change gear manually.After the engine is started, the automatic trans-mission automatically switches to drive pro-gram C (Comfort) for a comfortable and eco-nomical driving style.

DYNAMIC SELECT switch

X Push DYNAMIC SELECT switch : up or downuntil the desired drive program is selected.The display shows the letter of the selecteddrive program above the transmission posi-tion indicator (Y page 180).

M Manual Manual gearshifting

S Sport Sporty driving style

C Comfort Comfortable, economicaldriving style

E Eco Particularly economicaldriving style

Drive program (M)The Manual drive program is characterised bythe following:RThe automatic transmission must be shifted

manually at all times. The automatic trans-mission does not shift up automatically evenwhen the maximum engine speed is reached(Y page 182).RThe ECO start/stop function must be activa-

ted manually.

Drive program SDrive program Sport has the following charac-teristics:Rthe vehicle exhibits sporty handling charac-

teristics.Rthe automatic transmission shifts up at a later

point and shifts down earlier. These auto-matic transmission shift points may increasefuel consumption.

Automatic transmission 181

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Drive program CDrive program Comfort has the following char-acteristics:Rthe vehicle delivers comfortable, economical

handling characteristics.Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the

automatic transmission shifting up sooner.Rincreased sensitivity. This improves driving

stability on slippery road surfaces, for exam-ple.Rthe automatic transmission shifts up sooner.

The vehicle thus maintains lower enginespeeds.

Drive program EDrive program Eco has the following character-istics:Rthe vehicle exhibits particularly economical

handling characteristics.Rthe maximum available engine torque is

reduced.Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the

automatic transmission shifting down signifi-cantly later and up significantly sooner, evenat full-load operation.No shift point adjustment for adapting to indi-vidual, dynamic driving styles.In kickdown, the automatic transmissionautomatically shifts to drive program C.Rincreased sensitivity. This improves driving

stability on slippery road surfaces, for exam-ple.

Driving tips

Accelerator pedal positionYour style of driving influences how the auto-matic transmission shifts gear:Rlittle throttle: early upshiftsRlots of throttle: later upshifts

KickdownUse kickdown for maximum acceleration:X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the

pressure point.The automatic transmission shifts to the nextgear down, depending on the engine speed.

The drive program switches automaticallyfrom E to C.

X Ease off on the accelerator pedal once thedesired speed is reached.The automatic transmission shifts up again.

X If necessary, select drive program E again.

Rocking the vehicle freeAt speeds up to 9 km/h, you can switch backand forth between drive position D and reversegear R without applying the brakes. This helpswhen rocking the vehicle free out of snow orslush.X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever alternately up

and down beyond the first point of resistance.

Trailer towingX Depending on the downhill gradient, restrict

the shift range (Y page 180) or shift manuallyto a lower gear (Y page 182) in which theengine will run in the middle of the enginespeed range. This also applies if cruise con-trol, DISTRONIC or SPEEDTRONIC are activa-ted.

Manual gearshifting

General notesIf you select drive program M, automatic gear-shifting is deactivated and manual gearshiftingis automatically activated. You must then per-manently change gear yourself for as long as thedrive program is selected.Permanent manual gearshifting is deactivatedautomatically when you switch from drive pro-gram M to another drive program. The auto-matic transmission then shifts gears automati-cally. The display shows the selected drive pro-gram and transmission position D again.

182 Automatic transmissionDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Shifting gears

: To shift down; To shift upThe transmission position indicator in the dis-play shows drive program M and the selectedgear.X To shift up: briefly pull right-hand steering

wheel gearshift paddle ;.If the engine speed is sufficient, the automatictransmission shifts up to the next gear.If the maximum engine speed is reached inthe currently engaged gear and you continueto accelerate, the automatic transmission willnot shift up automatically. Always make surethat the engine speed does not reach the redarea of the rev counter. Observe the gearshiftrecommendation in the display (Y page 183).When the engine reaches its maximum speed,

the fuel supply is cut to prevent the enginefrom overrevving.

X To shift down: pull briefly on left-hand steer-ing wheel gearshift paddle :.Provided that the engine will not exceed itsmaximum speed when shifting down, theautomatic transmission shifts down to thenext gear.

orX Pull the left-hand steering wheel gearshift

paddle until the automatic transmissionselects the optimum gear for the currentspeed.

i When coasting, the automatic transmissionshifts down automatically.

Gearshift recommendation

: Gearshift direction; Recommended gearThe gearshift recommendations assist you inadopting an economical driving style.X When the display shows the gearshift recom-

mendation, shift to recommended gear ;.

Automatic transmission 183

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Problems with the transmission

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The transmission islocked in position P.

The vehicle electronics are malfunctioning.X Have the vehicle electronics checked immediately at a qualified

specialist workshop.

The acceleration charac-teristics have deteriora-ted noticeably.The transmission doesnot shift.

The transmission is in emergency mode.It is only possible to shift into 2nd gear or reverse gear R.X Stop the vehicle.X Depress the brake pedal.X Move the selector lever to position P.X Switch off the engine.X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.X Depress the brake pedal.X Move the selector lever to position D or R.

In position D, the transmission shifts into 2nd gear; in position R, thetransmission shifts into reverse gear.

X Have the transmission checked immediately at a qualified specialistworkshop.

Refuelling

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. Improper handing offuel creates a risk of fire and explosion.Avoid fire, naked flames, smoking and creat-ing sparks under all circumstances. Switch offthe engine and, if applicable, the auxiliaryheating before refuelling.

G WARNINGFuels are poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a danger of injury.Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contactwith skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale fuelvapours. Keep fuels out of the reach of chil-dren.

If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash the fuel off any affected areas of skin

with water and soap immediately.RIf you get fuel in your eyes, rinse them thor-

oughly with clean water immediately. Seekimmediate medical attention.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek immediate medi-

cal attention. Do not induce vomiting.RChange any clothing that has come into

contact with fuel immediately.

G WARNINGElectrostatic charge can cause sparks andthereby ignite fuel vapours. There is a risk offire and explosion.Always touch the vehicle body before openingthe fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pumpnozzle. This discharges any electrostaticcharge that may have built up.

Do not get into the vehicle again during the refu-elling process. Otherwise, electrostatic chargecould build up again.

184 RefuellingDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

G WARNINGIf you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the flashpoint of this fuel mixture is lower than that ofpure diesel fuel. When the engine is running,components in the exhaust system may over-heat unnoticed. There is a risk of fire.Never refuel with petrol. Never add petrol todiesel fuel.

H Environmental noteIf fuels are handled improperly, they pose adanger to persons and the environment. Donot allow fuels to run into the sewage system,the surface waters, the ground water or intothe ground.

! Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with adiesel engine. Even small amounts of petrolresult in damage to the fuel system andengine.

! Do not switch on the ignition if you acciden-tally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, thefuel will enter the fuel lines. Notify a qualifiedspecialist workshop and have the fuel tankand fuel lines drained completely.

! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage thefuel system.

! Take care not to spill any fuel on paintedsurfaces. You could otherwise damage thepaintwork.

! Use a filter when adding fuel from a fuel can.The fuel lines and/or the fuel injection systemcould otherwise be blocked by particles fromthe fuel can.

You will find further information about fuel andfuel grades under "Service products and capaci-ties" (Y page 387).

Refuelling

: Fuel filler flap; Fuel filler cap= Tyre pressure table (Y page 369)? Blue filler cap and filler neck for AdBlue®

A Tank for fuelFuel filler flap : is on the left side of the vehiclebehind the front door. It is only possible to openfuel filler flap : when the front door is open.X Remove the key from the ignition lock.X Switch off the auxiliary heating system

(Y page 157).X Open the front left-hand door first, and then

fuel filler flap :.X Close all vehicle doors to prevent fuel vapours

from entering the vehicle interior.X Turn fuel filler cap ; anti-clockwise, remove

it and let it hang from the strap.X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel

pump nozzle into tank A and refuel.X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle

switches off. Fuel may otherwise leak out.X Replace tank filler cap ; on tank A and turn

clockwise.You will hear a click when the fuel filler cap isclosed fully.

X Open the front left-hand door first, and thenclose filler flap :.

Refuelling 185

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Problems with the fuel and fuel tankIf your vehicle is losing fuel, the fuel lines or thefuel tank are defective:X Turn the key immediately to position 0 in the

ignition lock and remove it.X Do not restart the engine under any circum-

stances.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.If the fuel tank has been run dry, after refuellingcarry out the following steps:X Before starting the engine: switch on the igni-

tion three or four times.X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock

(Y page 172).The % preglow indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up briefly.

X Once the % preglow indicator lamp goesout, turn the key to position 3 in the ignitionlock and release it as soon as the engine isrunning.

You can start the diesel engine without preglowwhen the engine is warm.

AdBlue®

General notesTo function properly, the exhaust gas aftertreat-ment in BlueTEC vehicles must be operated withthe NOx reducing agent AdBlue® (Y page 32).When the supply of AdBlue® is down to a reserveof approximately 6.5 l, the first warning mes-sage Refill AdBlue See Owner’s Manual isshown in the display.Have the vehicle's AdBlue® tank refilled at aqualified specialist workshop. However, you canalso top up the AdBlue® tank:Rwith the pump nozzle at an AdBlue® filling

pump (Y page 187)Rwith an AdBlue® refill canister (Y page 188)Rwith AdBlue® refill bottles (Y page 188)Before you travel outside Europe, check theAdBlue® supply (Y page 256) and get advicefrom a qualified specialist workshop.Further information on exhaust gas aftertreat-ment in BlueTEC® vehicles as well as informa-tion on AdBlue® can be obtained at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Low ambient temperaturesAdBlue freezes at a temperature of approx-imately -11 †. The vehicle is equipped with anAdBlue® preheating system at the factory. Win-ter operation can thus be guaranteed even attemperatures below -11 †.If you top up AdBlue® at temperatures under-11 †, the AdBlue® level in the multifunctiondisplay may not be displayed correctly. If theAdBlue® is frozen, drive for at least 20 minutesand then park the vehicle for a minimum of30 seconds, so that the level is correctly dis-played.

Important safety notes! Only use AdBlue® which meets the

ISO 22241 standard.Do not mix AdBlue® with any additives and donot dilute AdBlue® with water. Exhaust gasaftertreatment may otherwise not functioncorrectly and its components may be dam-aged.

! In order to fill the AdBlue® tank, the vehiclemust be parked on a level surface. TheAdBlue® tank can only be filled as intendedwith the vehicle parked on a level surface. Inthis way, differences in filling quantities canbe avoided.Filling a vehicle standing on an uneven sur-face is not permitted. There is a danger ofoverfilling. The components of the exhaustgas aftertreatment system may be damagedas a result.

! Surfaces which have come into contact withAdBlue® while refilling should be rinsedimmediately with water, or remove AdBlue®

with a moist cloth and cold water. If AdBlue®

has already crystallised, use a sponge andcold water to clean the area. AdBlue® residuecrystallises after a certain amount of time andsoils the affected surfaces.

! AdBlue® is not a fuel additive and must notbe added to the fuel tank. If AdBlue® is addedto the fuel tank, this can lead to engine dam-age.

If you open the AdBlue® tank, small amounts ofammonia vapour may be released.Ammonia vapours have a pungent smell and areparticularly irritating to skin, mucous mem-

186 RefuellingDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

branes and eyes. You may experience a burningsensation in your nose, throat and eyes. Youmay also experience coughing and watery eyes.Do not inhale ammonia vapours. Only fill theAdBlue® tank in well-ventilated areas.Do not swallow AdBlue® or let it come into con-tact with skin, eyes or clothing. Keep AdBlue®

out of the reach of children.If you or others come into contact with AdBlue®,observe the following:Rimmediately rinse AdBlue® off your skin with

soap and water.Rif AdBlue® comes into contact with your eyes,

immediately rinse them thoroughly with cleanwater. Seek immediate medical attention.Rif AdBlue® is swallowed, immediately rinse

your mouth out thoroughly. Drink plenty ofwater. Seek immediate medical attention.Rchange immediately out of clothing that has

come into contact with AdBlue®.When filling the AdBlue® tank, completelyempty refill bottles or refill canisters where pos-sible to avoid transporting opened refill contain-ers in the vehicle.Additional information on AdBlue® can be foundunder "Service products and capacities"(Y page 389).

Opening and closing the AdBlue® fillercap

: Fuel filler flap; Blue AdBlue® filler cap= Fuel filler capFuel filler flap : is on the left side of the vehiclebehind the front door. It is only possible to openfuel filler flap : when the front door is open.

X Remove the key from the ignition lock.X Switch off the auxiliary heating system

(Y page 157).X Open the front left-hand door first, and then

fuel filler flap :.X Close all vehicle doors to prevent ammonia

vapours from entering the vehicle interior.X Turn blue AdBlue® filler cap ; anticlockwise

and remove it.X Start the filling procedure:

with a pump nozzle (Y page 187)with a refill canister (Y page 188)with a refill bottle (Y page 188)

X After filling the AdBlue® container, placeAdBlue® filler cap ; on the filler neck andturn it clockwise.

X Turn AdBlue® filler cap ; until the lettering islegible and horizontal.The filler neck is only locked correctly whenthis is the case.

X Open the front left-hand door first, and thenclose filler flap :.

Filling procedure with the pump nozzleof an AdBlue® filling pump! Surfaces which have come into contact with

AdBlue® while refilling should be rinsedimmediately with water, or remove AdBlue®

with a moist cloth and cold water. If AdBlue®

has already crystallised, use a sponge andcold water to clean the area. AdBlue® residuecrystallises after a certain amount of time andsoils the affected surfaces.

AdBlue® filling pumps can be found at many fill-ing stations. Refilling AdBlue® is also possible attruck filling pumps.X Unscrew the blue AdBlue® filler cap

(Y page 187).X Insert the pump nozzle into the filler neck and

fill up with AdBlue®. When doing so, do notoverfill the AdBlue® tank.

X If the pump nozzle switches off during filling,do not continue the filling procedure.The AdBlue® tank is completely full.

X Screw on the AdBlue® filler cap and close thefuel filler flap. Pay attention to the correct

Refuelling 187

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

positioning of the AdBlue® filler cap whendoing so (Y page 187).When you subsequently switch on the igni-tion, the Refill AdBlue See Owner’s Manual display message must go out afterapproximately 20 seconds. If the messagecontinues to be displayed, you must add moreAdBlue®.

Filling procedure with the AdBlue® refillcanister! Surfaces which have come into contact with

AdBlue® while refilling should be rinsedimmediately with water, or remove AdBlue®

with a moist cloth and cold water. If AdBlue®

has already crystallised, use a sponge andcold water to clean the area. AdBlue® residuecrystallises after a certain amount of time andsoils the affected surfaces.

AdBlue® refill canisters are available at manyfilling stations or at a Mercedes-Benz ServiceCentre. AdBlue® refill canisters are often soldwith a filler hose. A filler hose that does notexactly fit the vehicle's AdBlue® tank offers noprotection against overfilling. AdBlue® may leakout as a result of overfilling. AdBlue® is availablein a variety of containers and receptacles.X Unscrew the cap of the AdBlue® refill canis-

ter.X Screw the refill hose onto the AdBlue® refill

canister until hand-tight.X Unscrew the blue AdBlue® filler cap

(Y page 187).X Insert the refill hose into the filler neck and fill

up with AdBlue®.When doing so, do not overfill the AdBlue®

tank. If any AdBlue® overflows, do not con-tinue filling the tank.

X Screw on the AdBlue® filler cap and close thefuel filler flap. Pay attention to the correctpositioning of the AdBlue® filler cap whendoing so (Y page 187).

X Unscrew the filler hose of the AdBlue® refillcanister.

X Reseal the AdBlue® refill canister with thecap.

X Store the partially empty AdBlue® refill can-ister and refill hose or dispose of the empty

AdBlue® refill canister and refill hose in anenvironmentally-responsible manner.When you subsequently switch on the igni-tion, the Refill AdBlue See Owner’s Manual display message must go out afterapproximately 20 seconds. If the messagecontinues to be displayed, you must add moreAdBlue®.

Filling procedure with AdBlue® refillbottle! Surfaces which have come into contact with

AdBlue® while refilling should be rinsedimmediately with water, or remove AdBlue®

with a moist cloth and cold water. If AdBlue®

has already crystallised, use a sponge andcold water to clean the area. AdBlue® residuecrystallises after a certain amount of time andsoils the affected surfaces.

! Only screw on the AdBlue® refill bottle sothat it is hand-tight. Otherwise, the thread ofthe AdBlue® refill bottle could be damagedand AdBlue® could leak out.

AdBlue® refill bottles are available at many fill-ing stations or at a Mercedes-Benz ServiceCentre. Refill bottles without a threaded sealoffer no protection against overfilling. AdBlue®

may leak out as a result of overfilling. MercedesBenz offers special refill bottles with a threadedseal. These are available from a Mercedes-BenzService Centre.

X Unscrew the blue AdBlue® filler cap(Y page 187).

X Unscrew the cap of AdBlue® refill bottle :.X Place AdBlue® refill bottle : on the filler

neck as shown and screw it on clockwise untilhand-tight.

188 RefuellingDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

X Press AdBlue® refill bottle : firmly towardsthe filler neck.The AdBlue® tank is filled. This may last up toone minute.If you let go of AdBlue® refill bottle :, thefilling process stops. The AdBlue® refill bottlecan be removed when it has been only parti-ally emptied.

X Release AdBlue® refill bottle :.X Turn AdBlue® refill bottle : anticlockwise

and remove it.X Screw on the AdBlue® filler cap and close the

fuel filler flap. Pay attention to the correctpositioning of the AdBlue® filler cap whendoing so (Y page 187).

X Close AdBlue® refill bottle :.X Store partially empty AdBlue® refill bottle :

or dispose of empty AdBlue® refill bottle : inan environmentally responsible manner.When you subsequently switch on the igni-tion, the Refill AdBlue See Owner’s Manual display message must go out afterapproximately 20 seconds. If the messagecontinues to be displayed, you must add moreAdBlue®.

Parking

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFlammable material such as leaves, grass ortwigs may ignite if they come into contact withhot parts of the exhaust system or exhaustgas flow. There is a risk of fire.Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate-rial can come into contact with hot vehiclecomponents. In particular, do not park on drygrassland or harvested grain fields.

G WARNINGIf you leave children unattended in the vehi-cle, they may be able to set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brakeRshift the automatic transmission out of park

position P or shift manual transmission intoneutralRstart the engineIn addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take the keywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leavechildren unattended in the vehicle.

! Always secure the vehicle correctly againstrolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle or its driv-etrain could be damaged.

! When the vehicle is parked, always removethe key to prevent the battery from becomingdischarged.

Always park your vehicle safely and secure itagainst rolling away. When parking, observe thelegal requirements of the country in which youare currently driving.To ensure that the vehicle is properly securedagainst rolling away unintentionally:Rthe parking brake must be appliedRon vehicles with an automatic transmission,

the transmission must be in position P and thekey must be removed from the ignition lockRon vehicles with a manual transmission, first

gear or reverse gear must be engagedRon steep uphill or downhill gradients, the front

wheels must be turned towards the kerb

Parking brake

Important safety notesAs a rule, you should only apply the parkingbrake when the vehicle is stationary.Your vehicle is equipped with an electric parkingbrake. The function of the parking brake isdependent on the on-board voltage. If the on-board voltage is low or there is a malfunction inthe parking brake system, it may not be possible

Parking 189

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

to release or apply the parking brake in somecases.If the parking brake is malfunctioning, the yel-low ! indicator lamp in the instrument clus-ter lights up and a corresponding message isshown in the display. Proceed as instructed bythe message in the display (Y page 266).

Applying or releasing automaticallyWhen you remove the key from the ignition lockwhen the vehicle is stationary, the parking brakeis applied automatically.When your seat belt is fastened and you depressthe accelerator pedal to pull away, the parkingbrake is released automatically.On vehicles with a manual transmission, theparking brake is released when your seat belt isfastened and you depress the accelerator pedalto pull away. The holding force of the parkingbrake is already reduced when the pulling-awaygear is engaged. Therefore also depress thebrake pedal when engaging the gear. Only thenis your vehicle secured against rolling away.On vehicles with automatic transmission, theparking brake is released when your seat belt isfastened and you shift the transmission to D orR. To do this, depress the brake pedal.

Applying or releasing manually

Parking brake handleIf you apply and release the parking brake fre-quently within a short period, it may not be pos-sible to release the parking brake again in somecases. To protect it from damage, the parkingbrake is temporarily locked and cannot bereleased – play-protection feature. The parkingbrake is operational again after approximately20 seconds.

X To apply: turn the key to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.If you turn the key to position 0 in the ignitionlock, you must apply the parking brake withinthe next five minutes.

X Push handle :.The red ! indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up.

X To release: turn the key to position 1 or 2 inthe ignition lock.If you turn the key from position 1 to position0 in the ignition lock, you can release theparking brake once.

X Depress the brake pedal.X Pull handle :.

The red ! indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster goes out.

Emergency brakingIf, in exceptional cases, the service brake fails,the parking brake can be used to brake the vehi-cle in an emergency. The braking distance isthen considerably greater.X While the vehicle is in motion, push the park-

ing brake handle (Y page 190).The vehicle's brake lights light up. A warningtone sounds and the red ! indicator lampin the instrument cluster lights up. The displayshows the Release parking brake mes-sage.

The vehicle is braked as long as you keep thehandle of the electric parking brake pressed.If you brake the vehicle to a standstill with theparking brake, the parking brake is applied.

Switching off the engine

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe automatic transmission switches to neu-tral position N when you switch off the engine.The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of anaccident.After switching off the engine, always switchto parking position P. Prevent the parked vehi-cle from rolling away by applying the parkingbrake.

190 ParkingDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

! If the coolant temperature is very high, e.g.after driving on hilly roads, leave the enginerunning at idle speed for about two minutesbefore turning it off.This allows the coolant temperature to returnto normal.

Vehicles with manual transmissionX Stop the vehicle.X Engage 1st gear or reverse gear R.X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock

and remove it.The immobiliser is activated. The parkingbrake is automatically applied.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away(Y page 189).

Vehicles with automatic transmissionX Stop the vehicle.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock

and remove it.The immobiliser is activated. The parkingbrake is automatically applied.If you switch the engine off with the trans-mission in position R or D, the automatictransmission shifts to N automatically.If you then open one of the front doors orremove the key from the ignition, the auto-matic transmission automatically shifts to P.If you shift the automatic transmission to Nbefore switching off the engine, the automatictransmission remains in N even if a front dooris opened.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away(Y page 189).

Parking up the vehicleIf you leave the vehicle parked up for longer thanfour weeks, the battery may be damaged byexhaustive discharging.X Disconnect the battery (Y page 346).orX Connect the battery to a trickle charger.

Be sure to observe the notes on charging thebatteries (Y page 349).

You can obtain information about tricklechargers from a qualified specialist work-shop.

If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer than6 weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as aresult of lack of use.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seek

advice.

Driving tips

General notes

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

If you take your foot off the accelerator pedal inoverrun mode, the fuel supply is cut off when theengine speed is outside the idling speed controlrange.

ECO displayDepending on the vehicle equipment you cancall up the ECO display on your vehicle's display.The ECO display shows you how economicalyour driving style is. The ECO display assists youin achieving the most efficient driving style forthe selected settings and prevailing conditions.Your driving style has a significant influence onyour vehicle's fuel consumption.You can view the ECO display in the Trip menu.

Driving tips 191

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

: Acceleration; Coasting= Constant? Additional range achievedUse the steering wheel buttons.X To show the ECO display: call up the list of

menus with ò.X Press : or 9 to select the Trip menu.X Press a to confirm.X Press : or 9 to the select the ECO

display.Range ? is shown under Bonus fr. start andrepresents the additional range achieved sincethe beginning of the journey as a result of anadapted driving style.If the fuel level has dropped into the reserverange, the Reserve fuel message is shown inthe display instead of range ?. In addition, theæ warning lamp lights up in the instrumentcluster (Y page 289).

The ECO display consists of three sections, withan inner and outer area. The sections corre-spond to the following three categories:

: Acceleration – evaluation of allacceleration processes:Rthe outer area fills up and the inner

area lights up green: moderateacceleration, especially at higherspeedsRthe outer area empties and the

inner area is grey: sporty acceler-ation

; Coasting – assessment of all decel-eration processes:Rthe outer area fills up and the inner

area lights up green: anticipatorydriving, keeping your distance andearly release of the accelerator.The vehicle can coast without useof the brakesRthe outer area empties and the

inner area is grey: frequent heavybraking

= Constant – continuous evaluation ofall changes in speed:Rthe outer area fills up and the inner

area lights up green: constantspeed and avoidance of unneces-sary acceleration and decelerationRthe outer area empties and the

inner area is grey: fluctuations inspeed

The three inner areas display the current drivingstyle and light up green as a result of a particu-larly economical driving style. Depending on thedriving situation, up to two areas may light upsimultaneously.At the beginning of the journey, the three outerareas are empty and fill up as a result of eco-nomical driving. A higher level indicates a moreeconomical driving style. If the three outer areasare completely filled at the same time, the driverhas adopted the most economical driving stylefor the selected settings and prevailing condi-tions. The ECO display border lights up.The ECO display does not indicate the actual fuelconsumption. The additionally achieved rangedisplayed under Bonus fr. start does notindicate a fixed consumption reduction.

192 Driving tipsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

In addition to driving style, the actual fuel con-sumption is affected by other factors, such as:RloadRtyre pressureRcold startRchoice of routeRthe use of electrical consumersThese factors are not taken into considerationby the ECO display.An economical driving style involves driving at amoderate engine speed.You will drive in a fuel-efficient manner and willobtain better results in the "Acceleration" and"Constant" categories if you:Robserve the gearshift recommendations on

vehicles with a manual transmission(Y page 174)Ron vehicles with an automatic transmission,

drive in drive program E (Y page 181)On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g. on themotorway, only the outer area for "Constant"will change.The ECO display summarises the driving stylefrom the start of the journey to its completion.Therefore, there are more marked changes inthe outer areas at the start of a journey. After aprolonged driving time, these changes aresmaller. To obtain a clearer evaluation of thecurrent period during the journey, you mustreset the values (Y page 250).If you interrupt your journey and switch off theignition for longer than four hours, the values ofthe ECO display are reset automatically.

Short journeys! If the vehicle is predominantly used for

short-distance driving, this could lead to afault in the automatic cleaning function forthe diesel particle filter. As a result, fuel mayaccumulate in the engine oil and cause enginefailure.

! During automatic regeneration, extremelyhot exhaust gases escape from the exhaustpipe. Maintain a distance of at least 1 metre toother objects, e.g. parked vehicles, in order toavoid damage to property.

If you mainly drive short distances, you shoulddrive on a motorway or an inter-urban road for

20 minutes every 500 km. This facilitates theregeneration of the diesel particle filter.

Speed limiter

G WARNINGExceeding the stated tyre load-bearing capa-city and the approved maximum speed couldlead to tyre damage or the tyre bursting. Thereis a risk of accident.Therefore, only use tyre types and sizesapproved for your vehicle model. Observe thetyre load rating and speed rating required foryour vehicle.

As the driver, you must be aware of the maxi-mum design speed of the vehicle and the maxi-mum permissible speed based on the tyres (tyreand tyre pressure). Pay special attention to thecountry-specific requirements for tyre approval.You must not exceed the speed limit for thetyres specified by the speed rating. The speedrating is stated in the tyre tables (Y page 381).You can permanently limit the permissible max-imum speed of your vehicle, e.g. for driving onwinter tyres.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have themaximum permissible speed programmed at aMercedes-Benz Service Centre.On vehicles with SPEEDTRONIC, you can tem-porarily or permanently limit the permissiblemaximum speed of your vehicle using the on-board computer (Y page 199).Before overtaking, take into consideration thatthe engine speed limiter prevents the speedincreasing beyond the programmed permissiblemaximum speed.On downhill gradients, the speed limitation maybe exceeded. Apply the brakes if necessary.Display messages indicate that you areapproaching the limit speed.

Driving abroad

ServiceAn extensive network of Mercedes-Benz ServiceCentres is also at your disposal when you aretravelling abroad. Nevertheless, please bear inmind that service facilities or replacement parts

Driving tips 193

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

may not always be immediately available. Theworkshop directories are available from anyMercedes-Benz Service Centre.

FuelIn some countries, only fuels with a higher sul-phur content are available.Unsuitable fuel can cause engine damage. Youwill find information about fuel under "Serviceproducts and capacities" (Y page 387).

AdBlue®

AdBlue® of a suitable quality is not available inevery country. Therefore, before taking a tripwith your vehicle outside Europe, check theAdBlue® level (Y page 256). Consult a qualifiedspecialist workshop.You will find information about AdBlue® under"Service products and capacities"(Y page 389).

Dipped-beam headlamps

General notesWhen driving in countries in which traffic driveson the opposite side of the road to the countrywhere the vehicle is registered, you must switchthe headlamps to symmetrical dipped beam.This prevents oncoming traffic from being daz-zled. Symmetrical dipped beam does not illumi-nate as large an area of the edge of the carria-geway.

Vehicles with halogen headlampsThe headlamps do not need to be switched tosymmetrical dipped beam. The legal require-ments of countries in which traffic drives on theopposite side of the road to the country wherethe vehicle is registered are met without theneed to convert the headlamps.

Vehicles with LED headlampsYou can switch over the dipped-beam head-lamps via theSettings menu in the on-boardcomputer. In the Lights submenu, use theDipped beams Setting for function to switchbetween right-side traffic and left-side traffic (Y page 258).You can also have the dipped-beam headlampsswitched over at a qualified specialist workshop.

X On your outbound journey, switch over thedipped-beam headlamps before crossing theborder; on your return journey, switch theheadlamps back as close to the border aspossible.If your vehicle's current setting differs from itscountry specifications, then motorway modeand the extended range fog lamps are unavail-able.

Transport by railTransporting your vehicle by rail may be subjectto certain restrictions or require special meas-ures to be taken in some countries due to vary-ing tunnel heights and loading standards.You can obtain information about this from anyMercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Braking

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.This increases the risk of skidding and havingan accident.Do not shift down for additional engine brak-ing on a slippery road surface.

Downhill gradients! Depressing the brake pedal constantly

results in excessive and premature wear tothe brake pads.

This also applies to automatic braking when youhave activated cruise control, SPEEDTRONIC orDISTRONIC PLUS.Therefore shift to a lower gear in good time onlong and steep downhill gradients, including onvehicles with automatic transmission. On vehi-cles with automatic transmission without driveprogram M, you must restrict the shift range to2 or 1 in good time (Y page 180).This should be observed in particular when driv-ing with a laden vehicle and when towing atrailer.

194 Driving tipsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

You thereby make use of the braking effect ofthe engine and do not have to brake as often tomaintain the speed. This relieves the load on theservice brake and prevents the brakes fromoverheating and wearing too quickly.

Heavy and light loads

G WARNINGThe braking system can overheat if you leaveyour foot on the brake pedal while driving.This increases the braking distance and couldeven cause the braking system to fail. There isa risk of an accident.Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Donot simultaneously depress both the brakepedal and the accelerator pedal while driving.

! Depressing the brake pedal constantlyresults in excessive and premature wear tothe brake pads.

If the brakes have been subjected to a heavyload, do not stop the vehicle immediately. Driveon for a short while. The brakes are cooled downmore quickly in the airflow.If the brakes have been used only moderately,you should occasionally test their effectiveness.To do this, brake more firmly from a higherspeed, paying attention to traffic conditions.The brakes will grip better as a result.

Wet road surfacesIf you have been driving for a long time in heavyrain without braking, there may be a delayedresponse when you first apply the brakes. Thismay also occur after driving through a car washor deep water.You must depress the brake pedal more firmly.Maintain a longer distance to the vehicle infront.While paying attention to the traffic conditions,you should brake the vehicle firmly after drivingon a wet road surface or through a car wash. Thisheats the brake discs so that they dry morequickly, which protects them against corrosion.

Limited braking performance on salt-treated roadsWhen driving on salted roads, salt may start tobuild up on the brake disks and brake pads. Thiscan increase braking distances considerably.Maintain a greater distance to the vehicle infront.To remove any build up of salt that may haveformed:X Apply the brakes at the start of the journey,

occasionally during journey and at the end ofthe journey. Make sure that you do not endan-ger other road users when doing so.

New brake discs and brake pads/liningsNew brake pads and brake discs only reach theiroptimal braking effect after a fewhundred kilometres. Until then, compensate forthis by applying greater force to the brake pedal.For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends only fitting the following brake discs andbrake pads/linings:Rbrake discs that have been approved by

Mercedes-BenzRbrake pads/linings that have been approved

by Mercedes-Benz or are of an equivalentstandard of quality

Other brake discs or brake pads/linings cancompromise the safety of your vehicle.Always replace all brake discs or brake pads/linings on an axle at the same time and only havethem replaced at a qualified specialist work-shop. When replacing the brake discs, alwayshave the brake pads/linings replaced at thesame time.

Driving in wet conditions

Aquaplaning

G WARNINGThere is a danger of aquaplaning occurring,even if you are driving slowly and your tyreshave sufficient tread depth, depending on thedepth of water on the road. There is a risk ofan accident.

Driving tips 195

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

For this reason, avoid tyre ruts and brakecarefully.

Therefore, in heavy rain or other conditions inwhich aquaplaning can occur, drive as follows:Rreduce your speedRavoid tyre rutsRapply the brakes with care

Driving on flooded roads! Bear in mind that vehicles travelling in front

or in the opposite direction create waves. Thismay cause the maximum permissible waterdepth to be exceeded.These notes must be observed under all cir-cumstances. You could otherwise damagethe engine, the electronics or the transmis-sion.

If you have to drive on stretches of road on whichwater has collected, please bear in mind the fol-lowing:Rthe water level of standing water should not

be above the lower edge of the front bumperRdo not drive faster than walking speed

Driving in winter

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.This increases the risk of skidding and havingan accident.Do not shift down for additional engine brak-ing on a slippery road surface.

G DANGERIf the exhaust pipe is blocked or sufficientventilation is not possible, toxic exhaustfumes may enter the vehicle, especially car-bon monoxide. This is the case, for example, ifthe vehicle gets stuck in snow. There is a riskof fatal injuries.If you have to leave the engine or the auxiliaryheating running, keep the exhaust pipe andthe area around the vehicle free of snow. To

guarantee a sufficient supply of fresh air, opena window on the side of the vehicle away fromthe wind.

! In the vicinity of the air intake, moveableparts, the axles and wheel arches, the accu-mulation of snow and ice especially if frozensolid may:Robstruct the air intakeRdamage vehicle partsRcause malfunction by limiting the manoeu-

vrability intended by the design (e.g. insuf-ficient steering movement possible)

Check your vehicle regularly when driving inwinter conditions and remove snow and ice.If there is any damage, inform a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

! Vehicles with automatic transmission mayroll only briefly in the neutral position N. Pro-longed rolling of the wheels, e.g. when beingtowed, will result in transmission damage.

Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop at the onset of winter.Drive particularly carefully on slippery roads.Avoid sudden acceleration, steering and brakingmanoeuvres. Do not use cruise control orDISTRONIC PLUS.If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot bestopped when moving at low speed:X Vehicles with manual transmission:

engage neutral.X Vehicles with automatic transmission:

shift the transmission to position N.X Try to maintain control of the vehicle using

corrective steering.The outside temperature indicator is notdesigned to serve as an ice-warning device andis therefore unsuitable for that purpose.Changes in the outside temperature are dis-played after a short delay.Indicated temperatures just above the freezingpoint do not guarantee that the road surface isfree of ice. The road may still be icy, especially inwooded areas or on bridges. If you do not adjustyour driving style, the vehicle may start to skid.Always adapt your driving style and drive at aspeed to suit the prevailing weather conditions.You should pay special attention to road condi-tions when temperatures are around the freez-ing point.

196 Driving tipsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

You can find further information under:R"M+S tyres" (Y page 367)R"Snow chains" (Y page 368)R"Driving with summer tyres" (Y page 367)Also observe the notes under "Winter operation"(Y page 367).

Driving in mountainous areas! Vehicles with a diesel engine: the oper-

ating safety of the diesel engine is guaranteedup to an altitude of 2,500 m above sea level.You may exceed this altitude for short peri-ods, e.g. in mountainous terrain. Do not driveat altitudes above 2,500 m for extended peri-ods. You could otherwise damage the dieselengine.

When driving in mountainous areas, note thatthe power output of the engine, and with it itsgradient climbing capability, decrease withincreasing altitude. Please take note of this par-ticularly when driving with a trailer in mountain-ous areas.The maximum permissible trailer loads are validfor journeys at altitudes up to 1000 m above sealevel with gradients up to 12%.Information on maximum permissible trailerloads can be found in your vehicle registrationpapers and on the vehicle identification plate(Y page 386) or under "Trailer loads"(Y page 396).When driving at altitudes of 2500 m above sealevel or greater, the ECO start/stop function isno longer available.Notes on braking on downhill gradients can befound in the "Braking" section (Y page 194).

Driving systems

Cruise control

General notesCruise control maintains the speed of the vehi-cle for you. It brakes automatically in order toavoid exceeding the set speed.Use cruise control if road and traffic conditionsmake it appropriate to maintain a steady speedfor a prolonged period. You can set any speedfrom 30 km/h upwards in increments of 1 km/hand 10 km/h.

If you have set Miles as the unit for the digitalspeedometer (Y page 259), you can set anyspeed from 20 mph in increments of 1 mph and5 mph.Cruise control should not be activated whendriving off-road or on construction sites.Cruise control may be unable to maintain thestored speed on uphill gradients. The storedspeed is resumed if the uphill gradient evens outand the vehicle's speed does not fall below30 km/h. Cruise control maintains the storedspeed on downhill gradients by automaticallyapplying the brakes. Observe the additional driv-ing tips (Y page 194).Gearshift instructions for vehicles with manualtransmission:Ralways drive at an adequate, but not exces-

sive engine speedRchange gear in good time, particularly on

steep uphill gradientsRdo not change down several gears at a timeRcruise control is deactivated if you depress

the clutch pedal for longer than six secondsRif you shift into neutral and release the clutch

pedal, the engine speed may increase con-siderably. Deactivate cruise control before-hand

Important safety notesObserve the notes on braking (Y page 194).If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you areinattentive, cruise control can neither reducethe risk of an accident nor override the laws ofphysics. Cruise control cannot take road,weather and traffic conditions into account.Cruise control is only an aid. You are responsiblefor the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehi-cle speed, for braking in good time and for stay-ing in lane.If you change wheel size, make sure they corre-spond to the correct wheel size category(Y page 365). If the category is changed withoutrecoding the control units in the vehicle, thefunctioning of cruise control may be impaired.

Driving systems 197

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Do not use cruise control:Rin traffic conditions that are unsuitable for

driving at a constant speed, e.g. in heavy traf-fic, on winding roads or off-roadRon slippery roads. Braking or accelerating

may cause the drive wheels to lose tractionand the vehicle could then skidRwhen visibility is poor, e.g. due to fog, heavy

rain or snowIf there is a change of drivers, make sure thatyou inform the new driver about the storedspeed.

Cruise control lever and display

: To activate and store the current speed or ahigher speed

; LIM indicator lamp= To activate at the last stored speed? To activate and store the current speed or a

lower speedA To switch between cruise control and varia-

ble SPEEDTRONICB To deactivate cruise controlThe cruise control lever is the lower lever on theleft of the steering column.You can operate cruise control and variableSPEEDTRONIC with the cruise control lever.X To preselect cruise control: check that LIM

indicator lamp ; is off.If it is, cruise control is already selected.If it is not, press the cruise control lever in thedirection of arrow A.

LIM indicator lamp ; shows you which functionyou have selected:RLIM indicator lamp off: cruise control is

selected.RLIM indicator lamp lit: variable SPEED-

TRONIC is selected.

When you activate cruise control, the displaybriefly shows the Cruise control messageand the stored speed.

Activation conditionsTo activate cruise control, all of the followingactivation conditions must be fulfilled:Rthe cruise control function must be selected

(Y page 198)Rthe parking brake must be released. The !

indicator lamp in the instrument cluster is offRESP® must be switched on, but not currently

intervening or performing a control actionRyou are driving faster than 30 km/hRneither the brake or clutch pedal is depressed

Storing and maintaining the currentspeedX Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed

above 30 km/h.X Briefly push the cruise control lever up : or

down ?.X Release the accelerator pedal.

Cruise control is activated. The current speedis stored and shown briefly in the display.

Resuming the stored speed

G WARNINGIf you call up a stored speed and this is dif-ferent from the current speed, the vehicleaccelerates or brakes. If you do not knowwhat the stored speed is, the vehicle mayaccelerate or brake unexpectedly. There is arisk of an accident.Take the traffic conditions into accountbefore calling up the stored speed. If you donot know what the stored speed is, store thedesired speed again.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou =.

X Release the accelerator pedal.Cruise control is activated and adjusts thevehicle's speed to the last speed stored.The stored speed is shown briefly in the dis-play.

198 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

i When you pull the cruise control levertowards you for the first time after starting theengine, cruise control adopts the currentspeed.

Setting the speedIt may be a moment before the vehicle starts toaccelerate or brake to the set speed. Take thisdelay into account when setting the speed.X Briefly push the cruise control lever up : to

increase the speed or down ? to reduce thespeed.The vehicle will accelerate or decelerate. Thespeed is shown in the display.

X Release the cruise control lever once thedesired speed is reached.The displayed speed is stored.

orX Briefly press the cruise control lever up : or

down ? to the first point of resistance.The last speed stored is increased/reduced inincrements of 1 km/h.

orX Briefly press the cruise control lever up : or

down ? beyond the pressure point.The last speed stored is increased/reduced inincrements of 10 km/h.

i Cruise control is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal. If you acceler-ate briefly to overtake, for example, cruisecontrol adjusts the vehicle's speed to the lastspeed stored after you have finished overtak-ing.

Deactivating cruise controlThere are various ways to deactivate cruise con-trol:X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwardsB.

orX Apply the brakes.orX Briefly push the cruise control lever in the

direction of arrow A.Variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. LIM indi-cator lamp ; in the cruise control lever lightsup.

The last speed set remains stored. The lastspeed stored is cleared when you switch off theengine.Cruise control is deactivated automaticallywhen:Ryou apply the brakesRyou apply the parking brake and the !

indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lightsupRyou are driving slower than 30 km/hRyou depress the clutch pedal for longer than

six seconds while the vehicle is in motionRyou shift the manual transmission to neutral

while the vehicle is in motion and release theclutch pedalRon vehicles with manual transmission, you

shift to a higher gear and as a result theengine speed is too lowRyou shift the automatic transmission to neu-

tral position N while the vehicle is in motionRESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®

Rthere is a malfunction in the ESP® or ABS sys-tem

If cruise control automatically deactivates, awarning tone sounds and the Cruise control off message appears briefly in the display.

Problems with cruise controlThe speed cannot be set when cruise control isactivated.The display is showing a message of high priorityand cannot therefore show a change in speed.X Proceed as instructed by the message in the

display.

SPEEDTRONIC

General notesSPEEDTRONIC helps you to avoid exceeding aset speed.You can set a variable or permanent speed lim-itation:RVariable, for maximum permissible speeds,

e.g. in built-up areasRPermanent, for long-term maximum permis-

sible speeds, e.g. when driving on winter tyres(Y page 201)

Driving systems 199

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

When the engine is running, you can use thecruise control lever to limit the speed to anyspeed above 30 km/h even if the vehicle is sta-tionary. You can adjust the speed limitation inincrements of 1 km/h and 10 km/h.If you have set Miles as the unit for the digitalspeedometer (Y page 259), you can set anyspeed from 20 mph as the speed limitation. Youcan then adjust the speed limitation in incre-ments of 1 mph and 5 mph.

i The speed shown in the speedometer maydiffer slightly from the stored speed limita-tion.

You can only exceed the speed limitation storedby variable SPEEDTRONIC if you:Rdeactivate variable SPEEDTRONIC using the

cruise control lever. (Y page 201)Rdepress the accelerator pedal beyond the

pressure point (kickdown with automatictransmission). Variable SPEEDTRONIC thenswitches to passive (Y page 201).

i You cannot deactivate variable SPEED-TRONIC by braking.

Important safety notesThe SPEEDTRONIC system automatically brakesthe vehicle to ensure that you do not exceed thespeed that you have set. Observe the supple-mentary notes on braking (Y page 194).If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you areinattentive, SPEEDTRONIC can neither reducethe risk of an accident nor override the laws ofphysics. SPEEDTRONIC cannot take road,weather and traffic conditions into account.SPEEDTRONIC is only an aid. You are responsi-ble for the distance to the vehicle in front, forvehicle speed, for braking in good time and forstaying in lane.If you change wheel size, make sure they corre-spond to the correct wheel size category(Y page 365). If the category is changed withoutrecoding the control units in the vehicle, thefunctioning of SPEEDTRONIC may be impaired.If there is a change of drivers, make sure thatyou inform the new driver about the storedspeed.

Variable SPEEDTRONIC

Cruise control lever and display

: Activates and stores the current speed or ahigher speed

; LIM indicator lamp= Activates at the last stored speed? Activates and stores the current speed or a

lower speedA Switches between cruise control or

DISTRONIC PLUS and variable SPEED-TRONIC

B Deactivates variable SPEEDTRONICThe cruise control lever is the lower lever on theleft of the steering column.With the cruise control lever, you can operatecruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS and variableSPEEDTRONIC.X To preselect variable SPEEDTRONIC:

check whether LIM indicator lamp ; is lit.If it is on, variable SPEEDTRONIC is alreadyselected.If it is not, press the cruise control lever in thedirection of arrow A.

LIM indicator lamp ; shows you which functionyou have selected:RLIM indicator lamp off: cruise control or

DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.RLIM indicator lamp lit: variable SPEED-

TRONIC is selected.You can use the cruise control lever to limit thespeed to any speed above 30 km/h while theengine is running.When you activate variable SPEEDTRONIC, thedisplay briefly shows the SPEEDTRONIC limitmessage and the stored speed.

200 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

On vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS, the seg-ments between the start of the scale and thestored speed also light up in the speedometer.

Storing the current speedX Briefly push the cruise control lever up : or

down ?.Variable SPEEDTRONIC is activated. The cur-rent speed is stored and shown briefly in thedisplay as the speed limitation. On vehicleswith DISTRONIC PLUS, the segmentsbetween the start of the scale and the storedspeed also light up in the speedometer.

You can use the cruise control lever to limit thespeed to any speed above 30 km/h.

Resuming the stored speedG WARNINGIf you call up the stored speed and it is lowerthan the current speed, the vehicle deceler-ates. If you do not know the stored speed, thevehicle could decelerate unexpectedly. Thereis a risk of an accident.Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-tions before calling up the stored speed. If youdo not know the stored speed, store thedesired speed again.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou =.Variable SPEEDTRONIC is activated. Thespeed limit is shown briefly in the display. Onvehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS, the segmentsbetween the start of the scale and the storedspeed also light up in the speedometer.

i Variable SPEEDTRONIC is activated whenyou pull the cruise control lever towards youfor the first time after starting the engine. Thecurrent speed is then stored.

Setting the speedX Briefly push the cruise control lever up : to

increase the speed or down ? to reduce thespeed.The speed is shown in the display.

X Release the cruise control lever once thedesired speed is displayed.The displayed speed is stored.

or

X Briefly press the cruise control lever up : ordown ? to the first point of resistance.The last speed stored is increased/reduced inincrements of 1 km/h.

orX Briefly press the cruise control lever up : or

down ? beyond the point of resistance.The last speed stored is increased/reduced inincrements of 10 km/h.

Switching variable SPEEDTRONIC to pas-siveIf you depress the accelerator pedal beyond thepressure point (kickdown), SPEEDTRONIC isswitched to passive mode. The display thenshows the SPEEDTRONIC passive messageand you are able to exceed the stored speed.Variable SPEEDTRONIC is activated again if you:Rdrive slower than the stored speed without

kickdownRset a new speed orRcall up the last speed stored againThe SPEEDTRONIC passive then disappearsfrom the display.

Deactivating variable SPEEDTRONICThere are various ways to deactivate variableSPEEDTRONIC:X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwardsB.

orX Briefly press the cruise control lever in the

direction of arrow A.LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise controllever goes out. Variable SPEEDTRONIC isdeactivated and cruise control or DISTRONICPLUS is preselected.

The last speed limitation set remains stored. Thelast speed limitation stored is deleted when youswitch off the engine.Variable SPEEDTRONIC is deactivated automat-ically if:Ryou deactivate ESP®

Rthere is a malfunction in the ESP® or ABS sys-tem

Permanent SPEEDTRONICi Permanent SPEEDTRONIC is only available

in certain countries.

Driving systems 201

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

You can use the on-board computer to limit thespeed permanently to a value between160 km/h (e.g. for driving on winter tyres) andthe maximum permissible speed (Y page 259).If you accelerate the vehicle using the acceler-ator pedal, the SPEEDTRONIC limit messageand the stored speed are shown in the displayshortly before the set limit speed is reached.Permanent SPEEDTRONIC remains active evenif variable SPEEDTRONIC is deactivated.You cannot then exceed the set speed limitationeven if you depress the accelerator pedalbeyond the pressure point (kickdown for auto-matic transmissions).

i If there is a malfunction in the ESP® or ABSsystem, permanent SPEEDTRONIC is deacti-vated for the duration of the malfunction.

Problems with SPEEDTRONICThe speed cannot be set when SPEEDTRONIC isactivated.The display is showing a message of high priorityand cannot therefore show a change in speed.X Proceed as instructed by the message in the

display.

DISTRONIC PLUS

General notesDISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and auto-matically helps you maintain the distance to thevehicle detected in front. The system detectsvehicles by means of radar sensors. DISTRONICPLUS brakes automatically so that the set speedis not exceeded. If the set speed during corner-ing is too high, DISTRONIC PLUS slows yourvehicle down automatically.Observe the supplementary notes on braking(Y page 194).DISTRONIC PLUS includes COLLISION PREVEN-TION ASSIST which warns you visually andacoustically if there is a risk of a collision. COL-LISION PREVENTION ASSIST then uses theradar sensor system and data from DISTRONICPLUS. In such cases, adaptive Brake Assist sup-ports you in the speed range between 7 km/hand approximately 30 km/h, even in the case ofdetected stationary obstacles (Y page 211).

DISTRONIC PLUS is operational in the speedrange from 0 km/h and a maximum speed of200 km/h.Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS when driving witha fully laden vehicle or when driving on steepdownhill or uphill gradients.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS does not react to:Rpeople or animalsRstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stop-

ped or parked vehiclesRoncoming and crossing trafficAs a result, DISTRONIC PLUS may neither givewarnings nor intervene in such situations.There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly rec-ognise other road users and complex trafficconditions.In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may:Rgive an unnecessary warning and then

brake the vehicleRneither give a warning nor interveneRaccelerate or brake unexpectedlyThere is a risk of an accident.Continue to drive carefully and be prepared tobrake, particularly if DISTRONIC PLUS warnsyou.

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with upto 50% of the maximum possible deceleration.If this deceleration is not sufficient,DISTRONIC PLUS alerts you with a visual andacoustic warning. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Apply the brakes yourself in these situationsand try to take evasive action.

202 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

! When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, thevehicle brakes automatically in certain situa-tions. To avoid damage to the vehicle, deac-tivate DISTRONIC PLUS in the following orsimilar situations:Rwhen towing awayRin a car wash

If you fail to adapt your driving style, DISTRONICPLUS can neither reduce the risk of an accidentnor override the laws of physics. DISTRONICPLUS cannot take road and weather conditionsor traffic conditions into account. DISTRONICPLUS is only an aid. You are responsible for thedistance to the vehicle in front, for vehiclespeed, braking in good time and for staying inyour lane.Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS:Rif the vehicle is fully ladenRin traffic conditions that are unsuitable for

driving at a constant speed, e.g. in heavy traf-fic, on winding roads or off-roadRon slippery roads. Braking or accelerating can

cause the drive wheels to lose traction andthe vehicle could then skid.Rwhen visibility is poor, e.g. due to fog, heavy

rain or snowDISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow vehi-cles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or vehi-cles driving on a different line.In particular, the detection of obstacles can beimpaired in the case of:Rdirt on the sensors or anything else covering

the sensorsRit is snowing or raining heavilyRthere is interference from other radar sourcesRthe possibility of strong radar reflections, for

example, in multi-storey car parksIf DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a vehiclein front, it may unexpectedly accelerate thevehicle to the stored speed.This speed can:Rbe too high for a filter lane or a slip roadRbe so high in the right lane that you pass vehi-

cles driving in the left laneRbe so high in the left lane that you pass vehi-

cles driving in the right laneIf there is a change of drivers, make sure thatyou inform the new driver about the storedspeed.

Following damage to the front end of the vehicle,have the configuration and operation of theradar sensor checked at a qualified specialistworkshop. This also applies to collisions at slowspeeds where there is no visible damage to thefront of the vehicle.If you change wheel size, make sure they corre-spond to the correct wheel size category(Y page 365). If the category is changed withoutrecoding the control units in the vehicle, thefunctioning of DISTRONIC PLUS may beimpaired or it might detect a malfunction switchitself off.

Cruise control lever

: To activate and store the current speed or ahigher speed

; To set the specified minimum distance= LIM indicator lamp? To activate at the last stored speedA To activate and store the current speed or a

lower speedB To switch between DISTRONIC PLUS and

variable SPEEDTRONICC To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUSThe cruise control lever is the lower lever on theleft of the steering column.You can operate DISTRONIC PLUS and variableSPEEDTRONIC with the cruise control lever.X To preselect DISTRONIC PLUS: check that

LIM indicator lamp = is off.If it is off, DISTRONIC PLUS is already selec-ted.If it is not, press the cruise control lever in thedirection of arrow B.

Driving systems 203

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

LIM indicator lamp = shows you which functionyou have selected:RLIM indicator lamp off: DISTRONIC PLUS is

selected.RLIM indicator lamp lit: variable SPEED-

TRONIC is selected.

Activating DISTRONIC PLUS

Activation conditionsTo activate DISTRONIC PLUS, all of the followingactivation conditions must be fulfilled:Rthe DISTRONIC PLUS function must be selec-

ted (Y page 203).Rthe parking brake must be released. The

red ! indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster is off.Rthe driver's seat belt must be fastened.Rall doors and the tailgate must be closed.Rthe engine must be running. It may take up to

two minutes of driving before DISTRONICPLUS is ready for use.RESP® must be switched on but not currently

intervening.RActive Parking Assist must not be activated.Rthe automatic transmission must be in posi-

tion D.

ActivatingX While the vehicle is in motion, briefly press the

cruise control lever up : or down A andrelease the accelerator pedal.DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The currentspeed is stored and appears in the speedom-eter and briefly in the display.

X If necessary, set the speed (Y page 206) andthe specified minimum distance(Y page 206).Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of thevehicle in front, but only up to the storedspeed.If you do not fully release the acceleratorpedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS inactive mes-sage appears in the display. The set distanceto a slower-moving vehicle in front will thennot be maintained. You will be driving at thespeed you determine by the position of theaccelerator pedal.

If you activate DISTRONIC PLUS while the vehi-cle is stationary, the lowest speed you can set is30 km/h. After pulling away, your vehicle

adapts its speed to that of a vehicle in front, butonly up to the stored speed.

Activating at the last stored speedG WARNINGIf you call up a stored speed and this is dif-ferent from the current speed, the vehicleaccelerates or brakes. If you do not knowwhat the stored speed is, the vehicle mayaccelerate or brake unexpectedly. There is arisk of an accident.Take the traffic conditions into accountbefore calling up the stored speed. If you donot know what the stored speed is, store thedesired speed again.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou ?.

X Release the accelerator pedal.DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. Your vehicleadapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front,but only up to the stored speed.The stored speed appears in the speedometerand briefly in the display.

When you pull the cruise control lever towardsyou for the first time after starting the engine,DISTRONIC PLUS adopts the current speed. If atthe time, the current speed is less than30 km/h, DISTRONIC PLUS adopts the speed of30 km/h.

Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

Pulling away and drivingThe vehicle can also pull away when it is facingan unidentified obstacle or is driving on a differ-ent line from another vehicle. The vehicle thenbrakes automatically. Be ready to brake at alltimes.If you brake while the vehicle is in motion,DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. If you depressthe brake pedal while the vehicle is stationary,DISTRONIC PLUS remains activated.

204 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

X To pull away with DISTRONIC PLUS:remove your foot from the brake pedal.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou ?.

orX Briefly depress the accelerator pedal.

The vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed tothat of the vehicle in front.If no vehicle is detected in front, the vehicleaccelerates to the set speed.

If DISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a vehicle infront, the system operates like cruise control.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle infront has slowed down, it brakes the vehicle. Inthis way, the specified minimum distance youhave selected is maintained.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-movingvehicle in front, it accelerates the vehicle to theset speed.

Selecting the drive programOn vehicles with automatic transmission, youcan select between various drive programs.DISTRONIC Plus supports a sporty driving stylewhen you select the S or M drive program. Cor-nering or acceleration behind the vehicle in frontor to the set speed is then noticeably moredynamic.If you have selected drive program E or C,DISTRONIC PLUS accelerates the vehicle moregently. This setting is recommended in stop-and-start traffic or when driving a laden vehicle.You will find further information about the driveprograms in the automatic transmission under"Automatic transmissions" (Y page 180).

Changing lanesIf you change to the overtaking lane, DISTRONICPLUS supports you if:Ryou are driving faster than 70 km/hRDISTRONIC PLUS is maintaining the distance

to a vehicle in frontRyou switch on the turn signalRDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger of

collisionIf all preconditions are met, your vehicle willaccelerate when you change lanes. DISTRONICPLUS interrupts the acceleration process ifchanging lanes takes too long or if the distancebetween your vehicle and the vehicle in frontbecomes too small.

DISTRONIC PLUS recognises whether traffic isdriving on the left or right and monitors the cor-responding lane when you change lanes.

StoppingG WARNINGIf you leave the driver's seat when the vehicleis only being braked by DISTRONIC PLUS, thevehicle could roll away if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in

the voltage supply.RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated with the

cruise control lever, for example by a vehi-cle occupant or from outside the vehicle.Rthe electrical system in the engine com-

partment, the battery or the fuses are tam-pered with.Rthe battery is disconnected.Rthe vehicle is accelerated, e.g. by a vehicle

occupant.There is a risk of an accident.If you wish to leave the driver's seat, alwaysdeactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and secure thevehicle against rolling away.

Information on deactivation can be found under"Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS" (Y page 207).If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle infront has stopped, it will cause your vehicle tobrake and come to a halt. Your vehicle will stopa sufficient distance from the vehicle in front.The distance will depend on the set specifiedminimum distance (Y page 206).The vehicle is automatically kept stationarywithout the driver having to depress the brakepedal. To pull away, you must then brieflydepress the accelerator pedal or briefly pull thecruise control lever towards you. If the vehicle isstationary for just a moment, your vehicle willpull away automatically. If the vehicle remainsstationary for over 20 minutes, the transmissionshifts automatically into position P.

Driving systems 205

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Transmission position P secures the vehicleautomatically if DISTRONIC PLUS is activatedand:Rthe driver's seat belt is not fastened and a

door or the tailgate is openedRthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-

matically switched off by the ECO start/stopfunctionRthere is a malfunction in the systemRthe power supply is not sufficient

Setting the speed

: To store the current speed or a higher speed; To store the current speed or a lower speedIt may be a moment before the vehicle starts toaccelerate or brake to the set speed. Take thisdelay into account when setting the speed.X Press the cruise control lever up : to

increase the speed or down ; to reduce thespeed.The vehicle will accelerate or decelerate. Thespeed appears in the speedometer and thedisplay.

X Release the cruise control lever once thedesired speed is reached.The current speed is stored.

orX Briefly press the cruise control lever as far as

the 1st pressure point up : or down ;.The last speed stored is increased/reduced inincrements of 1 km/h.

orX Briefly press the cruise control lever beyond

the pressure point up : or down ;.The last speed stored is increased/reduced inincrements of 10 km/h.

i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal. If you acceler-

ate briefly to overtake, for example,DISTRONIC PLUS adjusts the vehicle's speedto the last speed stored after you have fin-ished overtaking.

Setting the specified minimum distance

The specified minimum distance describes thedistance to the vehicle in front that DISTRONICPLUS has to maintain depending on the roadspeed. You can set the specified minimum dis-tance that DISTRONIC PLUS is to maintain. Asthis distance varies depending on the roadspeed, you set it by adjusting the time gap to thevehicle in front. You can select between a shortand a longer time gap. The set gap is shown inthe display as a distance from the vehicle infront (Y page 207).You remain responsible at all times for main-taining the legally required minimum distancefrom the vehicle in front. Adjust the distance tothe vehicle in front if necessary.X Turn controller = in direction ; to increase

the specified minimum distance and in direc-tion : to reduce the specified minimum dis-tance.DISTRONIC PLUS adjusts the distance to thevehicle in front accordingly.

206 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the instru-ment cluster

Displays in the speedometer

Display in the speedometer with a vehicle in front(example: stored speed of 130 km/h)When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, 1 or 2 scalesegments in the speedometer dial light up in setspeed range ;.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front,the scale segments between speed of the vehi-cle in front : and stored speed ; light up.

i For design reasons, the speed displayed inthe speedometer may differ slightly from thespeed set for DISTRONIC PLUS.

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deacti-vated

: Vehicle in front, if detected; Distance indicator: current distance to the

vehicle in front= Specified minimum distance to the vehicle

in front; adjustable? Own vehicleX Select the Assistance graphic function

using the on-board computer (Y page 255).

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is activa-ted

: DISTRONIC PLUS active (text only appearswhen the cruise control lever is actuated)

; Vehicle in front, if detected= Specified minimum distance to the vehicle

in front; adjustable? Own vehicleX Select the Assistance graphic function

using the on-board computer (Y page 255).When you switch on DISTRONIC PLUS, the dis-play briefly shows the stored speed first.

Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS

There are several ways to deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS:X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards=.

orX Brake while the vehicle is moving.orX Briefly push the cruise control lever in the

direction of arrow ;.Variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. LIM indi-cator lamp : in the cruise control lever lightsup.

Driving systems 207

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

The last speed set remains stored. The lastspeed stored is cleared when you switch off theengine.DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactivatedif:Ryou apply the brakesRyou apply the parking brake and the red !

indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lightsupRyou activate Active Parking AssistRyou unfasten your seat beltRa door or the tailgate is openedRyou shift the automatic transmission to posi-

tion P, R or NRESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®

Rthe vehicle is skiddingRthere is a malfunction in the ESP® or ABS sys-

tem.If DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated automati-cally, you will hear a tone and the DISTRONIC PLUS off message is shown briefly in the dis-play.

Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

General notesThe following contains descriptions of certainroad and traffic conditions in which you must beparticularly attentive. In such situations, brake ifnecessary. DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactiva-ted.

Cornering, entering and exiting a bend

If the vehicle speed during cornering is too high,DISTRONIC PLUS slows your vehicle down auto-matically.The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehi-cles when cornering is limited. Your vehicle maybrake unexpectedly or late.

Vehicles which are not driving in the mid-dle of their lane

DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehicles whichare not driving in the middle of their lane. Thedistance to the vehicle in front will be too short.

Other vehicles changing lane

DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the vehiclecutting in yet. The distance to this vehicle will betoo short.

Narrow vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected the vehi-cle in front on the edge of the carriagewaybecause of its narrow width. The distance to thevehicle in front will be too short.

208 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Obstructions and stationary vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obstaclesor stationary vehicles. If, for example, the detec-ted vehicle turns a corner and reveals an obsta-cle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONIC PLUS willnot brake for these.

Crossing vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS may detect vehicles that arecrossing your lane by mistake. ActivatingDISTRONIC PLUS at, for example, a traffic lightwith crossing traffic, could cause your vehicle topull away at the wrong time.

4MATIC (permanent all-wheel drive)

General notes4MATIC ensures permanent drive for all fourwheels, and together with ESP® it improves thevehicle's traction.If a driven wheel spins due to lack of traction:RWhen pulling away, make use of the traction

control integrated in ESP®. Depress theaccelerator pedal as far as necessary.RWhile driving, slowly take your foot off the

accelerator pedal

Use winter tyres (M+S tyres), with snow chainsif necessary, when the conditions are wintry(Y page 367). This is the only way to get the fullbenefit from the all-wheel drive system.Use DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) whendriving downhill off-road (Y page 209).

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style or if you areinattentive, 4MATIC can neither reduce the riskof an accident nor override the laws of physics.4MATIC cannot take road, weather and trafficconditions into account. 4MATIC is only an aid.You are responsible for the distance to the vehi-cle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in goodtime and for staying in lane.

! A function or performance test should onlybe carried out on a twin-axle dynamometer.Before you operate the vehicle on such adynamometer, please consult a qualifiedworkshop. You could otherwise damage thedrive train or the brake system.

! Never tow the vehicle with one axle raised.This may damage the transfer case. Damageof this sort is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz implied warranty. All wheels mustremain either on the ground or be fully raised.Observe the instructions for towing the vehi-cle with all wheels in full contact with theground.

You can find information on towing away under"Tow-starting and towing away" (Y page 362).

DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)

General notesOn vehicles with 4MATIC, DSR can be activatedas assistance when driving downhill off-road.DSR maintains a stored speed for you on down-hill gradients by applying the brakes as required.The steeper the gradient is, the more DSR cau-ses the vehicle to brake. On flat terrain or goinguphill, DSR hardly brakes or does not brake atall.You can set the stored speed to between4 km/h and 18 km/h using the brake and accel-erator pedals or the cruise control lever. You candrive below or exceed the set speed at any timeby braking or accelerating.

Driving systems 209

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

DSR is activated but not active if you drive fasterthan 18 km/h off-road. DSR remains activated,but does not brake automatically. If you subse-quently drive slower than 18 km/h, DSR brakesautomatically until the set speed is reached.If you drive faster than 45 km/h, DSR switchesoff automatically.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the speed driven and the set speed deviateand you activate DSR on a slippery road sur-face, the wheels may lose traction. Thisincreases the risk of skidding and having anaccident.Before switching DSR on, please take intoconsideration the road surface and the differ-ence between driving speed and the setspeed.

If you fail to adapt your driving style, the drivingsafety systems can neither reduce the risk ofaccident nor override the laws of physics. DSRcannot take road, weather and traffic conditionsinto account. DSR is only an aid. You are respon-sible for the distance to the vehicle in front, forvehicle speed, braking in good time and for stay-ing in your lane.You are always responsible for maintaining con-trol over your vehicle on downhill gradients. DSRcannot always maintain the set speed, depend-ing on the condition of the terrain and the tyres.Select a set speed to suit the surrounding con-ditions and also apply the brakes yourself, ifnecessary.

Activating or deactivating DSRYou can only switch DSR on when you are drivingat 40 km/h or less. If the current speed is toohigh, the display shows the à symbol and theMax. speed 25 mph message.When DSR is activated and the vehicle acceler-ates or brakes, the current speed is saved as theset speed. This is only the case if you are notdriving faster than 18 km/h.

X Press button :.The indicator lamp in the button is lit whenDSR is activated. If you drive slower than18 km/h, DSR with the current speed is shownin the status area of the display(Y page 248).When the system switches over, the Ãsymbol is shown briefly in the display with theset speed or the message off.When DSR is activated, the on-board com-puter shows the à symbol in the assis-tance display menu (Y page 255).

If you are driving faster than 18 km/h with DSRactivated:RDSR remains activated but is not activeRthe display hides the DSR message in the sta-

tus areaRthe display briefly shows the à symbol

with the --- km/h message.If you drive faster than 45 km/h, DSR switchesoff automatically.When parking or pulling away using Active Park-ing Assist, if you press button :, the indicatorlamp flashes. You will then be unable to activateDSR.

210 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Setting the speed

Cruise control lever: increases the set speed; reduces the set speedYou can change the set speed to a valuebetween 4 km/h and 18 km/h when DSR isactive. To do so, DSR must be activated and thecurrent speed must be between 4 km/h and18 km/h.X Brake or accelerate the vehicle to the set

speed, then release the brake or acceleratorpedal.

orX Briefly press the cruise control lever as far as

the 1st pressure point up : or down ;.The set speed is increased or reduced inincrements of 1 km/h.The display shows the set speed in the statusarea (Y page 248).

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST

General notesCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST helps you:Rto minimise the risk of a front-end collision

with a detected obstacle in the path of yourvehicleRto reduce the consequences of a front-end

collisionThe system uses the radar sensors to detectvehicles in front. On vehicles with DISTRONICPLUS, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST is partof this system and uses its radar sensors anddata.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST consists of thedistance warning function and Adaptive BrakeAssist.

If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST is malfunc-tioning, the display shows a corresponding mes-sage (Y page 276).

Distance warning function

Important safety notesG WARNINGThe distance warning function does not react:Rto people or animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRwhen corneringThus, the distance warning function cannotprovide a warning in all critical situations.There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

G WARNINGThe distance warning function cannot alwaysclearly identify objects and complex trafficsituations.In such cases, the distance warning functionmay:Rgive an unnecessary warningRnot give a warningThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation; do not rely on the distance warningfunction alone.

In particular, the detection of obstacles can beimpaired in the case of:Rdirt on the sensors or anything else covering

the sensorsRsnow or heavy rainRinterference from other radar sourcesRstrong radar reflections, for example, in multi-

storey car parksRa narrow vehicle travelling in front, e.g. a

motorbikeRa vehicle travelling in front on a different lineDue to the nature of the system, particularlycomplicated but non-critical driving conditionsmay also cause the system to display a warning.

Driving systems 211

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

If you fail to adapt your driving style, the dis-tance warning function can neither reduce therisk of an accident nor override the laws of phys-ics. The distance warning function cannot takeinto account road, weather or traffic conditions.The distance warning function is only an aid. Youare responsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed, braking in good timeand for staying in your lane.Following damage to the front end of the vehicle,have the configuration and operation of theradar sensor checked at a qualified specialistworkshop. This also applies to collisions at slowspeeds where there is no visible damage to thefront of the vehicle.If you change wheel size, make sure they corre-spond to the correct wheel size category(Y page 365). If the category is changed withoutrecoding the control units in the vehicle, thefunctioning of the distance warning feature maybe impaired. COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTmay then detect a fault and switch itself off.

FunctionX To activate/deactivate: activate or deacti-

vate the distance warning function in the on-board computer (Y page 257).When the distance warning function is deac-tivated, the æ symbol appears in the assis-tance graphic on the display.

The distance warning function can help you tominimise the risk of a rear-end collision with avehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such acollision. With the help of the radar sensor sys-tem, the distance warning function can detectobstacles that are in the path of your vehicle foran extended period of time. If the distance warn-ing function detects that there is a risk of a col-lision, you will be warned visually and, wherenecessary, acoustically. Without your interven-tion, the distance warning function cannot pre-vent a collision.The distance warning function issues a warningat speeds:Rfrom about 30 km/h if, over several seconds,

the distance maintained to the vehicle travel-ling in front is insufficient for the speed beingdriven. The · warning lamp in the instru-ment cluster then lights up.Rfrom about 7 km/h if you approach a vehicle

travelling in front or a stationary vehicle tooquickly. The · warning lamp in the instru-

ment lights up and an intermittent warningtone also sounds.At speeds up to about 70 km/h, the systemalso detects stationary obstacles, for exam-ple stopped or parked vehicles.

X Brake immediately until the distance from theobstacle increases and the risk of a front-endcollision passes.

orX Take evasive action, provided it is safe to do

so.

Adaptive Brake Assist

General notesAdaptive Brake Assist evaluates the traffic sit-uation with the help of the radar sensor systemand can detect obstacles which have been inyour vehicle's path for an extended period oftime. From speeds above 7 km/h, AdaptiveBrake Assist aids you in braking during hazard-ous situations.Up to a speed of approximately 200 km/h,Adaptive Brake Assist is capable of reacting tomoving obstacles that have already been detec-ted as such at least once over the period ofobservation.

Important safety notesG WARNINGAdaptive Brake Assist does not react:Rto people or animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRto stationary obstaclesRwhen corneringAs a result, the Adaptive Brake Assist may notintervene in all critical conditions. There is arisk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

G WARNINGAdaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearlyidentify objects and complex traffic situa-tions.

212 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist can:Rintervene unnecessarilyRnot interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake. Terminate theintervention in a non-critical driving situation.

In particular, the detection of obstacles can beimpaired in the case of:Rdirt on the sensors or anything else covering

the sensorsRsnow or heavy rainRinterference from other radar sourcesRstrong radar reflections, for example, in multi-

storey car parksRa narrow vehicle travelling in front, e.g. a

motorbikeRa vehicle travelling in front on a different lineDue to the nature of the system, particularlycomplicated but non-critical driving conditionsmay also cause Adaptive Brake Assist to inter-vene.If you fail to adapt your driving style, AdaptiveBrake Assist can neither reduce the risk of acci-dent nor override the laws of physics. AdaptiveBrake Assist cannot take into account road,weather or traffic conditions. Adaptive BrakeAssist is only an aid. You are responsible for thedistance to the vehicle in front, for vehiclespeed, braking in good time and for staying inyour lane.Following damage to the front end of the vehicle,have the configuration and operation of theradar sensor checked at a qualified specialistworkshop. This also applies to collisions at slowspeeds where there is no visible damage to thefront of the vehicle.If you change wheel size, make sure they corre-spond to the correct wheel size category(Y page 365). If the category is changed withoutrecoding the control units in the vehicle, thefunctioning of Adaptive Brake Assist may beimpaired. COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST maythen detect a fault and switch itself off.If Adaptive Brake Assist is not available due to amalfunction in the radar sensor system, thebrake system remains available with full brakeboosting effect and BAS.

FunctionWith the help of the radar sensor system, Adap-tive Brake Assist can detect obstacles that havebeen in the path of your vehicle for an extendedperiod of time. Adaptive Brake Assist does notreact to stationary obstacles. If Adaptive BrakeAssist detects a risk of collision with a vehicletravelling in front or with a stationary obstacle,the system calculates the braking force neces-sary to avoid a collision. If you apply the brakesforcefully, Adaptive Brake Assist will automati-cally increase the braking force to a level suita-ble for the traffic conditions.X Brake until the distance to the obstacle

increases and the risk of a collision passes.ABS prevents any of the wheels from locking.

The brakes function as usual again if:Ryou release the brake pedalRthere is no longer any danger of a collisionRno obstacle is detected in front of your vehicleBraking assistance is then ended.Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: if Adaptive BrakeAssist demands particularly high braking force,preventative passenger protection measuresare activated simultaneously. Information onthis can be found under "PRE-SAFE®"(Y page 58).

Blind Spot Assist

General notesBlind Spot Assist monitors the areas on eitherside of the vehicle that are not visible to thedriver with two lateral, rear-facing radar sensorsin the bumper. It supports you from speeds ofapproximately 30 km/h. A warning display inthe exterior mirrors draws your attention tovehicles detected in the monitored area. If youthen switch on the corresponding turn signal tochange lane, you will also receive an optical andaudible collision warning.

Driving systems 213

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Important safety notes

G WARNINGBlind Spot Assist does not react to vehicles:Rovertaken too closely on the side, placing

them in the blind spot areaRwhen the difference in the speed of

approach and overtaking is too greatAs a result, Blind Spot Assist cannot warndrivers in these situations. There is a risk of anaccident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and maintain a safe distance at the sideof the vehicle.

Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail todetect some vehicles and is no substitute forattentive driving. Always ensure that there issufficient distance to the side for other roadusers and obstacles.In particular, the detection of obstacles can beimpaired in the case of:Rdirt on the sensors or anything else covering

the sensorsRfog, heavy rain or snowRnarrow vehicles, e.g. motorcycles or bicyclesRvery wide lanesRnarrow lanesRvehicles not driving in the middle of their laneRbarriers or other road boundariesVehicles in the monitoring range are then notindicated.

Monitoring range of the sensors

Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to 3 mbehind your vehicle and directly next to yourvehicle, as shown in the diagram.If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in thelane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may beindicated, especially if the vehicles are not driv-ing in the middle of their lane. This may be thecase if the vehicles are driving on the inner sideof their lane.Due to the nature of the system:Rwarnings may be issued in error when driving

close to crash barriers or similar solid lanebordersRwarnings may be interrupted when driving

alongside long vehicles, for example lorries,for a prolonged time

The two sensors for Blind Spot Assist are inte-grated into the sides of the rear bumper. Makesure that the bumper is free of dirt, ice or slushin the vicinity of the sensors. The radar sensorsmust not be covered, for example by rear-moun-ted cycle racks or overhanging loads. Followinga severe impact or in the event of damage to thebumper, have the function of the radar sensorschecked at a qualified specialist workshop.Blind Spot Assist may otherwise not work prop-erly.

214 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Warning display

Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds belowapproximately 30 km/h. Vehicles in the moni-toring range are then not indicated.If a vehicle is detected within the monitoringrange of Blind Spot Assist at speeds aboveapproximately 30 km/h, warning lamp : lightsup red on the corresponding side. Warninglamp : always lights up when a vehicle entersthe blind spot monitoring range from behind orfrom the side. When you overtake a vehicle, thewarning only occurs if the difference in speed isless than 11 km/h.If you select reverse gear, Blind Spot Assist isinactive.The intensity of warning lamps : depends onthe brightness of the ambient light and is con-trolled automatically.

Collision warningIf a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range ofBlind Spot Assist and you switch on the corre-sponding turn signal, a double warning tonesounds once. The warning lamp in the corre-sponding exterior mirror flashes. If the turn sig-nal remains on, detected vehicles are indicatedby the flashing of the warning lamp in the exte-rior mirror. There are no further warning tones.

Activating Blind Spot AssistX Make sure that Blind Spot Assist is activated

in the on-board computer (Y page 257).X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.

The warning lamps in the exterior mirrors lightup for approximately 1.5 seconds.

When Blind Spot Assist is activated, the displayin the assistance graphic shows grey radarwaves propagating backwards next to the vehi-cle. Above a speed of 30 km/h, the colour of theradar waves in the assistance graphic changesto green ;. Blind Spot Assist is then ready foruse.

Trailer towingIf you attach a trailer, make sure that you havecorrectly established the electrical connection.This can be accomplished by checking the trailerlighting. Blind Spot Assist is then deactivatedand the Blind Spot Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual messageappears in the display.

Lane Keeping Assist

General notes

Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front ofyour vehicle by means of camera : at the top ofthe windscreen. Lane Keeping Assist detectslane markings on the road and can warn youbefore you leave your lane unintentionally.This function is available in the range between60 km/h and 200 km/h.

Driving systems 215

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

A warning may be given if a front wheel passesover a lane marking. It will warn you by means ofintermittent vibration through the steeringwheel for up to 1.5 seconds.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGLane Keeping Assist cannot always clearlyidentify lane markings.In these cases, Lane Keeping Assist may:Rgive an unnecessary warningRnot give a warningThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and keep in lane, especially if LaneKeeping Assist alerts you.

G WARNINGThe Lane Keeping Assist warning does notreturn the vehicle to the original lane. There isa risk of an accident.Always steer, apply the brakes or acceleratethe vehicle yourself, especially if Lane Keep-ing Assist alerts you.

If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane Keep-ing Assist can neither reduce the risk of accidentnor override the laws of physics. Lane KeepingAssist cannot take into account road, weather ortraffic conditions. Lane Keeping Assist is only anaid. You are responsible for the distance to thevehicle in front, for vehicle speed, braking ingood time and for staying in your lane.Lane Keeping Assist does not keep your vehiclein its lane.The system may be impaired or may not functionif:Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient

illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain,fog or sprayRthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the

sun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. ifthe road surface is wet)Rthe windscreen is dirty, misted up, damaged

or covered, for instance by a sticker, in thevicinity of the cameraRno, or several, unclear lane markings are pres-

ent for one lane, e.g. in a construction area

Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or cov-ered, e.g. by dirt or snowRthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small

and the lane markings thus cannot be detec-tedRthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes

branch off, cross one another or mergeRthe road is narrow and windingRthere are highly variable shade conditions on

the road

Deactivating and activating Lane Keep-ing Assist

X Press button :.If the indicator lamp in the button is lit, LaneKeeping Assist is activated. If all conditionshave been satisfied, there may be a warning.If Lane Keeping Assist is activated and youdrive at speeds above 60 km/h and lanemarkings are detected, the lines in the assis-tance graphic display (Y page 255) areshown in green. Lane Keeping Assist is readyfor use.When the system switches over, the Lane Keeping Assist on or Lane Keeping Assist off message is shown briefly in thedisplay.

Setting the sensitivity of Lane KeepingAssistX In the Assistance menu on the on-board

computer, select the Lane Keeping Assistfunction (Y page 258).

X Select Standard or Adaptive.In the Standard setting, no warning vibrationoccurs if:

216 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Ryou operate the turn signal in the correspond-ing direction. In this event, the warnings aresuppressed for a certain period of time.Ra driving safety system, such as ABS, BAS or

ESP®, intervenes or performs a controlaction.

When Adaptive is selected, there is also nowarning vibration when:Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown on vehi-

cles with an automatic transmission.Ryou brake sharply.Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an

obstacle or change lanes quickly.Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.In order that you are warned only when neces-sary and in good time if you cross the lane mark-ing, the system recognises certain conditionsand warns you accordingly.The warning vibration occurs earlier if:Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a

bend.Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a motorway.Rthe system recognises solid lane markings.The warning vibration occurs later if:Rthe road has narrow lanes.Ryou cut the corner on a bend.

Traffic Sign Assist

General notes

Traffic Sign Assist shows speed limits and over-taking restrictions in the display. If you drive intoa section of road in the wrong direction, it willwarn you visually and acoustically. Traffic SignAssist detects traffic signs with camera sys-tem : attached behind the top of the wind-screen. The data and general traffic regulations

stored in the navigation system are also used todetermine the current speed limit.If a traffic sign that is relevant to your vehicle ispassed, the display of the speed limits and over-taking restrictions is updated.The display can also be updated without a visibletraffic sign if:Rthe vehicle changes roads, as in a motorway

exit or slip road, for exampleRa village or town boundary is passed which is

stored in the digital map of the navigationsystemRthe last traffic sign detected by the camera

has not been repeatedIf a sign indicating the end of a restriction for aspeed limit or overtaking restriction is passed,the sign is shown for five seconds in the display.The applicable traffic regulation then appears inthe instrument cluster.The camera also detects traffic signs with arestriction indicated by an additional sign, e.g."When wet".The traffic signs are only displayed with therestrictions if:Rthe regulation must be observed with the

restriction, orRTraffic Sign Assist is unable to determine

whether the restriction appliesIf Traffic Sign Assist is unable to determine amaximum permitted speed from any of the avail-able sources, no speed limit is displayed in theinstrument cluster either.

Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all coun-tries. In this case, symbol : is shown in theassistance graphic display (Y page 255).

Driving systems 217

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Important safety notesTraffic Sign Assist is only an aid and is not alwaysable to correctly display speed limits and over-taking restrictions. The actual traffic signsalways have priority over the Traffic Sign Assistdisplay.The system may be impaired or may not functionif:Rvisibility is poor, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog or

sprayRthere is glare, e.g. from the sun being low in

the skyRthe windscreen is dirty, misted up, damaged

or covered, for instance by a sticker, in thevicinity of the cameraRtraffic signs are hard to detect, e.g. due to dirt,

ice or snowRthere is insufficient illumination of the traffic

signs in the nightRsigns are ambiguous, e.g. traffic signs on con-

struction sites or in adjacent lanesRthe information in the digital street map of the

navigation system is incorrect or out of date

Activating Traffic Sign AssistThe Traffic Sign Assist message function can beswitched on in the on-board computer. Whenyou pass a traffic sign, the display shows thetraffic regulations (speed limit and overtakingrestriction) for five seconds. The previous menuthen reappears automatically.The wrong-way warning remains active even ifyou deactivate the message function of TrafficSign Assist.X Switch on the Traffic Sign Assist message

function via the on-board computer(Y page 257).

Displays in the instrument cluster

Displaying traffic signsX Call up the assistance graphics function using

the on-board computer (Y page 255).X Select the Traffic Sign Assist display.

Detected traffic signs are displayed in theinstrument cluster.

Speed limit with overtaking restriction

A maximum permitted speed of 60 km/h : andan overtaking restriction ; apply.

Speed limit with unknown restriction

: Maximum permitted speed; Maximum permitted speed for vehicles for

which the restriction in the additional sign isrelevant

= Additional sign for unknown restrictionA maximum permitted speed of 80 km/h and aspeed limit of 60 km/h with an unknown restric-tion apply.

218 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Speed limits in wet conditions

: Maximum permitted speed; Additional "When wet" signA maximum permitted speed of 80 km/happlies in wet conditions and Traffic Sign Assisthas determined that the restriction must beobserved.

End of an overtaking restriction

A maximum permitted speed of 60 km/h :applies. The overtaking restriction no longerapplies ;. The crossed-out no overtaking traf-fic sign is displayed for five seconds.

End of a speed limit

The speed limit no longer applies :.

i The unit for the speed limit (km/h or mph)depends on the country in which you are driv-ing. In general it is not displayed either ontraffic signs or in the instrument cluster.Always observe the legally required maximumpermissible speed.

No entry – wrong-way warningThis function is not available in all countries.

If a no entry sign or roundabout sign is passed,warning message : is shown in the display ifTraffic Sign Assist detects that the vehicle istravelling in the wrong direction. A warning tonealso sounds. Immediately check the direction inwhich you are driving. Only by doing so are youable to avoid any potential risk to yourself andother road users.

Alertness Assistant ATTENTIONASSIST

General notesATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,monotonous journeys such as on motorwaysand trunk roads. It is active in the 60 km/h to200 km/h range. If ATTENTION ASSIST detectstypical indicators of fatigue or increasing lapsesin concentration on the part of the driver, it sug-gests taking a break.

Important safety notesATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. The systemmay not always detect fatigue or lapses in con-centration until too late, or may not detect themat all. ATTENTION ASSIST is not a substitute fora well-rested and attentive driver.

Driving systems 219

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST isrestricted, and warnings may be delayed or notoccur at all:Rif the length of the journey is less than approx-

imately 30 minutesRif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the surface

is uneven or if there are potholesRif there is a strong side windRif you have adopted a sporty driving style with

high cornering speeds or high rates of accel-erationRif you are predominantly driving at a speed

below 60 km/h or above 200 km/hRif the time has been set incorrectlyRin active driving situations, such as when you

change lanes or change your speedATTENTION ASSIST is reset and starts assessingyour attention again when you continue yourjourney if:Ryou switch off the engineRyou take off your seat belt and open the driv-

er's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or totake a break

Displaying the attention level

You can have the current ATTENTION ASSISTassessment displayed using the Assistance graphic menu in the on-board computer.X Call up the current ATTENTION ASSIST

assessment using the Assistance graphicmenu (Y page 255).

The following information is displayed:Rthe length of the journey since the last breakRthe attention level determined by ATTENTION

ASSIST, displayed in a bar display in five levelsfrom low to highRif ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate

the attention level and cannot output a warn-

ing, the System suspended messageappears in the display. The bar display is thendimmed. This is the case, for example, if youare driving at a speed below 60 km/h orabove 200 km/h

Activating ATTENTION ASSISTX Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-

board computer (Y page 258).The system determines the attention level ofthe driver depending on the setting selected:Standard selected: the sensitivity withwhich the system determines the attentionlevel is set to normal.Sensitive selected: the sensitivity is sethigher. The attention level detected byATTENTION ASSIST is adapted accordinglyand the driver is warned earlier.

When ATTENTION ASSIST is switched off andthe engine is running the assistance graphicsshow the À symbol and OFF.If you deactivate ATTENTION ASSIST, the sys-tem is automatically re-activated when you startthe engine. The system sensitivity then corre-sponds to the last selection activated – standardor sensitive.

Warning in the displayIf the system detects tiredness or increasinglapses in concentration, the warning Atten‐tion Assist: Take a break! is shown in thedisplay in addition to the length of the journeysince the last break.A warning tone also sounds.X If necessary, take a break.X Confirm the message by pressing the a

button on the steering wheel.On long journeys, take regular breaks in goodtime to allow yourself to rest. If you do not takea break and ATTENTION ASSIST continues todetect increasing lapses in concentration, youwill be warned again after 15 minutes at theearliest. This will only happen if ATTEN-TION ASSIST still detects typical indicators offatigue or increasing lapses in concentration.If the warning is shown in the display, the mul-timedia system offers to perform a service sta-tion search. You can select a service station andnavigation to this service station will then begin.This function can be activated and deactivated

220 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

in the multimedia system (see the separateoperating instructions).

HOLD function

General notesThe HOLD function can assist you in the follow-ing situations:Rwhen pulling away, especially on an uphill gra-

dientRwhen manoeuvring on a hillRwhen waiting in trafficThe vehicle is kept stationary without the driverhaving to depress the brake pedal.When you depress the accelerator pedal to pullaway, the braking effect is cancelled and theHOLD function is deactivated.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, it can still roll awaydespite being braked by the HOLD function if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in

the voltage supplyRthe HOLD function is deactivated by the

accelerator pedal being depressed, e.g. bya vehicle occupantRthe electrical system in the engine com-

partment, the battery or the fuses are tam-pered withRthe battery is disconnectedThere is a risk of an accident.Before leaving the vehicle, always deactivatethe HOLD function and secure the vehiclefrom rolling away.

! When DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD func-tion is activated, the vehicle brakes automat-ically in certain situations.To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function inthe following or similar situations:Rwhen towing awayRin a car wash

Switching off the HOLD function (Y page 221).

Activation conditionsYou can activate the HOLD function once all ofthe following conditions have been fulfilled:Rthe vehicle is stationary.Rthe engine is running or has been switched off

by the ECO start/stop function.Rall the doors and the tailgate are closed, or

your seatbelt is fastened.Rthe electric parking brake is released.Rvehicles with automatic transmission: the

transmission is in position D, R or N.RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.

Activating the HOLD function

X Make sure that the activation conditions havebeen fulfilled.

X Depress the brake pedal.X Quickly continue depressing the brake until

display : appears in the multifunction dis-play.The HOLD function is switched on. You canrelease the brake pedal.

i If the HOLD function was not activated thefirst time the brake pedal was depressed, waitbriefly and then try again.

Switching off the HOLD functionThe HOLD function is deactivated when:Ryou depress the accelerator pedal and the

transmission is in position D or R on vehicleswith an automatic transmissionRyou depress the brake pedal again with

enough pressure so that the ë display inthe multifunction display goes outRyou activate DISTRONIC PLUS

Driving systems 221

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

i Your vehicle's transmission will move toposition P after a short period of time. Thisrelieves the load on the service brake.

Vehicles with automatic transmissionWith the HOLD function activated, the transmis-sion is moved automatically to position P if:Rthe driver's seat belt is not fastened, or a door

or the tailgate is openRthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-

matically switched off by the ECO start/stopfunction

PARKTRONIC

General notesPARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid. Thesystem is equipped with ultrasonic sensors inthe front and rear bumpers to monitor the areaaround your vehicle. PARKTRONIC indicates vis-ually and audibly the distance between yourvehicle and an object.Your vehicle features two separate sound emit-ters with different frequencies for the warningtones. The warning ranges in front of and behindthe vehicle are indicated by different warningtones.PARKTRONIC is automatically activated whenthe key is turned to position 2 in the ignition lockand the parking brake is released.On vehicles with automatic transmission, youmust also shift the transmission to position D, Nor R.PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above18 km/h. PARKTRONIC is reactivated at speedsbelow 16 km/h.

Important safety notesPARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a substitutefor your attention to the immediate surround-ings. You are responsible for safe manoeuvring,parking and pulling away. Make sure that thereare no persons, animals or objects in themanoeuvring area while manoeuvring and park-ing in/leaving parking spaces.

! Pay particular attention to obstacles aboveor below the sensors when parking, such asflower pots or trailer towbars. PARKTRONICdoes not detect such objects when they are in

the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. Youcould damage the vehicle or objects.PARKTRONIC can suffer interference from:Rultrasonic sources such as a lorry's

compressed-air brakes, an automatic carwash or a pneumatic drillRattachments to the vehicle, e.g. rear moun-

ted racksRnumber plates (vehicle licence plates) that

are not affixed flat against the bumperRdirty or icy sensors

Remove a detachable trailer coupling if it is nolonger required. PARKTRONIC measures theminimum detection range to an obstacle fromthe bumper, not the ball coupling.

Range of the sensorsPARKTRONIC does not account for obstaclesthat are:Rbeneath its detection range, e.g. persons, ani-

mals or objectsRabove its detection range, e.g. overhanging

loads, overhangs or truck loading ramps

The sensors must be free of dirt, ice or slush.Otherwise, they cannot function correctly.

222 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not toscratch or damage them (Y page 353).Front sensors

Centre Approx. 100 cm

Corners Approx. 60 cm

Rear sensors

Centre Approx. 120 cm

Corners Approx. 80 cm

Minimum distance

Centre Approx. 20 cm

Corners Approx. 20 cm

If an obstacle is within this area, the relevantsegments of the warning displays light up andyou hear a warning tone. If the distance fallsbelow the minimum, the distance from an obsta-cle may no longer be shown.

Warning displays

Front area warning display in instrument clusterdisplay

Rear area warning display in the rear at centre ofthe roof lining: Warning segments for the left side of the

vehicle; Warning segments for the right side of the

vehicle= Segments showing operational readinessThe warning displays show the distancebetween the sensor and the obstacle.The warning display is divided into five yellowand two red segments for each side of the vehi-cle. PARKTRONIC is operational if operationalreadiness indicator = lights up.There is a malfunction if only the red segmentsof the warning display light up (Y page 224).The selected transmission position determineswhether the front and/or rear area is monitored.

Driving systems 223

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Transmission posi-tion

Monitoring

Forward gear,Neutralor D

Front area

Reverse gearR or N

Front and rear area

P No areas activated

One or more segments light up as the vehicleapproaches an obstacle, depending on the vehi-cle's distance from the obstacle.From the:Rsixth segment, an intermittent warning tone

sounds for approximately two seconds.Rseventh segment, a continuous warning tone

sounds. This indicates that you have nowreached the minimum distance.

Roll-back warningRegardless of transmission position,PARKTRONIC automatically monitors the areabehind the vehicle if the vehicle begins to rollbackwards, e.g. after stopping on an uphill gra-dient.

Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC

X Press button :.If PARKTRONIC is deactivated, the indicatorlamp in the button lights up.

Towing a trailerPARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear areawhen you establish an electrical connectionbetween your vehicle and a trailer.After uncoupling the trailer, unplug the 7-pinconnector adapter from the socket(Y page 244). Otherwise, PARKTRONICremains deactivated for the rear area.

Problems with PARKTRONIC

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Only the red segments inthe PARKTRONIC warn-ing displays are lit.In addition, a warningtone sounds for approx.2 secondsPARKTRONIC is thendeactivated.The indicator lamp of thef button lights upand the red segments inthe PARKTRONIC warn-ing display go out.

PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched itself off.X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified spe-

cialist workshop.

The PARKTRONIC warn-ing displays implausibledistances.For example, all the seg-ments may be lit even

The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or iced up.X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 353).X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.

224 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutionsthough there is no obsta-cle present. The licence plate or other parts attached near the sensors may not be

secured correctly.X Check the licence plate and attachment parts near the sensors for

correct seating.

An external radio or ultrasonic source may be causing interference.X Check PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.

Active Parking Assist

General notesActive Parking Assist is an electronic parkingaid. The system uses ultrasound sensors tomeasure the road on both sides of the vehicleand indicates suitable parking spaces. It canthen actively steer and brake the vehicle to helpyou to park and exit the parking space.The active braking function is only available onvehicles with an automatic transmission. Onvehicles with manual transmission, active park-ing assistance is limited to just steering assis-tance.Active Parking Assist includes the PARKTRONICparking aid which indicates visually and audiblythe distance between your vehicle and anobject. To do this, PARKTRONIC uses the ultra-sonic sensors of the Active Parking Assist(Y page 222).

Important safety notesActive Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not asubstitute for your attention to the immediatesurroundings. You are responsible for safemanoeuvring, parking and pulling away. Makesure that no persons, animals or objects are inthe manoeuvring range.When you deactivate PARKTRONIC, Active Park-ing Assist will also be deactivated.For vehicles with a trailer coupling installed, theminimum length for parking spaces will beslightly increased.If you have attached a trailer to your vehicle, youshould not use Active Parking Assist. Once theelectrical connection is established betweenyour vehicle and the trailer, Active ParkingAssist is no longer available. PARKTRONIC isthen deactivated for the rear area.

G WARNINGWhile parking or pulling out of a parkingspace, the vehicle swings out and can driveonto areas of the oncoming lane. This couldcause you to collide with other road users.There is a risk of an accident.Pay attention to other road users. Stop thevehicle if necessary or cancel the Active Park-ing Assist parking procedure.

! If unavoidable, you should drive over obsta-cles such as kerbs slowly and not at a sharpangle. Otherwise, you may damage thewheels or tyres.

Active Parking Assist may also display spacesnot suitable for parking, e.g.:Rin a zone where parking or stopping is pro-

hibitedRin front of driveways or entrances and exitsRon unsuitable surfacesParking tips:Ron narrow roads, drive as closely as possible

past the parking spaceRparking spaces that are littered or overgrown

might be identified or measured incorrectlyRparking spaces that are partially occupied by

trailer drawbars might not be identified assuch or be measured incorrectlyRsnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking

space being measured inaccuratelyRwhen transporting a load which protrudes

from your vehicle, you should not use ActiveParking AssistRwhen snow chains are fitted, never use Active

Parking AssistRmake sure that the tyre pressures are always

correct. This has a direct influence on theparking characteristics of the vehicle

Driving systems 225

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Rif you fit wheels with different wheel dimen-sions, this has a direct influence on the resultof the parking manoeuvreRif you fit tyres from another manufacturer, this

can have an influence on the result of theparking manoeuvreRif you drive past the parking space slowly, the

result of the parking manoeuvre will be betterRpay attention to the PARKTRONIC warning

messages (Y page 223) during the parkingprocedureRyou can intervene in the steering procedure to

correct it at any time. Parking assistance willthen be cancelled and Active Parking Assiststopped

Use Active Parking Assist for parking spacesthat are:Rparallel or at right angles to the direction of

travelRon straight roads, not bendsRon the same level as the road, e.g. not on the

pavement

Detecting parking spaces

G WARNINGIf there are objects above the detection range:RActive Park Assist may steer too earlyRthe vehicle may not stop in front of these

objectsThis could cause a collision. There is a risk ofan accident.If objects are located above the detectionrange, stop and deactivate Active ParkingAssist.

Objects located above the height range of ActiveParking Assist will not be detected when theparking space is measured. These are not takeninto account when the parking procedure is cal-culated, e.g. overhanging loads, tail sections orloading ramps of goods vehicles.For further information on the detection range(Y page 222).

Active Parking Assist does not assist you park-ing in spaces at right angles to the direction oftravel if:Rtwo parking spaces are located directly next

to one anotherRthe parking space is directly next to a low

obstacle such as a low kerb stoneRyou forward parkActive Parking Assist does not assist you park-ing in spaces that are parallel or at right anglesto the direction of travel if:Rthe parking space is on a kerb stoneRthe system reads the parking space as being

blocked, for example by foliage or grass pav-ing blocksRthe area is too small for the vehicle to

manoeuvre intoRthe parking space is bordered by an obstacle,

e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer

: Detected parking space on the left; Parking symbol= Detected parking space on the rightIf the driver's seat belt is fastened and all doorsare closed, Active Parking Assist is activatedautomatically when driving forwards. The sys-tem is operational at speeds of up to approx-imately 35 km/h. While in operation, the systemindependently locates and measures parkingspaces on both sides of the vehicle.Active Parking Assist will only detect parkingspaces:Rparallel or at right angles to the direction of

travelRthat are parallel to the direction of travel and

are at least 1.5 m wide

226 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel andat least 1.0 m longer than your vehicleRthat are at right angles to the direction of

travel and at least 1.0 m wider than your vehi-cle

i Note that Active Parking Assist cannotmeasure the length of a parking space if it is atright angles to the direction of travel. You willneed to judge whether your vehicle will fit inthe parking space.

When the vehicle is driving at speeds of up toapproximately 30 km/h, parking symbol ; isdisplayed in the instrument cluster as a statusdisplay.The system detects and differentiates betweenparking spaces which are parallel or at rightangles to the direction of travel. When a parkingspace is detected, an arrow appears next toparking symbol ; to indicate which side theparking space is on. The parking space is dis-played while you are driving past it and until youare approximately 15 m away from it.Active Parking Assist displays parking spaces onthe co-driver's side as standard. The parkingspaces on the driver's side are only displayed ifyou operate the turn signal on the driver's side.When parking on the driver's side, you mustoperate the turn signal until you have startedactive parking assistance by pressing the abutton on the steering wheel.

Parking

G WARNINGIf you leave the driver's seat when the vehicleis only being braked by Active Parking Assist,the vehicle could roll away if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in

the voltage supply.Rthe electrical system in the engine com-

partment, the battery or the fuses are tam-pered with.Rthe battery is disconnected.Rthe vehicle is accelerated, e.g. by a vehicle

occupant.There is a risk of an accident.Before leaving the driver's seat, always securethe vehicle against rolling away.

Vehicles with automatic transmission: ifPARKTRONIC detects obstacles, Active ParkingAssist brakes automatically during the parkingprocess. You are responsible for braking in goodtime.X Bring the vehicle safely to a stop when the

parking symbol shows the desired parkingspace in the instrument cluster.

X Vehicles with manual transmission: shift toreverse gear.Vehicles with automatic transmission: shiftinto position R.The display shows the Start Park Assist?Yes: OK No: % message and the locationof the parking space.

X To cancel the process: press the % but-ton on the steering wheel or drive off.

orX To park using active parking assistance:

press the a button on the steering wheel.The Park Assist active Accelerate and brake Observe surroundings mes-sage is shown in the display.

X Let go of the steering wheel.X Reverse the vehicle, being ready to brake at

all times. Reverse slowly, do not drive fasterthan 10 km/h. Otherwise parking assistanceis cancelled and Active Parking Assist is stop-ped.On vehicles with automatic transmission,Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle to astandstill when the vehicle approaches therear border of the parking space.

X Vehicles with manual transmission: stopat the rear border of the parking space. Stopwhen PARKTRONIC sounds the continuouswarning tone, if not before.

Manoeuvring may be required in tight parkingspaces. Depending on the vehicle's transmis-sion, either the Park Assist active Engage forward gear Observe surroundings orPark Assist active Select D Observe surroundings message is shown in the display.X While the vehicle is stationary, shift the trans-

mission to position D or engage 1st gear.Active Parking Assist immediately steers inthe other direction. The Park Assist active Accelerate and brake Observe

Driving systems 227

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

surroundings message is shown in the dis-play.

i You will achieve the best results by waitingfor the steering procedure to complete beforepulling away.

X Drive forwards and be ready to brake at alltimes.On vehicles with automatic transmission,Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle to astandstill.

X Vehicles with manual transmission: stopat the front border of the parking space. Stopwhen PARKTRONIC sounds the continuouswarning tone, if not before.

Depending on the vehicle's transmission, eitherthe Park Assist active Engage reverse gear Observe surroundings or Park Assist active Select R Observe sur‐roundings message is shown in the display.As soon as the parking procedure is complete,the Park Assist switched off messageappears in the display and a tone sounds. Theparking assistance function of Active ParkingAssist is stopped. The vehicle is parked and keptstationary without the driver having to depressthe brake pedal. The braking effect is cancelledwhen you depress the accelerator pedal.Active Parking Assist no longer supports youwith steering interventions and brake applica-tions. Once active parking assistance has beenstopped, you must steer and brake again your-self. PARKTRONIC is still available.Parking tips:RThe way your vehicle is positioned in the park-

ing space after parking is dependent on vari-ous factors. These include the position andshape of the vehicles parked in front andbehind it and the conditions of the location. Itmay be the case that Active Parking Assistguides you too far into a parking space, or notfar enough into it. In some cases, it may alsolead you across or onto the kerb. In this case,cancel the active parking assistance.RYou can also engage 1st gear or transmission

position D prematurely. The vehicle redirectsand does not drive as far into the parkingspace. If you change direction too early, park-ing assistance is cancelled and Active ParkingAssist is stopped. It is then not possible toachieve a sensible parking position from thecurrent position.

Exiting a parking spaceIn order that Active Parking Assist can assist youwhen exiting the parking space:Rthe border of the parking space must be high

enough at the front and the rear. A kerb stoneis too small, for example.Rthe border of the parking space must not be

too wide. Your vehicle can be manoeuvredinto a position at a maximum of 45° to thestarting position in the parking space.Ra manoeuvring distance of at least 1.0 m must

be available.Active Parking Assist can only assist you withexiting a parking space if you have parked thevehicle parallel to the direction of travel usingActive Parking Assist.Vehicles with automatic transmission: ifPARKTRONIC detects obstacles, Active ParkingAssist brakes automatically when exiting fromthe parking space. You are responsible for brak-ing in good time.X Start the engine.X Switch on the turn signal in the direction in

which you are pulling away.X Vehicles with manual transmission:

engage 1st gear or reverse gear.Vehicles with automatic transmission:shift the transmission to position D or R.The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No: %message is shown in the display.

X To cancel the process: press the % but-ton on the steering wheel or drive off.

orX To exit the parking space using active

parking assistance: press the a buttonon the steering wheel.The Park Assist active Accelerate and brake Observe surroundings mes-sage is shown in the display.

X Let go of the steering wheel.X Pull away, being ready to brake at all times.

Exit the parking space slowly, do not drivefaster than 10 km/h. Otherwise parkingassistance is cancelled and Active ParkingAssist is stopped.On vehicles with automatic transmission,Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle to astandstill when the vehicle approaches a bor-der of the parking space.

X Vehicles with manual transmission: stopat a border of the parking space. Stop when

228 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

PARKTRONIC sounds the continuous warningtone, if not before.

X While the vehicle is stationary, shift the trans-mission to position D or R or engage 1st gearor reverse gear as required or according tothe message.Active Parking Assist immediately steers inthe other direction. The Park Assist active Accelerate and brake Observe surroundings message is shown in the dis-play.

i You will achieve the best results by waitingfor the steering procedure to complete beforepulling away.If you reverse after activation, the steeringwheel is moved to the straight-ahead posi-tion.

X Drive forwards and reverse as prompted bythe PARKTRONIC warning displays, severaltimes if necessary.Vehicles with manual transmission: stop,at the latest when PARKTRONIC sounds thecontinuous warning tone.

Once you have exited the parking space com-pletely:Rthe display shows the Park Assist switched off messageRa tone soundsRthe steering wheel is moved to the straight-

ahead positionThe parking assistance function of Active Park-ing Assist is stopped. You will then have to steerand merge into traffic on your own.PARKTRONIC is still available.You can take over the steering before the vehi-cle has exited the parking space completely.This is useful, for example when you recognisethat it is already possible to pull out of the park-ing space.

Cancelling active parking assistanceX Stop the movement of the steering wheel or

steer yourself.orX Press the f button and deactivate

PARKTRONIC (Y page 224).Parking assistance is cancelled immediatelyand Active Parking Assist is stopped. The dis-play shows the Park Assist cancelledmessage.

Active parking assistance is cancelled automat-ically if:Ryou apply the electric parking brakeRparking using Active Parking Assist is no lon-

ger possibleRyou are driving faster than 10 km/hRa wheel spins and ESP® intervenes or fails.

The ÷ warning lamp in the instrumentcluster then lights upRyou open the driver's door or a sliding door on

vehicles with a manual transmissionRon vehicles with automatic transmission:

- you unfasten your seat belt- you open a door or the tailgate- you shift the automatic transmission to

position PA warning tone sounds, the parking symbol inthe display goes out and the Park Assist cancelled message appears.Once Active Parking Assist has been cancelled,you must steer and brake again yourself.If a fault arises in the system, vehicles with anautomatic transmission are braked to a stand-still automatically. To continue driving, you mustdepress the accelerator pedal again.

Rear view camera

General notesThe reversing camera is next to the tailgate han-dle (Y page 353).The reversing camera is a visual parking aid. Itshows you the area behind the vehicle in themultimedia system display.The area behind the vehicle is displayed in amirrored fashion, as in the rear-view mirror orthe exterior mirrors. The guide lines displayedassist you in reversing.The message displays depend on the languagesetting in the multimedia system. The followingreversing camera displays are examples.

Important safety notes! Objects that are not at ground level appear

further away than they actually are, for exam-ple:Rthe bumper of the vehicle parked behindRthe drawbar of a trailer

Driving systems 229

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitchRthe tail-end of a lorryRslanted postsOnly use the camera guide lines for orienta-tion. Do not get any closer to objects than thelowest horizontal guide line. You may other-wise damage your vehicle and/or the object.

The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not asubstitute for your attention to the immediatesurroundings. You are responsible for safemanoeuvring and parking. When manoeuvringand parking, make sure that there are no per-sons, animals or objects in the manoeuvringarea.The rear view camera may show a distorted viewof obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all.The rear view camera cannot show all objectswhich are very near to or under the rear bumper.It will not warn you of a collision, people orobjects.Under the following circumstances, the rearview camera will not function, or will function ina limited manner:Rif the tailgate is openRif it is raining hard, snowing or foggyRat night or in very dark placesRif the camera is exposed to very bright light.

White lines may appear in the camera imageRif the area is lit by fluorescent light or LED

lighting. The camera image may flickerRif the camera lens mists up, e.g. when driving

into a heated garage in winter, causing a rapidchange in temperatureRif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed.

Observe the notes on cleaning(Y page 353)Rif the rear of the vehicle is damaged. In this

case, have the camera position and settingchecked at a qualified specialist workshop

Do not use the reversing camera in these situa-tions. You could otherwise injure others or dam-age objects and the vehicle while parking andmanoeuvring.The field of vision and other functions of thereversing camera may be restricted due to addi-tional accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g.licence plate holder, rear-mounted bicyclerack).Guide lines are always shown at road level. Intrailer mode, the guide lines are shown at thelevel of the trailer coupling.

If you change wheel size, make sure they corre-spond to the correct wheel size category(Y page 365). If the assignment changes with-out recoding the control units in the vehicle, thereversing camera cannot be calibrated exactly.The guide lines at road level or at the level of thetrailer tow hitch will not be displayed correctly.The reversing camera is protected from rain-drops and dust by means of a flap. When thereversing camera is activated, this flap opens.The flap closes again when:Ryou have finished the manoeuvring processRyou switch off the engineFor technical reasons, the flap may remain openbriefly after the reversing camera has beendeactivated.

Switching the reversing camera on oroff

X To switch on: make sure that the key is inposition 2 in the ignition lock.

X Make sure that the multimedia system isswitched on and that the Activation by R gear function is selected in the Rear view camera menu (see the separate operatinginstructions).

X Engage reverse gear or shift the transmissionto position R.The reversing camera flap opens. The multi-media system display shows the area behindthe vehicle. The rear area shown is divided byguide lines.

230 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

In vehicles with a trailer coupling installed, thefunction mode in the reversing camera can beswitched over when the trailer is reached. Thereversing camera then changes the cameraangle and shows a locating aid for the ball cou-pling of the trailer tow hitch to help reach thedrawbar.X To switch function mode: select and con-

firm "Reverse parking" function : or "Cou-pling up a trailer" function ; with the multi-media system controller.The symbol of the selected function is high-lighted.

X To switch off: shift the manual transmissionto neutral or engage a gear. Shift the auto-matic transmission to N or D.The dynamic guide lines are hidden and afterabout 15 seconds the reversing cameraswitches itself off.

orX Drive forwards more than about 10 m.orX Drive forwards faster than 10 km/h.orX Shift the automatic transmission to P.In vehicles with Active Parking Assist, thereversing camera remains switched on after theinitial shift to reverse gear for the whole durationof active parking assistance. You can find infor-mation on active parking assistance under"Active Parking Assist“ (Y page 225).Information on the multimedia system control-ler can be found in the separate operatinginstructions.

Messages in the multimedia system dis-play

: Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 4.0 m from the rear of the vehicle

; White guide line without turning the steeringwheel, vehicle width including the exteriormirrors (static)

= Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, at the currentsteering angle (dynamic)

? Yellow lane marking the course the tyres willtake at the current steering angle (dynamic)

A Vehicle centre axis (locating aid)B Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-

imately 1.0 m from the rear of the vehicleC Red guide line at a distance of approximately

0.30 m from the rear of the vehicleD BumperThe guide lines are shown when the transmis-sion is in position R or when the reverse gear isengaged.The distance specifications only apply toobjects that are at ground level.

Driving systems 231

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

E Front warning displaysF Vehicle symbol as PARKTRONIC measure-

ment operational readiness indicatorG Rear warning displaysVehicles with Active Parking Assist: whenPARKTRONIC is activated and operational(Y page 223), the camera image shows vehiclesymbol F. When the PARKTRONIC warning dis-plays go on, warning displays E and G light upaccordingly as red or yellow brackets aroundvehicle symbol F.

"Reverse parking" function

Reversing straight into a parking spacewithout turning the steering wheel

: White guide line without turning the steeringwheel, vehicle width including the exteriormirrors (static)

; Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, at the currentsteering angle (dynamic)

= Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 1.0 m from the rear of the vehicle

? Red guide line at a distance of approximately0.30 m from the rear of the vehicle

X Make sure that the reversing camera isswitched on (Y page 230).The lane and the guide lines are shown.

X With the help of white guide line :, checkwhether the vehicle will fit into the parkingspace.

X Using white guide line : as a guide, carefullyreverse until you reach the end position.Red guide line ? is then at the end of theparking space. The vehicle is almost parallelin the parking space.

Reversing into a perpendicular parkingspace with the steering wheel at an angle

: Parking space marking; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width

including the exterior mirrors, at the currentsteering angle (dynamic)

X After driving past the parking space, stop thevehicle, paying attention to road and trafficconditions.

X Make sure that the reversing camera isswitched on (Y page 230).The lane and the guide lines are shown.

X While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn thesteering wheel in the direction of the parkingspace until yellow guide line ; reaches park-ing space marking :.

X Maintain the steering angle and reverse care-fully.

232 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

: Parking space marking; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width

including the exterior mirrors, at the currentsteering angle (dynamic)

= White guide line without turning the steeringwheel

X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly infront of the parking space.The white lane = should be as parallel aspossible with the parking space marking.

: Parking space marking= White guide line without turning the steering

wheelX Turn the steering wheel to the centre position

while the vehicle is stationary.

? End of parking spaceA Red guide line at a distance of approximately

0.30 m from the rear of the vehicle

X Reverse carefully until you have reached theend position.Red guide line A is then at the end of parkingspace ?. The vehicle is almost parallel in theparking space.

"Coupling up a trailer" function

: Trailer drawbar; Vehicle centre point on the yellow guide line

at a distance of approximately 1.0 m fromthe rear of the vehicle

= Red guide line at a distance of approximately0.30 m from the ball coupling

This function is only available on vehicles with atrailer tow hitch attached.X Before coupling up the trailer, set the height

of trailer drawbar : so that it is slightlyhigher than the ball coupling.

X Position the vehicle centrally ; in front oftrailer drawbar :.

: Trailer drawbar= Red guide line at a distance of approximately

0.30 m from the ball coupling? Trailer drawbar locating aidA Symbol for the "Coupling up a trailer" func-

tionX Select and confirm "Coupling up a trailer"

function A with the multimedia system con-troller.

Driving systems 233

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Information on the multimedia system con-troller can be found in the separate operatinginstructions.Symbol A is highlighted. The distance spec-ifications now only apply to objects that are atthe same level as the ball coupling.

X Reverse carefully, making sure that trailerdrawbar locating aid ? points approximatelyin the direction of trailer drawbar :.

X Reverse carefully until trailer drawbar : rea-ches red guide line =.The distance between trailer drawbar = andball coupling is now approximately 0.30 m.

X Couple the trailer (Y page 239).

"Wide-angle" function

Wide-angle view (example with PARKTRONIC dis-play): Symbol for the wide-angle functionX Select and confirm "Wide-angle" function :

with the multimedia system controller.Information on the multimedia system con-troller can be found in the separate operatinginstructions.Symbol : is highlighted. The multimedia sys-tem display shows a wide-angle view of therear area without guide lines.

360° camera

General notesThe 360° camera is a camera system that con-sists of four cameras.

The system evaluates images in the immediatevicinity of the vehicle from the following cam-eras:Rrear view cameraRfront cameraRside cameras in both exterior mirrorsThe camera system can only be activated duringthe journey when you are driving no faster thana moderate speed. The 360°camera assists youwhen parking or at exits with reduced visibility,for example.You can show pictures from the 360° camera infull screen mode or in seven different split-screen views on the multimedia system display.A split-screen view also includes a top view ofthe vehicle. This view is calculated from the datasupplied by the installed cameras (virtual view).You can display one of the following seven split-screen views:Rtop view and image from the reversing cam-

era (130° viewing angle)Rtop view and image from the front camera

(130° viewing angle without displaying themaximum steering angle)Rtop view and enlarged rear viewRtop view and enlarged front viewRtop view and trailer view (vehicles with

attached trailer tow hitch only)Rtop view and rearward views from the side

cameras (view of rear wheels)Rtop view and forward views from the side

cameras (view of front wheels)If you shift to neutral or to transmission positionN while the camera system is switched on, thedynamic guide lines are hidden.When you change between a forward gear andreverse gear or between transmission positionsD and R, you see the previously selected front orrear view.

Important safety notes! Objects that are not at ground level appear

further away than they actually are, for exam-ple:Rthe bumper of the vehicle parked behindRthe drawbar of a trailerRthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitchRthe tail-end of a lorryRslanted posts

234 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Only use the camera guide lines for orienta-tion. Do not get any closer to objects than thelowest horizontal guide line. You may other-wise damage your vehicle and/or the object.

The 360° camera is only an aid. The camerasystem is not a substitute for your attention tothe immediate surroundings. You are responsi-ble for safe manoeuvring and parking. Whenmanoeuvring and parking, make sure that thereare no persons, animals or objects in themanoeuvring area.You are always responsible for safety and mustalways pay attention to your immediate sur-roundings when parking and manoeuvring. Thisapplies to the areas behind, in front of andbeside the vehicle. You could otherwise endan-ger yourself and others.The camera system may show a distorted viewof obstacles or show them incorrectly or not atall. Obstacles are not shown by the system in thefollowing locations:Runder the front and rear bumpersRvery close to the front and rear bumpersRin the area immediately above the tailgate

handleRvery close to the exterior mirrorsRin the transitional areas between the various

cameras in the virtual top viewThe 360° camera will not function or will func-tion only in a limited manner:Rif the doors are openRif the exterior mirrors are folded inRif the tailgate is openRif it is raining hard, snowing or foggyRat night or in very dark placesRif the cameras are exposed to very bright light.

White lines may appear in the camera imageRif the area is lit by fluorescent light or LED

lighting. The camera image may flickerRif the camera lenses mist up, e.g. when driving

into a heated garage in winter, causing a rapidchange in temperatureRif the ambient temperature is very highRif the camera lenses are dirty or covered.

Observe the notes on cleaning(Y page 353)Rif the vehicle components in which the cam-

eras are fitted are damaged. In this event,have the camera position and setting checkedat a qualified specialist workshop

Do not use the 360° camera in this case. Youcould otherwise injure others or damage objectsand the vehicle while you are parking.Guide lines are always shown at road level. Intrailer mode, the guide lines are shown at thelevel of the trailer coupling.If you change wheel size, make sure they corre-spond to the correct wheel size category(Y page 365). If the category is changed withoutrecoding the control units in the vehicle, the360° camera cannot calibrate properly. Theguide lines at road level or at the level of thetrailer tow hitch will not be displayed correctly.

Activating the 360° camera with thebutton

X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in theignition lock.

X Make sure that multimedia system is activa-ted (see the separate operating instructions).

X Press button :.Depending on the transmission position, themultimedia system display shows:Ra split-screen view with top view and image

from the front camera, if a forward gear ortransmission position D is selectedRa split-screen view with top view and image

from the reversing camera, if reverse gearor transmission position R is selected

Driving systems 235

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Switching on the 360° camera with themultimedia systemX Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the

ignition lock.X In the vehicle menu of the multimedia system,

select the 360° camera function (see theseparate operating instructions).Depending on the transmission position, themultimedia system display shows:Ra split-screen view with top view and image

from the front camera, if a forward gear ortransmission position D is selectedRa split-screen view with top view and image

from the reversing camera, if reverse gearor transmission position R is selected

Activating the 360° camera withreverse gearX Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the

ignition lock.X Make sure that the multimedia system is

switched on and that the Activation by R gear function is selected in the 360° cameramenu (see the separate operating instruc-tions).

X Engage reverse gear or select transmissionposition R.The multimedia system display shows a splitscreen with the top view and the image fromthe reversing camera as well as the Check entire surroundings display message.

Selecting the split-screen and fullscreen displaysSwitching between split-screen views:X Select the symbol for the respective view in

the header of the display using the multimediasystem controller.Information on the multimedia system con-troller can be found in the separate operatinginstructions.

Switching to full screen mode:X Select and confirm the 180° view function

using the controller.

i The full-screen mode is only available in thefollowing two views:RTop view with image from the reversing

cameraRTop view with image from the front camera

Messages in the multimedia system dis-play

PARKTRONIC warning displays

PARKTRONIC warning displays (example: top viewwith image from the reversing camera)

PARKTRONIC warning displays (example: full-screen mode, rear view): PARKTRONIC warning displays; Vehicle symbolThe display shows PARKTRONIC warning dis-plays :Ras a bracket around the vehicle in split screen

mode, top viewRas a bracket around displayed vehicle sym-

bol ; in full-screen modeIf the PARKTRONIC warning displays light up,warning displays : light up correspondingly infront of or behind the vehicle, as red or yellowbrackets.

236 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Top view with image from the reversingcamera

: Symbol for the split screen setting with topview and image from the reversing camera

; Yellow guide line for the maximum steeringangle

= Yellow lane marking the course the tyres willtake at the current steering angle (dynamic)

? Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, at the currentsteering angle (dynamic)

A Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 4.0 m from the rear of the vehicle

B Vehicle centre axis (locating aid)C Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-

imately 1.0 m from the rear of the vehicleD Red guide line at a distance of approximately

0.30 m from the rear of the vehicleE BumperThe guide lines are displayed when reverse gearis engaged or transmission position R is selec-ted.The distance specifications only apply toobjects that are at ground level.

Top view with image from the front cam-era

: Symbol for the split screen setting with topview and image from the front camera

; Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 4.0 m from the front of the vehicle

= Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, at the currentsteering angle (dynamic)

? Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 1.0 m from the front of the vehicle

A Yellow lane marking the course the tyres willtake at the current steering angle (dynamic)

B Red guide line at a distance of approximately0.30 m from the front of the vehicle

Top view and enlarged rear view

: Symbol for the split screen setting with topview and enlarged image from the reversingcamera

; Red guide line at a distance of approximately0.30 m from the rear of the vehicle

This view assists you in estimating the distanceto the vehicle behind you. You can also selectthis setting as an enlarged front view.

Driving systems 237

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Top view with image from the side cam-eras

: Symbol for the setting with top view andforward view from the side cameras

; Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirror (right side ofvehicle)

= Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirror (left side ofvehicle)

You can also select the side camera setting toshow a rearward view.

"Coupling up a trailer" function

: Trailer drawbar; Locating aid – vehicle centre point on the

yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 1.0 m from the rear of the vehicle

= Red guide line at a distance of approximately0.30 m from the rear of the vehicle

This function is only available on vehicles with atrailer tow hitch attached. The viewing angle ofthe reversing camera can be switched overwhen the trailer is reached. The reversing cam-era then shows a locating aid for the ball cou-pling of the trailer tow hitch to help reach thedrawbar.

X Before coupling up the trailer, set the heightof trailer drawbar : so that it is slightlyhigher than the ball coupling.

X Position the vehicle centrally ; in front oftrailer drawbar :.

: Trailer drawbar= Red guide line at a distance of approximately

0.30 m from the ball coupling? Symbol for the "Coupling up a trailer" func-

tionA Trailer drawbar locating aidX Select symbol ? using the multimedia sys-

tem controller.Information on the multimedia system con-troller can be found in the separate operatinginstructions.The "Coupling up a trailer" function has beenselected. The distance specifications nowonly apply to objects that are at the same levelas the ball coupling.

X Reverse carefully, making sure that trailerdrawbar locating aid A points approximatelyin the direction of trailer drawbar :.

X Reverse carefully until trailer drawbar : rea-ches red guide line =.The distance between trailer drawbar : andthe ball coupling is now approximately0.30 m.

X Couple the trailer (Y page 239).

238 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

"Wide-angle" function

: Symbol for the full-screen setting withimage from the reversing camera (rear view)

; Own vehicleThe display shows the corresponding full-screensetting of the rear or front view and the vehiclesymbol of your own vehicle ;.Select the front view when you are driving out ofan exit and the view of crossing traffic is restric-ted, for example.X To switch to split-screen view: press the

back button &.orX Select and confirm the & display symbol

with the controller.orX Select and confirm the 360° view function

using the controller.Information on the multimedia system back but-ton and controller can be found in the separateoperating instructions.

Stopping the 360° camera display

X Press button :.orX Drive forwards faster than moderate speed.or

X Shift the automatic transmission to P.orX In split-screen mode, confirm the "Back" func-

tion with the back button & or by using the& display symbol.Information on the multimedia system backbutton and controller can be found in the sep-arate operating instructions.The multimedia system display shows the dis-play of the previously active function.

Towing a trailer

Notes on towing a trailer

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the ball coupling is not properly engaged, itcould come loose and endanger other roadusers. There is a risk of an accident and injury.Engage the ball coupling as described, makingsure that it is securely attached.

G WARNINGIf the ball coupling is not engaged, the trailercould become detached. There is a risk of anaccident.Always engage the ball coupling as describedand make sure that it is securely attached.

G WARNINGIf the maximum permissible load for a carriersystem is exceeded, the carrier could comeloose from the vehicle and endanger otherroad users. There is a risk of an accident andinjury.Never exceed the maximum permissible loadwhen using a carrier.

G WARNINGYou could lose control of the vehicle/trailercombination if it begins to swerve. The vehi-cle/trailer combination could even overturn.There is a risk of an accident.On no account should you attempt tostraighten out the vehicle/trailer combina-

Towing a trailer 239

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

tion by increasing speed. Decrease yourspeed and do not countersteer. Brake if nec-essary.

G WARNINGThe braking system can overheat if you leaveyour foot on the brake pedal while driving.This increases the braking distance and couldeven cause the braking system to fail. There isa risk of an accident.Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Donot simultaneously depress both the brakepedal and the accelerator pedal while driving.

! Depressing the brake pedal constantlyresults in excessive and premature wear tothe brake pads.

You can attach carrier systems such as bicycleracks or load-bearing implements to the ballcoupling. The maximum load-bearing capacityof 75 kg applies when using carrier systems onthe ball coupling.Follow the information from the trailer tow hitchmanufacturer when using a detachable trailertow hitch (see the manufacturer's operatinginstructions).Couple and decouple the trailer carefully. Whenreversing the vehicle towards the trailer, makesure there is nobody between the trailer and thevehicle.A trailer which is incorrectly coupled to the tow-ing vehicle could break away. A correctly cou-pled trailer must be positioned horizontallybehind the towing vehicle.Ensure that the following weights are not excee-ded:Rthe permissible noseweightRthe permissible trailer loadRthe permissible rear axle load of the towing

vehicleRthe maximum permissible gross vehicle

weight of both the towing vehicle and thetrailerRthe maximum permissible gross weight of

vehicle/trailer combinationThe applicable permissible values that may notbe exceeded can be found:Rin your vehicle documentsRon the type plates for the trailer tow hitch

Ron the type plates for the trailerRon the vehicle identification plate

(Y page 386)Where the values differ, the lowest is valid.You will find the values approved by the manu-facturer on the vehicle identification plates andthose for the towing vehicle in the "Technicaldata" section (Y page 396).When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handlingcharacteristics will be different in comparison towhen driving without a trailer.The vehicle/trailer combination:Ris heavierRis restricted in its acceleration and gradient-

climbing capabilityRhas an increased braking distanceRis more susceptible to strong crosswindsRrequires more sensitive steeringRhas a larger turning circleThis may impair the handling characteristics.When towing a trailer, always adjust your speedto suit the road and weather conditions. Drivecarefully. Maintain a safe distance.

General notes! Use a drawbar noseweight that is as close as

possible to the maximum permissible nose-weight. Do not fall below a noseweight of50 kg, otherwise the trailer may come loose.RDo not exceed the legally permitted maximum

speed for vehicle/trailer combinations in therelevant country. Before beginning the jour-ney, check the trailer's documents for themaximum permitted speed of your trailer. InGermany, the maximum permitted speed is80 km/h (100 km/h in exceptional cases).RWhen towing a trailer, set the tyre pressure

for the rear axle of the towing vehicle to thesetting for a fully laden vehicle (Y page 369).RThe trailer tow hitch is one of the most impor-

tant components on the vehicle with regard toroad safety. Observe the notes on operation,care and maintenance of the trailer tow hitch(see the manufacturer's operating instruc-tions).RVehicles with a detachable trailer coupling:

minimise the risk of damage to the ball cou-pling. If you do not require the ball coupling,remove it from the ball coupling recess.

240 Towing a trailerDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

i When towing a trailer, the permissible grossvehicle weight is increased by 100 kg for vehi-cles with passenger vehicle approval. The per-missible gross vehicle weight must beobserved.

You can obtain information on the installation oftrailer electrics at any qualified specialist work-shop. You will find fitting dimensions and loadsunder "Technical data" (Y page 396).The height of the ball coupling changes with theload of the vehicle. If this is case, use a trailerwith a height-adjustable trailer drawbar.

Driving tipsWhen towing a trailer, your vehicle's handlingcharacteristics will be different in comparison towhen driving without a trailer and it will con-sume more fuel.On long and steep downhill gradients, select alower gear.

i This also applies if cruise control,DISTRONIC PLUS or SPEEDTRONIC are acti-vated.

You thereby make use of the braking effect ofthe engine and do not have to brake as often tomaintain the speed. This relieves the load on thebrake system and prevents the brakes fromoverheating and wearing too quickly. If you needadditional braking, depress the brake pedalrepeatedly rather than continuously.Observe the notes on ESP® trailer stabilisation(Y page 71).

Driving tipsIf the trailer begins to swing from side to side:X Do not accelerate.X Do not counter-steer.X Brake if necessary.RMaintain a greater distance than you would

when driving without towing a trailer.RAvoid sudden braking. Apply the brakes gen-

tly at first to allow the trailer brake to overrun.Then, increase the brake force quickly.RThe figures for the gradient climbing capabil-

ities from a standstill refer to sea level. Whendriving in mountainous areas, note that thepower output of the engine, and with it itsgradient climbing capability, decrease withincreasing altitude.

Fitting the ball coupling

G WARNINGIf the ball coupling is not properly engaged, itcould come loose and endanger other roadusers. There is a risk of an accident and injury.Engage the ball coupling as described, makingsure that it is securely attached.

G WARNINGIf the ball coupling is not engaged, the trailercould become detached. There is a risk of anaccident.Always engage the ball coupling as describedand make sure that it is securely attached.

Before you can tow a trailer with your vehicle,you must fit the ball coupling.X Make a note of the number of the key which

belongs to the trailer tow hitch.You can use this number to obtain a replace-ment key from a Mercedes-Benz ServiceCentre.

X Take the ball coupling of the trailer tow hitchout of the stowage space on the right-handside of the rear compartment (Y page 357).

X Unlock lock ; in handwheel = using thekey. The red marking on ball coupling ? mustbe aligned with the green area on handwheel= (fitting position).

Towing a trailer 241

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

X If red marking B is not aligned with greenarea A, unlock lock ; in handwheel =using the key.

X Pull handwheel = outwards. Turn red mark-ing B to green area A until handwheel =engages.

X Push ball coupling ? vertically into thesocket until you hear it engage.The ball coupling locks into place automati-cally. The green marking on handwheel = isaligned with green area A on the ball cou-pling.The ball coupling is only securely engagedwhen the green marking on the handwheel isaligned with the green area on the ball cou-pling.

X Lock lock ; in handwheel = using the key.X Remove the key and replace cap : on

lock ;.The ball coupling is only installed securelywhen the ball coupling can be locked and thekey can be removed.Store the key for the trailer tow hitch in a safeplace, e.g. in the vehicle document wallet.

If you cannot remove the key, the ball couplingmay be dirty.X Remove the ball coupling and clean it

(Y page 354).If you cannot lock the ball coupling once youhave cleaned it, the trailer tow hitch is damaged.X Remove the ball coupling.

Safe trailer-towing cannot be guaranteed. Theball coupling should no longer be used fortrailer-towing.

X Have the trailer coupling checked at a quali-fied specialist workshop.

Removing the ball coupling

For removal, you will need the key of the trailertow hitch.X Pull protective cap : off lock ; in hand-

wheel =.X Unlock lock ; in handwheel = using the

key.

X Hold onto ball coupling ?.X Pull handwheel = outwards. Turn red mark-

ing B to green area A until handwheel =engages.

242 Towing a trailerDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Follow the pictogram on handwheel =.X Pull out ball coupling ? downwards.X Clean the ball coupling if it is dirty

(Y page 354).X Stow the ball coupling with the key inserted in

the stowage space on the right-hand side ofthe rear compartment (Y page 357).

Coupling up a trailer! The eyelet on the ball coupling is intended

solely for the attachment of a trailer break-away cable. Do not attach towing cables, tow-ing bars or similar items to the eyelet. Theeyelet is not designed for such loads and maybecome detached.

X On vehicles with an automatic transmission,ensure that the transmission is in position P.

X Apply the vehicle's parking brake.X Close all the doors.X Position the trailer horizontally behind your

vehicle.i The height of the ball coupling changes with

the load of the vehicle. If this is case, use atrailer with a height-adjustable trailer draw-bar.

X Couple the trailer.X Establish all electrical and other connections

to the trailer. When doing so, hook the break-away cable of the trailer into eyelet : on theball coupling.

X Make sure that the trailer lights are function-ing correctly.

X Activate the turn signals on both sides of thevehicle and check that the corresponding turnsignals flash on the trailer.A trailer can only be detected if the electricalconnection is established correctly and the

lighting system is in working order. The func-tioning of other systems, e.g. ESP®,PARKTRONIC, Active Parking Assist, BlindSpot Assist or Lane Keeping Assist alsodepends on this.

X Remove the objects that are preventing thetrailer from rolling, e.g. wheel chocks.

X Release the trailer parking brake.

Decoupling a trailer

G WARNINGIf you uncouple a trailer with an engaged over-run brake, you could trap your hand betweenthe vehicle and the trailer drawbar. This posesa risk of injury.Do not uncouple a trailer with an engagedoverrun brake.

! Do not disconnect a trailer with an engagedoverrun brake. Otherwise, your vehicle couldbe damaged by the rebounding of the overrunbrake.

X On vehicles with an automatic transmission,ensure that the transmission is in position P.

X Apply the vehicle's parking brake.X Close all the doors.X Apply the trailer parking brake.X In addition, secure the trailer against rolling

away with a wheel chock or similar object.X Remove the trailer cable and unhook the

breakaway cable.X Decouple the trailer.

Trailer power supply! You can connect accessories to the perma-

nent power supply up to a maximum of 240 W.You cannot charge a trailer battery using thepower supply.

When it leaves the factory, your vehicle's trailersocket is equipped with a permanent powersupply and a power supply that is switched onvia the ignition lock.The permanent power supply is supplied viatrailer socket pin nine.

Towing a trailer 243

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

The power supply which is activated when thekey is in position 2 in the ignition is supplied viatrailer socket pin ten.The trailer's permanent power supply isswitched off when the vehicle's on-board volt-age is low and at the latest after six hours.You can find more information about installingthe trailer electrics at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Bulb failure indicator for LED lightsIf the trailer is equipped with LED lights, the dis-play may show a malfunction message for thetrailer lights.The trailer lighting is identified as being faultyeven though it is in working order. The reason forthe malfunction message may be that the cur-rent has fallen below the minimum of 50 mA.To ensure reliable operation of the bulb failureindicator, each LED chain in the trailer lightingmust be guaranteed a minimum current of50 mA.

Trailers with a 7-pin connector

General notesIf your trailer is equipped with a 7-pin connector,you need to use an adapter plug or an adaptercable to make the connection. An adapter plugor adapter cable for the 13-pin vehicle socketcan be obtained at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Fitting the adapter! Make sure that there is sufficient cable play

so that the cable cannot become detachedwhen cornering.

X Open the vehicle socket cover.X Insert adapter plug ; by lug : into groove= in the vehicle socket. Turn adapter plug ;clockwise as far as it will go.

X Close the cover so that it engages.X If you are using an adapter cable, use cable

ties to secure the cable to the trailer.

244 Towing a trailerDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Useful information

These Operating Instructions describe all mod-els as well as standard and optional equipmentof your vehicle that were available at the time ofgoing to print. Country-specific variations arepossible. Note that your vehicle may not be fit-ted with all of the described functions. This alsoapplies to safety-relevant systems and func-tions.Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops: (Y page 31).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGOperating the integrated information systemsand communications equipment in the vehiclewhile driving will distract you from traffic con-ditions. You could then lose control of thevehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate these devices if road traffic con-ditions permit. If you are unsure about thesurrounding conditions, pull over to a safelocation and make entries only while the vehi-cle is stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements for thecountry in which you are currently driving whenoperating the on-board computer.

G WARNINGIf the instrument cluster has failed or mal-functioned, you may not recognise functionrestrictions relevant to safety. The operatingsafety of your vehicle may be impaired. Thereis a risk of an accident.Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checkedat a qualified specialist workshop immedi-ately.

The on-board computer only shows messagesand warnings from certain systems. You shouldtherefore make sure your vehicle is operatingsafely at all times. If the operating safety of yourvehicle is impaired, stop the vehicle as soon aspossible, paying attention to road and trafficconditions. Then contact a qualified specialistworkshop.

The accuracy of the speedometer and odometerdisplays is legally prescribed. Determining thespeed is dependent on the wheel size or therolling circumference of the wheels. If youchange the wheel size on your vehicle, makesure it is assigned to the correct wheel size cat-egory (Y page 365). If the assignment changeswithout recoding the control units in the vehicle,the speedometer will not display the speedaccurately. Driving safety systems and drivingsystems may then be operationally impaired ormay detect a fault and switch themselves off.An overview of the instrument cluster can befound under "Instrument cluster" (Y page 36).

Display and operation

Instrument cluster lighting

In daylight, the displays in the instrument clusterare illuminated. A dimming function is not pos-sible in daylight.The light sensor in the instrument cluster auto-matically controls the brightness of the displaylighting.While the lights are on, the brightness is depend-ent upon the brightness of the ambient light.You can also adjust the brightness of the instru-ment lighting and the display lighting using con-trol :.X Turn control : up or down.

SpeedometerOn vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS, segments inthe speedometer dial light up. These segmentsindicate which speed range is available.RVariable SPEEDTRONIC activated

(Y page 200):

Display and operation 245

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

The segments between the start of the scaleand the selected limit speed light up.RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 202):

One or two segments in the set speed rangelight up.RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front:

The segments between the speed of the vehi-cle in front and the stored speed light up.

The speed can also be shown in the display inthe form of a digital speedometer (Y page 259).If you change the wheel size on your vehicle,make sure it is assigned to the correct wheelsize category (Y page 365). If the assignmentchanges without recoding the control units inthe vehicle, the speedometer will not display thespeed accurately. The current vehicle speedmay then be higher than the speed displayed inthe speedometer.

i In some countries, an acoustic signalsounds and/or the display shows a messagewhen the vehicle reaches the maximumlegally permissible speed limit, e.g. at120 km/h.

Rev counter! Do not drive in the overrevving range. Doing

so will damage the engine.

H Environmental noteAvoid excessive engine speeds. This unnec-essarily increases the fuel consumption ofyour vehicle and harms the environment as aresult of increased emissions.

The red band in the rev counter indicates theengine's overrevving range.To protect the engine, the fuel supply is inter-rupted when the red band is reached.

Outside temperature displayYou should pay special attention to road condi-tions when temperatures are around the freez-ing point.Please bear in mind that the outside tempera-ture display shows the air temperature meas-ured and not the road temperature.The display shows the outside temperature inthe footer (Y page 248).

Changes in the outside temperature are dis-played after a short delay.

Coolant temperature gauge

G WARNINGIf you open the bonnet while the engine isoverheating or while there is a fire in theengine compartment, you could come intocontact with hot gases or other leaking ser-vice products. There is a danger of injury.Allow an overheating engine to cool downbefore opening the bonnet. If there is a fire inthe engine compartment, leave the bonnetclosed and notify the fire brigade.

The coolant temperature gauge is located in therev counter in the instrument cluster(Y page 36).Under normal operating conditions and with thespecified coolant level, the coolant temperaturemay rise to 120 †.

Operating the on-board computer

: Display; Right control panel= Left control panelX To activate the on-board computer: turn

the key to position 1 in the ignition lock.

246 Display and operationOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Vehicles with manual transmission: if youremove the key, then quickly re-insert it and turnto position 1, the on-board computer and theinstrument cluster is not activated.You can control the displays and the settings inthe on-board computer using the steering wheelbuttons in the control panels on the left = andright ;.Left control panel =

ò RCalls up the main menu

9

:

Press briefly:RScrolls through listsRSelects menu or functionsRIn the Radio/Media menu: opens

the track or station list and selectsa station, an audio track or a videosceneRIn the Telephonemenu: switches

to the phone book and selects aname or a telephone number

9

:

Press and hold:RQuickly scrolls through all listsRIn the Radio or Media menu:

selects a station, audio track orvideo scene using rapid scrollingRIn the Telephone menu: starts

rapid scrolling if the phone book isopen

a RIn all menus: confirms the selectedentry in the list or the displayRIn the Radio or Media menu:

opens the list of available radiosources or mediaRIn the Telephone menu: switches

to the phone book and starts dial-ling the selected number

ñ RVehicles with Audio 20:Switches off voice-operated con-trol of the navigation system; seethe manufacturer's operatinginstructionsRVehicles with COMAND Online:

Switches off LINGUATRONIC (seethe separate operating instruc-tions)

% Press briefly:RBackRIn the Radio or Media menu: dese-

lects the track or station list or listof available radio sources or mediaRHides display messagesRExits the telephone book/redial

memory

% Press and hold:RCalls up the standard display in theTrip menu

Right control panel ;

~ RRejects or ends a callRExits the telephone book/redial

memory

6 RMakes or accepts a callRSwitches to the redial memory

WX

RAdjusts the volume

8 RMute

ó RVehicles with Audio 20:Switches on voice-operated con-trol of the navigation system; seethe manufacturer's operatinginstructionsRVehicles with COMAND Online:

Switches on LINGUATRONIC (seethe separate operating instruc-tions)

Display and operation 247

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Display

Instrument cluster display: Drive program (Y page 180); Transmission position (Y page 179)= Display panel for display messages, menus

and menu lists? ClockA Outside temperature (Y page 246)B Additional speedometer (Y page 259)C Status areaX To call up the menu list in display panel =:

press the ò button.Display panel = shows the selected menu orsubmenu and display messages.

In the status area of the display, one of the fol-lowing may appear:Z Gearshift recommendation, for

manual transmission (Y page 174)or automatic transmission(Y page 183)

1 A door is not fully closed.= PARKTRONIC (Y page 222)V CRUISE CONTROL (Y page 197)È SPEEDTRONIC (Y page 199)DSR DSR (Y page 209)_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist

(Y page 130)è ECO start/stop function

(Y page 175)

ë HOLD function (Y page 221)120 km/h! Maximum permissible speed

exceeded (only for certain coun-tries)

In the display footer, the display for the activePark Assist XjY may also be shown(Y page 225).

Menus and submenus

Menu overviewPress the ò button on the steering wheel tocall up the list of menus and select a menu.Operation information can be found under"Operating the on-board computer"(Y page 246).Depending on the vehicle equipment, you cancall up the following menus:RTrip menu (Y page 248)RNavi menu (navigation instructions)

(Y page 250)RRadio menu (Y page 252)RMedia menu (Y page 252)RTelephone menu (Y page 254)RAssistance graphic menu (Y page 255)RService menu (Y page 256)RSettings menu (Y page 256)

Trip menu

Standard display

X Press and hold the % steering wheel but-ton until the Reise (Trip) menu with tripmeter : and total distance ; appears.

248 Menus and submenusOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Displaying the range and current fuelconsumption

Use the steering wheel buttons.X Press ò to call up the list of menus.X Press : or 9 to select the Trip menu.X Press a to confirm.X Use the : or 9 button to select

approximate range : and current fuel con-sumption ;.

Approximate range : is calculated on the basisof your current driving style and the amount offuel in the tank. If there is only a small amount offuel left in the fuel tank, the display shows avehicle being refuelled Ï instead of approx-imate range :.Recuperation display = shows whether, andhow much, kinetic energy is being transformedinto electric current whilst the vehicle is coast-ing. The recuperated energy is then stored in thestarter battery. Recuperation display = isdependent on the engine fitted and is thereforenot available in all vehicles.

Trip computer "After start" or "Afterreset"

: Distance; Length of journey= Average speed? Average fuel consumptionUse the steering wheel buttons.X Press ò to call up the list of menus.X Press : or 9 to select the Reise (Trip)

menu.X Press a to confirm.X Press : or 9 to select From start orFrom reset.

The values in the From start submenu are cal-culated from the start of a journey whilst thevalues in the From reset submenu are calcu-lated from the last time the submenu was reset(Y page 250).The two trip computers are automatically resetif the value exceeds 9,999 hours or99,999 kilometres. If the ignition remainsswitched off for longer than four hours, only tripcomputer From start is reset automatically.

Digital speedometer

Menus and submenus 249

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Use the steering wheel buttons.X Press ò to call up the list of menus.X Press : or 9 to select the Reise (Trip)

menu.X Press a to confirm.X Select the digital speedometer by press-

ing : or 9.

Resetting values

Use the steering wheel buttons.X Press ò to call up the list of menus.X Press : or 9 to select the Reise (Trip)

menu.X Press a to confirm.X Press : or 9 to select the function you

would like to reset.X Press a to confirm.X Press : to select Yes and press a to

confirm.You can reset the values of the following func-tions:RTrip meterR"From start" trip computerR"From reset" trip computerRECO displayIf you reset the values in the ECO display, thevalues in the "From start" trip computer are alsoreset. If you reset the values in the "From start"trip computer, the values in the ECO display arealso reset.

Navigation menu

Displaying navigation instructionsIn the Navi menu, the display shows navigationinstructions from the multimedia system. Fur-ther information on the navigation system canbe found in the separate operating instructions.Use the steering wheel buttons.X Switch the multimedia system or Garmin®

MAP PILOT on (see the separate operatinginstructions).

X Press ò to call up the list of menus.X Press : or 9 to select the Navi menu.X Press a to confirm.

Route guidance not active

: Direction of travel; Current street

Route guidance activated

No change of direction announced

: Distance to the next destination; Expected time of arrival

250 Menus and submenusOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

= Distance to the next change of direction? Current street

Change of direction announced with alane recommendation

: Road to which the change of direction leads; Distance to the change of direction= Change-of-direction symbol? Recommended lane and new lane during a

change of direction (white)A Possible lane (light grey)B Lane not recommended (dark grey)On multilane roads, new lane recommendationscan be displayed for the next change of directionif the digital map contains the correspondingdata. During the change of direction, new lanesmay be added.Lane not recommended B: you will not be ableto complete the next change of direction if youstay in this lane.Possible lane A: you will be able to completethe next change of direction in this lane only.Recommended lane ?: in this lane you will beable to complete the next change of directionand the one after that.

Change of direction without lane recom-mendation

: Road to which the change of direction leads; Distance to the change of direction and dis-

tance graphic= Change-of-direction symbolWhen a change of direction is to be made, youwill see symbol = for the change of directionand distance graphic ;. This shortens towardsthe top of the display as you approach the pointof the announced change of direction. Thechange of direction starts once the distance dis-play reaches zero.

Change of direction with lane recommen-dation

: Road to which the change of direction leads; Distance to the change of direction and dis-

tance graphic= Change-of-direction symbol? Lane recommendation

Menus and submenus 251

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Other navigation system status indica-tors

: Additional informationOther possible additional information:RNew route... or Calculating route...

A new route is calculated.RRoad not mapped

The vehicle position is inside the area of thedigital map but the road is not recognised, e.g.unpaved roads (OFF-ROAD).RNo route

No route could be calculated to the selecteddestination.RO

You have reached the destination or an inter-mediate destination.

Radio menu

: Waveband; Station with memory position= Name of artist? Name of trackStation ; is displayed with the station fre-quency or station name. The memory position is

only displayed along with station ; if this hasbeen stored.Use the steering wheel buttons.X Switch the multimedia system on (see sepa-

rate operating instructions).X Press ò to call up the list of menus.X Press : or 9 to select the Radio

menu.X Press a to confirm.

The display shows the currently selected sta-tion ;.

X To open the station list: press : or 9briefly.

X To select a station from the station list:press : or 9 briefly.

X To select a station from the station list using rapid scrolling: press and briefly holdthe : or 9 button.

X To select a waveband or station preset: press a briefly.

X Press : or 9 to select the waveband orstation preset.

X Press a to confirm.Further information, e.g. on saving stations andDAB radio mode (Digital Audio Broadcasting)can be found under "Radio" in the separateoperating instructions.

Media menu

Changing the media source

You can change the media source and playbackmode (audio, video or TV) in the Media menu.

252 Menus and submenusOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Use the steering wheel buttons.X Switch the multimedia system on (see the

separate operating instructions).X Press ò to call up the list of menus.X Press : or 9 to select the Media

menu.X Press a to confirm.X To open/close the media sources list:

press a briefly.Depending on the vehicle equipment, the listshows the following media sources, for exam-ple:RDisc (CD/DVD)RMemory card (SD/SDHC)RMEDIA REGISTERRUSB storage mediaRBluetooth® audio device

Observe the additional information on mediasupport under "Media" in the separate operatinginstructions.

Operating audio devices or media

: Media source, e.g. name of USB memorystick

; Current track= Name of artist? Name of albumA Folder nameAudio data from various audio devices or mediacan be played, depending on the equipment fit-ted in the vehicle. Use the steering wheel but-tons.X Switch the multimedia system on (see sepa-

rate operating instructions).X Press ò to call up the list of menus.X Press : or 9 to select the Media

menu.

X Press a to confirm.X To select audio player or audio media:

briefly press a.The display shows the list of media sources.

X Press : or 9 to select audio player oraudio media

X Press a to confirm.X To open the track list: press : or 9

briefly.X To select next/previous track from the

track list: briefly press : or 9.X To select a track from the track list using

rapid scrolling: press and hold : or 9until the desired track is reached.If you hold down : or 9, the systemruns through the list more quickly. Not allaudio drives or data carriers support this func-tion.

If the corresponding track information is storedon the audio drive or audio media, the displaymay show the following:Rtrack numberRtrack nameRartistRalbumThe track information does not appear in audioAUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: externalaudio source connected).

Video DVD operation

: Current sceneUse the steering wheel buttons.X Switch the multimedia system on (see sepa-

rate operating instructions).X Press ò to call up the list of menus.X Press : or 9 to select the Media

menu.

Menus and submenus 253

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

X Press a to confirm.X To select DVD player or DVD media: briefly

press a.The display shows the list of media sources.

X Press : or 9 to select DVD player orDVD media.

X Press a to confirm.X To open the scene list: press : or 9

briefly.X To select the next or previous scene from

the scene list: briefly press : or 9.X To select a scene from the scene list using

rapid scrolling: press and hold : or 9until desired scene : is reached.

X Press a to confirm the choice.

Telephone menu

Introduction

G WARNINGOperating the integrated information systemsand communications equipment in the vehiclewhile driving will distract you from traffic con-ditions. You could then lose control of thevehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate these devices if road traffic con-ditions permit. If you are unsure about thesurrounding conditions, pull over to a safelocation and make entries only while the vehi-cle is stationary.

When using the phone, you must observe thelegal requirements for the country in which youare currently driving.X Switch on the mobile phone (see the manu-

facturer's separate operating instructions).X Switch the multimedia system on (see sepa-

rate operating instructions).X Insert the mobile phone into the mobile phone

bracket (Y page 325).orX Establish a Bluetooth® connection to the mul-

timedia system (see the separate operatinginstructions).

Use the steering wheel buttons.X Press ò to call up the list of menus.X Press : or 9 to select the Telephone

menu.X Confirm by pressing a on the steering

wheel.The display shows one of the following mes-sages:RTelephone ready or the name of the net-

work provider: the mobile phone has found anetwork and is ready to receive.RTelephone No service: there is no network

available or the mobile phone is searching fora network.

You can obtain further information about suita-ble mobile phones and connecting mobilephones via Bluetooth®:Rat your Mercedes Benz Service CentreRon the Internet at http://www.mercedes-

benz.com/connect

Accepting a call

X Press the 6 button to answer a call.If someone calls you when you are in the Tel‐efon (Telephone) menu, a display messageappears in the multifunction display.

Rejecting an incoming call/ending a callX Press the ~ steering wheel button.

Dialling a number from the phone bookUse the steering wheel buttons.X Press ò to call up the list of menus.X Press : or 9 to select the Telefon

(Telephone) menu.

254 Menus and submenusOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

X Press a to confirm.X Press :, 9 or a to switch to the

phone book.X Press : or 9 to select names succes-

sively.If you press and hold the button for longerthan one second, the names in the telephonebook are shown rapidly one after another.

orX Press and hold : or 9 for longer than

five seconds.Rapid scrolling — the name that starts with thenext letter or the previous letter in the alpha-bet is displayed. Rapid scrolling stops whenyou release the button or reach the end of thelist.

X If only one telephone number is stored for a name: press 6 or a to start dialling.

orX If there is more than one number for a

particular name: press the 6 or abutton to display the numbers.

X Press : or 9 to select a telephonenumber.

X Press 6 or a to start dialling.orX To exit the telephone book: press ~ or%.

RediallingThe on-board computer saves the last names ornumbers dialled in the redial memory. Using thesteering wheel buttonsX Press ò to call up the list of menus.X Press : or 9 to select the Telephone

menu.X Press a to confirm.X Press the 6 button to switch to the redial

memory.X Press : or 9 to select names or tele-

phone numbers.X Press the 6 or a button to start dial-

ling.orX To exit the redial memory: press the ~

or % button.

Assistance graphic menu

Use the steering wheel buttons.X Press ò to call up the list of menus.X Press : or 9 to select the Assis‐tance graphic menu.

X Press a to confirm.The assistance graphic shows you the statusof and/or information from the following driv-ing systems or driving safety systems:RRear window wiper (Y page 139)RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST

(Y page 211)RATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 219)RDSR (Y page 209)RTraffic Sign Assist (Y page 217)RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 207)RLane Keeping Assist (Y page 215)RBlind Spot Assist (Y page 213)

X Press : and 9 to switch between theassistance graphic and the evaluation of theATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 219).The ATTENTION ASSIST assessment showsthe length of the journey since the last breakas well as the attention level detected(Y page 219).

Menus and submenus 255

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Service menu

Introduction

You have the following options in the Servicemenu:RCalling up display messages in the message

memory (Y page 260)RRestarting the tyre pressure loss warning sys-

tem or checking the tyre pressure electroni-cally (Y page 370)RChecking the engine oil level electronically

(Y page 338)RCalling up the service due date

(Y page 344)RDisplaying the AdBlue® level in BlueTEC®

vehicles (Y page 256)

Displaying the AdBlue® levelThe display is only available for BlueTEC® vehi-cles.Using the steering wheel buttonsX Press ò to call up the list of menus.X Press : or 9 to select the Service

menu.X Press a to confirm.X Press : or 9 to select the AdBlue

submenu.X Press a to confirm.

The display shows the level of AdBlue®.You can find information on refilling AdBlue®

under "Refuelling" (Y page 186).

Settings menu

Introduction

In the Einstellungen (Settings) menu, youhave the following options:Rchanging the settings for driving and driver

assistance systems in the Assistance sub-menu (Y page 256)Rchanging the exterior lighting settings in the

Light submenu (Y page 258)Rchanging the display options in the instru-

ment cluster submenu (Y page 259)Rsetting permanent SPEEDTRONIC in the Vehi-

cle submenu (Y page 259)Rrestoring the factory settings (Y page 260)

Assistance submenu

Deactivating/activating ESPPlease observe the important safety notesunder "ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)"(Y page 70).

G WARNINGIf you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta-bilises the vehicle. There is an increased riskof skidding and an accident.Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri-bed in the following.

It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the follow-ing situations:Rif snow chains are being usedRin deep snowRon sand or gravelFurther information can be found under "ESP®

(Electronic Stability Program)" (Y page 71).

256 Menus and submenusOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

X Start the engine.Using the steering wheel buttonsX Press ò to call up the list of menus.X Press : or 9 to select the Settings

menu.X Press a to confirm.X Press : or 9 to select the Assistance

submenu.X Press a to confirm.X Press : or 9 to select ESP.X Press a to confirm.

The current status is shown.X To activate/deactivate: press a again.

If the å warning lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up when the vehicle is ready todrive, ESP® is deactivated.

If the ÷ warning lamp lights up continuously,ESP® is not available due to a malfunction.Observe the information on warning lamps(Y page 287) and display messages(Y page 265).

Activating/deactivating Traffic SignAssistUse the steering wheel buttons.X Press ò to call up the list of menus.X Press : or 9 to select the Einstel‐lungen (Settings) menu.

X Press a to confirm.X Press : or 9 to select the Assistance

submenu.X Press a to confirm.X Press : or 9 to select Traffic Sign Assist.

X Press the a button.The current status is shown.

X To switch on or off: press a.If you switch on the message function, detec-ted traffic signs are shown for five seconds inthe display.

Further information can be found under "TrafficSign Assist" (Y page 217).

Activating/deactivating the distancewarning functionUsing the steering wheel buttonsX Press ò to call up the list of menus.X Press : or 9 to select the Settings

menu.X Press a to confirm.X Press : or 9 to select the Assistance

submenu.X Press a to confirm.X Press 9 or : to select Distance warning.

X Press a to confirm.The current status is shown.

X To activate/deactivate: press the a but-ton again.When the distance warning function of COL-LISION PREVENTION ASSIST is activated, theradar waves in front of the vehicle and theI symbol are shown in colour in the dis-play.When the distance warning function of COL-LISION PREVENTION ASSIST is deactivated,the display shows the æ symbol in theAssistance graphic menu to inform you ofthis.

Further information can be found under "COL-LISION PREVENTION ASSIST" (Y page 211).

Activating/deactivating Blind Spot AssistUsing the steering wheel buttonsX Press ò to call up the list of menus.X Press : or 9 to select the Settings

menu.X Press a to confirm.X Press : or 9 to select the Assistance

submenu.X Press a to confirm.X Press : or 9 to select Blind Spot Assist.

X Press a to confirm.The current status is shown.

X To activate/deactivate: press the a but-ton again.When Blind Spot Assist is activated, greyradar waves propagating backwards appearnext to the vehicle in the Assistenzgrafik(Assistance display) menu in the display.

Further information can be found under "BlindSpot Assist" (Y page 213).

Menus and submenus 257

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Setting ATTENTION ASSISTUsing the steering wheel buttonsX Press ò to call up the list of menus.X Press : or 9 to select the Settings

menu.X Press a to confirm.X Press : or 9 to select the Assistance

submenu.X Press a to confirm.X Press : or 9 to select Attention Assist.

X Press a to confirm.X Press : or 9 to set Deactivated,Standard or Sensitive.

X Press a to confirm the selection.When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, theé symbol appears in the Assistenzgra‐fik (Assistance display) menu in the displayas a warning. The selection Standard or Sen‐sitive sets the sensitivity with which thesystem determines the attention level.

Further information can be found under "ATTEN-TION ASSIST" (Y page 219).

Setting Lane Keeping AssistUsing the steering wheel buttonsX Press ò to call up the list of menus.X Press : or 9 to select the Settings

menu.X Press a to confirm.X Press : or 9 to select the Assistance

submenu.X Press a to confirm.X Press : or 9 to select Lane Keeping Assist.

X Press a to confirm.The current selection Standard or Adaptiveis displayed.

X To change the setting: press a again.Further information can be found under "LaneKeeping Assist" (Y page 215).

Lights submenu

Activating/deactivating the IntelligentLight SystemUse the steering wheel buttons.X Press ò to call up the list of menus.X Press : or 9 to select the Settings

menu.X Press a to confirm.X Press : or 9 to select the Lights

submenu.X Press a to confirm.X Press : or 9 to select the Intelli‐gent Light System function.If the Intelligent Light System functionis switched on, the cone of light and the Lsymbol in the display are shown in white.

X Press a to change the setting.If the Intelligent Light System function isswitched on, the following functions are activa-ted:RMotorway modeRActive light functionRCornering light functionRExtended range foglampsIf you set the dipped-beam headlamps for driv-ing on the right/left, the Inactive for left-side traffic or Inactive for right-side traffic display message is shown instead ofthe Intelligent Light System function inthe Lights submenu (Y page 258). This displaymessage will only appear if the setting for driv-ing on the left/right is set opposite to your vehi-cle's country version.Further information can be found under "Intelli-gent Light System" (Y page 128).

Setting the dipped-beam headlamps fordriving on the left/rightThis function is only available on vehicles withthe Intelligent Light System. When travellingabroad you can switch between symmetricaland asymmetrical dipped beam using the on-board computer (Y page 194).Using the steering wheel buttonsX Press ò to call up the list of menus.X Press : or 9 to select the Settings

menu.X Press a to confirm.

258 Menus and submenusOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

X Press : or 9 to select the Lightssubmenu.

X Press a to confirm.X Press : or 9 to select the Dipped beams Setting for function.You will see the selected setting: right-side traffic or left-side traffic.

X Press a to change the setting.If you change the setting, conversion does nottake place until the next time the vehicle isstationary.

If you switch the dipped-beam headlamps fordriving on the right/left, motorway mode andthe extended range foglamps may then not beavailable. These are only deactivated if the set-ting for driving on the left/right is set oppositeto your vehicle's country version.A qualified specialist workshop can set thedipped-beam headlamps for driving on the left/right.

Instrument cluster submenu

Selecting the unit for the distanceThe Display unit Speed-/odometer functionallows you to choose whether certain displaysappear in kilometres or miles in the display.Using the steering wheel buttonsX Press ò to call up the list of menus.X Press : or 9 to select the Settings

menu.X Press a to confirm.X Press : or 9 to select the Instru‐ment cluster submenu.

X Press a to confirm.X Press : or 9 to select the Display unit Speed-/odometer function.You will see the selected setting: km or Miles.

X Press a to change the setting.The selected distance units are used for:RDigital speedometer in the Trip menuRTotal distance recorder and trip meterRTrip computerRCurrent consumption and rangeRNavigation instructions in the Navi menuRCruise controlRSPEEDTRONICRDISTRONIC PLUSRService interval display

Switching the additional speedometeron/offUnited Kingdom only:The display permanently shows the digital speedin mph in the status area. The additional speed-ometer cannot be switched on or off.All countries:With the Digital speedo function, you canselect whether the display shows the digitalspeed in the status area (Y page 248) The unitshown by the additional speedometer is alwaysinverse to the speedometer unit.Use the steering wheel buttons.X Press ò to call up the list of menus.X Press : or 9 to select the Settings

menu.X Press a to confirm.X Press : or 9 to select the Instru‐ment cluster submenu.

X Press a to confirm.X Press : or 9 to select Digital speedo.The current selection is displayed.

X To activate/deactivate: press a again.

Vehicle submenu

Setting permanent SPEEDTRONICUsing the steering wheel buttonsX Press ò to call up the list of menus.X Press : or 9 to select the Settings

menu.X Press a to confirm.X Press : or 9 to select the Vehicle

submenu.X Press a to confirm.X Press : or 9 to select the Limit speed (winter tyres) function.The display shows the current setting.

X Press a to change the setting.X Press : or 9 to adjust permanent

SPEEDTRONIC in increments of ten(240 km/h to 160 km/h). Selecting the Offsetting switches permanent SPEEDTRONICoff.

X Press the a button to store the entry.Further information can be found under "Per-manent SPEEDTRONIC" (Y page 201).

Menus and submenus 259

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Restoring the factory settingsUsing the steering wheel buttonsX Press ò to call up the list of menus.X Press : or 9 to select the Settings

menu.X Press a to confirm.X Press : or 9 to select the Factory settings submenu.

X Press a to confirm.The Reset all settings? messageappears.

X Press : or 9 to select No or Yes.X Press the a button to confirm the selec-

tion.If you select Yes, the display shows a confir-mation message.

For safety reasons, not all functions are reset:the Limit speed (winter tyres) function inpermanent SPEEDTRONIC can only be set in theVehicle submenu.

Display messages

Introduction

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the instrument cluster has failed or malfunctioned, you may not recognise function restrictionsrelevant to safety. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. There is a risk of anaccident.Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

The on-board computer only shows messages or warnings from certain systems in the instrumentcluster display. You should therefore make sure your vehicle is operating safely at all times. If theoperating safety of your vehicle is impaired, stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attentionto road and traffic conditions. Then contact a qualified specialist workshop.Display messages with graphic symbols are simplified in the Operating Instructions and may differfrom the symbols in the display. The display shows high-priority display messages in red. A warningtone sounds with certain display messages.Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in theseOperating Instructions.You can hide low-priority display messages using the a or % steering wheel button. Thedisplay messages are then stored in the message memory. Rectify the cause of a display messageas soon as possible.High-priority display messages cannot be hidden. These messages will continue to be shown in thedisplay until their cause has been eliminated.

Message memoryThe on-board computer stores certain display messages in the message memory. You can call upthe stored display messages. Use the steering wheel buttons.X Press ò to call up the list of menus.X Press : or 9 to select the Service menu.X Press a to confirm.X Press : or 9 to select messages.

The line shows the number of stored messages.

260 Display messagesOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

X Press a to confirm.The first stored display message appears in the display.If there are no display messages, the display shows No messages.

X Press : or 9 to scroll through the display messages.All of the stored display messages are numbered in the message memory. The current messagenumber is displayed as a guide together with the number of stored display messages in thebottom line of the display.

X Press % to exit the display messages.

Safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

! ÷inoperative See Own‐er's Manual

ABS, BAS, hill start assist, and ESP® as well as its driving safety sys-tems are unavailable due to a malfunction.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated and other driving systems could beautomatically deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brakehard, for example.This greatly impairs steerability and braking. The braking distance canincrease in emergency braking situations.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® will not stabilise the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and accidents.X Drive on with care.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

! ÷currently unavaila‐ble See Owner's Man‐ual

ABS, BAS, hill start assist, and ESP® as well as its driving safety sys-tems are temporarily unavailable.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated and other driving systems could beautomatically deactivated.For example, the on-board voltage may be insufficient.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brakehard, for example.This greatly impairs steerability and braking. The braking distance canincrease in emergency braking situations.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® will not stabilise the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and accidents.X Drive on with care on a suitable stretch of road, making slight

steering movements at a speed above 20 km/h.If the display message continues to be displayed:X Drive on with care.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Display messages 261

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Front-passenger airbag disabled See Owner's Manual

The co-driver's airbag is disabled during the journey even though anadult or a person with a corresponding build is occupying the co-driv-er's seat.If additional forces are applied to the seat or the occupant is not sittingon the seat properly (Y page 53), the weight the system detects maybe too low.

G WARNINGThe co-driver's front airbag does not deploy during an accident.There is an increased risk of injury.X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic

conditions.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 189).X Switch off the ignition.X The co-driver must get out of the vehicle.X Make sure that the co-driver's seat is unoccupied, close the co-

driver's door and switch on the ignition.X Observe the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp in the centre

console and the display messages and check the following:Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:RThe PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must light up contin-

uously. If the indicator lamp is on, the automatic co-driver's frontairbag deactivation system has disabled the co-driver's front airbag(Y page 53).RThe display must not show the messages Front-passenger air‐bag enabled See Owner's Manual or Front-passenger air‐bag disabled See Owner's Manual.

X Wait for at least one minute until the necessary system checks havebeen completed.

X Ensure that the display does not show either of the display mes-sages about the co-driver's front airbag.

If these conditions are met, the co-driver's seat can be occupied again.If these conditions are not met, the automatic co-driver's front airbagdeactivation system is malfunctioning.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.Further information on airbag deactivation can be found under "Auto-matic airbag deactivation" (Y page 53).

262 Display messagesOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Front-passenger airbag enabled See Owner's Manual

The co-driver's front airbag is enabled during the journey although theco-driver's seat:Ris occupied by a child in a child restraint system, or a person of small

statureorRis not occupied.The system may detect objects or forces that are adding to the weightapplied to the seat.

G WARNINGThe co-driver's airbag may deploy unintentionally.There is an increased risk of injury.X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic

conditions.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 189).X Switch off the ignition.X Open the co-driver's door.X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the co-driver's

seat.X Make sure there are no objects applying additional weight to the

seat.The system may otherwise detect the additional weight and inter-pret the vehicle seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually is.

X Make sure that the co-driver's seat is unoccupied, close the co-driver's door and switch on the ignition.

X Observe the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp in the centreconsole and the display and check the following:

Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:RThe PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must light up contin-

uously. If the indicator lamp is on, the automatic co-driver's frontairbag deactivation system has disabled the co-driver's front airbag(Y page 53).RThe display must not show the messages Front-passenger air‐bag enabled See Owner's Manual or Front-passenger air‐bag disabled See Owner's Manual.

X Wait for at least one minute until the necessary system checks havebeen completed.

X Ensure that the display does not show either of the display mes-sages about the co-driver's front airbag.

If these conditions are met, the co-driver's seat can be occupied again.Observe the notes on the seat occupancy sensor and the result of theclassification of the automatic co-driver's front airbag deactivationsystem (Y page 53).

Display messages 263

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M SolutionsIf these conditions are not met, the automatic co-driver's front airbagdeactivation system is malfunctioning.X Fit the child restraint system on a suitable rear seat.orX Seat a person of small stature on a suitable rear seat.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.Further information on airbag deactivation can be found under "Auto-matic airbag deactivation" (Y page 53).

#Check brake pad wear

The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

JCaution Brakes over‐heated Drive care‐fully

On vehicles with 4MATIC, the brake system has overheated.

G WARNINGTraction control and braking power are impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Drive on with care.

When the brake system has cooled sufficiently, the display messagedisappears. Traction control is then fully operational again.

JCheck brake fluid level

There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

G WARNINGBraking performance can be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic

conditions. Do not drive on.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 189).X Do not top up the brake fluid. Topping up does not rectify the fault.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

264 Display messagesOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

T !÷inoperative See Own‐er's Manual

EBD is unavailable due to a malfunction. ABS, BAS, hill start assist andESP® as well as its driving safety systems, for example, are thereforealso unavailable.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated and other driving systems could beautomatically deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock prematurely ifyou brake hard, for example.This greatly impairs steerability and braking. The braking distance canincrease in emergency braking situations.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® will not stabilise the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and accidents.X Drive on with care.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

÷inoperative See Own‐er's Manual

ESP®, BAS and hill start assist are unavailable due to a malfunction.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated and other driving systems could beautomatically deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance can thus increase in emergency braking situa-tions.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® will not stabilise the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and accidents.X Drive on with care.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 265

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

÷currently unavaila‐ble See Owner's Man‐ual

ESP®, BAS and hill start assist are unavailable due to a malfunction.The self-diagnosis function, for example, may not be complete.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated and other driving systems could beautomatically deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brakehard, for example.The braking distance can thus increase in emergency braking situa-tions.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® will not stabilise the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and accidents.X Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering

movements at a speed above 20 km/h.If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned aboveare available again.

If the display message continues to be displayed:X Drive on with care.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

!Release parking brake

The red ! indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up and awarning tone also sounds.You are driving with the parking brake applied or are making an emer-gency stop using the parking brake (Y page 189).

!Parking brake See Owner's Manual

The yellow ! warning lamp flashes and the red ! indicator lampis not lit.The parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. after the starter battery hasbeen disconnected.To release:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Depress the brake pedal and briefly pull the parking brake handle.

(Y page 189).X Press the parking brake handle after approx. ten seconds.

When the yellow ! warning lamp goes out, release the parkingbrake.

If the yellow ! warning lamp remains lit:X Do not drive on.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away.X Vehicles with a manual transmission: engage first gear.X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to

P.X Turn the front wheels towards the kerb.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

266 Display messagesOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The yellow ! warning lamp and the red ! indicator lamp are lit.The parking brake is malfunctioning.To release:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Release the parking brake.If it is still not possible to release the parking brake:X Do not drive on.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The red ! indicator lamp flashes and the yellow ! warning lampis lit.The parking brake is malfunctioning.X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Apply or release the parking brake.If the red ! indicator lamp continues to flash:X Do not drive on.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away.X Vehicles with a manual transmission: engage first gear.X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to

P.X Turn the front wheels towards the kerb.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

!Depress brake pedal to release

The red ! indicator lamp lights up.You have attempted to release the parking brake without depressingthe brake pedal.X Depress the brake pedal.X To release, pull the parking brake handle.

PRE-SAFE inopera‐tive See Owner's Manual

Important functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupantsafety systems, e.g. airbags, remain available.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.Information on these functions can be found under "PRE‑SAFE®

(anticipatory occupant protection)" (Y page 58).

Display messages 267

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

6Restraint sys. mal‐function Consult workshop

The restraint system is faulty. In addition, the 6 warning lamplights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered unintentionallyor, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Have the restraint system and its components checked immedi-

ately at a qualified specialist workshop.Further information on the restraint system and its components canbe found under "Occupant safety" (Y page 45).

6Front left malfunc‐tion Consult work‐shop or Front right malfunction Consult workshop

The front left or right restraint system is malfunctioning. In addition,the 6 warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered unintentionallyor, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Have the restraint system and its components checked immedi-

ately at a qualified specialist workshop.

6Left windowbag mal‐function Consult workshop or Right windowbag malfunc‐tion Consult work‐shop

There is a malfunction in the left-hand or right-hand windowbag. Inaddition, the 6 warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe left-hand or right-hand windowbag may either be triggered unin-tentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Have the restraint system checked immediately at a qualified spe-

cialist workshop.

LightsOn vehicles with LED headlamps and/or LED tail lamps the display only shows certain messageswhen a certain number of LEDs for a light function have failed.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

bLeft cornering light or Right cor‐nering light

The left or right-hand cornering light is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bLeft dipped beam or Right dipped beam

The left or right-hand dipped-beam headlamp is faulty.X Halogen headlamp: replace the bulb (Y page 134).X LED headlamp: visit a qualified specialist workshop.

268 Display messagesOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Adaptive Main-beam Assist inoperative

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is malfunctioning.X Switch the main-beam headlamps on/off manually.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Adaptive Main-beam Assist currently unavailable See Own‐er's Manual

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.Possible causes:RThe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision.RVisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.X Clean the windscreen.If the system detects that the camera is fully available, the Adaptive Main-beam Assist available again message appears in the dis-play.Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again.

bActive Light System inoperative

The active light function is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bTrailer left indica‐tor or Trailer right indicator

The left or right-hand trailer turn signal lamp is faulty.X Replace the bulb (see the trailer manufacturer's operating instruc-

tions).For trailers with LED lamps, please observe the notes on lamp failuremonitoring under "Trailer operation" (Y page 244).

bTrailer brake lamp

The trailer brake lamp is faulty.X Replace the bulb (see the trailer manufacturer's operating instruc-

tions).For trailers with LED lamps, please observe the notes on lamp failuremonitoring under "Trailer operation" (Y page 244).

bTrailer left tail lamp or Trailer right tail lamp

The left or right-hand trailer tail lamp is faulty.X Replace the bulb (see the trailer manufacturer's operating instruc-

tions).For trailers with LED lamps, please observe the notes on lamp failuremonitoring under "Trailer operation" (Y page 244).

bAUTO lights inoper‐ative

The light sensor is faulty. The automatic headlamp feature is mal-functioning.X Switch the light functions on/off manually (Y page 126).X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bRear left indicator or Rear right indi‐cator

The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is faulty.X Standard tail lamp: replace the bulb (Y page 134).X LED tail lamp: visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 269

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

bLeft mirror indica‐tor or Right mirror indicator

The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bFront left indica‐tor or Front right indicator

The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is faulty.X Halogen headlamp: replace the bulb (Y page 134).X LED headlamp: visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bThird brake lamp

The third brake lamp is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bLeft-hand tail lamp/ brake lamp or Right-hand tail lamp/ brake lamp

The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is faulty.X Standard tail lamp: replace the bulb (Y page 134).X LED tail lamp: visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bLeft main beam or Right main beam

The left or right-hand main-beam headlamp is faulty.X Halogen headlamp: replace the bulb (Y page 134).X LED headlamp: visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bIntell. Light Sys‐tem inoperative

The Intelligent Light System is malfunctioning. The lights remain avail-able without the Intelligent Light System functions.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bNumber plate lamp

The left or right-hand licence plate lamp is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bSwitch off lights

The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A warningtone also sounds.X Turn the light switch to the à position.

bRear fog lamp

The rear foglamp is faulty.X Standard tail lamp: replace the bulb (Y page 134).X LED tail lamp: visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bFront left parking lamp  or Front right parking lamp

The front left or front right side lamp or parking lamp is faulty.X Halogen headlamp: replace the bulb (Y page 134).X LED headlamp: visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bReversing light

The left or right-hand reversing lamp is faulty.X Replace the bulb (Y page 134).

270 Display messagesOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

bLeft tail lamp or Right tail lamp

The left or right-hand tail lamp is faulty.X Standard tail lamp: replace the bulb (Y page 134).X LED tail lamp: visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bMalfunction See Own‐er's Manual

The exterior lighting is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Vehicles with trailer tow hitch: a fuse may be defective.X Check the fuses and if necessary replace any blown fuses (see the

"Fuse allocation" supplement).X If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified spe-

cialist workshop.

bLeft daytime driv‐ing lamp  or Right daytime driving lamp

The left or right-hand daytime driving lamp is faulty.X Halogen headlamp: replace the bulb (Y page 134).X LED headlamp: visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Engine

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

#See Owner's Manual

A warning tone also sounds. The battery is no longer being charged.Possible causes:Rfaulty alternatorRtorn poly-V-beltRa malfunction in the electronicsX Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic

conditions, and switch off the engine.

! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 189).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

ØRefill AdBlue See Owner’s Manual

A warning tone also sounds. The AdBlue® level has fallen below thereserve range.X Refill AdBlue® as soon as possible (Y page 186).

ØRefill AdBlue Emer. oper. in ... mi See Owner's Manual

A warning tone also sounds. The AdBlue® supply is almost used up andonly sufficient for the indicated distance. If you subsequently switchoff the engine, the engine management prevents the engine frombeing started again. You can then only start the engine if you haverefilled the AdBlue® tank.X Refill AdBlue® immediately (Y page 186).

Display messages 271

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

ØEmer. oper.: 20km/h No start in: ... mi See Owner's Manual

A warning tone also sounds. The AdBlue® tank is empty. You can drivea further 50 km at a maximum speed of 20 km/h. If you subsequentlyswitch off the engine, the engine management prevents the enginefrom being started again. You can then only start the engine if you haverefilled the AdBlue® tank.When you stop and park the vehicle:X Stop the vehicle safely.X Add at least two refill bottles or approximately 4 litres of AdBlue®

(Y page 186).X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock for approximately one

minute.When the new level is detected by the engine management, you canthen start the engine again.

X Start the engine.

¯AdBlue system Mal‐function See Own‐er's Manual

A warning tone also sounds. The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

¯AdBlue malfunction Emer. oper. in ... mi See Owner's Man‐ual

A warning tone also sounds. The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning.The displayed distance is the maximum you can drive. The enginemanagement then prevents the engine from being started again.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

¯Emer. oper.: 20km/h No start in: ... mi See Owner's Manual

A warning tone also sounds. The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning.You can drive a further 50 km at a maximum speed of 20 km/h. If yousubsequently switch off the engine, the engine management preventsthe engine from being started again.X Drive on to a qualified specialist workshop.orX Stop the vehicle safely and consult a qualified specialist workshop.

!Clean the fuel fil‐ter

There is water in the fuel filter. The water must be drained off.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

272 Display messagesOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

?Coolant Stop vehi‐cle Switch engine off

A warning tone also sounds. The coolant is too hot.

G WARNINGNever drive with an overheated engine. Driving when the engine isoverheated can cause fluids which may have leaked into the enginecompartment to catch fire.In addition, steam from an overheated engine can cause seriousburns, which can occur just by opening the bonnet.There is a risk of injury.X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic

conditions, and switch off the engine.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 189).X Wait until the engine has cooled down.X Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed – by

frozen slush, for example.X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out and

the coolant temperature is below 120 †. The engine could other-wise be damaged.

X Monitor the ? coolant temperature gauge in the instrumentcluster.

X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist work-shop immediately.

Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolantlevel, the coolant temperature display ? may rise to 120 †.

? The fan motor is faulty.X Check the ? coolant temperature display in the instrument

cluster.If the coolant temperature is below 120 †, you can continue drivingto the nearest qualified specialist workshop.Avoid heavy loads on the engine, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain,and stop-start traffic.

+Top up coolant See Owner’s Manual

The coolant level is too low.

! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the enginecooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.

X Top up the coolant, making sure to observe the warning notes(Y page 340).

X If you have to top up the coolant more frequently, have the coolingsystem checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

¸Replace air cleaner

The engine air filter is dirty and must be replaced.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 273

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

4Check eng. oil lev. when next refuelling

A warning tone also sounds. The engine oil level has dropped to theminimum level.X Check the oil level, at the latest when next refuelling (Y page 339).X If necessary, top up the engine oil (Y page 340).X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if the

engine oil needs topping up more often than usual.

! Avoid long journeys when there is too little coolant in the coolingsystem. Otherwise the engine will be damaged.

4Engine oil level Stop vehicle Switch engine off

The oil level is too low. There is a risk of engine damage.X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic

conditions, and switch off the engine.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 189).X Check the oil level (Y page 339).X If necessary, top up the engine oil (Y page 340).

6Reserve fuel level

The fuel level has dropped to the reserve range.Operation of the auxiliary heating is deactivated if the fuel level dropsinto the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest filling station.

Ï There is very little fuel in the fuel tank.X Refuel at the nearest filling station without fail.

Driving systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

120 km/h!Maximum speed excee‐ded

Only for certain countries: the maximum speed has been exceeded.X Drive more slowly.

ÀATTENTION ASSIST inoperative

ATTENTION ASSIST has failed.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a break!

Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue ora lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone alsosounds.X If necessary, take a break.During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so that you getenough rest.

DISTRONIC PLUS - - - mph

An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled.X Observe the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS

(Y page 202).

274 Display messagesOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

DISTRONIC PLUS off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 202).If it was not deactivated by the driver, a warning tone also sounds.

DISTRONIC PLUS inop‐erative

A warning tone also sounds. DISTRONIC PLUS is faulty. BAS may alsohave failed.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

DISTRONIC PLUS and SPEEDTRONIC inoper‐ative

A warning tone also sounds. DISTRONIC PLUS and SPEEDTRONIC arefaulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

DISTRONIC PLUS sus‐pended

You accelerate. Whilst you are accelerating, DISTRONIC PLUS doesnot control the speed.X Release the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is activated again.

DISTRONIC PLUS cur‐rently unavailable See Owner's Manual

A warning tone also sounds.DISTRONIC is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Possible cau-ses:RThe function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.RThe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to

electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations orother sources of electromagnetic radiation.RThe system is outside the operating temperature range.RThe on-board voltage is too low.Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display messagegoes out and DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic

conditions.X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 189).X Restart the engine.

DISTRONIC PLUS available again

DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been temporarilyunavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 202).

Ã--- km/h

DSR is activated but not active, since you are driving faster than18 km/h. If you drive at slower than 18 km/h, DSR brakes automat-ically until the set speed is reached.

Ãoff

DSR was deactivated.If it was not deactivated by the driver, e.g. due to a malfunction inESP®, a warning tone also sounds.

Ãinoperative

A warning tone also sounds. DSR is unavailable due to a malfunction.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 275

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Park Assist cancel‐led

A warning tone also sounds. The active parking assistance has beencancelled and Active Parking Assist has ended automatically. Forexample, you have touched the steering wheel or driven too fast.X Steer and brake yourself.X Repeat the parking procedure if necessary. Observe the deactiva-

tion conditions as you do so (Y page 229).

Park Assist inoper‐ative

PARKTRONIC is malfunctioning or faulty.X Follow the instructions and helpful hints in the "Problems with

PARKTRONIC" section (Y page 224).X If the display message continues to be shown, consult a qualified

specialist workshop.

Active Parking Assist is unavailable or faulty.X Switch off the ignition.X Start the engine again.X If the display message continues to be shown or symbol j is not

shown in the display, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

PRE-SAFE Functions limited See Owner's Manual

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is not available due to a mal-function.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

PRE-SAFE Functions currently limited See Owner's Manual

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is temporarily inoperative.Possible causes:RThe sensors in the front bumper are dirty.RThe function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.RThe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to

electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations orother sources of electromagnetic radiation.RThe system is outside the operating temperature range.RThe on-board voltage is too low.Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display messagegoes out and COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic

conditions.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 189).X Switch off the engine.X Clean the sensors in the front bumper (Y page 353).X Restart the engine.

276 Display messagesOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Radar sensors dirty See Owner's Manual

A warning tone also sounds.At least one of the following driving systems or driving safety systemsis temporarily restricted or inoperative:RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTRBlind Spot AssistRDISTRONIC PLUSPossible causes:RThe sensors in the radiator trim and/or in the bumpers are dirty.RThe function of the driving system and/or driving safety system is

impaired due to heavy rain or snow.Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display messagegoes out and the driving systems/driving safety systems are opera-tional again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic

conditions.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 189).X Switch off the engine.X Clean the sensors in the following locations (Y page 353):Rin the radiator trimRin the front bumperRin the rear bumper

SPEEDTRONIC Limit - - - mph

While depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point(kickdown), SPEEDTRONIC cannot be activated.X If conditions permit, drive faster than 30 km/h and store the speed.

SPEEDTRONIC suspen‐ded

You depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. Whilstyou are accelerating, SPEEDTRONIC does not control the speed.X Release the accelerator pedal. SPEEDTRONIC is reactivated and

limits the speed.

Lane Keeping Assist inoperative

Lane Keeping Assist is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 277

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Lane Keeping Assist currently unavaila‐ble See Owner's Man‐ual

Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Pos-sible causes:RThe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision.RVisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.RThere are no lane markings for an extended period.RThe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or

snow.Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display messagegoes out and Lane Keeping Assist is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic

conditions.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 189).X Clean the windscreen.

Cruise control - - - mph

A condition for activating cruise control has not been met.You have tried to store a speed below 30 km/h for example.X If conditions permit, drive faster than 30 km/h and store the speed.X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 198).

Cruise control and SPEEDTRONIC inoper‐ative

A warning tone also sounds. Cruise control and SPEEDTRONIC aremalfunctioning.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Blind Spot Assist not available when towing a trailer See Owner's Manual

Blind Spot Assist is deactivated while towing a trailer.X Confirm the display message by pressing the a steering wheel

button.

Blind Spot Assist inoperative

Blind Spot Assist is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Blind Spot Assist currently unavaila‐ble See Owner's Man‐ual

Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes:RThe function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.RThe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to

electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations orother sources of electromagnetic radiation.RThe system is outside the operating temperature range.Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display messagegoes out and Blind Spot Assist is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic

conditions.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 189).X Restart the engine.

278 Display messagesOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Traffic Sign Assist inoperative

Traffic Sign Assist is malfunctioning.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Traffic Sign Assist currently unavaila‐ble See Owner's Man‐ual

Traffic Sign Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Possiblecauses:RThe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision.RVisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display messagegoes out and Traffic Sign Assist is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic

conditions.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 189).X Clean the windscreen.

ëOff

The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skiddingA warning tone also sounds.X Activate the HOLD function again later (Y page 221).

The HOLD function is deactivated. When the brake pedal is firmlydepressed, an activation condition is not fulfilled.A warning tone also sounds.X Check the activation conditions for the HOLD function

(Y page 221).

Display messages 279

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Tyres

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Please correct tyre pressure

The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres, or the tyrepressure difference between the wheels is too great.X Check the tyre pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 370).X If necessary, correct the tyre pressure.X Restart the tyre pressure monitor (Y page 372).

Check tyre(s) An additional warning tone sounds.The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped significantly. Thedisplay shows the wheel position.

G WARNINGTyre pressures which are too low, harbour the following hazards:RThe tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed

increase.RThe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly

impair tyre traction.RThe handling as well as steering and braking characteristics may be

severely affected.There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking

manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions while doing so.X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 189).X Check the tyres and, if necessary, change the wheel (Y page 376).X Check the tyre pressure (Y page 370).X If necessary, correct the tyre pressure.

Warning tyre defect The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly. Thedisplay shows the wheel position.

G WARNINGIf you drive with a flat tyre, there is a risk of the following hazards:RA flat tyre affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.RYou could then lose control of the vehicle.RContinued driving with a flat tyre will cause excessive heat build-up

and possibly a fire.There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking

manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions while doing so.X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 189).X Check the tyres and, if necessary, change the wheel (Y page 376).

Tyre press. monitor currently unavaila‐ble

Due to a source of radio interference, no signals can be received fromthe wheel sensors. The tyre pressure monitor is temporarily malfunc-tioning.The tyre pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the causehas been rectified.

280 Display messagesOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Wheel sensor(s) missing

There is no signal from the tyre pressure sensor of one or severalwheels. The pressure of the affected tyre is not shown in the display.X Have the faulty tyre pressure sensor replaced at a qualified spe-

cialist workshop.

Tyre press. monitor inoperative No wheel sensors

The wheels fitted do not have suitable tyre pressure sensors. The tyrepressure monitor is deactivated.X Fit wheels with suitable tyre pressure sensors.

The tyre pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving fora few minutes.

Tyre press. monitor inoperative

The tyre pressure monitor is malfunctioning.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Vehicle

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

To start engine, shift to either P or N

You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in posi-tion R or D.X Shift the transmission to position P or N.

Auxiliary battery malfunction

The auxiliary battery for the transmission is no longer being charged.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Apply brake to dese‐lect Park (P) posi‐tion

You have attempted to shift the transmission to position D, R or Nwithout depressing the brake pedal.X Depress the brake pedal.

Risk of vehicle rolling Transmis‐sion not in P

A warning tone also sounds. The driver's door is open and the trans-mission is in position R, N or D.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 189).

Without changing gear, consult work‐shop

A warning tone also sounds. You cannot change the transmissionposition due to a malfunction.If transmission position D is selected:X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the trans-

mission from position D.

If transmission position R, N or P is selected:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Only select Park (P) when vehicle is stationary

The vehicle is still moving.X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic

conditions.X Shift the transmission to position P.

Display messages 281

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Clutch overheated Avoid pulling away Engage/disengage clutch quickly if req.

A warning tone also sounds. The clutch is under considerable load andthe permitted operating temperature has been exceeded.Avoid frequent pulling away and driving at walking pace over longerdistances.X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic

conditions.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 189).X Start the engine.

The clutch is cooled more quickly with the engine running.orX If possible, continue driving at a steady speed.X Remove your foot from the clutch pedal and do not allow the clutch

to slip.The clutch may also cool down during the journey.

It may take several minutes for it to cool down. When the clutch hascooled down, the display message disappears and the clutch is fullyoperational again.

Ò The tailgate is open.X Close the tailgate.

Ó A warning tone also sounds. The bonnet is open.

G WARNINGThe open bonnet may then block your view when the vehicle is inmotion.There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic

conditions.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 189).X Close the bonnet.

C An additional warning tone sounds while the vehicle is in motion. Thedisplay shows the open door(s).X Close all the doors.

&inoperative Battery low

The on-board voltage is too low. The hot-water auxiliary heater hasswitched itself off or cannot be switched on.X Drive for a considerable distance.

The battery charges. The hot-water auxiliary heater is operationalagain as soon as the on-board electrical system voltage is sufficient.

&inoperative Refuel vehicle

There is too little fuel in the fuel tank. The hot-water auxiliary heatercannot be switched on.X Refuel at the nearest filling station.

282 Display messagesOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

&inoperative See Own‐er's Man.

The hot-water auxiliary heater is malfunctioning.X When the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled

down, make up to four attempts to switch on the hot-water auxiliaryheater, waiting several minutes between each attempt(Y page 158).

X If the hot-water auxiliary heater does not switch on, consult a quali-fied specialist workshop.

ÐPower steering mal‐function See Own‐er's Manual

A warning tone also sounds. The steering power assistance could bemalfunctioning. You may need to steer more forcefully.X Carefully continue to a qualified specialist workshop and have the

steering checked immediately.

Telephone No service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/receiverrange.

¥Top up washer fluid

The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped belowthe minimum.X Top up the washer fluid (Y page 342).

Key

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

ÂKey does not belong to vehicle

You have put the wrong key in the ignition lock.X Use the correct key.

ÂRemove key

The key is in the ignition lock.X Remove the key.

ÂReplace key

The key needs to be replaced.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ÂChange key batteries

The key battery is discharged.X Change the battery (Y page 78).

Warning and indicator lamps on the instrument cluster

General notesWhen switching on the ignition, some systems carry out a self-test. Some indicator and warninglamps may temporarily turn on or start to flash. This is not an indication of any problem. Only whenthese indicator and warning lights turn on or start flashing after the engine has started or during thejourney has a malfunction occurred.

Warning and indicator lamps on the instrument cluster 283

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Seat belt

Warning/indicator lamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences and M Solutions

ü N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up or flashes. Awarning tone may also sound.Only for certain countries: the red seat belt warning lamp lights up for a maximumof 6 seconds after the ignition is switched on.The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and co-driver to fasten their seatbelts.X Fasten the seat belt (Y page 48).

ü N The red seat belt warning lamp lights up after the engine starts, as soon as thedriver's or the co-driver's door is closed.The driver or co-driver has not fastened their seat belt.X Fasten the seat belt (Y page 48).

The warning lamp goes out.On vehicles with the co-driver's automatic front airbag deactivation system, thereare objects on the co-driver's seat.X Remove the objects from the co-driver’s seat and store them in a safe place.

The warning lamp goes out.

ü N The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent audible warningsounds.The driver or co-driver has not fastened their seat belt. At the same time, you aredriving faster than 25 km/h or have briefly driven faster than 25 km/h.X Fasten the seat belt (Y page 48).

The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent audible warning ceases.On vehicles with the co-driver's automatic front airbag deactivation system, thereare objects on the co-driver's seat. At the same time, you are driving faster than25 km/h or have briefly driven faster than 25 km/h.X Remove the objects from the co-driver’s seat and store them in a safe place.

The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.

284 Warning and indicator lamps on the instrument clusterOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Safety systems

Warning/indicator lamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences and M Solutions

J N The red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.EBD is unavailable due to a malfunction. ABS, BAS, hill start assist and ESP® as wellas its driving safety systems, for example, are therefore also unavailable.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated and other driving systems could be automati-cally deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listedabove. The wheels could therefore lock prematurely if you brake hard, for example.This greatly impairs steerability and braking. The braking distance can increase inemergency braking situations.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® will not stabilise the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and accidents.X Switch the engine off, wait briefly and start the engine again.X Check if the display message has disappeared and ESP® is operational.X If the display message continues to be displayed:RDrive on with care.RVisit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

J N The red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A warningtone also sounds.

G WARNINGThe brake booster is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affec-ted.There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do

not drive on.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 189).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Observe the display messages.

Warning and indicator lamps on the instrument cluster 285

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Warning/indicator lamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences and M Solutions

J N The red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A warningtone also sounds.There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

G WARNINGBraking performance can be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do

not drive on.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 189).X Do not top up the brake fluid. Topping up does not rectify the fault.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Observe the display messages.

! N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.ABS has been deactivated due to a malfunction. BAS, hill start assist and ESP® aswell as its driving safety systems, for example, are therefore also deactivated.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated and other driving systems could be automati-cally deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listedabove. The wheels could therefore lock prematurely if you brake hard, for example.This greatly impairs steerability and braking. The braking distance can increase inemergency braking situations.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® will not stabilise the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and accidents.X Switch the engine off, wait briefly and start the engine again.X Check if the display message has disappeared and ESP® is operational.X If the display message continues to be displayed:RDrive on with care.RVisit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems, suchas the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will be restricted orunavailable.

286 Warning and indicator lamps on the instrument clusterOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Warning/indicator lamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences and M Solutions

÷ N The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.ESP® or traction control is intervening because there is a risk of skidding or at leastone wheel has started to spin.Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactivated.X When pulling away, depress the accelerator pedal only as far as necessary.X Ease off the accelerator pedal while driving.X Adapt your driving style to suit the weather and road conditions.X Do not deactivate ESP®.

In rare cases, it may be best to deactivate ESP® (Y page 70).

÷ N The yellow ESP® warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.ESP®, BAS and hill start assist are unavailable due to a malfunction.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated and other driving systems could be automati-cally deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listedabove.The braking distance can thus increase in emergency braking situations.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® will not stabilise the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and accidents.X Observe the display messages.X Drive on with care.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

å N The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running or the ECOstart/stop function is activated.ESP® is deactivated.

G WARNINGIf ESP® is deactivated, vehicle stabilisation assistance is significantly reduced.There is an increased risk of skidding and accidents.X Reactivate ESP®.

In rare cases, it may be best to deactivate ESP® (Y page 70).X Adapt your driving style to suit the weather and road conditions.

If ESP® cannot be activated:X Drive on with care.X Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps on the instrument cluster 287

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Warning/indicator lamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences and M Solutions

! N The red indicator lamp for the parking brake flashes or is lit and/or the yellowwarning lamp for the parking brake is lit.The parking brake is malfunctioning or the display instructs the driver to releasethe parking brake.If only the red parking brake indicator lamp is lit, the parking brake has beenapplied.X Observe the display messages (Y page 266).

6 N The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.The restraint system is faulty.

G WARNINGThe airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered unintentionally or, in theevent of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Observe the display messages.X Drive on with care.X Have the restraint system and its components checked immediately at a quali-

fied specialist workshop.Further information on the restraint system and its components can be foundunder "Occupant safety" (Y page 45).

288 Warning and indicator lamps on the instrument clusterOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Engine

Warning/indicator lamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences and M Solutions

; N The yellow engine diagnostics warning lamp lights up while the engine is run-ning.There may be a fault, for example:Rin the engine managementRin the fuel injection systemRin the exhaust systemRin the ignition system (for vehicles with petrol engines)Rin the fuel systemThe emission limit values may be exceeded as a result and the engine may berunning in emergency mode.X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.

æ N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp is on while the engine is running.The fuel level has dropped to the reserve range.Operation of the auxiliary heating is deactivated if the fuel level drops into thereserve range.X Refuel at the nearest filling station.

? N The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running and thecoolant temperature gauge is at the start of the scale.The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge is faulty.The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a risk of enginedamage if the coolant temperature is too high.X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions,

and switch off the engine. Do not drive on.X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 189).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps on the instrument cluster 289

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Warning/indicator lamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences and M Solutions

? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running.The coolant level is too low.If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked orthe electric engine radiator fan may be malfunctioning.The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently.X Observe the display messages.X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions,

and switch off the engine.X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 189).X Exit the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has

cooled down.X Check the coolant level and top up the coolant, observing the warning notes

(Y page 340).X If you have to top up the coolant more frequently, have the engine cooling sys-

tem checked.X Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed – by frozen slush,

for example.X Monitor the coolant temperature gauge in the instrument cluster.X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is below 120 †. The

engine could otherwise be damaged.X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.

Avoid heavy loads on the engine, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain, and stop-start traffic.

? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. A warningtone also sounds.The coolant temperature has exceeded 120 †. The airflow to the engine radiatormay be blocked or the coolant level may be too low.

G WARNINGThe engine is not being cooled adequately and could become damaged.Never drive with an overheated engine. Otherwise, fluids which may have leakedinto the engine compartment could catch fire.In addition, steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns, which canoccur just by opening the bonnet.There is a risk of injury.X Observe the display messages.X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions,

and switch off the engine.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 189).X Exit the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has

cooled down.X Check the coolant level and top up the coolant, observing the warning notes

(Y page 340).X If you have to top up the coolant more frequently, have the engine cooling sys-

tem checked.

290 Warning and indicator lamps on the instrument clusterOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Warning/indicator lamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences and M Solutions

X Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed – by frozen slush,for example.

X Monitor the coolant temperature gauge in the instrument cluster.X If the coolant temperature is below 120 †, you can continue driving to the

nearest qualified specialist workshop.Avoid heavy loads on the engine, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain, and stop-start traffic.

Driving systems

Warning/indicator lamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences and M Solutions

· N The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion.The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed selected.X Increase the distance.

· N The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. Anadditional warning tone sounds.You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your line of travel at toohigh a speed.X Be prepared to brake immediately.X Pay particular attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or take

evasive action.Further information about the distance warning function can be found under"COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST" (Y page 211).

Warning and indicator lamps on the instrument cluster 291

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Tyres

Warning/indicator lamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences and M Solutions

h N The yellow tyre pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) islit.The tyre pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of thetyres.

G WARNINGTyre pressures that are too low present the following hazards:RThe tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.RThe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre

traction.RThe handling as well as steering and braking characteristics may be severely

impaired.There is a risk of an accident.

X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres.Pay attention to the traffic conditions while doing so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 189).X Observe the display messages.X Check the tyres and, if necessary, change the wheel (Y page 376).X Check the tyre pressure (Y page 370).X If necessary, correct the tyre pressure.

h N The yellow tyre pressure monitor (pressure loss/malfunction) warning lampflashes for approx. one minute and then remains lit.The tyre pressure monitor is malfunctioning.

G WARNINGThe system is possibly unable to detect or register low tyre pressure as intended.There is a risk of an accident.X Observe the display messages.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Vehicle

Warning/indicator lamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Ð N The red power steering warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A warningtone also sounds.The steering power assistance could be malfunctioning. You may need to steermore forcefully.X Carefully continue to a qualified specialist workshop and have the steering

checked immediately.

292 Warning and indicator lamps on the instrument clusterOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Introduction

Important safety notes

G WARNINGOperating the integrated information systemsand communications equipment in the vehiclewhile driving will distract you from traffic con-ditions. You could then lose control of thevehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate these devices if road traffic con-ditions permit. If you are unsure about thesurrounding conditions, pull over to a safelocation and make entries only while the vehi-cle is stationary.

Observe the legal requirements for the countryyou are in.

G WARNINGOperating mobile information systems andcommunications equipment while driving willdistract you from traffic conditions. You couldthen lose control of the vehicle. There is a riskof an accident.Only operate these devices when the vehicleis stationary.

G WARNINGHandling discs while driving will distract youfrom traffic conditions. You could then losecontrol of the vehicle. There is a risk of anaccident.Handle discs only when the vehicle is station-ary.

Bear in mind that at a speed of only 50 km/hyour vehicle is covering a distance of nearly14 m per second.

G WARNINGSD cards are small parts. They can be swal-lowed and cause choking. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Keep the SD card out of the reach of children.If a SD card is swallowed, seek medical atten-tion immediately.

G WARNINGThe CD/DVD drive is a class 1 laser product.If you open the housing of the CD/DVD drive,invisible laser beams may be released. Theselaser beams may damage your retina. There isa risk of injury.Do not open the housing. Always have main-tenance work and repairs carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGModifications to electronic components, theirsoftware as well as wiring could affect theirfunction and/or the operation of other net-worked components. This could in particularalso be the case for systems relevant tosafety. They might not function properly any-more and/or jeopardise the operationalsafety of the vehicle. There is an increasedrisk of an accident and injury.Do not attempt to modify the wiring as well aselectronic components or their software.Always have work on electrical and electroniccomponents carried out at a qualified special-ist workshop.

When using the device please follow:Rthe safety notes in these operating instruc-

tionsRtraffic laws and regulationsRlaws pertaining to motor vehicles and safety

standards

General notesThese brief instructions only describe the basicoperation of your multimedia system.All further information on the individual func-tions can be found on the Internet atwww.mercedes-benz.de/betriebsanleitung-transporter.All further information on the individual func-tions can be found in the Digital OperatingInstructions or on the Internet atwww.mercedes-benz.de/betriebsanleitungen.

Introduction 293

Mul

timed

ia s

yste

ms

Z

The brief instructions include the followingdevice variants:RAudio 20RCOMAND OnlineUnless otherwise specified, the descriptions inthese brief instructions apply to both device var-iants.

Function restrictionsFor safety reasons, some functions are restric-ted or unavailable while the vehicle is in motion.You will notice this, for example, because:Ryou will not be able to select certain menu

itemsRyou will see a message to this effect

Overview

Components

: Display; COMAND Online: DVD changer or single DVD drive, Audio 20: single CD drive= Touchpad (for the multimedia system with touchpad)? ControllerFor multimedia system with touchpad: with the controller and touchpad, you have two ways ofentering characters and selecting functions.

Function overviewThe multimedia system has the following func-tions:RRadio modeRMedia mode with media searchRSound systemsRNavigation system

COMAND Online: navigation using hard driveAudio 20: navigation using SD memory cardRCommunication functions

RVehicle functions with system settingsRFavourites functions

Display

General notes! Avoid any direct contact with the display

surface. Pressure on the display surface mayresult in impairments to the display, whichcould be irreversible.

294 OverviewM

ultim

edia

sys

tem

s

Wearing polarised sunglasses may impair yourability to read the display.The display has an automatic temperature-con-trolled switch-off feature. The brightness isautomatically reduced if the temperature is toohigh. The display may temporarily switch offcompletely.

Display overview

: Status bar with traffic announcements, canshow other displays

; Cover display (if available)

= Main display field? Climate control status display

Cleaning instructions! Do not touch the display. The display has a

very sensitive high-gloss surface; there is arisk of scratching. If you have to clean thescreen, however, use a mild cleaning agentand a soft, lint-free cloth.

The display must be switched off and havecooled down before you start cleaning. Cleanthe display screen, when necessary, with a com-mercially available microfibre cloth and cleaningagent for TFT/LCD displays. Do not apply pres-sure to the display surface when cleaning it, asthis could cause irreversible damage. Then, drythe surface with a dry microfibre cloth.Avoid using alcoholic thinners, petrol or abra-sive cleaning agents. These could damage thedisplay surface.

Buttons and controller

Button overview

: Telephone button; Vehicle and system settings button= To adjust the volume or mute? To switch the multimedia system on/offA Favourites button

Overview 295

Mul

timed

ia s

yste

ms

Z

B Back buttonC Navigation buttonD Radio buttonE Media button

Back buttonX To exit the menu: briefly press the %

button.The multimedia system changes to the nexthigher menu level in the current operatingmode.

X To call up the basic display: press the %button for longer than two seconds.The multimedia system changes to the basicdisplay of the current operating mode.

ControllerUsing the controller you can:Rselect menu items on the displayRentering charactersRselect a destination on the mapRsave entriesUsing the controller you can:Rturn 3Rslide left or right 1Rslide forwards or backwards 4Rslide diagonally 2Rbriefly press or hold 7

Touchpad

Touchpad overview! Do not use any sharp objects on the touch-

pad. This could damage the touchpad.

: Touch-sensitive surface; Favourites button

= Quick access for audio? Back button

Switching the touchpad on/offX Press the Ø button.

The vehicle menu appears.X Select System settings by sliding 6,

turning and pressing the controller.A menu appears.

X Select Touchpad by turning and pressing thecontroller.

X Select Activate touchpad.The touchpad is switched on O or off ª.

Operating the touchpad

Selecting a menu item

X Touch the touch-sensitive surface with onefinger.

X Swipe up, down, to the left or to the right.The selection in the display moves accordingto the direction of the movements.

This allows you to navigate through lists ormenus.

296 TouchpadM

ultim

edia

sys

tem

s

Confirming a selection

Do not press too firmly with your fingers on thetouchpad. This can result in a malfunction.X Press the touch-sensitive surface with one

finger until the point of resistance is reached.A menu, an option or an application is started.

Calling up quick access for audio

X With two fingers, touch the lower section ofthe touch-sensitive surface.

X Swipe upwards.Quick access appears.

Further information on quick access for audio(Y page 299).

Hiding quick access for audio

X Touch the touch-sensitive surface with twofingers.

X Swipe downwards.Quick access is hidden.

Operating the control for vehicle orsound settings

X Place two fingers a short distance apart onthe touch-sensitive surface.

X Turn both fingers clockwise.The control setting is increased.

orX Turn both fingers anti-clockwise.

The control setting is decreased.

Moving the map

X Press the touch-sensitive surface with onefinger until the point of resistance is reached.The crosshair is displayed.

Touchpad 297

Mul

timed

ia s

yste

ms

Z

X Touch the touch-sensitive surface with onefinger again.

X Swipe in a direction of your choosing.The maps move in the corresponding direc-tion.

Increasing the map scale

X Place two fingers a short distance apart onthe touch-sensitive surface.

X Slide your fingers apart.The map scale is increased.

Decreasing the map scale

X Place two fingers a larger distance apart onthe touch-sensitive surface.

X Slide your fingers together.The map scale is decreased.

Handwriting recognition

Handwriting recognition overviewYou can use handwriting recognition in everyinput line for text, numbers or characters.

: Active entry line; To enter a space (Y page 299)= Illustration of the touch-sensitive surface? To delete characters (Y page 299)

Switching the read-aloud function ofhandwriting recognition on/offYou can switch the handwriting recognitionread-aloud function on and off.X Press the Ø button.

The vehicle menu appears.X Select System settings by sliding 6,

turning and pressing the controller.A menu appears.

X Select Touchpad by turning and pressing thecontroller.

X Select Read out handwriting recogni‐tion.The read-aloud function is switched on O oroff ª.

Entering charactersRequirement: an input line for text, numbers orcharacters has been selected.

298 TouchpadM

ultim

edia

sys

tem

s

X Draw the desired character on the touch-sen-sitive surface with one finger.The recognised character is entered in theinput line. The next character can be drawn onthe touch-sensitive surface.

If the character that you have entered can beinterpreted in different ways, these options aredisplayed.Further information on character suggestion(Y page 299).

Selecting a character suggestionX Turn the controller.

The selected character is entered instead ofthe automatically recognised character.Character entry can be continued.

Entering a spaceRequirement: an input line for text, numbers orcharacters has been selected.X Touch the touch-sensitive surface with a fin-

ger and swipe it to the right.A space is entered in the input line.

Deleting charactersRequirement: an input line for text, numbers orcharacters has been selected.X Touch the touch-sensitive surface with a fin-

ger and swipe it to the left.The last character entered is deleted.

Switching the entry lineX Press the touchpad.

A menu appears.X To select p: swipe to the left or right and

press.X To select the desired input line: swipe up or

down and press.The selected input line is active and characterentry can be continued.

Moving the cursor within the input lineX Press the touchpad.

A menu appears.X To select p: swipe to the left or right and

press.X To move the cursor: swipe to the left or right.

Searching in listsSearching in the telephone book is used as anexample.You determine the first letter of the contact youare looking for with the first character you enter.X Draw the letter on the touchpad surface.

The first contact with the selected first char-acter is highlighted in the phone book.Further information on handwriting recogni-tion on the touchpad (Y page 298).

X Draw additional letters on the touchpad sur-face one after another.

X To end the search and switch to the tele-phone book: press the touchpad.

Switching between the controller andtouchpad as input deviceRequirement: an input line for text, numbers orcharacters has been selected.X To switch from the controller to handwrit-

ing recognition on the touchpad: press thetouchpad with one finger.Handwriting recognition on the touchpad isactive.

X To switch from the touchpad to character entry on the controller: press the controller.Character entry via the controller is active.

Changing station/music track

Depending on the active audio source, you canselect the next station or music track with thisfunction.

Touchpad 299

Mul

timed

ia s

yste

ms

Z

X Call up quick access (Y page 297).The current audio source appears.

X To select the previous or next station/music track: swipe to the left or right.The selected station or music track is playedback.

Favourites

Favourites overview

: To add new favourites; To rename selected favourites= To move selected favourites? To delete selected favouritesYou can manage a total of 20 favourites.

Displaying and calling up favouritesX Press the favourites button on the controller.

The favourites appear.X To select a favourite: turn the controller.X To call up a favourite: press the controller.

Adding favourites

Adding specified favouritesX Press the favourites button on the controller.

The favourites appear.X Slide 6 the controller.

The menu bar appears.X Select Reassign by turning and pressing the

controller.The categories of the available favouritesappear.

X Select the desired category.The corresponding favourites appear.

X Select the desired favourites.X Store the favourites in the desired order by

turning and pressing the controller.The favourite is added.If a favourite is stored above another favour-ite, the lower favourite is deleted.

Adding own favouritesYou can set telephone numbers from the tele-phone book, radio stations or destinations asfavourites.You can set telephone numbers from the tele-phone book or radio stations as favourites.A number from the telephone book serves as anexample.X Call up the telephone book.X Search for a contact and display the tele-

phone number.X To set the telephone number as a favour-

ite: press and hold the favourite button on thecontroller until the favourites are displayed.

X To add a favourite at the desired position:turn and press the controller.The favourite is added.If a favourite is stored above another favour-ite, the lower favourite is deleted.

Deleting favouritesX Press the favourites button on the controller.

The favourites appear.X Select the desired favourites by turning the

controller.X Slide 6 the controller.

The menu bar appears.X Select Delete by turning and pressing the

controller.X Select Yes.

The favourite is deleted.orX Select No.

The process is cancelled.

300 FavouritesM

ultim

edia

sys

tem

s

Calling up vehicle settings

X Press the Ø button.The Vehicle menu appears.

X Select Vehicle settings by turning andpressing the controller.The Vehicle settings menu appears.

X Select the desired vehicle setting.The main area with the setting element isactive.

X To select another vehicle setting: activatethe vehicle setting selection menu by sliding5 the controller.

X To exit the vehicle settings: select & bysliding 6 and pressing the controller.

Navigation

Important safety notes

G WARNINGOperating the integrated information systemsand communications equipment in the vehiclewhile driving will distract you from traffic con-ditions. You could then lose control of thevehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate these devices if road traffic con-ditions permit. If you are unsure about thesurrounding conditions, pull over to a safelocation and make entries only while the vehi-cle is stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements for thecountry in which you are currently driving whenoperating the system.For safety reasons, only enter a new destinationwhen the vehicle is stationary. You may other-wise be distracted from the traffic conditions,cause an accident and injure yourself and oth-ers.The multimedia system calculates the route tothe destination without taking the following intoaccount, for example:Rtraffic lightsRstop and give way signsRparking or stopping restrictionsRroad narrowingRother road and traffic rules and regulations

The multimedia system may give incorrect nav-igation commands if the actual street/trafficsituation does not correspond with the digitalmap's data. Digital maps neither cover all areasnor all routes in an area. For example, a routemay have been diverted or the direction of a one-way street may have changed.For this reason, you must always observe roadand traffic rules and regulations during yourjourney. Road and traffic rules and regulationsalways have priority over the system's drivingrecommendations.

General notesAudio 20 is equipped with Garmin® MAP PILOT.The following information relating to navigationapplies to COMAND Online. Information on nav-igation with Garmin® MAP PILOT can be found inthe manufacturer's operating instructions.Correct functioning of the navigation systemdepends, amongst other aspects, on GPS recep-tion. In certain situations, GPS reception may beimpaired, there may be interference or theremay be no reception at all, e.g. in tunnels ormulti-storey car parks.At vehicle speeds of above 5 km/h, data entriesare restricted.

Switching on navigation modeX Press the ß button.

The map displays the current vehicle position.

Showing or hiding the menuX To display the menu: slide 6 the control-

ler when the map appears.X To hide the menu: press the % button.

Destination entry

Destination entry optionsDestination entry may be blocked while driving,depending on the country specifications.

Address entry

Keyword search using fragments of words

Navigation 301

Mul

timed

ia s

yste

ms

Z

From the list of last destinations (up to 50destinations)

Selecting a contact from the address book(navigable contact L)

Selecting a POI (e. g. filling station, restaurant)for different positions

On the map

Entering way points

From Mercedes-Benz AppsRequirement: a mobile phone with a datapackage is connected to the multimedia sys-tem.

Entering geo-coordinates

Example: address entryX Press the ß button.X Show the menu by sliding 6 the controller.X Select Destination by turning and pressing

the controller.X Select Address entry.X Enter the address, e.g. as a town, street and

house number.X To calculate the route: confirm Start by

pressing the controller.The route is calculated with the current routetype.

X To select the route type: show the menu(Y page 301).

X Select Options by turning and pressing thecontroller.

X Select Route settings.X Select a route type.

The route type is used for the next route cal-culation.If Dynamic route or Eco route has beenselected, traffic reports on the route are takeninto account.

i You can also map the route to the destina-tion yourself by entering up to four waypoints.

Route guidance

General notesThe multimedia system guides you to your des-tination by means of navigation commands inthe form of audible navigation announcementsand route guidance displays.Navigation messages should guide you duringthe journey without distracting you from trafficconditions or driving. Always listen to the navi-gation announcements rather than using theroute guidance display for orientation.The multimedia system may issue incorrect nav-igation commands if the actual street/trafficsituation does not correspond to the digitalmap's data. Digital maps neither cover all areasnor all routes in an area. For example, a routemay have been diverted or the direction of a one-way street may have changed.For this reason, you must always observe roadand traffic rules and regulations during yourjourney. Road and traffic rules and regulationsalways have priority over the system's drivingrecommendations.

Change of direction and lane recom-mendations

Before and during a change of direction, the mapis shown on the left side of the display and a viewof the junction or a 3D image on the right. Lanerecommendations (white directional arrows)may be shown at the bottom of the display formultilane roads.

302 NavigationM

ultim

edia

sys

tem

s

Navigation announcementsX To set the volume: turn the thumbwheel dur-

ing a navigation announcement.X To switch navigation announcements on:

press the thumbwheel during the navigationannouncement.

X To switch navigation announcements on:switch the multimedia system off and onagain.

Showing route informationX Show the menu by sliding 6 the controller.X Select Route by turning and pressing the con-

troller.X To display destination information: selectDestination information.

X To display the route list: select Route list.

X To display the current position: selectWhere am I?.

Cancelling or continuing route guidanceX Press the controller.X Select Destination by turning and pressing

the controller.X Select Cancel current route guidance orContinue route guidance.

Dynamic route guidanceYou can receive traffic reports from Live TrafficInformation (subscription service) or FM RDS-TMC and take them into consideration fordynamic route guidance. The simultaneous useof both services is not possible.Traffic reports can be displayed on the route assymbols on the map or as text. You can havetraffic reports read out.If route type Dynamic route or Eco route isset as the route type, traffic reports are takeninto account for route guidance.X Press the Ø button.X Show the menu (Y page 301).X Select Traffic by turning and pressing the

controller.

Map functions

Setting the map scaleRequirement: the map is in full screen mode, themenu is hidden (Y page 301).X Turn the controller until the desired scale is

set.

Moving the mapRequirement: the map is in full screen mode, themenu is hidden (Y page 301).X Slide 1, 4 or 2 the controller.

The crosshair is displayed. The map moves inthe corresponding direction under the cross-hair.

i Pressing the controller selects a destinationon the map.

Selecting map orientationX Show the menu (Y page 301).X Select Options by turning and pressing the

controller.X Select Map orientation.

The # dot indicates the current setting.X Select map orientation.

Telephone

Connecting and disconnecting amobile phone

RequirementsFor telephony via the Bluetooth® interface, yourequire a Bluetooth®-capable mobile phone. Themobile phone must support Hands-Free Profile1.0 or above.On the multimedia systemX Press the Ø button.

The vehicle menu appears.X Select System settings by sliding 6,

turning and pressing the controller.A menu appears.

X Select Activate Bluetooth by turning andpressing the controller.This activates O or deactivates ª Blue-tooth®.

Telephone 303

Mul

timed

ia s

yste

ms

Z

On the mobile phoneX Switch on the mobile phone and enter the PIN

when prompted to do so (see the manufac-turer's operating instructions).

X Activate Bluetooth® and, if necessary, Blue-tooth® visibility for other devices (see themanufacturer's operating instructions).This visibility is for restricted periods of timeon some mobile phones (see the manufactur-er's operating instructions).

X Set the Bluetooth® device name for themobile phone if necessary.

The Bluetooth® device names for all of one man-ufacturer's products might be identical. Tomake it possible to clearly identify your mobilephone, change the device name (see the man-ufacturer's operating instructions).The battery of the mobile phone should alwaysbe kept sufficiently charged in order to preventmalfunctions.

i Some displays (e.g. the signal strength)depend on the supported version of theHands-Free Profile.

Specified procedure and general infor-mation

Searching for and authorising (connect-ing) a mobile phoneBefore using your mobile phone with the multi-media system for the first time, you will need tosearch for the phone (Y page 304) and thenauthorise it (Y page 305). Depending on themobile phone, authorisation takes place bymeans of Secure Simple Pairing or by entering apasskey. The multimedia system automaticallymakes the procedure that is relevant for yourmobile phone available. You can recogniseSecure Simple Pairing by the fact that a code isdisplayed on the mobile phone and on the mul-timedia system. You can recognise the passkeysystem by the fact that you have to enter a codeon the mobile phone and on the multimedia sys-tem. The mobile phone is always connectedautomatically after authorisation.If the multimedia system does not detect yourmobile phone, this may be due to particularsecurity settings on your mobile phone. You canalso begin the search procedure and the author-isation from the mobile phone (Y page 305).

Device-specific information on authorisationand connection of Bluetooth®-capable mobilephones can be obtained online by visitinghttp://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect.You can authorise up to 15 mobile phones. Afterauthorisation, the connection with the twophones that were last used functions automati-cally at all times. Only one mobile phone can beconnected at any one time.If the mobile phone supports the PBAP (PhoneBook Access Profile) and MAP (MessageAccess Profile) Bluetooth® profiles, the follow-ing information will be transmitted after youconnect:Rphone bookRcall listsRmessages

De-authorising a mobile phone (discon-necting)The connection is terminated automatically ifyou leave the reception range of the multimediasystem or deactivate Bluetooth® on your mobilephone.If you no longer want the Bluetooth® connectionto be automatically established, you must de-authorise (disconnect) the mobile phone(Y page 306).

Searching for a mobile phoneX Press the % button.X Slide 6 the controller to switch to the menu

bar.X Select Connect device by turning and press-

ing the controller.The device list appears.

X Select Search for phones.A message appears informing you that Blue-tooth® must be activated on the mobile phoneand must be made visible to other devices.

X Select Start search by pressing the con-troller.The available mobile phones appear in thedevice list.

The duration of the search depends on the num-ber of Bluetooth® telephones within range andtheir characteristics.If a new phone is found, it appears in the devicelist with the Ï symbol. You can authorise

304 TelephoneM

ultim

edia

sys

tem

s

(connect) the mobile phone found(Y page 305).If the device list is already full, you will berequested to de-authorise a mobile phone(Y page 306).When you call up the device list again, de-authorised devices will be removed from the list.To update the device list, start the search again.The symbols in the device list have the followingmeanings:Ï New mobile phone found, not yet author-

ised.Ñ Mobile phone is authorised, but is not

connected.# Mobile phone is authorised and connec-

ted.

i Mobile phones that are connected to theoptionally available telephone module withBluetooth® (SAP profile) are displayed sepa-rately in the device list. These are found belowthe MB SAP module phonesentry.

Authorising a mobile phone (connect-ing)

Authorising via Secure Simple PairingIf the multimedia system has found your mobilephone, you can authorise (connect) it.X Select your mobile phone in the device list by

turning and pressing the controller.A code is displayed in the multimedia systemand on the mobile phone.

The code is the sameX Multimedia system: select Yes.X Mobile phone: confirm the code. Depending

on the mobile phone used, you may have toconfirm the connection to the multimedia sys-tem and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth®

profiles. The display of the confirmation querycan be delayed by up to two minutes. If nec-essary, you can save the confirmation on themobile phone (see the manufacturer's oper-ating instructions).The mobile phone is now authorised and con-nected to the multimedia system. You cannow phone using the hands-free system.

The code is differentX Multimedia system: select No.

The process is cancelled. Repeat the author-isation process.

Authorising by entering a passkey (pass-code)If the multimedia system has found your mobilephone, you can authorise (connect) it.X Select the Bluetooth® name of the desired

mobile phone in the device list by turning andpressing the controller.The input menu for the passkey appears.The passkey is a one to sixteen-digit numberwhich you can set yourself.

X Multimedia system: enter the passkey usingthe character bar.

X After entering all digits, press ¬.X Mobile phone: enter the same passkey and

confirm. Depending on the mobile phoneused, you may have to confirm the connectionto the multimedia system and for the PBAPand MAP Bluetooth® profiles. The display ofthe confirmation query can be delayed by upto two minutes. If necessary, you can save theconfirmation on the mobile phone (see themanufacturer's operating instructions).The mobile phone is now authorised and con-nected to the multimedia system. You cannow phone using the hands-free system.

If the Authorisation failed messageappears, you may have entered a different pass-key or exceeded the prescribed time limit.Repeat the procedure.

i Some mobile phones require the input of afour-digit passkey or longer.

i If you wish to re-authorise the mobile phoneafter de-authorising it, you can chooseanother passkey for it.

Establishing a connection from themobile phoneX Multimedia system: press the % button.X Slide 6 the controller to switch to the menu

bar.X Select Connect device by turning and press-

ing the controller.The device list appears.

Telephone 305

Mul

timed

ia s

yste

ms

Z

X Select Search via telephone.A message appears informing you that thesearch on the mobile phone can be started.

X Mobile phone: start the search for a Blue-tooth® device (see the manufacturer's oper-ating instructions).The multimedia system appears under thename "MB Bluetooth" in the mobile phone'sdevice list.

X Select "MB Bluetooth".A prompt appears in the multimedia system'sdisplay asking if the mobile phone should beauthorised.

X Multimedia system: select Yes.If No is selected, the process is cancelled.If your mobile phone supports Secure SimplePairing, a code now appears on both devices.

The code is the sameX Multimedia system: select Yes.X Mobile phone: confirm the code. Depending

on the mobile phone used, you may have toconfirm the connection to the multimedia sys-tem and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth®

profiles. The display of the confirmation querycan be delayed by up to two minutes. If nec-essary, you can save the confirmation on themobile phone (see the manufacturer's oper-ating instructions).The mobile phone is now authorised and con-nected to the multimedia system. You cannow phone using the hands-free system.

The code is differentX Multimedia system: select No.

The process is cancelled. Repeat the proce-dure.

If your mobile phone does not support SecureSimple Pairing, an input menu for the passkeyappears. The passkey is a one to sixteen-digitnumber which you can set yourself. Enter thesame passkey into both the multimedia systemand the mobile phone and confirm. Dependingon the mobile phone used, you may have to con-firm the connection to the multimedia systemand for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth® profiles.

Reconnecting automaticallyThe multimedia system always searches for thelast connected mobile phone.If no connection can be made to the mostrecently connected mobile phone, the system

searches for the mobile phone which was con-nected before that one.

Switching between mobile phonesIf you have authorised more than one mobilephone, you can switch between the individualphones.X Press the % button.X Show the menu bar by sliding 6 the con-

troller.X Select Connect device by turning and press-

ing the controller.The device list appears.

X Select the desired mobile phone.The selected mobile phone is searched forand connected if it is within Bluetooth® rangeand if Bluetooth® is activated.

Only one mobile phone can be connected at anyone time. The currently connected mobilephone is indicated by the # dot in the device list.

i You can only switch to another authorisedmobile phone if you are not currently makinga call.

De-authorising a mobile phone (discon-necting)Mercedes-Benz recommends de-authorisationin the multimedia system as well as on themobile phone. Subsequent authorisation mayotherwise fail.X Press the % button.X Show the menu bar by sliding 6 the con-

troller.X Select Connect device by turning and press-

ing the controller.X Select the desired mobile phone in the device

list by turning the controller.X Select G by sliding 9 the controller.X Select De-authorise by turning and press-

ing the controller.A prompt appears asking whether you reallywish to de-authorise this device.

X Select Yes.The mobile phone is de-authorised.

i Before re-authorising the mobile phone, youshould also delete the device name MB Blue‐tooth from your mobile phone's Bluetooth®

list.

306 TelephoneM

ultim

edia

sys

tem

s

Make a call

Accepting a callX Select Accept by pressing the controller.orX Press 6 on the multifunction steering

wheel.The call is accepted.

Further information on the functions you canuse during a call can be found in the DigitalOperating Instructions.

i If the phone number of the caller is sent, itappears in the display. If the phone number issaved in the phone book, the contact's nameis also displayed. If the phone number is notsent, Unknown is shown in the display.

Rejecting a callX Select Reject by turning and pressing the

controller.orX Press ~ on the multifunction steering

wheel.

Making a call

Using the telephone menuX Press the % button.X In the telephone menu, select all numbers one

after the other by turning and pressing thecontroller.

X Select w in the telephone menu.The call is made.

Using favouritesThis function can be used when a telephonenumber has been added as a favourite. Furtherinformation about adding favourites(Y page 300).X Press the favourites button on the controller.

The favourites are displayed.X Select the telephone number by turning the

controller.X Make a call by pressing the controller.

Using the call listsX Press the % button.X Slide 6 the controller to switch to the menu

bar.X Select Call lists by turning and pressing

the controller.X Select Incoming calls or Calls dialled.

The corresponding list appears.X Select an entry and make a call by turning and

pressing the controller.Select and place a call using the multifunctionsteering wheel (see the vehicle OperatingInstructions).

Using the phone bookX Press the % button.X In the telephone menu, select Name by turning

and pressing the controller.The phone book appears with the active char-acter bar.

X Select a character.The first contact with the selected first char-acter is highlighted in the phone book.

X Select the characters of the contact you aresearching for one by one by turning and press-ing the controller.

X To complete the search: slide 5 the con-troller repeatedly until the character bar dis-appears.

orX Select ¬.

The contacts in the phone book are displayed.X To select a contact: turn and press the con-

troller.If a contact has more than one phone number:X Select a phone number by turning and press-

ing the controller.Select and place a call using the multifunctionsteering wheel (see the vehicle OperatingInstructions).Further information on the phone book can befound in the Digital Operating Instructions.

Telephone 307

Mul

timed

ia s

yste

ms

Z

Ending an active callX In the telephone menu, select = by turning

and pressing the controller.orX Press ~ on the multifunction steering

wheel.The active call is ended.

Mercedes me connect

Important safety notes

G WARNINGOperating the integrated information systemsand communications equipment in the vehiclewhile driving will distract you from traffic con-ditions. You could then lose control of thevehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate these devices if road traffic con-ditions permit. If you are unsure about thesurrounding conditions, pull over to a safelocation and make entries only while the vehi-cle is stationary.

Observe the legal requirements for the countryyou are in.

RequirementsMercedes me connect only functions in areaswhere the contracting parties have GSM net-work coverage. If the contracting parties haveinsufficient network coverage, it may not bepossible to establish a connection. Networkaccess in the regions in which Mercedes meconnect is available is a prerequisite for estab-lishing a connection.As with mobile phones, atmospheric interfer-ence may mean that a connection cannot beestablished.The ignition must be switched on for vehicledata to be transferred automatically.

General notesThe Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre is availa-ble to you around the clock for breakdown assis-tance, for requesting an appointment or similarenquiries.

Please note that Mercedes me connect is aMercedes-Benz customer service. In emergen-cies, always call the national emergency serv-ices first, using the standard national emer-gency service telephone numbers. In emergen-cies, you can also use the Mercedes-Benz emer-gency call system.

i More information on Mercedes me connect,the range of services offered and on using thefunction is available from your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or on the Internet athttp:// manuals.daimler.com/baix/cars/connectme/de_DE/index.html

Calling a Mercedes-Benz CustomerCentreX Call up the telephone book.X Select MB Contact by turning the controller.X Press the controller.orX Press the 6 button on the multifunction

steering wheel.The call is made.

Information about Mercedes me con-nect accident managementMercedes me connect accident management isan extension of the Mercedes-Benz emergencycall system.If an emergency call to the Mercedes-Benzemergency call centre has been triggered fol-lowing an accident:Ra voice connection is made to a contact per-

son at the Mercedes-Benz emergency callcentreRif necessary, the contact at the Mercedes-

Benz emergency call centre will transfer thecall to the Mercedes-Benz Customer CentreRif necessary, the vehicle will be towed to a

Mercedes-Benz Service CentreThese services may require payment.Data will be transferred during the connectionwith the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre.

308 TelephoneM

ultim

edia

sys

tem

s

Information about Mercedes me con-nect Breakdown ManagementIf a breakdown assistance call has been made tothe Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre with themultimedia system or the F breakdownassistance call button in the overhead controlpanel:Ra qualified Mercedes-Benz technician will per-

form repairs on-site and/or tow the vehicle tothe nearest Mercedes-Benz Service Centre

These services may require payment.Data will be transferred during the connectionwith the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre.

Establishing and ending an Internetconnection

Establishing the connectionA connection can be established by:Rentering a web addressRcalling up a Mercedes-Benz AppRcalling up a favouriteX To cancel the connection: select Cancel in

the connections window.

Calling up Internet functionsAudio 20X Press the % button.X Activate the main function bar by sliding 5

the controller.X Select TEL/® by turning and pressing the

controller.X Select Internet.

The menu with the Internet functionsappears.

COMAND OnlineX Activate the main function bar by sliding 5

the controller.X Select ® by turning and pressing the con-

troller.The menu with the Internet functionsappears.

Connection status

: Display of existing connection and signalstrength of the mobile phone network

In most cases, the current connection status isthen shown in the status bar when you switch toanother main function.If a phone call is made at the same time as theInternet connection is active, the ¡ symbol isdisplayed in status bar :. The Internet connec-tion remains active depending on the mobilephone and mobile phone network used.

Detailed connection statusX Call up Internet functions (Y page 309).X Slide 6 the controller to switch to the menu

bar.X Select Settings by turning and pressing the

controller.X Select Connection status.

The following information is displayed:Rthe volume of transferred dataRconnection statusRthe device name of the mobile phone

Ending the connectionX Call up Internet functions (Y page 309).X Slide 6 the controller to switch to the menu

bar.X Select © by turning and pressing the con-

troller.If the mobile phone Internet connection is dis-connected, the multimedia system tries toreconnect. You should therefore always closethe connection on the multimedia system.

Establishing and ending an Internet connection 309

Mul

timed

ia s

yste

ms

Z

Automatic disconnection of the Inter-net connection after inactivity

If no data is transferred for a specified time, e.g.five minutes, the system automatically discon-nects from the Internet.

Radio

Radio overview

Radio display overview

: Main function bar; Status bar with active traffic announce-

ments= Main display field with available stations and

relevant information? Display for the selected radio stationA Radio menu barB Climate control status barX To show the main function bar: slide 5

the controller.X To show the menu bar: slide 6 the con-

troller.

Radio menu overviewRadio main function barRFM radio or FM/DAB radio: FM radio mode

or FM/DAB radio modeRAM radio: SW/MW radio modeRRadio station presets: 100 preset posi-

tions for radio stationsRInformation on radio: information on

radio in the Digital Operating InstructionsRadio menu barROptions: radio optionsRè: searches for stations by name

RPreset: station preset menuRWaveband: waveband selectionRInformation: displays additional informa-

tion about the current station (radio text)Rà: sound settings, Burmester® soundDAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) is an opti-mised digital transmission standard designedfor the mobile reception of radio transmissions.Several programmes are combined into so-called ensembles and transmitted on a singlefrequency.

i DAB cannot be received everywhere inEurope.

Switching to radio modeX Press the $ button.

The radio display appears.You will hear the last station played on the lastwaveband selected.

Selecting a waveband and station

Selecting a stationRUsing the main display field: in radio mode,

turn the controller until the desired station isin the centre.RVia the "Options" menu: usingCurrent station/channel listing/Current sta‐tion list with EPG or Direct entryselect or enter the desired station.RUsing the search function: in radio mode,

select è in the menu bar and enter the firstletters of the desired station using the con-troller.

Traffic announcements

Switching traffic announcementson/offX While in radio mode, slide 6 the controller.X Select Options.X Select TA.

Switch traffic announcements on O or offª.

310 RadioM

ultim

edia

sys

tem

s

When the traffic announcements areswitched on, the TA symbol appears in thestatus bar.

orX On the multifunction steering wheel, press

and hold the 8 button until the TA displayin the status bar goes either on or off.A tone sounds. When the traffic announce-ments are switched on, the TA symbolappears in the status bar.

Interrupting a traffic announcementX During a traffic announcement press the8 button on the multifunction steeringwheel.The multimedia system switches back to thestation that was selected before theannouncement. Any subsequent newannouncements will continue to interrupt thestation.

Display informationThis function is available in FM or FM/DAB radiomode.To receive this, the broadcasting station mustprocess the relevant information.X While in radio mode, slide 6 the controller.

The radio menu bar appears.X Select Info by turning and pressing the con-

troller.If the station supports this function, addi-tional information will be displayed.If available, you will see:Rstation abbreviationRthe current trackRthe artist of the current trackRinformation about the current programmeRhotline number for the station or latest

headlinesX To return to radio display: select Info by

sliding 6 and pressing the controller.

Radio 311

Mul

timed

ia s

yste

ms

Z

Useful information

These Operating Instructions describe all mod-els as well as standard and optional equipmentof your vehicle that were available at the time ofgoing to print. Country-specific variations arepossible. Note that your vehicle may not be fit-ted with all of the described functions. This alsoapplies to safety-relevant systems and func-tions.Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops: (Y page 31).

Stowage spaces and stowage com-partments

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you transport objects in the vehicle interiorand these are not adequately secured, theycould slip or be flung around and therebystrike vehicle occupants. In addition, cupholders, open stowage spaces and mobilephone brackets may not always be able tohold the objects placed in them in the event ofan accident. There is a risk of injury, particu-larly in the event of sharp braking or suddenchanges of direction.RAlways stow objects in such a way that they

cannot be tossed about in these or similarsituations.RAlways make sure that objects do not proj-

ect from stowage spaces, luggage nets orstowage nets.REnsure that closable stowage spaces are

shut before beginning your journey.RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-

ted, sharp-edged, fragile or outsize objectsin the load compartment.

Observe the "Loading guidelines" (Y page 328).

Glove compartment

1 Unlocked2 Locked= Glove compartment handleYou can lock and unlock the glove compartmentusing the emergency key element (Y page 77) .When you open the glove compartment flap, acoin holder, a pen holder and a credit cardholder are integrated on the inside.X To open: unlock the glove compartment

cover if necessary.X Pull glove compartment handle = in the

direction of the arrow.X To close: fold the glove compartment up and

press it until it engages.

Spectacles compartment in the over-head control panel

X To open: briefly press cover :.The spectacles compartment opens down-wards.

X To close: press the spectacles compartmentinto the overhead control panel until itengages.

312 Stowage spaces and stowage compartmentsSt

owin

g an

d fe

atur

es

Make sure that the spectacles compartment isalways closed while the vehicle is in motion.

Stowage compartment in the centreconsole

Centre console (example: centre console withcover)X To open or close: slide cover : of the centre

console up or down using handle ;.Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the fol-lowing can be found in the centre console:Ra 12 V socket (Y page 321) or

cigarette lighter (Y page 320)RMedia Interface with two USB ports or with

two USB ports and one SD card slotCorresponding connector cables and oradapter cables depend on the vehicle's equip-ment and are available as a Mercedes-Benzaccessory. The cable set is in the glove com-partment.Rthe holder for the mobile phone bracket

(Y page 325)Rtwo cup holders (Y page 318)Rashtray (Y page 320)Ra stowage compartment or a mounting frame

for an additional device, e.g. a tachograph

Stowage compartment under thearmrest

X To open: press button :.The stowage space opens.

The stowage compartment contains:Ran SD card slotRa multimedia connector unit with 2 USB ports,

e.g. for iPod®, iPhone® or MP3 player (see theDigital Operating Instructions)Rcoolbox (Y page 323)Ra small stowage space in the upper and lower

front sections

Stowage netYou can use the stowage nets on the back of theseat backrests to store small, lightweight items.On front seats with seat ventilation, make surethat no objects protrude out of the stowage netand cover the seat ventilation air inlet above.Observe the loading directions (Y page 328)and the safety information about the stowagespaces (Y page 312).

Stowage compartments underneaththe seat/berth combination

The seat/berth combination is fitted with tworemovable stowage compartments under theseat cushion. You can use these stowage com-partments to store bedding, for example.The maximum load which can be placed in eachstowage compartment is 13 kg.

! Always push the stowage compartmentunder the seat/bunk combination as far as itwill go to prevent damage.

Stowage spaces and stowage compartments 313

Stow

ing

and

feat

ures

Z

You can remove each stowage compartment toincrease the size of your vehicle's load com-partment.X To remove: slide seat/berth combination ?

as far back as possible (Y page 103).X Pull stowage compartment = out to the stop.X Pull left-hand plastic tongue : down and

right-hand plastic tongue : up, when viewedin the direction of travel. At the same time pullout stowage compartment = a little eachtime.The corresponding stop is released.

i The direction in which the plastic tonguesmust be moved to release the stops is stam-ped in the guide rail.

X Pull out stowage compartment =.X To fit: slide seat/berth combination ? as far

back as possible (Y page 103).X Slide stowage compartment = into guide

rail ; under the seat/berth combination.Plastic tongues : engage automatically.

Sun visors

Overview

: Mirror light; Holder= Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket? Vanity mirrorA Mirror cover

Vanity mirror in the sun visorX Fold up mirror cover A.X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition

lock.Mirror light : lights up.

Glare from the sideX Fold the sun visor down.X Pull the sun visor out of bracket ;.X Swing the sun visor to the side.

Folding table

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf objects, luggage or loads are not secured ornot secured sufficiently, they could slip, tipover or be flung around and thereby hit vehicleoccupants. There is a risk of injury, especiallywhen braking or abruptly changing directions.Always store objects so that they cannot beflung around. Secure objects, luggage or

314 Folding tableSt

owin

g an

d fe

atur

es

loads against slipping or tipping before thejourney.

G WARNINGIf the folding table is not properly engaged inthe fastening fixtures, it could break free andbe flung around during the journey. There is arisk of an accident and injury.Install the folding table as described. Onlymove the folding table when the vehicle isstationary. After moving it, always make surethat the folding table is properly engaged.

The folding table is only secured correctly whenboth locking and unlocking levers are engaged.Observe the "Loading guidelines" (Y page 328).

Installing the folding table

G WARNINGIf the folding table is not properly engaged inthe fastening fixtures, it could break free andbe flung around during the journey. There is arisk of an accident and injury.Install the folding table as described. Onlymove the folding table when the vehicle isstationary. After moving it, always make surethat the folding table is properly engaged.

The folding table is only secured correctly whenboth locking and unlocking levers are engaged.

X Push the front seats back fully or, if neces-sary, remove.

X Lift off both covers : from the guide railusing a suitable tool, e.g. a screwdriver.

X Press both covers : slightly together andremove from the guide rail.The rail openings for the middle sliding rail onthe underside of the folding table are open.

X Rotate the folding table until the arrow on theunderside of the folding table is pointing in thedirection of travel.

Installation positionX Insert the folding table into the guide rails so

that arrows ; on the folding table point toboth markings = on guide rail ?.The guides and sliding rail on the underside ofthe folding table fit into the guide rail.

X Pull lever A on the front or rear side of thefolding table upwards and push the foldingtable backwards.

Folding table 315

Stow

ing

and

feat

ures

Z

The folding table is properly inserted if:Ryou can slide it along the guide rail with

lever A pulled upRyou cannot lift it into a position other than

the installation positionX Press both covers : slightly together and

click into the openings of the guide rails.X Keep lever A pulled and move the folding

table into the desired position.X Move the folding table to the front or the back

until you can feel resistance while you pressdown lever A.

X Press lever A down against the resistance tothe stop.The folding table is correctly secured.

Repositioning the folding table

X Keep lever A pulled and move the foldingtable into the desired position.

X Release lever A.X Move the folding table until it automatically

engages in the next possible position.X After repositioning the table, ensure that the

folding table is properly secured again.

Adjusting the height of the foldingtable

X To raise: press table height adjustment but-ton : down fully against the resistance.

X Release button :.The folding table moves upwards andengages automatically.Tilt the backrest back slightly if it is no longerpossible to adjust the armrest with the foldingtable extended.

X To lower: press table height adjustment but-ton : down fully against the resistance.

X Press and hold button : and simultaneouslypress the centre section of the folding tabledown.

X Release button : when the folding table is inits lowered position.The centre section of the folding tableengages automatically.

Folding out the table panel

X Use handle : to pull the table panels out tothe stop in the direction of the arrow.

X Fold the table panels to the side until theyengage.The table panels must be engaged.

316 Folding tableSt

owin

g an

d fe

atur

es

Folding in the table panel

Always fold the table panels in before attempt-ing to slide the folding table.X Lift table panels up by handle :.X Use handle : to slide the panels down ver-

tically into the table.

Stowage spaces and stowage com-partments

: Recesses on the folding table; Stowage compartmentsStowage compartments ; can be used to stowlarge items, e.g. bottles.An insert can be fitted into stowage compart-ments ; to hold smaller items.

InsertX To remove: press lug = and remove the

insert.X To insert: position the insert so that the ribs

on the rear side of the insert engage.X Press the insert down until it engages.

Removing the folding tableX Fold in the table panels.X Slide the table height adjustment into the

retracted position.X Push the front seats back fully or, if neces-

sary, remove.

X Push the folding table so far back that cov-ers : of the rail openings can be removed.

X Lift off both covers : from the guide railusing a suitable tool, e.g. a screwdriver.

Folding table 317

Stow

ing

and

feat

ures

Z

X Press both covers : slightly together andremove from the guide rail.The rail openings for the middle sliding rail onthe underside of the folding table are open.

Installation positionX Push the folding table forwards into the instal-

lation position.Arrows ; on the folding table point to bothmarkings = on guide rail ?.

X Lift the folding table out of guide rail ?.X Press both covers : slightly together and

click into the openings of the guide rails.

Cup holder

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe cup holder cannot secure a drinks con-tainer in place during a journey. If you use acup holder during a journey, the drinks con-tainer could be flung around and liquid couldbe spilt. Vehicle occupants could come intocontact with the liquid and, in particular, bescalded by hot liquid. You could be distractedfrom the traffic situation and lose control of

the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident andinjury.Only use the cup holder when the vehicle isstationary. Only place containers of a suitablesize in the cup holder. Seal the container, inparticular when it contains hot liquid.

! Only use the cup holders for containers ofthe right size and which have lids. The drinkscould otherwise spill.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 328).

Cup holders in the centre console

Centre console with coverX To open: slide cover : of the centre console

upwards (Y page 313).X To remove: slide lock ; down and pull out

cup holder =.X To insert: insert cup holder = and slide

lock ; back.X To close: pull cover : of the centre console

down and close the stowage compartment.

Centre console with stowage compartment underthe armrest

318 Cup holderSt

owin

g an

d fe

atur

es

X To remove: slide lock ; forwards and pullout cup holder :.

X To insert: insert cup holder : and slidelock ; back.

You can remove the rubber mat of the cupholder to clean it. Wash it with clean and luke-warm water only.

Cup holders in the rear

Stowage compartment for the cup holder in therear compartment (example: left-hand side trim)Cupholder : is inserted into stowage compart-ment = of the side trim in the rear compart-ment.X To insert: position cup holder : above stow-

age compartment = so that the "INSIDE" let-tering on its base ; faces towards the vehi-cle interior.

X Insert base ; into the stowage compartmentand press down on both sides.The cup holder is correctly inserted when:Rboth sealing rings ? are within stowage

compartment =Rupper edge A of the base is flush with

stowage compartment =.X To remove: grasp the bottom of cup

holder : from below and remove by lifting itsbase ; out vertically.

Temperature-controlled cup holder inthe rear compartment

G WARNINGThe heating elements of the cup holder canbecome very hot. You could burn yourself onthem.

There is a risk of injury.Never touch the hot heating elements of thecup holder. Always make sure that the hotheating elements are out of reach of children.Never leave children unattended in the vehi-cle.

: Button; Cup holderIf the temperature-controlled cup holder is usedwhen the engine is switched off, the starter bat-tery may discharge. If the on-board voltage istoo low, it might then no longer be possible tostart the engine.The temperature-controlled cup holder is notautomatically deactivated when the on-boardvoltage is low.The temperature-controlled cup holder can beused to keep cold drinks cold and hot drinks hot.When the heating function is used, the metalinsert of the cup holder is heated. For this rea-son, do not reach into the cup holder insert.X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock

(Y page 172).X To switch on the cooling function: press

button : repeatedly until the blue indicatorlamp on the button lights up.

X To switch on the heating function: pressbutton : repeatedly until the red indicatorlamp on the button lights up.

X To switch off the function: press button :repeatedly until the indicator lamp on the but-ton goes out.

The rubber mat can be removed for cleaning.Wash it with clean, lukewarm water only.Do not use hard or sharp objects to clean thecup holder. Use a soft cloth only to clean it.

Cup holder 319

Stow

ing

and

feat

ures

Z

Bottle holder

The bottle holders are in front of the stowagecompartments in the front doors.There are additional bottle holders on the leftand right in the rear compartment side panel-ling. Observe the safety notes (Y page 312).

Ashtray

Front ashtray

Ashtray (example: centre console with cover)X To open: slide cover : of the centre console

upwards (Y page 313).Ashtray with lid ; can be inserted into a cupholder in the centre console with a cover or intoa cup holder in the rear compartment.

Ashtrays in the rear

X To open: pull cover ; down.X To remove the insert: push ribbing = on the

left-hand side and remove insert : upwards.X To refit the insert: refit insert : in the

holder from above and press into the holderuntil it engages.

Cigarette lighter

Important safety notes

G WARNINGYou can burn yourself if you touch the hotheating element or the socket of the cigarettelighter.In addition, flammable materials can ignite if:Rthe hot cigarette lighter fallsRa child holds the hot cigarette lighter to

objects, for exampleThere is a risk of fire and injury.Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.Always make sure that the cigarette lighter isout of reach of children. Never leave childrenunattended in the vehicle.

Your attention must always be focused on thetraffic conditions. You could otherwise cause anaccident and injure yourself and others. Onlyoperate the cigarette lighter if traffic conditionspermit.

Cigarette lighter in the front compart-ment

Cigarette lighter in the centre console (example:centre console with cover)

320 Cigarette lighterSt

owin

g an

d fe

atur

es

X To use the cigarette lighter: turn the key toposition 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 172).

X Slide cover : of the centre console upwards(Y page 313).

X Press in cigarette lighter ;.The cigarette lighter will pop out automati-cally when the heating element is red-hot.

X Pull the cigarette lighter out of the socket byits handle.

The cigarette lighter socket can be used foraccessories with a maximum power consump-tion of 180 W (15 A).If you use the sockets to connect accessoriesfor long periods when the engine is switched off,the starter battery may discharge. An emer-gency cut-off ensures that the on-board voltagedoes not drop too low. If the on-board voltage istoo low, power to the socket is automaticallycut. This ensures that there is sufficient powerto start the engine.

Cigarette lighter in the rear compart-ment

X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock(Y page 172).

X To open: pull cover ; down.X Press in cigarette lighter :.

Cigarette lighter : will pop out automaticallywhen the heating element is red-hot.

X To close: press cover ; closed.

12 V socket

General notesWhen the key is turned to position 1 in the igni-tion lock, the sockets can be used for accesso-

ries with a maximum power consumption of180 W (15 A).If you use the sockets for long periods when theengine is switched off, the starter battery maydischarge. If the on-board voltage is too low, itmight then no longer be possible to start theengine.The socket in the centre console and the socketin the side of the luggage compartment are notautomatically deactivated if the on-board volt-age is low. The additional sockets in the rearcompartment are automatically deactivated ifthe on-board voltage is low.Additional 12 V sockets may be located in thecorner trim next to the tailgate and in the sidetrim on the left and right-hand sides.

Socket in the front centre console

Socket on the centre console (example: centreconsole with cover)X To open: slide cover : of the centre console

upwards (Y page 313).X Lift up the cover of socket ;.X To close: pull cover : of the centre console

down and close the stowage compartment.

12 V socket 321

Stow

ing

and

feat

ures

Z

Socket in the rear centre console

Centre console with a stowage compartmentunder the armrestX To open: swing cover ; down.X Lift up the cover of socket :.X To close: press cover ; closed.

230 V socket

Important safety notes

G DANGERWhen a suitable device is connected, the230 V power socket will be carrying a highvoltage. You could receive an electric shock ifthe connector cable or the 230 V powersocket is pulled out of the trim or is damagedor wet. There is a risk of fatal injury.RUse only connector cables that are dry and

free of damage.RWhen the ignition is off, make sure that the

230 V power socket is dry.RImmediately have the 230 V power socket

checked or replaced at a qualified special-ised workshop if it is damaged or has beenpulled out of the trim.RNever plug the connector cable into a 230 V

power socket that is damaged or has beenpulled out of the trim.

G DANGERIf you reach into the power socket or pluginappropriate devices into the power socket,

you could receive an electric shock. There is arisk of fatal injury.Only attach appropriate objects to the powersocket.

! Note that work and repairs on the 230 Vpower socket should only be carried out byqualified specialist personnel.

General notesThe 230 V power socket provides an alternatingvoltage of 230 V so that small electronic devicescan be connected. These devices, such asgames consoles, chargers and laptops, must notconsume more than a maximum of 150 wattsaltogether.Do not connect any multiple socket outlets tothe 230 V power socket.If you use the 230 V power socket when theengine is switched off, the starter battery maydischarge. If the on-board voltage is too low, itmight then no longer be possible to start theengine. The 230 V power socket is not automat-ically deactivated when the on-board voltage islow.Requirements for operating devices from the230 V power socket:Rthe electronic device that you connect has a

suitable connector and conforms to stand-ards specific to the country you are in.Rthe electronic device connector is plugged

fully into the 230 V power socket.Rthe maximum wattage of the device to be

connected must not exceed 150 watts.Rthe on-board voltage is within a permissible

voltage range.

322 230 V socketSt

owin

g an

d fe

atur

es

Using the 230 V power socket X To switch on: turn the key to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 172).

X Pull down the cover.X Open flap =.X Insert the electronic device connector into

230 V power socket :.Indicator lamp ; lights up.

X To switch off: remove the connector from230 V power socket :.Make sure that you do not pull on the cable.

Problems with the 230 V power socket

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The indicator lamp onthe 230 V power socketis not lit.

The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak.X Start the engine.orX Charge the battery (Y page 349).If the indicator lamp still does not light up:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

The temperature of the DC/AC converter is temporarily too high.X Remove the electronic device connector from the 230 V socket.X Let the DC/AC converter cool down.If the indicator lamp still does not light up after the converter coolsdown:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

You have connected an electronic device that has a constant nominalpower of less than 150 watts, but has a very high switch-on current.This device will not work. If you connect such a device, the 230 Vpower socket will not supply it with power.X Connect a suitable electronic device.

Coolbox in the centre console

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you cover the ventilation grille for the cool-box, it may overheat. There is a risk of fire.Always make sure that the ventilation grille isnot covered.

The coolbox ventilation grille is between thefront seat base and the centre console side wall.The coolbox can hold a maximum load of 3.5 kg.If the coolbox is used when the engine isswitched off, the starter battery may discharge.If the on-board voltage is too low, it might thenno longer be possible to start the engine.

Coolbox in the centre console 323

Stow

ing

and

feat

ures

Z

Using the coolboxX Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock

(Y page 172).X Open the stowage compartment under the

centre console armrest (Y page 313).

X To open: fold cover ; upwards.X To switch cooling level to low: press but-

ton : for approximately two seconds.An indicator lamp in the button lights up.

X To switch cooling level to high: press but-ton : again.Both indicator lamps in the button light up.

X To switch off cooling: press button : forapproximately two seconds until all indicatorlamps go out.

The cooling output of the coolbox depends onthe ambient temperature and the selected cool-ing level.The coolbox reduces its cooling output orswitches itself off, if:Ra lot of electrical consumers are switched onRthe starter battery is not sufficiently charged.This is indicated by the flashing indicator lampsin the button. The cooling function will automat-ically switch back on as soon as there is suffi-cient voltage.

Maintaining the coolboxIf you do not need to use the coolbox for anextended period you should switch it off, defrostit and clean it. After doing so, leave the lid openfor a time.

Mercedes-Benz emergency call sys-tem

Information on these requirements can be foundin the Digital Owner's Manual.

X To open: press cover ;.X To trigger an emergency call: press and

hold SOS button : for at least one second.The indicator lamp in SOS button : flashesuntil the emergency call has been completed.

X Wait for a voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre.

X After the emergency call, close cover ;.You will see a message if:Ra connection to the Mercedes-Benz emer-

gency call centre cannot be establishedRa call has not been automatically forwarded

to the public emergency call centreIn this case, dial the emergency number 999or 112 on your mobile phone.

You can find more information on the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system in the Digital Own-er's Manual.

MB Contact/Mercedes me connect

General notesThe Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre is availa-ble around the clock providing breakdown assis-tance, for making appointments or for questionspertaining to your vehicle. The call to theMercedes-Benz Customer Centre is placedusing the communication module in the vehicle.Please note that Mercedes me connect is aMercedes-Benz customer service. In emergen-cies, always call the national emergency serv-ices first, using the standard national emer-

324 MB Contact/Mercedes me connectSt

owin

g an

d fe

atur

es

gency service telephone numbers. In emergen-cies, you can also use the Mercedes-Benz emer-gency call system.You can contact the Mercedes-Benz CustomerCentre via the MB Contact phone book entry orvia the "Breakdown assistance" button and"info-call" button in the overhead control panel,if your vehicle is equipped with these.Further information on the MB Contact phonebook entry can be found under (Y page 308).More information on Mercedes me connect, therange of services offered and on using the func-tion is available from your Mercedes-Benz Ser-vice Centre or on the Internet at http://manuals.daimler.com/baix/cars/connectme/de_DE/index.html

Breakdown assistance call button

X To call: press button : for breakdown assis-tance.The call is initiated.The Connecting call message appears inthe multifunction display. The audio system ismuted.For certain countries only: a voice messageprompts you to confirm the data transmis-sion. After confirmation, the required vehicledata are transmitted. During data transmis-sion, you will see a corresponding indicationon the display. This may take a moment. Youare then connected to an employee.

X To end a call: press the ~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.

Info call buttonThis function is not available in all countries.

X To call: press Info call button :.The call is initiated.The Connecting call message appears inthe multifunction display. The audio system ismuted.For certain countries only: a voice messageprompts you to confirm the data transmis-sion. After confirmation, the required vehicledata are transmitted. During data transmis-sion, you will see a corresponding indicationon the display. This may take a moment. Youare then connected to an employee.

X To end a call: press the ~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.

Mobile phone

Important safety notes

G WARNINGOperating mobile communications equip-ment while driving distracts you from payingattention to traffic conditions. This could alsocause you to lose control of the vehicle. Thereis a risk of an accident.Use this device only when the vehicle is sta-tionary.

You must observe the legal requirements for thecountry in which you are currently driving whenoperating mobile phones.In Germany, for vehicles without a hands-freesystem, it is forbidden to use mobile phoneswhile driving or while the engine is running.Increased levels of electromagnetic radiationcould pose a risk to your health and the health ofothers. Using an exterior aerial takes intoaccount current scientific discussions relatingto the possible health hazards that may result

Mobile phone 325

Stow

ing

and

feat

ures

Z

from electromagnetic fields. Only have the exte-rior aerial installed by a qualified specialist work-shop.When using mobile phones and two-way radios,Mercedes-Benz recommends connection to anapproved exterior aerial. This is the only way toensure optimal reception quality in the vehicleand to minimise potential interference betweenthe vehicle electronics and mobile phones ortwo-way radios.

General notesDepending on the vehicle equipment, there arevarious mobile phone brackets that may be fit-ted in your vehicle; in some cases, these arecountry-specific.More information on suitable mobile phones,mobile phone brackets and on connecting Blue-tooth®-capable mobile phones with the multi-media system can be obtained:Rat a Mercedes-Benz Service CentreRon the Internet at http://www.mercedes-

benz.com/connectThe functions and services available when youuse the phone depend on your mobile phonemodel and service provider.

Inserting a mobile phone

Centre console with cover

X Slide cover : of the centre console upwards(Y page 313).

X Place the mobile phone bracket into the pre-installed fitting ; (see the separate installa-tion instructions for the mobile phone fitting).

X Insert the mobile phone into the mobile phonebracket (see the separate installation instruc-tions for the mobile phone fitting).

To connect a mobile phone to the exterior aerial,insert it into the mobile phone bracket. Tocharge the mobile phone, connect the chargingcable to USB port =.If you use the telephone module with Bluetooth®

(SAP profile), it is connected to the exterior aer-ial.Further information on the telephone modulewith Bluetooth® (SAP profile) can be found in theseparate operating instructions.

Using a mobile phoneThe phone can be operated using the 6 and~ buttons on the steering wheel. You canoperate other mobile phone functions via theon-board computer (Y page 254).If there is no active call and you remove the keyfrom the ignition lock, the mobile phone discon-nects from the vehicle. You can then no longermake calls using the hands-free system.If a call is active and you remove the key fromthe ignition lock, the mobile phone stays con-nected to the vehicle. You can then talk for up to30 minutes using the hands-free system withoutswitching the ignition back on.If you want to continue an active call using themobile phone after removing the key, you mustswitch it to "Private mode". The active call willthen be transferred to the mobile phone. Theconnection between the mobile phone and thehands-free system will be disconnected.Notes on the necessary steps for setting "Pri-vate mode" can be found in the separate oper-ating instructions of the mobile phone. Not allmobile phones support "Private mode".

326 Mobile phoneSt

owin

g an

d fe

atur

es

iPad® attachment

Your vehicle is equipped with iPad® attach-ment : on the driver's and co-driver's seatbackrests.A mount, which has been tested and approvedespecially for Mercedes-Benz vehicles, is avail-able as an accessory. Only this mount canunlock the attachment opening and allow theiPad® to be charged whilst it is installed.iPad® attachment : may only be used foraccessories up to 42 W (3.5 A).Contact a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre forinformation and availability. Before using themount, please read the operating instructionsfor the mount.

i Only use accessories which have been tes-ted and recommended by Mercedes-Benz.

Additional communications equip-ment

G WARNINGOperating mobile information systems andcommunications equipment while driving willdistract you from traffic conditions. You couldthen lose control of the vehicle. There is a riskof an accident.Only operate these devices when the vehicleis stationary.

Observe the legal requirements for the countryin which you are currently driving when operat-ing mobile communication equipment.Please remember, a navigation system does notsupply information on the load-bearing capacityof bridges or the overhead clearance of under-

passes. The driver remains responsible for thesafety of the vehicle at all times.Increased levels of electromagnetic radiationcould pose a risk to your health and the health ofothers. Using an exterior aerial takes intoaccount current scientific discussions relatingto the possible health hazards that may resultfrom electromagnetic fields. Only have the exte-rior aerial installed by a qualified specialist work-shop.Failure to observe the Mercedes-Benz installa-tion specifications can result in the invalidationof your vehicle's operating permit.You will find information on retrofitting electricalor electronic equipment under “Vehicle elec-tronics” (Y page 385).

Additional communications equipment 327

Stow

ing

and

feat

ures

Z

Useful information

These Operating Instructions describe all mod-els as well as standard and optional equipmentof your vehicle that were available at the time ofgoing to print. Country-specific variations arepossible. Note that your vehicle may not be fit-ted with all of the described functions. This alsoapplies to safety-relevant systems and func-tions.Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops: (Y page 31).

Loading guidelines

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen objects are unsecured or inadequatelysecured, they can slip, turn over or be thrownabout, striking vehicle occupants. This alsoapplies to:Rluggage or loadsRseats which have been removed and are

being transported in the vehicle in anexceptional case.

There is a risk of injury, particularly in theevent of braking manoeuvres or abruptchanges in direction.Always stow objects in such a way that theycannot be tossed about. Before travelling,secure objects, luggage or load to preventthem slipping or tipping over. If you remove aseat, store it preferably outside the vehicle.

G WARNINGAs a result of improperly placed or unevenlydistributed loads, the centre of gravity of theload being transported may be too high or toofar back. This can significantly impair handlingas well as steering and braking characteris-tics. There is a risk of an accident.Always make sure that the centre of gravity ofthe load is:Rbetween the axles

andRas low as possible, near the rear axle.

G WARNINGWhen the permissible wheel loads, axle loadsand/or the maximum permissible gross vehi-cle weight are exceeded, driving safety iscompromised. The handling as well as steer-ing and braking characteristics may be signif-icantly impaired. Overloaded tyres may over-heat, causing them to burst. There is a risk ofan accident.When transporting a load, always observe thepermissible wheel loads, axle loads and themaximum permissible gross vehicle weightfor the vehicle (including occupants).

! If you are using a roof carrier, observe themaximum roof load and maximum roof carrierload.RDo not stack luggage or loads higher than the

backrests.RObjects to be transported should preferably

be stowed in the load compartment.RWhen transporting luggage, always use the

lashing eyelets for securing loads and a safetynet, if fitted.RUse lashing eyelets and fasteners which are

suitable for the weight and size of the load.Always observe the operating instructions of therespective manufacturer when using suitableload securing aids or lashing material and par-ticularly the information on the end of servicelife contained in these Operating Instructions.Load securing aids or lashing material must notbe used if there is:Rmissing or illegible markingRyarn breaks, damage to load-bearing seams

or other traces of crackingRcutting, deformations, squashed areas or

other damageRdamage to clamping elements or fastenersThese types of load securing aids or lashingmaterial are worn out; they should not be usedand must be replaced. If you use load securingaids or lashing materials which are worn out, theload may not be sufficiently secured and couldcause damage to property.

328 Loading guidelinesTr

ansp

ortin

g lo

ads

with

the

vehi

cle

In the event of an accident, have a damagedluggage compartment floor or loading area, thelashing eyelets and the lashing materialchecked at a specialist workshop. Otherwise,the load may not be correctly secured the nexttime anything is stowed.Even if you adhere to all the loading guidelines,an increased payload increases the risk of injuryin the event of an accident. Observe the infor-mation in the "Securing a load" (Y page 330)and "Load distribution" (Y page 329) sections.You will find information about the maximumroof load under "Lashing points and carrier sys-tems" (Y page 395). You will find informationabout roof carriers under "Carrier systems"(Y page 334).

Before loadingX Tyre pressure: check the tyre pressure and

correct if necessary (Y page 369).

When loadingX Observe the permissible axle loads and per-

missible gross vehicle weight for your vehicle.Take into account that your vehicle's unladenweight is increased if accessories or optionalequipment are fitted. The maximum payloadis thus reduced.

X Observe the notes on load distribution(Y page 329).The overall centre of gravity of the load shouldalways be as low as possible, centred andbetween the axles near the rear axle.

X Secure the load (Y page 330).Observe the legal requirements of the countryin which you are currently driving.

Checking the load

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgateis open when the engine is running, particu-larly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumescould enter the passenger compartment.There is a risk of poisoning.

Turn off the engine before opening the tail-gate. Never drive with the tailgate open.

X Securing luggage/loads: make sure thatthe luggage and/or load is secure beforeevery journey and at regular intervals during along journey, and correct it if necessary.

X Doors/tailgate: close the sliding doors andtailgate.

X Headlamps: adjust the headlamp light coneif necessary. Adjust headlamp range(Y page 128).

X Tyre pressure: adjust the tyre pressureaccording to the vehicle load (Y page 369).

X Handling characteristics: adapt your driv-ing style according to the load being trans-ported.

Load distribution

General notes! Excessive loads on individual points of the

load compartment floor or on the load surfaceimpair vehicle handling characteristics andcould cause damage to the floor covering.

The overall centre of gravity of the load shouldalways be as low as possible, centred andbetween the axles near the rear axle.X Always transport loads in the load compart-

ment and with the seat backrests folded upand properly locked in position.

X Always place the load against the backrests ofthe front or rear seats.

X Move large and heavy loads as far towards thefront of the vehicle as possible against thefront or rear seats. Stow loads flush with therear or front seats.

X Always additionally secure the load with suit-able load-securing aids or lashing material.

Observe the following notes:RDo not stack loads higher than the upper edge

of the backrests.RTransport loads behind seats that are not

occupied.RIf the rear bench seat is not occupied, insert

the seat belts crosswise into the buckle of theopposite seat belt.

Load distribution 329

Tran

spor

ting

load

s w

ith th

e ve

hicl

e

Z

Load compartment variantsYou can vary the load compartment according toyour transportation requirements as follows:Rby folding the rear seat backrests or rear

bench seat backrests forward to the tablepositionRby folding the rear seats forwardsRby folding the rear bench seat forwardsRby removing the rear seats and/or the rear

bench seatRby removing the seat/berth combinationRby folding up or removing the bed extension of

the seat/berth combinationYou will find information about the rear seatsand the rear bench seat in the "Seats" section(Y page 99).

Securing loads

Important safety notes! Observe the notes regarding the maximum

load capacity of individual lashing points.If you combine several lashing points tosecure a load, you must always observe themaximum loading capacity of the weakestlashing point.For example, when the brakes are fullyapplied, forces act which can be many timesthat of the weight force of the load. To dis-tribute the load evenly, always use severallashing points. Load the lashing points asevenly as possible.

Spread the load evenly across lashing points/lashing eyelets. You will find information on themaximum loading capacity of the lashing pointsunder "Lashing points and carrier systems"(Y page 395).Do not attempt to modify or repair the lashingpoints/lashing eyelets or lashing materials.Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops (Y page 31).As the driver, you are responsible for ensuringthat:Rthe load is secured against slipping, tipping,

rolling or falling off in normal traffic condi-tions, should the vehicle swerve to avoid an

obstacle, in the event of full brake applicationand on poor road surfacesRthe applicable requirements and guidelines

relating to load-securing practices must bemetIf this is not the case, this may constitute apunishable offence, depending on local legis-lation and any ensuing consequences.Always observe the legal requirements for thecountry you are currently in.

Make sure that the load is secure before everyjourney and at regular intervals during a longjourney. Adjust the load as necessary.You can obtain information about securing theload correctly from the manufacturer of theload-securing aids or lashing material. Alsoobserve the safety information in the loadingdirections (Y page 328).X Fill spaces between the load and the load

compartment walls or wheel arches. For thispurpose use rigid load securing aids, such aswedges, wooden fixings or padding.

X Attach secured and stabilised loads in alldirections to lashing eyelets and the guiderails in the rear.Only use lashing material, such as lashingnets and lashing straps, which has been tes-ted in accordance with current standards(e.g. DIN EN).Lashing material tested in accordance withcurrent standards (e.g. DIN EN) can beobtained from any specialist firm orMercedes-Benz Service Centre.When securing a load, always use the closestlashing eyelets and pad sharp edges for pro-tection.

Example: variable lashing points in the guide rails: Guide rails; Lashing eyelet

330 Securing loadsTr

ansp

ortin

g lo

ads

with

the

vehi

cle

Fitting/removing lashing eyelets forthe guide rails

G WARNINGIf the lashing eyelet is not properly fitted, itmay slip or become detached in the event ofabrupt changes in direction, braking manoeu-vres or an accident. This may cause objects,luggage or the load to slip, tip over or betossed about, striking vehicle occupants.There is a risk of injury.Before using the lashing eyelets, always makesure they are properly fitted and cannot bemoved.

Example: guide rails

Lashing eyelets for guide railsFittingX Turn metal ring = so that it is parallel to the

longitudinal axis of lashing eyelet ; as illus-trated.The locking pin can only be pushed down suf-ficiently if the metal ring is parallel to the lon-gitudinal axis of the lashing eyelet. If it is not,

the lashing eyelet cannot be fitted, moved orremoved.

X Hold lashing eyelet ; between your forefin-ger and middle finger as illustrated and placeyour thumb through metal ring = and on thecentral pressure point.

X With your thumb, push the locking pin downas far as it will go.

X Push lashing eyelet ; through the notcheson guide rail : close to the load and slide itabout 12 mm.

X Remove your thumb from the pressure pointand slide lashing eyelet ; until it engages.

X Turn metal ring = so that it is perpendicularto the longitudinal axis of lashing eyelet ;.The locking pin cannot be pushed down if themetal ring is perpendicular to the longitudinalaxis of the lashing eyelet. This prevents thelashing eyelet from being released uninten-tionally, e.g. if the lashing eyelet is troddenon.

X Check lashing eyelet ; is seated correctly.The lashing eyelet cannot be moved.

RemovingX Turn metal ring = so that it is parallel to the

longitudinal axis of lashing eyelet ;.X Grip lashing eyelet ; as described above

under fitting and, with your thumb, push thelocking pin down as far as it will go.

X Slide lashing eyelet ; and pull it up and outthrough the notches of guide rail :.

Load-securing aids

Load protection net

G WARNINGThe load protection net alone cannot restrainor secure heavy objects, luggage or heavyloads. In the event of abrupt changes in direc-tion, braking manoeuvres or an accident, youmay be struck by unsecured loads. There is arisk of injury, possibly even fatal.Always stow objects in such a way that theycannot be tossed about. Secure objects, lug-gage and loads to prevent them slipping ortipping over, e.g. by lashing them down, evenwhen using the load protection net.

Load-securing aids 331

Tran

spor

ting

load

s w

ith th

e ve

hicl

e

Z

G WARNINGIf vehicle occupants are seated behind a loadprotection net, they may be squeezed upagainst the load protection net. There is a riskof injury, particularly in the event of brakingmanoeuvres or abrupt changes in direction.Never allow vehicle occupants to sit behindthe load protection net.

The load protection net borders the load com-partment. It protects vehicle occupants fromlight objects and/or luggage slipping or tippingover. Always observe the notes on securingloads (Y page 330).You can install the load protection net at anangle behind the front seats or behind the firstrow of back seats.

Upper retainer

Floor anchorage (example: lashing eyelet secured)

FittingX Remove the load compartment partitioning as

needed (Y page 334).X Clip the load protection net into upper retain-

ers : in such a way that tensioning straps =face the rear of the vehicle.

X Install lashing eyelets A into the nearestavailable guide rail behind the seat legs(Y page 331). Position them at least 5 cmfrom the seat legs to allow subsequent move-ment of the rear seat.

X Check lashing eyelet A is seated correctly.The lashing eyelets should not move.

X Pull tensioning straps = of the load protec-tion net tightly.

X Clip hook ? on tensioning straps = intolashing eyelets A.

X Fold tensioning element ; up.X Pull the loose ends of tensioning straps =

down in the direction of the arrow until ten-sioning straps = are tight.

X Fold tensioning element ; down to achievethe final tension on the straps.

X Fit the load compartment partitioning as nee-ded (Y page 334).

X After travelling a short distance, check thatthe load protection net is taut.

X Retighten if necessary.RemovingX Remove the load compartment partitioning as

needed (Y page 334).X Fold tensioning element ; up.

Tensioning straps = are slack.X Unclip hook ? of tensioning straps = from

lashing eyelets A at the bottom.X Unclip the load protection net from upper

retainers :.X When required, remove lashing eyelets A

(Y page 331).X Fit the load compartment partitioning as nee-

ded (Y page 334).X Roll up the load protection net and fasten it,

still rolled up, using the Velcro fasteners.

332 Load-securing aidsTr

ansp

ortin

g lo

ads

with

the

vehi

cle

Adjusting the front seat with the load pro-tection net installedX Fold tensioning element ; on straps =

upwards.The load protection net slackens.

X Correctly adjust the front seat.X Re-tension the load protection net.

Load compartment stowage space

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf objects, luggage or loads are not secured ornot secured sufficiently, they could slip, tipover or be flung around and thereby hit vehicleoccupants. There is a risk of injury, especiallywhen braking or abruptly changing directions.Always store objects so that they cannot beflung around. Secure objects, luggage orloads against slipping or tipping before thejourney.

G WARNINGIf the luggage compartment partition is notproperly engaged in the fastening fixtures, itcould break free and be flung around duringthe journey. There is a risk of an accident andinjury.Install the luggage compartment partition asdescribed. After fitting the luggage compart-ment partition, always make sure that the lug-gage compartment partition is locked and fol-ded down.

The luggage compartment partition is onlysecured correctly when both levers are locked.Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 328).

Storage compartments

X To open: push handle : in the direction ofthe arrow.Cover ; folds upwards in the middle.

X Slide cover ; back as far as it will go.

X To close: pull cover ; forwards using han-dle :.

X Push cover ; down in the middle until it isfully closed.

Folding up/down

Load-securing aids 333

Tran

spor

ting

load

s w

ith th

e ve

hicl

e

Z

X To fold up to a 70° angle: pull handle : inthe direction of the arrow.The luggage compartment partition isreleased.

X Swing luggage compartment partition ;upwards.

Make sure that the luggage compartment parti-tion is always folded down when the vehicle ismoving.X To fold down: pull luggage compartment par-

tition ; down until it engages.Luggage compartment partition ; is locked.

Removing/fitting

X To remove: fold up luggage compartmentpartition ; (Y page 333).

X Swing lever : inwards.Luggage compartment partition ; pops out.

X Remove luggage compartment partition ;.

If possible, fit the luggage compartment parti-tion with the help of a second person.X To fit: place luggage compartment parti-

tion ; into the vehicle at an angle.X Rotate luggage compartment partition ; in

the vehicle and insert it into the guide rails.The guide rails have triangular markings at theplace to be inserted which must be at thesame height as levers :.

X Swing lever : outwards.Luggage compartment partition ; engages.

X Fold luggage compartment partition ; down.

Carrier systems

G WARNINGWhen a load is transported on the roof, thevehicle's centre of gravity rises and the han-dling changes. If you exceed the maximumroof load, the handling as well as steering andbraking characteristics are severely affected.There is a risk of an accident.Always observe the maximum roof load andadapt your driving style.

You will find information about the maximumroof load under "Lashing points and carrier sys-tems" (Y page 395).

! Make sure that:Rthe screws for the roof carrier are tightened

to a maximum torque of 10 Nm in the threa-ded holes provided andRthere is a minimum bolt penetration of

4 turns.Only fit roof carriers and rear racks that havebeen approved or recommended for

334 Carrier systemsTr

ansp

ortin

g lo

ads

with

the

vehi

cle

Mercedes-Benz vehicles. This will help avoiddamage to the vehicle.

You can fit a roof carrier to the roof and, forexample, a rear-mounted cycle rack on the tail-gate.Fit the protective caps on the securing threadsafter you have removed the roof carrier.If you have fitted a rear rack on the tailgate, theadditional weight reduces the assistance provi-ded by the gas pressure springs when the tail-gate is opened. You will then need more force toopen the tailgate. At low outside temperaturesbelow freezing you will need to provide extrasupport for the tailgate to prevent it from sinkingunintentionally.

Carrier systems 335

Tran

spor

ting

load

s w

ith th

e ve

hicl

e

Z

Useful information

These Operating Instructions describe all mod-els as well as standard and optional equipmentof your vehicle that were available at the time ofgoing to print. Country-specific variations arepossible. Note that your vehicle may not be fit-ted with all of the described functions. This alsoapplies to safety-relevant systems and func-tions.Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops: (Y page 31).

Engine compartment

Bonnet

Important safety notes

G WARNINGAn unlocked bonnet may open up when thevehicle is in motion and block your view. Thereis a risk of an accident.Never unlock the bonnet when driving. Beforeevery trip, ensure that the bonnet is locked.

G WARNINGWhen being opened and closed, the bonnetmay suddenly fall into the closed position.There is a risk of injury to persons in the rangeof movement of the bonnet.Open and close the bonnet only when nobodyis in the range of movement.

G WARNINGIf you open the bonnet while the engine isoverheating or while there is a fire in theengine compartment, you could come intocontact with hot gases or other leaking ser-vice products. There is a danger of injury.Allow an overheating engine to cool downbefore opening the bonnet. If there is a fire inthe engine compartment, leave the bonnetclosed and notify the fire brigade.

G WARNINGThere are moving components in the enginecompartment. Certain components may con-tinue to move or suddenly move again evenafter the ignition has been switched off, e.g.the radiator fan. There is a risk of injury.If you have to carry out work in the enginecompartment:Rswitch off the ignitionRnever touch the dangerous areas surround-

ing moving components, e.g. the rotationarea of the fanRremove jewellery and watchesRkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam-

ple, away from moving parts.

G WARNINGThe fuel injection system operates with a highvoltage. If you touch the live components, youcould receive an electric shock. There is adanger of injury.Never touch components of the fuel injectionsystem when the ignition is switched on.

The live components of the fuel injection systemare, for example, the injectors.

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, theradiator and parts of the exhaust system.There is a risk of injury when accessing theengine compartment.As far as possible, allow the engine to cooldown and only touch the components descri-bed in the following.

If you have to carry out work in the engine com-partment, only touch the components describedin the following:RbonnetRoil dipstickRengine oil filler neck capRwasher fluid reservoir capRcoolant expansion tank cap

336 Engine compartmentM

aint

enan

ce a

nd c

are

Opening the bonnet

G WARNINGIf you open the bonnet while the engine isoverheating or while there is a fire in theengine compartment, you could come intocontact with hot gases or other leaking ser-vice products. There is a danger of injury.Allow an overheating engine to cool downbefore opening the bonnet. If there is a fire inthe engine compartment, leave the bonnetclosed and notify the fire brigade.

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, theradiator and parts of the exhaust system.There is a risk of injury when accessing theengine compartment.As far as possible, allow the engine to cooldown and only touch the components descri-bed in the following.

! Make sure that the windscreen wipers arenot folded away from the windscreen. Other-wise, you could damage the windscreen wip-ers or the bonnet.

Observe the safety notes when you open thebonnet.X Stop your vehicle on level ground, as far away

from traffic as possible.X Switch off the engine.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away

(Y page 189).X Pull release handle : on the bonnet.

The bonnet is released.

X Reach into the gap, push lever ; of bonnetcatch to the left and lift the bonnet.If you open the bonnet approximately 40 cm,the bonnet is opened and held open automat-ically by the gas-filled strut.

Closing the bonnet

G WARNINGCloths or other flammable materials left in theengine compartment can ignite if they comeinto contact with the exhaust system or partsof the engine that heat up. There is a risk offire. After carrying out maintenance work,make sure that no extraneous flammablematerial is left in the engine compartment oron the exhaust system.

! Do not use your hands to push the bonnetdown. You could damage it otherwise.

X Lower the bonnet and allow it to fall withmomentum from a height of approximately30 cm.The bonnet locks audibly.

X Check that the bonnet is correctly locked.If the bonnet can be raised slightly, it is notproperly engaged. If the bonnet is not cor-rectly engaged, open the bonnet again. Letthe bonnet fall with a little more momentum.

Engine compartment 337

Mai

nten

ance

and

car

e

Z

Overview of the engine compartment

: Engine oil filler neck cap (Y page 338); Brake fluid reservoir cap (Y page 342)= Coolant expansion tank cap (Y page 340)? Washer fluid reservoir cap (Y page 342)Regularly check the fluid level and the assemblyfor leaks. If you detect fluid loss, e.g. oil flecks onthe vehicle parking space, consult a qualifiedspecialist workshop immediately.

Engine oil

General notes! Engine oil gets dirty in the course of opera-

tion and its quality and volume are graduallydiminished. Regularly check the oil level, andtop up or have it replaced as needed.

Observe the information on approved engineoils and oil consumption under "Service Prod-ucts and Capacities" (Y page 390).You can check the oil level in the engine:Ron the display of the on-board computerRwith the oil dipstick

Checking the engine oil level electroni-callyIf at extremely low temperatures no engine oillevel is displayed after five minutes, repeat theengine oil level check after another five minutes.If an oil level reading is still not displayed, checkthe engine oil level with the dipstick(Y page 339). Have the engine oil level checkedat a qualified specialist workshop.

To check the level, the ignition must be turnedon and the engine must be shut off once it rea-ches operating temperature. The vehicle mustbe parked on a level surface. Use the steeringwheel buttons.X Park the vehicle on a level surface.X Switch off the engine.X Wait for five minutes.

Wait 5 minutes.X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.X Press ò to call up the list of menus.X Use the 9 or : button to select theService menu.

X Press the a button.X Use the 9 or : button to selectEngine oil level.

X Press the a button.The Engine oil level Measuring now Measurement accurate only if vehi‐cle is level display message appears inthe display while the engine oil level meas-urement is in progress.

The display may show the following messagesafter the engine oil level measurement.

Display message Engine oil level OK–X Action: do not top up oil.

Display message Add X.X l engine oil when next refu‐elling–X Top up with the amount of oil X.X l shown

(Y page 340).X Action: check the engine oil level again

after a few minutes.

Display message Engine oil level Reduce oil level–The oil level is too high.X Action: have excess oil siphoned off.

Display message For engine oil level turn on igni‐tion–X Action: turn the key to position 2 in the

ignition lock.

338 Engine compartmentM

aint

enan

ce a

nd c

are

Display message Waiting period for engine oil level not observed–X Action: repeat the engine oil measurement

after about five minutes if the engine is atnormal operating temperature.

X Repeat the engine oil measurement afterabout 30 minutes if the engine is not atnormal operating temperature.

Display message Engine oil level Not with the engine running–X Action: switch off the engine when it is at

normal operating temperature and waitapproximately five minutes before measur-ing the engine oil level.

Display messageEngine oil level System inoperative–Engine oil level measurement is malfunction-ing.X Action: check the engine oil level using the

oil dipstick (Y page 339).X Have the oil level display checked at a quali-

fied specialist workshop.

Checking the oil level using the oil dip-stick

G WARNINGIf you open the bonnet while the engine isoverheating or while there is a fire in theengine compartment, you could come intocontact with hot gases or other leaking ser-vice products. There is a danger of injury.Allow an overheating engine to cool downbefore opening the bonnet. If there is a fire inthe engine compartment, leave the bonnetclosed and notify the fire brigade.

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, theradiator and parts of the exhaust system.There is a risk of injury when accessing theengine compartment.

As far as possible, allow the engine to cooldown and only touch the components descri-bed in the following.

Oil dipstick and engine oil filler neck (example: pet-rol engine)

Oil dipstick and engine oil filler neck (example: die-sel engine)Only check the oil level when the engine is atnormal operating temperature.X Stop your vehicle on level ground, as far away

from traffic as possible.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away.X Switch off the engine.X Wait for five minutes.X Open the bonnet (Y page 337).X Pull out oil dipstick :.X Wipe oil dipstick : using a lint-free cloth.X Insert oil dipstick : back into the guide tube

as far as it will go and remove it again.If the level is between MIN mark = and MAXmark ;, the oil level is adequate.

X If the oil level has dropped to or below mini-mum mark =, open cap ? and top up theengine oil (Y page 340).The difference in quantity between marks ;and = is approximately:

Engine compartment 339

Mai

nten

ance

and

car

e

Z

R2.5 litres for diesel engines with a poweroutput below 100 kWR2 litres for diesel engines with a power out-

put exceeding 100 kWR1.5 litres for petrol engines

X Close the bonnet.

Topping up the engine oil

G WARNINGIf you open the bonnet while the engine isoverheating or while there is a fire in theengine compartment, you could come intocontact with hot gases or other leaking ser-vice products. There is a danger of injury.Allow an overheating engine to cool downbefore opening the bonnet. If there is a fire inthe engine compartment, leave the bonnetclosed and notify the fire brigade.

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, theradiator and parts of the exhaust system.There is a risk of injury when accessing theengine compartment.As far as possible, allow the engine to cooldown and only touch the components descri-bed in the following.

G WARNINGIf engine oil comes into contact with hot com-ponents in the engine compartment, it mayignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Make sure that engine oil does not spill outover the filler neck. Allow the engine to cooldown and thoroughly clean the componentsthat have come into contact with engine oilbefore you start the engine.

H Environmental noteWhen topping up the oil, take care not to spillany. If oil enters the soil or waterways, it isharmful to the environment.

! Do not add too much oil. Topping up with toomuch engine oil can result in damage to the

engine or to the catalytic converter. Haveexcess engine oil siphoned off.

! Do not use any additives with the engine oil.This could damage the engine.

Example: engine oil filler neckObserve the information regarding approvedmotor oil under "Service products and capaci-ties" (Y page 390).X Open the bonnet (Y page 337).X Unscrew and remove cap :.X Top up the engine oil.X Fit cap : on the filler neck and tighten.

When doing so, make sure that the capengages correctly.

X Check the engine oil level using the oil dip-stick (Y page 339).

X Close the bonnet.

Coolant

G WARNINGService product can be poisonous and haz-ardous to health. There is a risk of injury.Observe the instructions on the respectiveoriginal container when using, storing and dis-posing off service products. Always store ser-vice products in the sealed original container.Always keep service products out of the reachof children.

G WARNINGIf you open the bonnet while the engine isoverheating or while there is a fire in theengine compartment, you could come into

340 Engine compartmentM

aint

enan

ce a

nd c

are

contact with hot gases or other leaking ser-vice products. There is a danger of injury.Allow an overheating engine to cool downbefore opening the bonnet. If there is a fire inthe engine compartment, leave the bonnetclosed and notify the fire brigade.

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, theradiator and parts of the exhaust system.There is a risk of injury when accessing theengine compartment.As far as possible, allow the engine to cooldown and only touch the components descri-bed in the following.

Coolant contains glycol and is therefore poison-ous. Also observe the safety notes in the "Ser-vice products and capacities" section(Y page 386).

G WARNINGThe cooling system is pressurised, particu-larly when the engine is warm. If you open thecap, you could be scalded if hot coolantsprays out. There is a risk of injury.Let the engine cool down before you open thecap. Wear gloves and eye protection. Openthe cap slowly to release the pressure.

Only check the coolant level and/or fill the cool-ant if the vehicle is on a level surface and theengine has cooled down. The coolant tempera-ture must be below 50 †.

! Check the engine cooling and heating sys-tem regularly for leaks.If a large quantity of coolant is lost, have thecause traced and rectified at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf antifreeze comes into contact with hot com-ponents in the engine compartment, it mayignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Let the engine cool down before you top upthe antifreeze. Make sure that antifreeze isnot spilled next to the filler neck. Thoroughly

clean the antifreeze from components beforestarting the engine.

! Take care not to spill any coolant on paintedsurfaces. You could otherwise damage thepaintwork.

Example: cap and coolant expansion tankChecking the coolant levelX Stop your vehicle on level ground, as far away

from traffic as possible.X Switch off the engine.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away.X Open the bonnet (Y page 337).X Allow the engine to cool down.X Unscrew cap : slowly about half a turn anti-

clockwise and allow excess pressure toescape.

X Turn cap : further and remove it from cool-ant expansion tank ;.

X Check the coolant level.If the coolant is up to marker bar = in thefiller neck when cold, there is a sufficientamount of coolant in coolant expansiontank ;.If the coolant is approximately 1.5 cm abovemarker bar = in the filler neck when warm,there is a sufficient amount of coolant in cool-ant expansion tank ;.

Topping up the coolantX If the coolant drops under marker bar = in

the filler neck, top up the coolant.Observe the information on the correct cool-ant mixture ratio and the required water qual-ity under "Service products and capacities"(Y page 392). To prevent damage to theengine cooling system, use only approvedcorrosion inhibitor/antifreeze that complies

Engine compartment 341

Mai

nten

ance

and

car

e

Z

with the Mercedes-Benz Specifications forService Products.

X Replace cap : and tighten in a clockwisedirection.

X Start the engine.X Set the temperature in the vehicle interior to

the maximum output on the air-conditioningsystem control panel.

X After approximately five minutes, switch offthe engine again and allow it to cool down.

X Check the coolant level again and top up thecoolant if necessary.

X Close the bonnet.

Brake fluid

G WARNINGService product can be poisonous and haz-ardous to health. There is a risk of injury.Observe the instructions on the respectiveoriginal container when using, storing and dis-posing off service products. Always store ser-vice products in the sealed original container.Always keep service products out of the reachof children.

Brake fluid is hazardous to health. Also observethe safety notes in the "Service products andcapacities" section (Y page 386).

G WARNINGThe brake fluid continuously absorbs mois-ture from the air. This results in the boilingpoint of the brake fluid lowering. If the boilingpoint of the brake fluid is too low, vapourpockets may form when the brakes are sub-jected to a heavy load. This would impair brak-ing efficiency. There is a risk of an accident.Have the brake fluid renewed at the prescri-bed intervals.

! If the brake fluid level in the brake fluid res-ervoir has fallen to the minimum mark or less,check the brake system immediately forleaks. Also check the thickness of the brakepads/linings. Visit a qualified specialist work-shop immediately.Do not top up the brake fluid. This does notsolve the problem.

! Brake fluid corrodes paint, plastic and rub-ber. If brake fluid comes into contact withpaint, plastic or rubber, rinse with waterimmediately.

Have the brake fluid renewed every two years ata qualified specialist workshop. Observe theinformation regarding brake fluid in the "Serviceproducts and capacities" section (Y page 392).

The clutch mechanism and the brake system areoperated hydraulically using brake fluid.Check the brake fluid level regularly, e.g. weeklyor when refuelling.Checking the brake fluid levelX Stop your vehicle on level ground, as far away

from traffic as possible.X Switch off the engine.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away.X Open the bonnet (Y page 337).X Check the brake fluid level.

The brake fluid level is adequate if the level isbetween the MIN mark and MAX mark onbrake fluid reservoir :.

X Close the bonnet.

Washer fluid

G WARNINGIf you open the bonnet while the engine isoverheating or while there is a fire in theengine compartment, you could come intocontact with hot gases or other leaking ser-vice products. There is a danger of injury.Allow an overheating engine to cool downbefore opening the bonnet. If there is a fire inthe engine compartment, leave the bonnetclosed and notify the fire brigade.

342 Engine compartmentM

aint

enan

ce a

nd c

are

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, theradiator and parts of the exhaust system.There is a risk of injury when accessing theengine compartment.As far as possible, allow the engine to cooldown and only touch the components descri-bed in the following.

G WARNINGIf windscreen washer concentrate comes intocontact with hot components of the engine orthe exhaust system, it can ignite. There is arisk of fire and injury.Make sure the windscreen washer concen-trate does not come into contact with the fillerneck.

! Only use washer fluid that is suitable forplastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit or MBWinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluid could dam-age the plastic lenses of the headlamps.

Example: washer fluid reservoirAdd windscreen washer concentrate to thewasher fluid all year round. Observe the infor-mation regarding washer fluid under "ServiceProducts and Capacities" (Y page 393).Topping up the washer fluidX Mix the washer fluid to the appropriate mixing

ratio in a container beforehand.X Open the bonnet (Y page 337).X Pull cap : on the washer fluid reservoir

upwards at the tab.X Top up with the premixed washer fluid.

X Press cap : onto the filler neck until itengages audibly.

X Close the bonnet.

Maintenance

General notes

H Environmental noteObserve measures to protect the environ-ment when working on the vehicle. You mustobserve the legal requirements when dispos-ing of service products, e.g. engine oil. Thisalso includes all components, e.g. filters,which have come into contact with serviceproducts. Any qualified specialist workshopcan provide information about this.Dispose of empty containers, cleaning clothsand care products in an environmentally-responsible manner. Comply with the instruc-tions for use of the care products.Do not run the engine for longer than neces-sary when the vehicle is stationary.

Before carrying out maintenance measures andrepairs, you must read the following documentsrelating to maintenance measures and repairs:Rrelevant sections of the technical documen-

tation such as the Operating Instructions andworkshop informationRlegal stipulations such as work safety regula-

tions and accident prevention regulationsWhen carrying out work underneath the vehicle,you must secure the vehicle using stands withsufficient load-bearing capacity.Never use a vehicle jack instead of stands. Thejack is designed only to raise the vehicle for ashort time when changing a wheel. It is notsuited for carrying out maintenance work underthe vehicle.Please also refer to the notes about qualifiedspecialist workshops (Y page 31).The scope and regularity of the inspection andmaintenance work primarily depend on theoften diverse operating conditions. Specialistknowledge beyond the scope of these OperatingInstructions is required when carrying out test-ing and maintenance work. This work shouldonly be carried out by trained personnel.

Maintenance 343

Mai

nten

ance

and

car

e

Z

The vehicle Maintenance Booklet describes thescope and frequency of maintenance work andcontains additional notes on the implied war-ranty. You will find information about serviceproducts approved by Mercedes-Benz andcapacities under "Service Products and Capaci-ties" (Y page 386).Maintenance services must be carried out inaccordance with the provisions and recommen-dations in the Maintenance Booklet. Not doingso could void any warranty claims and lead torefusal of goodwill gestures after the manufac-turer has submitted a damage report.Observe the information under "Mercedes-BenzOriginal Parts" (Y page 33).

Service interval display

General notesThe service interval display informs you of thenext service due date. Information on the type ofservice and service intervals can be found in theService Booklet.

i The service interval display does not provideinformation about the engine oil level. Theservice interval display should therefore notbe confused with the engine oil level display.

For example, the display shows one of the fol-lowing service messages for a few seconds:RService A in XX days RService A due RService A overdue by XX days Then either the remaining time or distance untilthe next service due date is displayed. If theservice due date has been exceeded, theelapsed time or distance travelled after the over-due service date is shown. The letter in the dis-play message indicates which service is due. Astands for a minor service and B for a major ser-vice.A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. aMercedes-Benz Service Centre, will reset theservice interval display after the service workhas been carried out. You can also obtain furtherinformation on maintenance work, for example.

The prescribed service interval is based on nor-mal vehicle use. Service work will need to beperformed more frequently than prescribed ifthe vehicle is operated under more arduous con-ditions or with higher loads. Such arduous con-ditions include:Rregular city driving with frequent intermediate

stopsRdriving predominantly short distancesRfrequent operation in mountainous terrain or

on poor road surfacesRleaving the engine idling for long periods on a

frequent basisIn these or similar operating conditions, havethe air filter, engine oil and oil filter, for example,replaced more frequently. If the vehicle is sub-jected to higher loads, the tyres must bechecked more frequently. Further informationcan be obtained at a qualified specialist work-shop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Hiding service messagesX Press the a or % button on the steering

wheel.

Calling up the service due dateUse the steering wheel buttons.X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.X Press ò to call up the list of menus.X Press 9 or : to select the Service

menu and press a to confirm.X Press 9 or : to select the ASSYST PLUS submenu and press a to confirm.The display shows the service due date.

ASSYST (Active Service System)On vehicles with ASSYST, you are informedwhen the next service is due depending on thedistance covered and driving style.The time between individual service due datescan be extended by:Rdriving with care at moderate engine speedsRavoiding short journeys where the engine

does not reach its operating temperatureASSYST only records periods of time duringwhich the battery is connected. To make surethat you have the vehicle serviced at the correcttime, you should therefore subtract periods

344 MaintenanceM

aint

enan

ce a

nd c

are

when the battery is disconnected from the daysshown.

Battery

Important safety notesWork on the battery, e.g. removing or installing,requires specialist knowledge and the use ofspecial tools. Therefore, always have work onthe battery carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop.

G WARNINGWork carried out incorrectly on the batterycan lead, for example, to a short circuit andthus damage the vehicle electronics. This canlead to function restrictions applying tosafety-relevant systems, e.g the lighting sys-tem, the ABS (anti-lock braking system) or theESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The oper-ating safety of your vehicle may be restricted.You could lose control of the vehicle, forexample:Rwhen brakingRin the event of abrupt steering manoeuvres

and/or when the vehicle's speed is notadapted to the road conditions

There is a risk of an accident.In the event of a short circuit or a similar inci-dent, contact a qualified specialist workshopimmediately. Do not drive any further. Alwayshave work on the battery carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.

Further information can be found under "ABS"(Y page 69) and under "ESP®" (Y page 70).

G WARNINGElectrostatic build-up can lead to the creationof sparks, which could ignite the highly explo-sive gases of a battery. There is a risk of anexplosion.Before handling the battery, touch the vehiclebody to remove any existing electrostaticbuild-up.

The flammable gas mix is produced when thebattery is charged or when the vehicle is jump-started.Always make sure that neither you nor the bat-tery is electrostatically charged. Electrostaticcharging results, for example, from:Rwearing synthetic clothingRfriction between clothing and the seatRdragging or pushing the battery across carpet

flooring or any other synthetic materialsRrubbing the battery with cloths or towelsComply with the following safety precautionsand take protective measures when handlingbatteries.

Risk of explosion. Explosive oxyhy-drogen is produced when batteriesare being charged. Only charge bat-teries in well-ventilated areas.Fire, naked flames and smoking areprohibited when working on the bat-tery. Avoid creating sparks.

Battery acid is caustic. Avoid con-tact with the skin, eyes or clothing.Wear acid-proof protective gloves. Ifskin or clothes are splashed withacid, neutralise the splashes imme-diately with soapy water or an acidneutraliser, then clean the affectedareas with water. Consult a doctor ifnecessary.Wear eye protection. When mixingwater and acid, the liquid can splashinto your eyes. Rinse acid splashesto the eyes immediately with cleanwater and contact a doctor immedi-ately.Keep children at a safe distance.Children are not able to assess thedangers posed by batteries andacid.When handling batteries, observethe safety precautions and specialprotective measures contained inthese Operating Instructions.

H Environmental noteBatteries contain pollutants.It is illegal to dispose of themwith the household rubbish.They must be collected sep-arately and disposed of in an

Battery 345

Mai

nten

ance

and

car

e

Z

environmentally responsiblerecycling system.Dispose of batteries in anenvironmentally responsiblemanner. Take dischargedbatteries to a qualified spe-cialist workshop or to a col-lection point for used batter-ies.

Observe the following notes:RRecharge the battery more frequently, if you:

- predominantly drive short distances- predominantly drive at low outside temper-

atures- leave the vehicle parked for a lengthy

periodIn order for the batteries to achieve their max-imum possible service life, they must alwaysbe sufficiently charged.RConsult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre if

you wish to leave your vehicle parked up for along period of time.RWhen you park the vehicle, remove the key if

you do not require any electrical consumers.The vehicle will then use very little energy,thus conserving battery power.RIf your vehicle requires jump-starting, or if you

wish to provide jump-starting assistance toanother vehicle, only use the jump-startingconnection point in the engine compartment(Y page 358).RFor safety reasons, only replace a battery with

a battery that has been recommended byMercedes-Benz.These batteries have been tested andapproved for your vehicle. They provideincreased impact protection to prevent vehi-cle occupants from suffering acid burnsshould the battery be damaged in the event ofan accident.RHave the battery removed at a qualified spe-

cialist workshop.

Installation locationsYour vehicle may be equipped with two batterieslocated in the seat base of the right-hand frontseat, depending on the equipment version:Rstarter batteryRauxiliary battery

Disconnecting and removing

G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a battery produ-ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs orsparks are created, the hydrogen gas canignite. There is a risk of an explosion.RMake sure that the positive terminal of a

connected battery does not come into con-tact with vehicle parts.RNever place metal objects or tools on a bat-

tery.RIt is important that you observe the descri-

bed order of the battery terminals whenconnecting and disconnecting a battery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the

battery poles with identical polarity areconnected.RIt is particularly important to observe the

described order when connecting and dis-connecting the jump leads.RNever connect or disconnect the battery

terminals while the engine is running.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.Do not breathe in any battery gases. Do notlean over the battery. Keep the batteries outof the reach of children. Immediately rinse offbattery acid thoroughly with plenty of cleanwater and seek medical attention at once.

! You should have all work involving the bat-tery carried out at a qualified specialist work-shop.

346 BatteryM

aint

enan

ce a

nd c

are

If, in exceptional circumstances, you need todisconnect the battery yourself, please makesure that:RSecure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling

away.RYou have switched off the engine and

removed the key. Make sure the ignition isswitched off. Check to see that there are noindicator lamps lighting in the instrumentcluster. Electronic components such as thealternator may otherwise be damaged.RAfter the battery has been disconnected,

the parking brake is automaticallyengaged. You can then no longer move thevehicle.RFor vehicles with automatic transmission,

the transmission is locked in position Pafter disconnecting the battery. You canthen no longer move the vehicle.RYou have first removed the negative termi-

nal and then the positive terminal. Nevermix up the terminal clamps. The vehicle'selectronics system may otherwise be dam-aged.

The battery and the cover of the positive ter-minal clamp must be fitted securely duringoperation.

The starter battery is located in the seat base ofthe right-hand front seat.X Switch off all electrical consumers.X Switch off the engine and remove the key

from the ignition lock.X Open the front door on the right-hand side.X Using both hands, remove the stowage com-

partment upwards from the seat base.The stowage compartment can be opened asfar as the B-pillar.

X Remove the stowage compartment by pullingupwards at an angle from the seat base.

Open seat baseX Remove screws = from holder ?.X Remove holder ?.X Remove breather hose ; from the top of the

battery.X Pull the battery out of the seat base until the

negative clamp can be released and removed.X Disconnect the negative clamp from negative

terminal :.X Remove the negative clamp in such a way that

the battery cable terminal no longer touchesnegative terminal :.

Example: starter batteryX Remove the battery from the seat base and

place it on the door sill panel as shown. Ifnecessary, hold the battery by handles C.

X Remove the positive clamp cover from posi-tive terminal A.

X Loosen positive clamp B on positive terminalA.

X Remove positive clamp B in such a way thatthe battery cable terminal no longer touchespositive terminal A.

X Lift the battery from the door sill panel byhandles C.

Battery 347

Mai

nten

ance

and

car

e

Z

Reconnecting and fitting

G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a battery produ-ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs orsparks are created, the hydrogen gas canignite. There is a risk of an explosion.RMake sure that the positive terminal of a

connected battery does not come into con-tact with vehicle parts.RNever place metal objects or tools on a bat-

tery.RIt is important that you observe the descri-

bed order of the battery terminals whenconnecting and disconnecting a battery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the

battery poles with identical polarity areconnected.RIt is particularly important to observe the

described order when connecting and dis-connecting the jump leads.RNever connect or disconnect the battery

terminals while the engine is running.

! Always connect the battery in the orderdescribed below. Never mix up the terminalclamp disconnection/connection order andnever mix up the terminal clamps. You willotherwise damage the vehicle electronics.Always observe the specified installationposition for the positive terminal. The positiveterminal may otherwise come into contactwith vehicle parts. This results in a risk ofshort circuit and fire.

The starter battery is located in the seat base ofthe right-hand front seat.

Example: starter battery

X Place the battery on the door sill panel asshown and secure with handles = if neces-sary.

X Connect positive clamp ; to positive termi-nal :. Always observe the positive terminalinstallation position shown when doing so.The positive lead must be routed parallel tothe side of the battery housing in the connec-tion area.

X Place the positive clamp cover on positiveterminal :.

X Fold both handles = down onto the battery.X Push the battery into the seat base until the

negative terminal can be connected.X Connect the negative clamp to negative ter-

minal ?.X Push the battery into the seat base as far as it

will go.

Open seat base with fitted starter batteryX Push breather hose A onto the battery con-

nection at the top.X Guide holder C over the lower side of the

battery housing and the threads for screwsB.

X Screw on holder C with screws B.The battery is secured to prevent slipping.

X Replace the stowage compartment diagonallyfrom above into the battery compartment andclose it.The stowage compartment must engage audi-bly at the top into the two brackets on the seatbase.

Carry out the following work after connectingthe battery:X Reset the side window (Y page 91).X Reset the exterior mirrors (Y page 123).X Reset the electric sliding doors (Y page 85).X Reset the EASY-PACK tailgate (Y page 88).

348 BatteryM

aint

enan

ce a

nd c

are

Charging

G WARNINGA discharged battery can freeze at tempera-tures below freezing point. When jump-start-ing the vehicle or charging the battery, gasescan escape from the battery. There is a risk ofan explosion.Allow the frozen battery to thaw out beforecharging it or jump-starting.

If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up inthe instrument cluster when temperatures arelow, it is probably because the discharged bat-tery has frozen. Should this be the case, do notjump-start the vehicle or charge the battery. Theservice life of a thawed battery may be shorter.Start-up behaviour may deteriorate, particularlyat low temperatures. Have the thawed batterychecked at a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosivegases can escape from the battery. There is arisk of an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, naked flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficientventilation while charging and jump-starting.Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.Do not breathe in any battery gases. Do notlean over the battery. Keep the batteries outof the reach of children. Immediately rinse offbattery acid thoroughly with plenty of cleanwater and seek medical attention at once.

! Only charge the fitted battery with a batterycharger that has been tested and approved byMercedes-Benz. This device allows the bat-tery to be charged when it is fitted in the vehi-cle. The vehicle's electronics system may oth-erwise be damaged.

! Only charge the battery using the jump-startconnection point.

A battery charger unit specially adapted forMercedes-Benz vehicles and tested and

approved by Mercedes-Benz is available as anaccessory. Only this device permits the chargingof the battery in its installed position. Contact aMercedes-Benz Service Centre for informationand availability. Read the operating instructionsfor your charger before charging the battery.Recharge the battery more frequently if you usethe vehicle mainly for short trips and/or drive atlow outside temperatures.Only charge the fitted battery with a batterycharger that has been tested and approved byMercedes-Benz, using the jump-start connec-tion point in the engine compartment.X Connect the battery charger to the positive

terminal and earth terminal in the same orderas when connecting the donor battery in thejump-starting procedure (Y page 358).

i If a battery is not fitted and not in service,you should charge it every three months. Thishelps to counteract self-discharging and pre-vent damage to the battery.

Care! Dirty battery terminals and battery surfaces

cause creepage current. This can cause thebatteries to discharge.

! Do not use any cleaning agents containingfuel. Cleaning agents containing fuel corrodethe battery housing.

! If dirt enters the battery cell, self-discharg-ing of the battery is increased and the batterymay be damaged.

The following points on battery care must beobserved:X Regularly check the battery terminals and the

fastening of the negative cable to the chassisto ensure that they are firmly seated.

X Always keep the battery terminals and batterysurfaces clean and dry.

X Lightly grease the undersides of the batteryterminals with acid-resistant grease.

X Only clean the battery casing with a commer-cially available cleaning product.

Battery 349

Mai

nten

ance

and

car

e

Z

Care

Notes on care

G WARNINGIf you use openings in the bodywork ordetachable parts as steps, you could:Rslip and/or fallRdamage the vehicle and cause yourself to

fall.There is a danger of injury.Always use secure climbing aids, e.g. a suita-ble ladder.

! Do not use the lower guide on the slidingdoor (carriage) as a step. You could otherwisedamage its trim and/or the mechanism of thesliding door

! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any ofthe following:Rdry, rough or hard clothsRabrasive cleaning agentsRsolventsRcleaning agents containing solventsDo not scrub.Do not touch the surfaces or protective filmswith hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice scraper.You could otherwise scratch or damage thesurfaces and protective film.

! Do not park up your vehicle for a long periodof time immediately after cleaning, particu-larly after cleaning the wheel rim with wheelcleaner. Wheel cleaner may lead to increasedcorrosion of the brake discs and pads. Youshould therefore drive for a few minutes aftercleaning. By heating up the brakes, the brakediscs and pads dry. The vehicle can then beparked up for a long period of time.

H Environmental noteOnly wash your vehicle at a wash baydesigned for this purpose. Dispose of emptycontainers and used cleaning products in anenvironmentally responsible manner.

H Environmental noteDispose of empty packaging and cleaningcloths in an environmentally responsible man-ner.

Regular care of your vehicle is a condition forretaining quality in the long term.Use care products and cleaning agents recom-mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Washing the vehicle and cleaning thepaintwork

Automatic car wash

G WARNINGBraking efficiency is reduced after the vehiclehas been washed. There is a risk of an acci-dent.After washing the vehicle, brake carefullywhile paying attention to the traffic conditionsin order to restore full braking efficiency.

! Make sure that the automatic car wash issuitable for the size of the vehicle.Before washing the vehicle in an automaticcar wash, fold in the exterior mirrors andremove any additional aerials. Otherwise, theexterior mirror, aerial or the vehicle itselfcould be damaged.Make sure that the exterior mirrors are fullyfolded out again and that any aerials are refit-ted when you leave the automatic car wash.

! Make sure that:Rthe side windows and the roof are com-

pletely closedRthe climate control blower is switched offRthe windscreen wiper switch is at position

0The vehicle could otherwise be damaged.

You can wash the vehicle in an automatic carwash from the very start.Wash off excess dirt before cleaning the vehiclein an automatic car wash.After putting the vehicle through an automaticcar wash, wipe off wax from the windscreen andthe wiper blades. This will prevent smears and

350 CareM

aint

enan

ce a

nd c

are

reduce wiping noises caused by residue on thewindscreen.

Washing by handIn some countries, washing by hand is onlyallowed at specially equipped washing bays.Observe the legal requirements of the countryyou are currently in when washing by hand.X Do not use hot water and do not wash the

vehicle in direct sunlight.X Use a soft car sponge.X Use a mild cleaning agent, e.g. a Mercedes-

Benz approved car shampoo.X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a gen-

tle jet of water.X Do not point the water jet directly towards the

air inlet grilles.X Use plenty of water and rinse out the sponge

frequently.X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry

thoroughly with a chamois.X Do not let the cleaning agents dry on the

paintwork.When using the vehicle in winter, remove alltraces of road salt deposits carefully and assoon as possible.

High-pressure cleaning equipment

G WARNINGThe water jet of circular-jet nozzles (dirt grind-ers) can cause damage not visible from theoutside to tyres or chassis components. Com-ponents damaged in this way can unexpect-edly fail. There is a risk of an accident.Do not use high-pressure cleaners with circu-lar-jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have dam-aged tyres or chassis components replacedimmediately.

! Never use a high-pressure cleaner in thevehicle interior. The pressurised water cre-ated by the high-pressure cleaner and theassociated spray could cause considerabledamage to the vehicle.

! When using a high-pressure cleaner, keep aminimum distance of approximately 30 cmbetween the high pressure nozzle and thevehicle parts. Do not use a high-pressure

cleaner with a round jet nozzle. Parts of thevehicle or engine can otherwise be damaged.

! Keep the water jet moving constantly whilecleaning. This will avoid causing damage tothe vehicle.Do not point the water jet at:Rdoor jointsRreversing cameraRair bellowsRbrake hosesRwheel balance weightsRelectrical componentsRelectrical plug connectorsRsealsRdrive train, especially not at the intermedi-

ate bearing of the propeller shaft

! The exhaust gas aftertreatment compo-nents may only be cleaned once they havecooled down. Otherwise, the sensors may bedamaged.Never point the water jet directly into theexhaust pipe. Otherwise, the exhaust gasaftertreatment components may be dam-aged.

Cleaning the engine! Water must not enter intake or ventilation

openings. When cleaning with high pressurewater or steam cleaners, the spray must notbe aimed directly at electrical components orthe terminals of electrical lines.Preserve the engine after the engine has beencleaned. Protect the belt drive system fromexposure to the preservative agent.

Also observe the information under "High-pres-sure cleaners" (Y page 351).

Cleaning the paintwork! Do not affix:RstickersRfilmsRmagnetic plates or similar itemsto painted surfaces. You could otherwisedamage the paintwork.

Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected bycorrosion and damage caused by inadequate

Care 351

Mai

nten

ance

and

car

e

Z

care cannot always be completely repaired. Insuch cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop.X Remove impurities immediately, where pos-

sible, whilst avoiding rubbing too hard.X Soak insect remains with insect remover and

rinse off the treated areas afterwards.X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off

the treated areas afterwards.X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, oils,

fuels and greases by rubbing gently with acloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighterfluid.

X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.X Use silicone remover to remove wax.

Cleaning chrome parts! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid-

based cleaning agents, such as sanitarycleanser or wheel cleaner.

Impurities combined with the effects of road gritand corrosive environmental factors may causeflash rust to form on the surface. You canrestore the original shine of the chrome parts bycleaning them regularly, especially in winter andafter washing the vehicle.X Clean the chrome parts with a chrome care

product tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning the windows

G WARNINGIf the windscreen wipers are set in motionwhen cleaning the windscreen or wiperblades, you could become trapped. There is adanger of injury.Always switch off the windscreen wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windscreen orwiper blades.

! Do not fold the windscreen wipers awayfrom the windscreen unless the bonnet isclosed. Otherwise, you could damage thebonnet.

! Hold the wiper arm securely when foldingback. The windscreen could be damaged ifthe wiper arm hits against it suddenly.

! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive cleaningagents, solvents or solvent-based cleaningagents to clean the inside of the windows/windscreen. Do not touch the inside of thewindows/windscreen with hard items suchas an ice scraper or a ring. Otherwise, thewindows/windscreen could be damaged.

! Clean the water drainage channels of thewindscreen and the rear window at regularintervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals andpollen may under certain circumstances pre-vent water from draining away. This can leadto corrosion damage and damage to elec-tronic components.

X Clean the inside and outside of the windowswith a damp cloth and a cleaning agent that isrecommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Exterior

Cleaning the wheels! Do not use any acidic or alkaline cleaning

agents. They can cause corrosion on thewheel bolts or the retainer springs for thewheel-balancing weights.

! Do not park up your vehicle for a long periodof time immediately after cleaning, particu-larly after cleaning the wheel rim with wheelcleaner. Wheel cleaner may lead to increasedcorrosion of the brake discs and pads. Youshould therefore drive for a few minutes aftercleaning. By heating up the brakes, the brakediscs and pads dry. The vehicle can then beparked up for a long period of time.

If you clean the wheels with a high-pressurecleaner, observe the safety notes for the high-pressure cleaner (Y page 351). You could oth-erwise damage the tyres.

Cleaning the wiper blades

G WARNINGIf the windscreen wipers are set in motionwhen cleaning the windscreen or wiperblades, you could become trapped. There is adanger of injury.

352 CareM

aint

enan

ce a

nd c

are

Always switch off the windscreen wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windscreen orwiper blades.

! Do not fold the windscreen wipers awayfrom the windscreen unless the bonnet isclosed. Otherwise, you could damage thebonnet.

! Do not pull on the wiper blade. Otherwise,the wiper blade could be damaged.

! Do not clean wiper blades too often and donot rub them too hard. Otherwise, the graph-ite coating could be damaged. This couldcause wiper noise.

! Hold the wiper arm securely when foldingback. The windscreen could be damaged ifthe wiper arm hits against it suddenly.

X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lockor remove the key.

X Fold the wiper arms away from the wind-screen until you feel them engage.

X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a dampcloth.

X Fold back the wiper arms before switching onthe ignition.

Cleaning the exterior lighting! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths

that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitablecleaning agents or cleaning cloths couldscratch or damage the plastic lenses of theexterior lighting.

X Clean the plastic covers of the exterior light-ing with a damp sponge and a mild cleaningagent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo, orwith cleaning cloths.

Cleaning the mirror turn signal! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths

that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitablecleaning agents or cleaning cloths couldscratch or damage the plastic lenses of themirror turn signals.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn sig-nals in the exterior mirror housing using a wetsponge and a mild cleaning agent, e.g.Mercedes-Benz car shampoo, or by usingcleaning cloths.

Cleaning the sensors! Do not use dry, coarse or hard cloths and do

not scrub. You will otherwise scratch or dam-age the sensors.If you clean the sensors with a high-pressurecleaner or steam cleaner, observe the infor-mation provided by the manufacturer regard-ing the distance to be maintained betweenthe vehicle and the nozzle of the high-pres-sure cleaner.

X Clean drive system sensors : with water, carshampoo and a soft cloth.

Cleaning the reversing camera! Do not use dry, coarse or hard cloths and do

not scrub. You could otherwise scratch ordamage the lens of the reversing camera.When cleaning the vehicle with a high-pres-sure or steam cleaner, observe a minimumdistance of 50 cm to the reversing camera. Donot aim directly at the reversing camera. Youcould otherwise damage the reversing cam-era.

The camera lens is next to the tailgate handle.If the camera flap is open, make sure that you donot apply any wax to the camera lens when wax-ing the vehicle. If necessary, remove the waxusing water, shampoo and a soft cloth.X Make sure that the engine is switched off and

the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock.X Make sure that the Activation by R gear

function is selected in the Rear view camera

Care 353

Mai

nten

ance

and

car

e

Z

menu of the multimedia system (see the sep-arate operating instructions).

X Engage reverse gear or select transmissionposition R.The reversing camera flap opens.

X Clean the camera lens with clean water and asoft cloth.

You can also open the reversing camera flapdirectly using a menu function:X Select the Open camera cover function from

the Rear view camera menu of the multi-media system (see the separate operatinginstructions).The display then shows the Please wait...message for approximately three seconds.The reversing camera flap opens.

The reversing camera flap closes automaticallywhen the key is turned to position 0 or 1 in theignition lock.

Cleaning the 360° camera! Do not use dry, coarse or hard cloths and do

not scrub. You could otherwise scratch ordamage the lenses of the cameras.When cleaning the vehicle with a high-pres-sure or steam cleaner, maintain a minimumdistance of 50 cm from the cameras. Do notaim directly at the cameras. Otherwise, youcould damage the cameras.

The system includes the reversing camera nextto the handle on the tailgate, the front camera inthe radiator trim and the two cameras in theexterior mirrors.Make sure that you do not apply any wax to thecamera lenses when waxing the vehicle. If nec-essary, remove the wax using water, shampooand a soft cloth.X Clean all camera lenses with clean water and

a soft cloth.To clean the reversing camera, it must be foldedout.X Make sure that the engine is switched off and

the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock.X Make sure that the Activation by R gear

function is selected in the 360° camera menuof the multimedia system (see the separateoperating instructions).

and

X Engage reverse gear or select transmissionposition R.The reversing camera flap opens.

orX Select the Open camera cover function from

the 360° camera menu of the multimediasystem (see the separate operating instruc-tions).The display then shows the Please wait...message for approximately three seconds.The reversing camera flap opens.

The reversing camera flap closes automaticallywhen the key is turned to position 0 or 1 in theignition lock.

Cleaning the sliding doorThe care instructions do not apply to electricsliding doors.

X Remove foreign objects from the vicinity ofcontact surfaces ; and contact pins : ofthe sliding door.

X Clean contact surfaces ; and contactpins : with a mild cleaning agent and a softcloth.Do not oil or grease contact plates ; andcontact pins :.

Cleaning the trailer tow hitch

H Environmental noteDispose of oily and greasy cloths in an envi-ronmentally-responsible manner.

! Do not clean the ball coupling with a high-pressure cleaner. Do not use solvents.

! Follow the additional notes on trailer towhitch care (see the manufacturer's operatinginstructions).

354 CareM

aint

enan

ce a

nd c

are

: Locking balls; Guide pin= Ball joint? Guide facesA CapB LockC HandwheelClean the ball coupling if it is dirty or corroded.X Remove traces of rust, e.g. with a wire brush.X Remove dirt with a clean, lint-free cloth or

brush.X After cleaning, lightly oil or grease posi-

tions : to ? and the ball coupling mountingon the vehicle.

X Treat lock B under cap A and the shaft ofhandwheel C with acid- and resin-free oil.

X Check that the vehicle's trailer tow hitch isworking properly.

You can also have the maintenance work on theball coupling and the trailer tow hitch carried outby a qualified specialist workshop.

Interior

Cleaning the interior! Observe the following points when wet

cleaning the vehicle interior:RNever use a high-pressure cleaner.RMake sure that no liquids enter or are left in

gaps or cavities.REnsure that there is sufficient ventilation

when cleaning.RMake sure that the vehicle interior dries

completely after cleaning.

Cleaning the display! For cleaning, do not use any of the following:Ralcohol-based thinner or petrolRabrasive cleaning agentsRcommercially-available household cleaning

agentsThese may damage the display surface. Donot put pressure on the display surface whencleaning. This could lead to irreparable dam-age to the display.

X Switch off the display and let it cool down.X Clean the display surface with a commercially

available microfibre cloth and cleaner forTFT/LCD displays.

X Dry the display surface using a dry microfibrecloth.

Cleaning the plastic trim

G WARNINGCare products and cleaning agents containingsolvents can cause surfaces in the cockpit tobecome porous. This could result in plasticparts breaking away when the airbags aredeployed. There is a danger of injury.Do not use care products and cleaning agentscontaining solvents to clean the cockpit.

! Do not affix the following to plastic surfaces:RstickersRfilmsRscented oil bottles or similar itemsYou could otherwise damage the plastic.

! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent orsunscreen to come in contact with the plastictrim. This maintains the high-quality look ofthe surfaces.

X Wipe the plastic trim and the cockpit with adamp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfibre cloth.

X Heavy soiling: use a mild detergent or careproducts and cleaning agents recommendedand approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Care 355

Mai

nten

ance

and

car

e

Z

Cleaning the steering wheel and gearleverX Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth.X Vehicles with leather upholstery: after

cleaning, use leather care agents that havebeen recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.

Cleaning the trim elements! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents

such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, polishesor waxes. There is otherwise a risk of damag-ing the surface.

X Wipe the trim elements with a damp, lint-freecloth, e.g. a microfibre cloth.

X Heavy soiling: use care products and clean-ing agents recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.

Cleaning the seat covers! Microfibre cloths should not be used to

clean covers made from genuine or artificialleather. The microfibre cloth can damage thecover if used frequently.

! Clean:Rartificial leather covers with a cloth mois-

tened with a solution containing 1% deter-gent, e.g. washing-up liquid.Rcloth covers with a microfibre cloth mois-

tened with a solution containing 1% deter-gent, e.g. washing-up liquid. Wipe entireseat sections carefully to avoid leaving visi-ble lines. Leave the seat to dry afterwards.Cleaning results depend on the type of dirtand how long it has been there.Rgenuine leather covers carefully with a

damp cloth, then wipe the covers downwith a dry cloth. Make sure that the leatherdoes not become soaked. Otherwise, theleather could become rough or cracked.Only use leather care agents that havebeen tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain these from a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

i Please keep in mind that:Rleather covers are a natural product and, as

such, are subject to a natural ageing proc-ess. Leather may react differently, e.g.

increased wrinkling, to certain environmen-tal influences (such as high humidity orintense heat).Rregular care is essential to make sure that

the appearance and comfort of the coversare retained over time.

To clean genuine leather covers:X Remove any dust, crumbs etc. If necessary,

carefully vacuum-clean the seat covers.X Carefully wipe the leather seat covers with a

damp cloth.X Wipe over again with a dry cloth.

Make sure that the leather does not becomesoaked, especially perforated parts.

X Then treat the leather seats with a leathercare foam.Only use leather care agents that have beentested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.Observe the manufacturer's instructions.

Cleaning the seat belts

G WARNINGSeat belts may be severely weakened ifbleached or coloured. This may lead to theseat belts, for example, tearing or failing in anaccident. There is an increased risk of injury,possibly even fatal.Never bleach or colour seat belts.

! Do not clean the seat belts using chemicalcleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts attemperatures above 80 † or in direct sun-light.

Remove any stains or dirt immediately. This willavoid residue or damage.X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solution.

Cleaning the roof lining and carpetsX Roof lining: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush

or dry shampoo.X Carpets: use the carpet and textile cleaning

agents recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.

356 CareM

aint

enan

ce a

nd c

are

Useful information

These Operating Instructions describe all mod-els as well as standard and optional equipmentof your vehicle that were available at the time ofgoing to print. Country-specific variations arepossible. Note that your vehicle may not be fit-ted with all of the described functions. This alsoapplies to safety-relevant systems and func-tions.Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops: (Y page 31).

Where will I find...?

Vehicle tool kit

General notesThe vehicle tool kit is in the rear stowage com-partment.Apart from some country-specific variants, vehi-cles without a spare wheel are not equippedwith tyre-changing tools. If your vehicle is equip-ped with tyre-changing tools, these are in thevehicle tool kit in the rear stowage compart-ment. Some tools for changing a wheel are spe-cific to the vehicle. For more information onwhich tools are required and approved to per-form a wheel change on your vehicle, consult aqualified specialist workshop.Necessary tyre-changing tools can include, forexample:RJackRWheel wrenchRRatchet ring spanner

i The jack has a maximum weight of 7.5 kgdepending on the vehicle's equipment.You will find the maximum load-bearing capa-city of the jack stated on the adhesive labelattached to the jack.The jack is maintenance-free. If there is amalfunction, please contact a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Stowage compartment in the rear

Stowage compartment in the rear on the right-handside of the vehicleUnlocking and removing the coverX If necessary, fold up the rear seat.X Turn top rotary catch : clockwise and bot-

tom rotary catch : anti-clockwise.X Remove cover ;.Inserting and engaging the coverX Position cover ;.X Turn top rotary catch : anti-clockwise and

bottom rotary catch : clockwise.X Fold down the rear seat.

Removing the vehicle tool kit and jackX Remove clamping strap ?.X Lift off tool holder cover =.X Carefully pull the tool kit and jack upwards out

of the stowage compartment. Lift the jackslightly before removing it and turn it to adiagonal position in the stowage compart-ment.

Stowing the vehicle tool kit and the jackX Before stowing, wind the jack to the fully

closed position and place it so that the hand

Where will I find...? 357

Brea

kdow

n as

sist

ance

wheel is facing forwards and the plate isfacing inwards.

X Place the jack and vehicle tool kit into the toolholder.

X Replace cover = of the tool holder.X Tighten clamping strap ?.

Warning triangle

Removing the warning triangleThe warning triangle is located in the stowagecompartment in the driver's door.

Setting up the warning triangle

X Fold stand = out sideways from the bottom.X Pull side reflectors ; upwards to form a tri-

angle and lock them at the top using press-stud :.

i When using the warning triangle you mustobserve the legal requirements for the coun-try in which you are currently driving.

First-aid kit

Removing the first-aid kitThe first-aid kit is located in the stowage com-partment in the co-driver's door.

i Check the expiry date on the first-aid kit atleast once a year. Replace any expired ormissing contents.Observe the legal requirements of the countryin which you are currently driving.

Fire extinguisher

Removing the fire extinguisher

X Open the clasp of holder ;.X Take fire extinguisher : out of its holder.On vehicles with a swivelling front seat, the fireextinguisher bracket is located on the side of theseat base.

i Please read the instructions on the fireextinguisher carefully and familiarise yourselfwith its operation. Have the fire extinguisherrefilled after each use and checked every oneto two years. It may otherwise fail in an emer-gency.Observe the legal requirements of the countryin which you are currently driving.

Flat tyre

You will find a sticker with the Mercedes-BenzService24h telephone number on the B-pillar onthe driver's side, for example.For vehicles with a spare wheel, information onbreakdown assistance in the event of a flat tyrecan be found under "Wheels and tyres"(Y page 376).

Jump-starting

Important safety notes

G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosivegases can escape from the battery. There is arisk of an explosion.

358 Jump-startingBr

eakd

own

assi

stan

ce

Particularly avoid fire, naked flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficientventilation while charging and jump-starting.Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.Do not breathe in any battery gases. Do notlean over the battery. Keep the batteries outof the reach of children. Immediately rinse offbattery acid thoroughly with plenty of cleanwater and seek medical attention at once.

G WARNINGA discharged battery can freeze at tempera-tures below freezing point. When jump-start-ing the vehicle or charging the battery, gasescan escape from the battery. There is a risk ofan explosion.Allow the frozen battery to thaw out beforecharging it or jump-starting.

! Vehicles with a petrol engine: avoidrepeated and lengthy starting attempts. Oth-erwise, the non-combusted fuel may damagethe catalytic converter.

If the indicator and warning lamps in the instru-ment cluster do not light up at low tempera-tures, the discharged battery may have frozen.In this case you may neither charge the batterynor jump-start the vehicle. The service life of athawed battery may be shorter. Start-up behav-iour may deteriorate, particularly at low temper-atures. Have the thawed battery checked at aqualified specialist workshop.Do not use a rapid charging device to start thevehicle. If your vehicle's battery is discharged,the engine can be jump-started from anothervehicle or from a donor battery using jumpleads. For this purpose, the vehicle has a jump-starting connection point in the engine com-partment.When jump-starting, observe the followingpoints:RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If

the other vehicle's battery is not accessible,

jump-start the vehicle using a donor batteryor a jump-starting device.RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the

engine and exhaust system are cold.RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen.

Let the battery thaw first.RJump-starting may only be performed from

batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V.ROnly use jump leads that have a sufficient

cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.RIf the battery is fully discharged, attach the

battery of another vehicle for a few minutesbefore attempting to start. This charges theempty battery a little.RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.Make sure that:RThe jump leads are not damaged.RBare parts of the terminal clamps do not come

into contact with other metal parts while thejump leads are connected to the battery.RThe jump leads cannot come into contact with

parts such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.These parts move when the engine is startedand while it is running.

Jump leads and further information regardingjump-starting can be obtained from any quali-fied specialist workshop.

Before reconnecting the jump leadsX Apply the parking brake.X Vehicles with automatic transmission:

shift the transmission to position P.X Vehicles with manual transmission:

engage neutral.X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. audio

equipment, blower.X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock

and remove it.X Open the bonnet (Y page 337).

Jump-starting 359

Brea

kdow

n as

sist

ance

Z

Connecting the terminal clamp

X Push contact protection cover : of the jump-starting connection point backwards againstthe spring force as far as it will go.The jump-starting connection point is visible.

Terminal connection diagramX Remove the cover from positive terminal =

of the donor vehicle's battery.

X Connect the positive terminal clamp of thejump lead to positive terminal = of the donorvehicle's battery, and then to positive termi-nal A of the jump-starting connection point.

X Run the donor vehicle's engine at idlingspeed.

X Connect the negative terminal clamp of thejump lead to negative terminal ; of thedonor vehicle's battery, and then to earthcontact ? of your own vehicle.

X Insert the key into the ignition lock and startthe engine.You can now switch electrical consumersback on except the lighting system.

X Before disconnecting the jump leads, let theengine run for several minutes.

X Disconnect the negative terminal of the jumplead from earth contact ? and then from

negative terminal ; of the donor vehicle'sbattery.

X Disconnect the positive terminal clamp of thejump lead from positive terminal A on thejump-starting connection point, and thenfrom positive terminal = of the donor vehi-cle's battery.Contact protection cover : is automaticallyreturned forwards to its original position bythe spring force and the jump-starting con-nection point is closed.

X Position the cover on positive terminal = ofthe donor vehicle's battery.You can now switch on the lighting system.

X Have the battery checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Tow-starting and towing away

Important safety notes

G WARNINGSafety-relevant functions are restricted or notavailable if:Rthe engine is not running.Rthe brake system or the power steering is

malfunctioningRthe voltage supply or the vehicle's electrical

system is malfunctioning.If your vehicle is towed, significantly greaterforce may be required to steer the vehicle orto brake. There is a risk of an accident.In such circumstances, use a towing bar.Make sure that the steering is moving freelybefore towing.

G WARNINGIf the steering wheel lock is engaged, the vehi-cle can no longer be steered. There is a risk ofan accident.Always switch on the ignition when towingwith a tow rope or a towing bar.

360 Tow-starting and towing awayBr

eakd

own

assi

stan

ce

G WARNINGWhen towing or tow-starting another vehicleand its weight is greater than the permissiblegross weight of your vehicle, the:Rtowing eye may be torn offRcar/trailer combination may swerve or

even overturnThere is a risk of an accident.When towing or tow-starting another vehicle,its weight should not be greater than the per-missible gross weight of your vehicle.

Information on the permissible gross vehicleweight can be found on the vehicle identificationplate (Y page 386).

! When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, thevehicle brakes automatically in certain situa-tions. To avoid damage to the vehicle, deac-tivate DISTRONIC PLUS in the following orsimilar situations:Rwhen towing awayRin a car wash

! Make sure that the electric parking brake isreleased. If the electric parking brake is faulty,visit a qualified specialist workshop.

! Secure the tow rope or tow bar to the towingeye or trailer tow hitch only. The vehicle mayotherwise be damaged.

! Observe the following points when towingwith a tow rope:Rsecure the tow rope on the same side on

both vehicles.Rmake sure that the tow rope is not longer

than legally permitted. Mark the tow rope inthe middle, e.g. with a white cloth(30 x 30 cm). This makes other road usersaware that a vehicle is being towed.Ronly secure the tow rope to the towing eye.Robserve the brake lamps of the towing vehi-

cle while driving. Always maintain a dis-tance so that the tow rope does not sag.Rdo not use steel cables or chains to tow

your vehicle. You could otherwise damagethe vehicle.

! Do not use the towing eye for recovery, thiscould damage the vehicle. If in doubt, recoverthe vehicle with a crane.

! Pull away smoothly when towing away ortow-starting a vehicle. If the tractive power istoo high, the vehicles could be damaged.

! Shift the automatic transmission to N anddo not open the driver's or front passenger'sdoor during towing. The automatic transmis-sion may otherwise shift to position P, whichcould damage the transmission.

! You may tow the vehicle for a maximum of50km. A towing speed of 50 km/h must notbe exceeded.For towing distances over 50 km, the entirevehicle must be lifted up and transported.

When towing away, you must observe the legalrequirements for the country in which you arecurrently driving.It is better to have the vehicle transported thanto have it towed.Have the vehicle transported on a transporter ortrailer if it has transmission damage.Vehicles with automatic transmission: whentowing a vehicle, the automatic transmissionmust be in position N. If the automatic trans-mission cannot be shifted to position N, havethe vehicle transported on a transporter ortrailer.The battery must be connected and charged.Otherwise, you:Rcannot turn the key to position 2 in the igni-

tion lockRcannot release the parking brakeRcannot shift the transmission to position N on

vehicles with automatic transmissionBefore the vehicle is towed, switch off the auto-matic locking feature (Y page 81). You couldotherwise become locked out when pushing ortowing the vehicle.Deactivate tow-away protection before the vehi-cle is towed away (Y page 73).

Tow-starting and towing away 361

Brea

kdow

n as

sist

ance

Z

Fitting/removing the towing eye

Fixture for the front towing eye in the bumper

Rear towing eye under the bumperIf you tow or tow-start a vehicle, attach the tow-ing device to rear towing eye ;.If your vehicle is equipped with a trailer towhitch, attach the towing device to the trailer towhitch (Y page 239).Fitting the front towing eyeX Take the towing eye and screwdriver from the

vehicle tool kit (Y page 357).X Press the arrow on the cover : and remove

cover : from the opening.You will see the fixture for the towing eye.

X Screw in the towing eye clockwise to the stop.X Insert the screwdriver into the towing eye and

tighten the towing eye.X Stow the screwdriver in the vehicle tool kit

(Y page 357).Removing the front towing eyeX Remove the screwdriver from the vehicle tool

kit (Y page 357).X Insert the screwdriver into the towing eye and

turn the screwdriver anti-clockwise.X Unscrew the towing eye.

X Insert cover : with the lug at the top andpress it in at the bottom until it engages.

X Stow the towing eye and the screwdriver withthe vehicle tool kit (Y page 357).

Towing with the rear axle raisedTowing with rear axle raised is only possible for vehicles without 4MATIC.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towedwith the front or rear axle raised; otherwise,the transmission may be damaged.

Vehicles with 4MATIC may be towed with bothaxles on the ground or loaded and transported.

! Vehicles with automatic transmission mustnot be towed with the rear axle raised. Thecar/trailer combination may otherwiseswerve or even overturn.

! The ignition must be switched off if you aretowing the vehicle with the rear axle raised.Intervention by ESP® could otherwise dam-age the brake system.

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps(Y page 128).

X Turn the front wheels to the straight-aheadposition.

X Release the parking brake.X If necessary, turn the key to position 0 in the

ignition lock and remove it.X Take the key with you when leaving the vehi-

cle.X Do not exceed the towing speed of 50 km/h.Please observe the important safety instruc-tions when towing your vehicle with the rear axleraised (Y page 360).

Towing away the vehicle with bothaxles on the ground

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the steering wheel lock is engaged, the vehi-cle can no longer be steered. There is a risk ofan accident.Always switch on the ignition when towingwith a tow rope or a towing bar.

362 Tow-starting and towing awayBr

eakd

own

assi

stan

ce

! Do not exceed the towing speed of50 km/h. You could otherwise damage thetransmission.

Please observe the important safety notesbefore towing your vehicle (Y page 360).

Towing away vehicles with manualtransmissionX Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock.X Switch on the hazard warning lamps

(Y page 128).X Shift the transmission to neutral.X Leave the key in position 1 in the ignition lock.X Depress the brake pedal and release the park-

ing brake.X Release the brake pedal.X Do not exceed the towing speed of 50 km/h.

Towing away vehicles with automatictransmissionX Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.X Depress and hold the brake pedal.X Shift the automatic transmission to position

N.X Leave the key in position 2 in the ignition lock.X Switch on the hazard warning lamps

(Y page 128).X Release the parking brake.X Release the brake pedal.X Do not exceed the towing speed of 50 km/h.

Recovering a vehicle that is stuck! When recovering a vehicle that has become

stuck, pull it as smoothly and evenly as pos-sible. If the tractive power is too high, thevehicles could be damaged.

If the drive wheels get trapped on loose ormuddy ground, recover the vehicle with theutmost care. This is especially the case if thevehicle is laden.Never attempt to recover a vehicle with a trailerattached.Pull out the vehicle backwards, if possible, usingthe tracks it made when it became stuck.

Transporting the vehicle! You may only secure the vehicle by the

wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such asaxle or steering components. Otherwise, thevehicle could be damaged.

The towing eye or trailer tow hitch can be usedto pull the vehicle onto a trailer or transporter ifyou wish to transport it.X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.X Vehicles with manual transmission: shift

the transmission to the neutral position.X Vehicles with automatic transmission:

shift the transmission to position N.X Release the parking brake.If the vehicle is loaded:X Vehicles with manual transmission:

engage 1st gear or reverse gear.X Vehicles with automatic transmission:

shift the transmission to position P.X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock

and remove it.X Make sure the parking brake is applied.X Lash down the vehicle.

Tow-starting (emergency enginestarting)

Vehicles with automatic transmission! Do not tow-start vehicles with automatic

transmission. You could otherwise damagethe automatic transmission.

You can find information on jump-starting under"Jump-starting“ (Y page 358).

Vehicles with manual transmissionBefore tow-starting:RMake sure that the battery is connected and

charged. The ignition cannot be switched onotherwise and there will be no steering andbraking assistance.RUse a towing bar and attach it to the front

towing eye (Y page 362) only.

Tow-starting and towing away 363

Brea

kdow

n as

sist

ance

Z

RAllow the engine and the exhaust system tocool down first.RIf the engine does not start after a few sec-

onds, try a jump-starting procedure using thebattery of another vehicle (Y page 358).

Tow-starting procedure:X Switch on the hazard warning lamps

(Y page 128).X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.X Shift the transmission to neutral.X Release the parking brake.X Have the vehicle tow-started.X Engage second or third gear and release the

clutch slowly. Do not depress the acceleratorpedal.

X When the engine has been started, immedi-ately depress the clutch pedal fully and shiftto neutral.

X Stop at a suitable place in accordance withthe traffic conditions.

X Apply the parking brake to prevent the vehiclefrom rolling away.

X After removing the towing eye, switch off thehazard warning lamps.

Fuses

The fuse allocation chart and important safetyinformation on the fuses can be found in the"Fuse allocation chart" supplement.

364 FusesBr

eakd

own

assi

stan

ce

Useful information

These Operating Instructions describe all mod-els as well as standard and optional equipmentof your vehicle that were available at the time ofgoing to print. Country-specific variations arepossible. Note that your vehicle may not be fit-ted with all of the described functions. This alsoapplies to safety-relevant systems and func-tions.Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops: (Y page 31).

Important safety notes

G WarningA flat tyre severely impairs the driving, steer-ing and braking characteristics of the vehicle.There is a risk of an accident.Do not drive with a flat tyre. Immediatelyreplace the flat tyre with your spare wheel, orconsult a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf wheels and tyres of the wrong size are used,the wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay be damaged. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Always replace wheels and tyres with thosethat fulfil the specifications of the originalpart.When replacing wheels, make sure to fit thecorrect:RdesignationRtypeWhen replacing tyres, make sure to fit thecorrect:RdesignationRmanufacturerRtype

Accessories that are not approved for your vehi-cle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used cor-rectly can impair operating safety.

Before purchasing and using non-approvedaccessories, visit a qualified specialist work-shop and enquire about:RsuitabilityRlegal stipulationsRfactory recommendationsYou can obtain information about tyres thathave been specially designed and approved foryour vehicle from a Mercedes-Benz ServiceCentre.The determined vehicle speed is displayed in theinstrument cluster and is important for the con-trol of the driving safety systems and drivingsystems. The accuracy of the speedometer andodometer displays is legally prescribed. Deter-mining the speed is dependent on the wheel sizeor the rolling circumference of the wheels andtherefore on their rim diameter. The rim diame-ter is always specified in inches.For this reason, the vehicle control units can becoded for the following wheel size categories:

Wheel size category 1

195/65 R 16 C

205/65 R 16 C

225/60 R 16 C

225/55 R 17 C

225/55 R 17 XL

245/45 R 18 XL

Wheel size category 2

225/55 R 17 XL

245/45 R 18 XL

245/45 R 19 XL

i Mercedes-Benz recommends that you staywithin the wheel size category when changinga wheel. That way you avoid having to recodethe control units.

Observe the following special considerations fortaxis and hire cars: due to the legally prescribedaccuracy of the speedometer and odometer dis-plays, only 245/45 R 19 RF tyres are permittedin the wheel size category 2.If you change the vehicle wheel size when instal-ling new tyres, such as when switching to winter

Important safety notes 365

Whe

els

and

tyre

s

Z

tyres, make sure it corresponds to the correctwheel size category. If the wheel size categorychanges, the vehicle control units must be reco-ded at a qualified specialist workshop.Otherwise the accuracy of the speedometer andodometer displays will be outside the toleranceas specified by law. It can also be lower, that isthe current driving speed is then faster than thespeed shown on the speedometer. If the devia-tion is outside of the tolerance range, drivingsafety systems and driving systems may beoperationally impaired or may detect a malfunc-tion and switch themselves off. Additionally, thedisplay accuracy of the reversing camera or the360° camera is impaired, since the wheel size isimportant for its calibration.Information on the dimensions and types ofwheels and tyres for your vehicle can be foundunder "Wheel/tyre combinations"(Y page 380).Information on your vehicle's tyre pressures canbe found:Rin the tyre pressure table inside the fuel filler

flap (Y page 369)Runder "Tyre pressure tables" (Y page 373)Runder "Tyre pressure" (Y page 369)Modifications to the brake system or wheels arenot permitted. The use of spacers or brake dustshields is not permitted. This invalidates thegeneral operating permit for the vehicle.Further information on wheels and tyres can beobtained at any qualified specialist workshop.

Operation

Information for a journeyCheck the tyre pressures when the vehicle isheavily laden and, if necessary, adjust(Y page 369).While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noisesand unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pull-ing to one side. This may indicate that thewheels or tyres are damaged. If you suspect thata tyre is defective, reduce your speed immedi-ately. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible tocheck the wheels and tyres for damage. Hiddentyre damage could also be causing the unusualhandling characteristics. If you find no signs ofdamage, have the tyres and wheels checked at aqualified specialist workshop.

When parking your vehicle, make sure that thetyres do not get deformed by the kerb or otherobstacles. If it is necessary to drive over kerbs,speed humps or similar elevations, try to do soslowly and not at a sharp angle. Otherwise, thetyres, particularly the sidewalls, may be dam-aged.

Regular wheel and tyre checks

G WARNINGDamaged tyres can cause tyre inflation pres-sure loss. As a result, you could lose control ofyour vehicle. There is a risk of accident.Check the tyres regularly for signs of damageand replace any damaged tyres immediately.

Check the wheels and tyres of your vehicle fordamage regularly, i.e. at least every two weeks,as well as after driving off-road or on roughroads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of tyrepressure. Pay particular attention to damagesuch as:Rcuts in the tyresRpuncturesRtears in the tyresRbulges on tyresRdeformation or severe corrosion on wheelsRegularly check the tyre tread depth and thecondition of the tread across the whole width ofall the tyres (Y page 367). If necessary, turn thefront wheels to full lock in order to inspect theinner side of the tyre surface.All wheels must have a valve cap to protect thevalve against the ingress of dirt and moisture.Do not fit anything onto the valve other than thestandard valve cap or other valve caps approvedfor your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Do not fitany other valve caps or systems, e.g. tyre pres-sure monitoring systems.Regularly check the pressure of all the tyres,particularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tyrepressure if necessary (Y page 369).The service life of tyres depends on various fac-tors, including the following:Rdriving styleRtyre pressureRmileage

366 OperationW

heel

s an

d ty

res

Tyre tread

G WARNINGInsufficient tyre tread will reduce tyre trac-tion. The tyre is no longer able to dissipatewater. This means that on wet road surfaces,the risk of aquaplaning increases, in particularwhere speed is not adapted to suit the drivingconditions. There is a risk of accident.If the tyre pressure is too high or too low, tyresmay exhibit different levels of wear at differ-ent locations on the tyre tread. Thus, youshould regularly check the tread depth andthe condition of the tread across the entirewidth of all tyres.Minimum tyre tread depth for:Rsummer tyres: 3 mmRM+S tyres: 4 mmFor safety reasons, replace the tyres beforethe legally prescribed limit for the minimumtyre tread depth is reached.

Selecting, fitting and renewing tyresROnly fit tyres and wheels of the same type and

make.RIf you change wheel size when installing new

tyres, make sure they correspond to the cor-rect wheel size category (Y page 365). If theassignment changes without recoding thecontrol units in the vehicle, the speedometerwill not display the speed accurately. Drivingsafety systems and driving systems may thenbe operationally impaired or may detect afault and switch themselves off.ROnly fit tyres of the correct size onto the

wheels.RRun in new tyres at moderate speeds for the

first 100 km.RDo not drive with tyres which have too little

tread depth, as this significantly reduces thetraction on wet roads (aquaplaning).RReplace the tyres after six years at the latest,

regardless of wear. This also applies to thespare wheel.

Winter operation

General notesHave your vehicle winterproofed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop at the onset of winter.If you install M+S tyres and change the wheelsize, make sure they correspond to the correctwheel size category. (Y page 365). If the assign-ment changes without recoding the controlunits in the vehicle, the speedometer will notdisplay the speed accurately. Driving safety sys-tems and driving systems may then be opera-tionally impaired or may detect a fault andswitch themselves off.Prior to the onset of winter, ensure that snowchains are stowed in the vehicle (Y page 368).Snow chains cannot be fitted on all wheel/tyrecombinations. Observe the restrictions on theuse of snow chains under "Wheel/tyre Combi-nations" (Y page 381).Also observe the notes in the "Changing awheel" section (Y page 376).

Driving with summer tyresAt temperatures below +7 †, summer tyres loseelasticity and therefore traction and brakingpower. Change the tyres on your vehicle toM+S tyres. Using summer tyres at very coldtemperatures could cause tears to form,thereby damaging the tyres permanently.Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility forthis type of damage.

M+S tyres

G WARNINGWheel and tyre dimensions as well as the typeof tyre can vary between the spare wheel andthe wheel to be replaced. When the sparewheel is fitted, driving characteristics may beseverely affected. There is a risk of an acci-dent.To prevent risks:Ryou should therefore adapt your driving

style and drive carefully.Rnever fit more than one spare wheel that

differs from the wheel to be replaced.

Winter operation 367

Whe

els

and

tyre

s

Z

Ronly use a spare wheel that differs from thewheel to be replaced for a short time.Rhave a spare wheel that differs from the

wheel that has been changed replaced atthe nearest qualified specialist workshop.You must observe the correct wheel andtyre dimensions as well as the wheel type.

G WARNINGM+S tyres with a tyre tread depth of less than4 mm are not suitable for use in winter as theydo not provide sufficient traction. There is arisk of accident.M+S tyres with a tread depth of less than4 mm must be replaced.

Use winter tyres or all-season tyres at temper-atures below +7 †. Both types of tyre are iden-tified by the M+S marking.Only winter tyres bearing the i snowflakesymbol in addition to the M+S marking providethe best possible grip in wintry road conditions.Only these tyres will allow driving safety sys-tems such as ABS and ESP® to function opti-mally in winter. These tyres have been devel-oped specifically for driving in snow.Use M+S tyres of the same make and tread on allwheels to maintain safe handling characteris-tics.Always observe the maximum permissiblespeed specified for the M+S tyres you have fit-ted.If you fit M+S tyres that have a lower maximumpermissible speed than the maximum designspeed of the vehicle, affix a corresponding warn-ing label in the driver's field of vision. You canobtain this at a qualified specialist workshop.If you fit M+S tyres and change the wheel size inthe process, check that the tyres are assigned tothe wheel size group (Y page 365). If the assign-ment changes without recoding the controlunits in the vehicle, the speedometer will notdisplay the speed accurately. Driving safety sys-tems and driving systems may then be opera-tionally impaired or may detect a fault andswitch themselves off.Vehicles with SPEEDTRONIC: under these cir-cumstances, you should also use permanentSPEEDTRONIC to restrict the maximum designspeed of the vehicle so that it does not exceed

the maximum permissible speed of theM+S tyres (Y page 201).Once you have fitted the winter tyres:X Check the tyre pressure (Y page 369).X Restart the tyre pressure monitor

(Y page 372).

Snow chains

G WARNINGIf you have fitted snow chains to the frontwheels, they may scrape against the vehiclebody or chassis components. This couldcause damage to the vehicle or the tyres.There is a risk of an accident.To avoid hazardous situations:Rnever fit snow chains on the front wheelsRfit snow chains to the rear wheels in pairs.

G WARNINGIf you drive too fast with snow chains fitted,they may snap. As a result, you could injureothers and damage the vehicle. There is a riskof an accident.Observe the maximum permissible speed foroperation with snow chains.

When driving with snow chains fitted, do notexceed the maximum permissible speed of50 km/h. When using snow chains, pleaseobserve the legal requirements of the country inwhich you are driving.

! Before fitting the snow chains, check themfor damage. Damaged or worn snow chainsmay snap and damage the following compo-nents:RwheelRwheel housingRwheel suspensionTherefore, only use snow chains that are inperfect condition. Observe the manufactur-er's installation instructions.

! Vehicles with steel wheels: if you fit snowchains on steel wheels, you may damage thehub caps. Remove the hub caps from the rel-evant wheels before fitting the snow chains.

368 Winter operationW

heel

s an

d ty

res

Snow chains offer better traction in wintry roadconditions.Information about snow chains can be obtainedfrom any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.When fitting snow chains, please bear the fol-lowing points in mind:RSnow chains cannot be fitted on all wheel/

tyre combinations. Observe the approved tyreand snow chain dimensions when fitting thesnow chains. Observe the restrictions on theuse of snow chains under "Wheel/tyre Com-binations" (Y page 381).Rfit snow chains only in pairs and only to the

rear wheels. Observe the manufacturer'sinstallation instructions.Ruse snow chains only when the road surface is

completely snow-covered. Remove the snowchains as soon as possible when you come toa road that is not snow-covered.Rlocal regulations may restrict the use of snow

chains. Observe the appropriate regulationsbefore fitting snow chains.Rwhen driving with snow chains fitted, do not

exceed the maximum permissible speed of50 km/h.Rcheck the tension of the chains after a dis-

tance of approximately 1.0 km.You may wish to deactivate ESP® when pullingaway with snow chains fitted (Y page 71). Thisway, you can allow the wheels to spin in a con-trolled manner, generating increased propulsiveforce (cutting action).

Tyre pressure

Information on tyre pressure

G WARNINGUnderinflated or overinflated tyres pose thefollowing risks:Rthe tyres may burst, especially as the load

and vehicle speed increase.Rthe tyres may wear excessively and/or

unevenly, which may greatly impair tyretraction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steer-

ing and braking, may be greatly impaired.There is a risk of an accident.

Observe the recommended tyre pressure andcheck the tyre pressure of all the tyres includ-ing the spare wheel:Rat least every two weeksRwhen the load changesRbefore embarking on a longer journeyRfor changed operating conditions, e.g. off-

road drivingIf necessary, correct the tyre pressure.

G WARNINGIf you fit unsuitable accessories onto tyrevalves, the tyre valves may be overloaded andmalfunction, which can cause tyre pressureloss. Due to their design, retrofitted tyre pres-sure monitors keep the tyre valve open. Thiscan also result in tyre pressure loss. There is arisk of accident.Only screw standard valve caps or valve capsspecifically provided by Mercedes-Benz foryour vehicle onto the tyre valve.

G WARNINGIf the tyre pressure drops repeatedly, thewheel, valve or tyre may be damaged. Tyrepressure that is too low may result in a tyreblow-out. There is a risk of accident.RCheck the tyre for foreign objects.RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the

valve is leaking.If you are unable to rectify the damage, con-tact a qualified specialist workshop.

! The pressure difference between tyres onany one axle must be no greater than 10 kPa(0.1 bar/1.5 psi).

H Environmental noteCheck the tyre pressure regularly, at leastevery 14 days.

Tyre pressure 369

Whe

els

and

tyre

s

Z

Example: tyre pressure table on the fuel filler flapYou will find the recommended tyre pressuresfor various operating conditions on the inside ofyour vehicle's fuel filler flap (Y page 185) orunder “Tyre pressure tables” (Y page 373).If tyre sizes are not specified, the tyre pressuresstated on the tyre pressure information tableapply for all tyres approved for this vehicle.If a tyre size precedes a tyre pressure, the fol-lowing tyre pressure information is only valid forthat tyre size.

: Partially laden vehicle; Fully laden vehicleThe tyre pressure information table may alsostate tyre pressures for different vehicle loads.These are defined in the tyre pressure informa-tion table as different numbers of passengersand amounts of luggage. The actual number ofseats may vary – for more information, pleaserefer to the vehicle's registration documents.The tyre pressure values given for partly ladenvehicles are minimum values which offer yougood ride comfort. They are not for towing trail-ers.You can also use the tyre pressure values for afully laden vehicle. These are always permittedand admissible. However, in a partially ladenvehicle, the ride is not as comfortable and fuel

consumption is only minimally reduced. In addi-tion, wear is greater in the middle of the tyretread.For towing trailers, the applicable value for therear tyres is the maximum tyre pressure valuestated in the table inside the fuel filler flap.Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tyrepressure. The outer appearance of a tyre doesnot permit any reliable conclusion about the tyrepressure.On vehicles fitted with the electronic tyre pres-sure monitor, the tyre pressure can be checkedusing the on-board computer.Set the correct tyre pressure before loading thevehicle. Once the vehicle is laden, check the tyrepressures and correct them if necessary.If possible, only correct tyre pressures when thetyres are cold.The tyres are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tyres

out of direct sunlight for at least three hoursandRif the vehicle has not been driven further than

1.6 kmDepending on the ambient temperature, thespeed at which you are driving and the load onthe tyres, the tyre temperature and thus the tyrepressure changes by approximately 10 kPa(0.1 bar/1.5 psi) per 10 †. Take this intoaccount when checking the pressure of warmtyres. Only correct the tyre pressure if it is toolow for the current operating conditions.Driving with a tyre pressure that is too high ortoo low:Rshortens the service life of the tyresRcauses increased tyre damageRhas a negative effect on handling character-

istics and thus driving safety (e.g. due toaquaplaning)

Tyre pressure monitor

General notesIn vehicles with a tyre pressure monitor system,the vehicle's wheels have sensors fitted whichmonitor the tyre pressure in all four tyres. Thetyre pressure monitor warns you if the pressuredrops in one or more of the tyres. The tyre pres-sure monitor only functions if the correspondingsensors are fitted to all wheels.

370 Tyre pressureW

heel

s an

d ty

res

Tyre pressure displayInformation on tyre pressures is shown in thedisplay. After a few minutes of driving, the cur-rent tyre pressure of each tyre is shown in theService menu of the display.For further information on displaying the currenttyre pressures, refer to "Checking the tyre pres-sure electronically" (Y page 371).

Important safety notesIt is the driver's responsibility to set the tyrepressure to the recommended cold tyre pres-sure suitable for the operating conditions(Y page 369).Note that the correct tyre pressure for the cur-rent operating conditions must first be program-med into the tyre pressure monitor. If there is asubstantial loss of pressure, the warning thresh-old for the warning message is aligned to thereference values programmed in. Restart thetyre pressure monitor after adjusting the coldtyre pressure (Y page 372). The current pres-sures are saved as new reference values. Thiswill ensure that a warning message will onlyappear if the tyre pressure drops significantly.The tyre pressure monitor does not warn you if atyre pressure is incorrect. Observe the notes onthe recommended tyre pressure (Y page 369).The tyre pressure monitor is not able to warnyou of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. followingpenetration by a foreign object. In this event,bring the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully.Avoid sudden steering movements.The h warning lamp on the instrument clus-ter shows a detected loss in pressure or a mal-function:Rif the h warning lamp is lit continuously,

the tyre pressure on one or more tyres is sig-

nificantly too low. The tyre pressure monitoris not malfunctioning.Rif the h warning lamp flashes for around a

minute and then remains lit constantly, thetyre pressure monitor is malfunctioning.

The display also shows a message (Y page 280).If the tyre pressure monitor is malfunctioning, itmay be more than ten minutes before the hwarning lamp displays the malfunction. Whenthe error has been rectified, the h warninglamp goes out after a few minutes of driving.The tyre pressure values indicated by the on-board computer may differ from those meas-ured at a filling station with a pressure gauge.The tyre pressures shown by the on-board com-puter refer to those measured at sea level. Athigh altitudes, the tyre pressure values indica-ted by a pressure gauge are higher than thoseshown by the on-board computer. In this case,do not reduce the tyre pressures.If radio transmitting equipment (e.g. cordlessheadphones, two-way radios) is operated insidethe vehicle or in the vicinity of the vehicle, thiscan interfere with the operation of the tyre pres-sure monitor.

Checking the tyre pressure electroni-callyUse the steering wheel buttons.X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.X Press ò to call up the list of menus.X Use the 9 or : button to select theService menu.

X Press the a button.X Use the 9 or : button to select Tyre pressure.

X Press the a button.The current tyre pressure of each wheel isshown in the display.

If the vehicle has been parked for longer than20 minutes, the Tyre pressures will be displayed after a few minutes of driv‐ing message appears in the display.After a teach-in period, the tyre pressure moni-tor automatically detects new wheels or newsensors. As long as clear allocation of the tyrepressure values to the wheel positions is notpossible, the Tyre pressure monitor activemessage is displayed instead of the tyre pres-sure display. The tyre pressures are alreadybeing monitored.

Tyre pressure 371

Whe

els

and

tyre

s

Z

Warning messages of the tyre pressuremonitorIf the tyre pressure monitor detects a loss inpressure in one or more tyres, a warning mes-sage is shown in the display and the h warn-ing lamp comes on.RIf the Please correct tyre pressure

message is shown in the display, the tyrepressure in at least one tyre is too low andmust be corrected at the next opportunity.RIf the Tyre pressure Check tyres mes-

sage is shown in the display, the tyre pressurein one or more tyres has dropped significantlyand the tyres must be checked.RIf the Tyre pressure Caution Tyre mal‐function message is shown in the display,the tyre pressure in one or more tyres is drop-ping suddenly and the tyres must be checked.

Always observe the instructions and safetynotes related to the display messages, whichcan be found in the "Tyres" section(Y page 280).If the wheel positions on the vehicle are inter-changed, the tyre pressures may be displayedfor the wrong positions for a short time. This isrectified after a few minutes of driving; the tyrepressures are then displayed for the correctpositions.

Restarting the tyre pressure monitorWhen you restart the tyre pressure monitor, allexisting warning messages are deleted and thewarning lamps go out. The monitor uses the cur-rently set tyre pressures as the reference valuesfor monitoring. In most cases, the tyre pressuremonitor will automatically detect the new refer-ence values after you have changed the tyrepressure. However, you can also define refer-ence values manually as described here. Thetyre pressure monitor then monitors the newtyre pressure values.Use the steering wheel buttons.X Make sure that the tyre pressure of all four

wheels is set correctly for the current oper-ating conditions. When doing so, observe thenotes under "Tyre pressure" (Y page 369).

X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.X Press ò on the steering wheel to call up

the list of menus.

X Press the 9 or : button on the steeringwheel to select the Service menu.

X Press the a button.X Use the 9 or : button to select Ser‐vice.

X Press the a button.The display shows the current tyre pressure ofeach wheel or the Tyre pressures will be displayed after a few minutes of driving message.

X Press the : button.The display shows the Use current pres‐sures as new reference values mes-sage.

If you wish to confirm the restart:X Press the a button.

After you have driven for a few minutes, thesystem checks whether the current tyre pres-sures are within the specified range. The newtyre pressures are then accepted as refer-ence values and are monitored and displayed.

If you wish to cancel the restart:X Press the % button.

The tyre pressure values stored at the lastrestart will continue to be monitored.

Radio type approval for the tyre pres-sure monitor

Country Radio type approval num-ber

Argentina CNC: H-12336Model: Schrader HSW4

Brazil 0381-13-8001Model: GG4

Jordan Model: MercedesHS Snap in 433 MHzManufacturer:Schrader Electronics Ltd.Type Approval Number:TRC/LPD/2013/48Type Number: LPD

Morocco MR7907 ANRT 201305/03/2013

Moldova 1024

Philippines No: ESD-1306995C

372 Tyre pressureW

heel

s an

d ty

res

Country Radio type approval num-ber

Serbia И 011 13

Singapore Compliance withIDA Standard DA-103365

South Africa TA-2013/461

United ArabEmiratesAbu Dhabiand Dubai

TRA, Registered NO:ER0104996/13Dealer NO: DA0047074/10

Tyre pressure tables

Vehicles with a gross vehicle weight of 2.8 t! The pressure difference between tyres on any one axle must be no greater than 10 kPa (0.1 bar/

1.5 psi).The following tyre pressure values apply to vehicles with:Ra permissible gross vehicle weight of 2.8 tRa permissible axle load of 1490 kg on the front and rear axles andRthe tyres referred to under "Wheel and tyre combinations" (Y page 381)Always observe the notes under "Information on tyre pressure" (Y page 369).Tyre pressure for the spare wheel is 350 kPa (3.5 bar/51 psi).

Partially laden vehicle Fully laden vehicle

Tyre size Front axle Rear axle Front axle Rear axle

195/65 R 16 C 320 kPa(3.2 bar/46 psi)

340 kPa(3.4 bar/49 psi)

360 kPa(3.6 bar/52 psi)

360 kPa(3.6 bar/52 psi)

205/65 R 16 C 300 kPa(3.0 bar/44 psi)

310 kPa(3.1 bar/45 psi)

340 kPa(3.4 bar/49 psi)

340 kPa(3.4 bar/49 psi)

225/60 R 16 C 280 kPa(2.8 bar/41 psi)

290 kPa(2.9 bar/42 psi)

320 kPa(3.2 bar/46 psi)

320 kPa(3.2 bar/46 psi)

225/55 R 17 XL 260 kPa(2.6 bar/38 psi)

260 kPa(2.6 bar/38 psi)

290 kPa(2.9 bar/42 psi)

300 kPa(3.0 bar/44 psi)

245/45 R 18 XL 100W 260 kPa(2.6 bar/38 psi)

260 kPa(2.6 bar/38 psi)

290 kPa(2.9 bar/42 psi)

310 kPa(3.1 bar/45 psi)

Tyre pressure 373

Whe

els

and

tyre

s

Z

Partially laden vehicle Fully laden vehicle

Tyre size Front axle Rear axle Front axle Rear axle

245/45 R 18 XL 100V 270 kPa(2.7 bar/39 psi)

270 kPa(2.7 bar/39 psi)

300 kPa(3.0 bar/44 psi)

310 kPa(3.1 bar/45 psi)

245/45 R 19 XL 102Y 230 kPa(2.3 bar/29 psi)

230 kPa(2.3 bar/29 psi)

250 kPa(2.5 bar/36 psi)

260 kPa(2.6 bar/38 psi)

245/45 R 19 XL 102W 260 kPa(2.6 bar/38 psi)

260 kPa(2.6 bar/38 psi)

280 kPa(2.8 bar/41 psi)

290 kPa(2.9 bar/42 psi)

Vehicles with a gross weight of 3.05 t or 3.1 t without 4MATIC! The pressure difference between tyres on any one axle must be no greater than 10 kPa (0.1 bar/

1.5 psi).The following tyre pressure values apply to vehicles with:Ra permissible gross weight of 3.05 t or 3.1 tRa permissible axle load of 1550 kg on the rear axle andRthe tyres referred to under "Wheel and tyre combinations" (Y page 381)Always observe the notes under "Information on tyre pressure" (Y page 369).Tyre pressure for the spare wheel is 350 kPa (3.5 bar/51 psi).

Partially laden vehicle9 Fully laden vehicle

Tyre size Front axle Rear axle Front axle Rear axle

205/65 R 16 C 300 kPa(3.0 bar/44 psi)

310 kPa(3.1 bar/45 psi)

360 kPa(3.6 bar/52 psi)

360 kPa(3.6 bar/52 psi)

225/60 R 16 C 280 kPa(2.8 bar/41 psi)

290 kPa(2.9 bar/42 psi)

340 kPa(3.4 bar/49 psi)

340 kPa(3.4 bar/49 psi)

225/55 R 17 XL 260 kPa(2.6 bar/38 psi)

260 kPa(2.6 bar/38 psi)

300 kPa(3.0 bar/44 psi)

310 kPa(3.1 bar/45 psi)

245/45 R 18 XL 100W 260 kPa(2.6 bar/38 psi)

260 kPa(2.6 bar/38 psi)

310 kPa(3.1 bar/45 psi)

330 kPa(3.3 bar/48 psi)

245/45 R 18 XL 100V 270 kPa(2.7 bar/39 psi)

270 kPa(2.7 bar/39 psi)

320 kPa(3.2 bar/46 psi)

330 kPa(3.3 bar/48 psi)

9 The tyre pressures for the partially laden vehicle are not valid for the Marco Polo with integrated kitchen.

374 Tyre pressureW

heel

s an

d ty

res

Partially laden vehicle9 Fully laden vehicle

Tyre size Front axle Rear axle Front axle Rear axle

245/45 R 19 XL 102Y 230 kPa(2.3 bar/29 psi)

230 kPa(2.3 bar/29 psi)

260 kPa(2.6 bar/38 psi)

270 kPa(2.7 bar/36 psi)

245/45 R 19 XL 102W 260 kPa(2.6 bar/38 psi)

260 kPa(2.6 bar/38 psi)

290 kPa(2.9 bar/42 psi)

300 kPa(3.0 bar/44 psi)

Vehicles with a gross weight of 3.05 t or 3.1 t and 4MATIC! The pressure difference between tyres on any one axle must be no greater than 10 kPa (0.1 bar/

1.5 psi).Always observe the notes under "Information on tyre pressure" in the vehicle Operating Instructions.The following tyre pressure values apply to vehicles with:Ra permissible gross weight of 3.05 t or 3.1 tR4MATICRa permissible axle load of 1550 kg on the rear axleRthe tyres referred to under "Wheel and tyre combinations" (Y page 381)

Partially laden vehicle9 Fully laden vehicle

Tyre size Front axle Rear axle Front axle Rear axle

225/55 R 17 C 310 kPa(3.1 bar/45 psi)

310 kPa(3.1 bar/45 psi)

350 kPa(3.5 bar/51 psi)

350 kPa(3.5 bar/51 psi)

225/55 R 17 XL 260 kPa(2.6 bar/38 psi)

260 kPa(2.6 bar/38 psi)

310 kPa(3.1 bar/45 psi)

310 kPa(3.1 bar/45 psi)

245/45 R 18 XL 100V 270 kPa(2.7 bar/39 psi)

270 kPa(2.7 bar/39 psi)

330 kPa(3.3 bar/48 psi)

330 kPa(3.3 bar/48 psi)

245/45 R 18 XL 100W 260 kPa(2.6 bar/38 psi)

260 kPa(2.6 bar/38 psi)

320 kPa(3.2 bar/46 psi)

330 kPa(3.3 bar/48 psi)

245/45 R 19 XL 102Y 230 kPa(2.3 bar/29 psi)

230 kPa(2.3 bar/29 psi)

260 kPa(2.6 bar/38 psi)

270 kPa(2.7 bar/39 psi)

245/45 R 19 XL 102W 260 kPa(2.6 bar/38 psi)

260 kPa(2.6 bar/38 psi)

290 kPa(2.9 bar/42 psi)

300 kPa(3.0 bar/44 psi)

9 The tyre pressures for the partially laden vehicle are not valid for the Marco Polo with integrated kitchen.

Tyre pressure 375

Whe

els

and

tyre

s

Z

Vehicles with a gross vehicle weight of 3.2 t! The pressure difference between tyres on any one axle must be no greater than 10 kPa (0.1 bar/

1.5 psi).Always observe the notes under "Information on tyre pressure" in the vehicle Operating Instructions.The following tyre pressure values apply to vehicles with:Ra permissible gross vehicle weight of 3.2 tRa permissible axle load of 1650 kg on the rear axleRthe tyres referred to under "Wheel and tyre combinations" (Y page 381)

Partially laden vehicle9 Fully laden vehicle

Tyre size Front axle Rear axle Front axle Rear axle

225/55 R 17 C 290 kPa(2.9 bar/42 psi)

310 kPa(3.1 bar/45 psi)

350 kPa(3.5 bar/51 psi)

380 kPa(3.8 bar/55 psi)

235/55 R 17 XL 260 kPa(2.6 bar/38 psi)

260 kPa(2.6 bar/38 psi)

280 kPa(3.0 bar/41 psi)

300 kPa(3.0 bar/44 psi)

245/45 R 19 XL 102Y 240 kPa(2.4 bar/35 psi)

240 kPa(2.4 bar/35 psi)

260 kPa(2.6 bar/38 psi)

280 kPa(2.8 bar/41 psi)

245/45 R 19 XL 102W 270 kPa(2.7 bar/38 psi)

270 kPa(2.7 bar/38 psi)

290 kPa(2.9 bar/42 psi)

310 kPa(3.1 bar/45 psi)

Changing a wheel

Interchanging the wheels

G WARNINGInterchanging the front and rear wheels mayseverely impair the driving characteristics ifthe wheels or tyres have different dimensions.The wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay also be damaged. There is a risk of acci-dent.Interchange front and rear wheels only if thewheels and tyres are of the same dimensions.

! On vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure mon-itor, electronic components are located in thewheel.

Tyre-fitting tools should not be applied in thearea of the valve, as this could damage theelectronic components.Only have tyres changed at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Interchanging front and rear wheels of differingdimensions can render the general operatingpermit invalid.Always observe the instructions and safetynotes under "Fitting a wheel" (Y page 377).The wear patterns on the front and rear tyresdiffer, depending on the operating conditions.Interchange the wheels before a clear wear pat-tern has formed on the tyres. The front tyrestypically wear more on the outer shoulder, andthe rear tyres in the centre of the tread.On vehicles that have the same size wheels andtyres, you can interchange the wheels every5,000 to 10,000 km. Maintain the direction oftyre rotation.

9 The tyre pressures for the partially laden vehicle are not valid for the Marco Polo with integrated kitchen.

376 Changing a wheelW

heel

s an

d ty

res

Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and thebrake disc thoroughly every time a wheel isinterchanged. Avoid oily or greasy cleaningagents.Check the tyre pressure and reactivate the tyrepressure monitor if necessary.Check the tyre pressures.

Direction of rotationTyres with a specified direction of rotation haveadditional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of aqua-planing. You will only gain these benefits if thecorrect direction of rotation is observed.An arrow on the sidewall of the tyre indicates itscorrect direction of rotation.You may fit the spare wheel against the directionof rotation. Observe the time restriction on useas well as the speed limitation specified on thespare wheel.

Storing the wheelsWheels that are not being used should be storedin a cool, dry and preferably dark place. Protectthe tyres against oil, grease and fuels.

Fitting a wheel

Vehicle preparationX Stop the vehicle as far away as possible from

traffic and on a level, firm and non-slip sur-face.

X If your vehicle poses a risk to approachingtraffic, switch on the hazard warning lamps.

X Apply the parking brake.X Turn the front wheels to the straight-ahead

position.X Vehicles with manual transmission:

engage 1st gear or reverse gear.X Vehicles with automatic transmission:

shift the transmission to position P.X Switch off the engine.X Passengers should leave the vehicle. Make

sure that the passengers are not endangeredas they do so.

X Make sure that no one is near the danger areawhile the wheel is being changed. Anyonewho is not directly assisting in the wheel

change should, for example, stand behind thebarrier.

X Place the warning triangle or warning lamp ata suitable distance.Observe the legal requirements on the cor-rect use of the warning triangle or warninglamp for the country in which you are cur-rently driving

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away.Observe the safety notes on parking under"Driving and parking" (Y page 189)

X On level terrain: place chocks or other suit-able objects under the front and rear of thewheel that is diagonally opposite the wheel tobe changed.

X On slight inclines: place chocks or othersuitable objects under the wheels on the frontand rear axles opposite the wheel to bechanged.

X If included in the vehicle equipment, take thetyre changing tool kit out of the vehicle tool kit(Y page 357).Apart from some country-specific variants,vehicles are not equipped with tyre-changingtools. Some tools for changing a wheel arespecific to the vehicle. Consult a qualifiedspecialist workshop for more information onwhich tools are required to perform a wheelchange on your vehicle.

X If included in the vehicle equipment, removethe spare wheel from the spare wheel bracket(Y page 383). Observe the safety notes listedunder "Spare wheel" (Y page 382).

X Carefully remove the hub caps.

X Loosen the wheel bolts on the wheel to bechanged in an anti-clockwise direction byabout one turn using wheel wrench :. Do notremove the wheel bolts.

Changing a wheel 377

Whe

els

and

tyre

s

Z

Raising the vehicle

G WARNINGIf you do not position the jack correctly at theappropriate jacking point of the vehicle, thejack could tip over with the vehicle raised.There is a risk of injury.Only position the jack at the appropriate jack-ing point of the vehicle. The base of the jackmust be positioned vertically, directly underthe jacking point of the vehicle.

G WARNINGOn uphill and downhill slopes, the jack couldtip over with the vehicle raised. There is adanger of injury.Do not change wheels on uphill or downhillgradients. Contact a qualified specialist work-shop.

! Only position the jack on the jacking pointsintended for this purpose. You could other-wise damage the vehicle.

Observe the following when raising the vehicle:RTo raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-spe-

cific jack that has been tested and approvedby Mercedes-Benz. If the jack is used incor-rectly, it could tip over while the vehicle israised.RThe vehicle's jack is intended only to raise the

vehicle for a short time when changing awheel. It is not suited for carrying out main-tenance work under the vehicle.RAvoid changing the wheel on uphill and down-

hill slopes.RBefore raising the vehicle, secure it from roll-

ing away by applying the parking brake andinserting wheel chocks. Never disengage theparking brake while the vehicle is raised.RThe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and

non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large,load-bearing underlay must be used. On aslippery surface, a non-slip underlay must beused, e.g. rubber mats.RMake sure the distance between the under-

side of the tyres and the ground does notexceed 3 cm.RNever place your hands or feet under the

raised vehicle.

RNever lie under the raised vehicle.RNever start the engine when the vehicle is

raised.RNever open or close a door or the tailgate

when the vehicle is raised.RMake sure that no persons are present in the

vehicle when the vehicle is raised.

Jacking points : (rubber stoppers) are locatedjust behind the front wheel arches and just infront of the rear wheel arches.X Place jack ; beneath corresponding jacking

points :.X Turn handwheel = until the plate of jack ;

sits securely on jacking point :.X Make sure the base of jack ; is positioned

vertically beneath jacking point :.X Assemble adapter ? and ratchet A from the

vehicle tool kit.X Place adapter ? and ratchet A on the hex-

agon nut of jack ; so that the lettering AUF/UP is visible.

X Turn ratchet A in the AUF/UP direction untilthe tyre is raised a maximum of 3 cm off theground.When doing so, jack ; may move to one ofthe side support surfaces.

Removing a wheel! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt. The

threads of the wheel bolts and wheel hubscould otherwise be damaged when the boltsare tightened.

378 Changing a wheelW

heel

s an

d ty

res

X Unscrew the wheel bolts.X Remove the wheel.

Fitting a new wheel

G WARNINGOiled or greased wheel bolts or damagedwheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheelbolts to come loose. As a result, you couldlose a wheel while driving. There is a risk ofaccident.Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event ofdamage to the threads, contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop immediately. Have thedamaged wheel bolts or hub threadsreplaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.

G WARNINGIf you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is raised, the jack could tipover. There is a risk of injury.Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is on the ground.

Always observe the instructions and safetynotes on "Changing a wheel" (Y page 376).Only use wheel bolts that have been designedfor the wheel and the vehicle. For safety rea-sons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that youonly use wheel bolts which have been approvedfor Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the respectivewheel.

! On vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure mon-itor, electronic components are located in thewheel.Tyre-fitting tools should not be applied in thearea of the valve, as this could damage theelectronic components.Only have tyres changed at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact sur-faces.

X Slide the new wheel onto the wheel hub andpush it on.

X Screw in the wheel bolts and tighten themlightly.

Lowering the vehicle

G WARNINGThe wheels could work loose if the wheel nutsand bolts are not tightened to the specifiedtightening torque. There is a risk of accident.Have the tightening torque immediatelychecked at a qualified specialist workshopafter a wheel is changed.

:—A Wheel boltsX Place the adapter and the ratchet on the hex-

agon head nut of the jack such that the let-tering AB/DOWN is visible.

X Turn the ratchet in the AB/DOWN directionuntil the vehicle is once again standing firmlyon the ground.

X Put the jack aside.X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise

pattern in the sequence indicated (: to A).

Changing a wheel 379

Whe

els

and

tyre

s

Z

Tighten the wheel bolts to the following tight-ening torques:RSteel wheel 200 NmRLight-alloy wheel 180 Nm

X Turn the jack back to its out-of-use position.X Stow the jack and the rest of the tyre-change

tool kit in the vehicle again.X Wheel with hub cap: position the opening for

the tyre valve in the hub cap over the tyrevalve.

X Push the edge of the hub cap onto the wheelrim with both hands until it engages intoplace. Make sure the hub cap retainingcatches engage on the steel wheel.

X If included in the vehicle equipment, securethe faulty wheel in the spare wheel bracket(Y page 383). Otherwise, transport the faultywheel in the luggage compartment.

X Check the tyre pressure of the newly fittedwheel and adjust it if necessary.Observe the recommended tyre pressure(Y page 369).Vehicles with the tyre pressure monitor sys-tem: all fitted wheels must be equipped withfunctioning sensors.

X Retighten the wheel bolts to the specifiedtightening torque after driving 50 km.

When using a wheel/spare wheel with a new ornewly painted wheel rim, have the wheel boltsretightened again after approximately 1,000 to5,000 km. Observe the specified tightening tor-que.

Wheel and tyre combinations

General notes! Retreaded tyres are neither tested nor rec-

ommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previ-ous damage cannot always be detected onretreaded tyres. As a result, Mercedes-Benzcannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreadedtyres are fitted. Do not fit used tyres if youhave no information about their previoususage.

! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use tyres, wheels andaccessories which have been speciallyapproved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.

These tyres have been specially adapted foruse with the driving safety systems, such asABS or ESP®.Only use tyres, wheels or accessories testedand approved by Mercedes-Benz. Certaincharacteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noiseemissions or fuel consumption, may other-wise be adversely affected. In addition, whendriving with a load, tyre dimension variationscould cause the tyres to come into contactwith the bodywork and axle components. Thiscould result in damage to the tyres or thevehicle.Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for dam-age resulting from the use of tyres, wheels oraccessories other than those tested andapproved.Further information on wheels, tyres andapproved combinations can be obtained fromany qualified specialist workshop.

! Large wheels: the lower the section widthfor a certain wheel size, the lower the ridecomfort is on poor road surfaces. Roll comfortand suspension comfort are reduced and therisk of damage to the wheels and tyres as aresult of driving over obstacles increases.

If you change wheel size, make sure they corre-spond to the correct wheel size category(Y page 365). If the assignment changes withoutrecoding the control units in the vehicle, thespeedometer will not display the speed accu-rately. Driving safety systems and driving sys-tems may then be operationally impaired or maydetect a fault and switch themselves off.You will find a table with the recommended tyrepressures for various vehicle loads on the insideof your vehicle's fuel filler flap or under "Tyrepressure tables" (Y page 373). You can find fur-ther information under "Tyre pressure"(Y page 369).Check tyre pressures regularly and only whenthe tyres are cold.Notes on the vehicle equipment – always fit thevehicle:Rwith tyres of the same size across an axle

(left/right)Rwith the same type of tyres on all wheels at a

given time (summer tyres, winter tyres)You can obtain information about tyres thathave been specially designed and approved foryour vehicle from a Mercedes-Benz ServiceCentre.

380 Wheel and tyre combinationsW

heel

s an

d ty

res

i Not all wheel/tyre combinations can be fit-ted at the factory in all countries.

TyresR 16

Tyres Steel or light-alloy wheels

195/65 R16 C 100/98T10 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 52

195/65 R16 C 104/102T (100T) 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 52

205/65 R16 C 107/105T (103T) 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 52

205/65 R16 C 107/105T (103H) 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 52

205/65 R16 C 103/101H 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 52

225/60 R16 C 105/103H 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 52

R 17

Tyres Steel wheel

225/55 R17 XL 101V 6.5 J x 17 H2 ET 50

225/55 R17 XL 101H 6.5 J x 17 H2 ET 50

R 17

Tyres Light-alloy wheel

225/55 R17 XL 101V 7 J x 17 H2 ET 51

225/55 R17 XL 101H 7 J x 17 H2 ET 51

R 18

Tyres Light-alloy wheel

245/45 R18 XL 100W 11, 12 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52

245/45 R18 XL 100V11, 12 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52

10 Only for vehicles with a permissible gross weight up to 2.8 t.11 Only for vehicles with a permissible gross weight up to 3.1 t and a permissible axle load of 1550 kg on the rear

axle.12 Not for vehicles with a permissible gross weight up to 3.2 t.

Wheel and tyre combinations 381

Whe

els

and

tyre

s

Z

R 19

Tyres Light-alloy wheel

245/45 R19 XL 102Y 13, 14 8 J x 19 H2 ET 52

The following additional wheel/tyre combinations apply to vehicles with 4MATIC.R 17

Tyres Steel wheel

225/55 R17 C 109/107H (104H) 6.5 J x 17 H2 ET 50

225/55 R17 C 109/107T (104T) 6.5 J x 17 H2 ET 50

R 17

Tyres Light-alloy wheel

225/55 R17 C 109/107H (104H) 7 J x 17 H2 ET 51

225/55 R17 C 109/107T (104T) 7 J x 17 H2 ET 51

R 18

Tyres Light-alloy wheel

245/45 R18 XL 100W 11, 12 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52

245/45 R18 XL 100V 11, 12 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52

R 19

Tyres Light-alloy wheel

245/45 R19 XL 102Y 13, 14 8 J x 19 H2 ET 52

Spare wheel

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe wheel or tyre size as well as the tyre typeof the spare wheel and the wheel to bereplaced may differ. Driving characteristicscan be severely impaired when you fit thespare wheel. There is a risk of an accident.

To prevent risks:Radapt your driving style accordingly and

drive carefullyRnever fit more than one spare wheel that

differs from the wheel to be changedRonly use a spare wheel that differs from the

wheel to be changed for a brief period

13 Only for vehicles with a permissible gross weight up to 3.2 t and a permissible axle load of 1650 kg on the rearaxle.

14 Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains".11 Only for vehicles with a permissible gross weight up to 3.1 t and a permissible axle load of 1550 kg on the rear

axle.12 Not for vehicles with a permissible gross weight up to 3.2 t.

382 Spare wheelW

heel

s an

d ty

res

Rdo not switch ESP® offRhave a spare wheel of a different size

replaced at the nearest qualified specialistworkshop. You must make sure that thewheel and tyre dimensions as well as thetyre type are correct.

When using a spare wheel of a different size, donot exceed the maximum permissible speed of80 km/h.

General notesThe procedure for fitting the spare wheel isdescribed in "Fitting a wheel" (Y page 377).The following should be checked regularly, par-ticularly prior to long journeys:Rthe tyre pressure of the spare wheel, which

should then be corrected if necessary(Y page 369)Rthe fastenings of the spare wheel bracketThe spare wheel is located in a spare wheelbracket under the rear of the vehicle.Replace the tyres after six years at the latest,regardless of wear. This also applies to the sparewheel.Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitor: thespare wheel is not equipped with a sensor formonitoring tyre pressure. If you have fitted aspare wheel, the tyre pressure monitor will notfunction for this wheel. The system may con-tinue to show the tyre pressure of the wheel thathas been removed for a few minutes. The valuedisplayed for the position where the spare wheelis fitted is not the same as the current tyre pres-sure of the spare wheel.When you are driving with the spare wheel fitted,the tyre pressure monitor cannot function reli-ably. Only restart the tyre pressure monitorwhen the defective wheel has been replacedwith a new wheel and sensor.More information can be found under "Tyrepressure monitor" (Y page 370).

Removing and fitting the spare wheel

Spare wheel under the rear of the vehi-cle

RemovingX Take the wheel wrench and auxiliary tool for

the spare wheel lifter out of the vehicle tool kit(Y page 357).

X Open the tailgate.X Carefully prise off protective cap : with a

suitable tool, e.g. a screwdriver. Be carefulnot to damage the paintwork or the coveringcap when doing so.

X Push auxiliary tool ; through the openinginto the winch guide.

X Attach wheel wrench = to auxiliary tool ;for the spare wheel lifter.

X Turn wheel wrench = in the direction ofarrow ? until you feel resistance or until thefriction clutch of the winch overwinds.The spare wheel has been lowered.

Spare wheel 383

Whe

els

and

tyre

s

Z

X Hold the spare wheel by handle E on thecover tray and pull it out from under the vehi-cle.

X Press cable B downwards and twist itagainst spring D using wheel gripper C.Wheel gripper C is released.

X Pull wheel gripper C through the opening incover tray E and out of the wheel brace.

X Remove cover tray E from the spare wheel.

! When winding upwards, make sure that thehandle of the cover tray points backwards.Check that the spare wheel is correctly andfirmly positioned:Rafter every wheel changeRat every maintenance intervalRat least once a year

Fittingi Light-alloy wheels cannot be transported

under the vehicle. In this case, transport thelight-alloy wheel in the load compartment andonly raise cover tray E.

X Take wheel wrench = and auxiliary tool ;for the spare wheel lifter out of the vehicletool kit (Y page 357).

X Place the wheel on the ground with the wheelbrace pointing upwards.

X Place cover tray E on the wheel so that therecess for tyre valve F is above the valve.

X Press cover tray E onto the wheel brace andalign the wheel so that the handle of covertray E faces backwards.

X Guide wheel gripper C at an angle on wire Bthrough the opening in cover tray E and intothe wheel brace from above.

X Slide the wheel under the vehicle a little.X Attach wheel wrench = to auxiliary tool ;

for the spare wheel lifter.X Turn wheel wrench = in the direction of

arrow A until you feel resistance and thefriction clutch of the winch overwinds in jerks.The wheel is firmly secured to the undersideof the vehicle.

X Pull wheel wrench = and auxiliary tool ; forthe spare wheel lifter out of the opening forthe winch.

X Close the winch opening with coveringcap :.

X Stow wheel wrench = and auxiliary tool ;for the spare wheel lifter in the vehicle tool kit.

X Close the tailgate.

384 Spare wheelW

heel

s an

d ty

res

Useful information

These Operating Instructions describe all mod-els as well as standard and optional equipmentof your vehicle that were available at the time ofgoing to print. Country-specific variations arepossible. Note that your vehicle may not be fit-ted with all of the described functions. This alsoapplies to safety-relevant systems and func-tions.Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops: (Y page 31).

Vehicle electronics

Working on the engine electronics! Only have work carried out on the engine

electronics and its associated parts, such ascontrol units, sensors, actuating componentsand connector leads, at a qualified specialistworkshop. Vehicle components may other-wise wear more quickly and the vehicle'soperating permit may be invalidated.

Fitting electrical or electronic equip-ment

Increased levels of electromagnetic radiationcould pose a risk to your health and the health ofothers. Using an exterior aerial takes intoaccount current scientific discussions relatingto the possible health hazards that may resultfrom electromagnetic fields. Only have the exte-rior aerial installed by a qualified specialist work-shop.If you use electric or electronic devices in thecar, the conditions named below must be met.The general operating permit may otherwise beinvalidated.Electrical and electronic devices may not onlyreduce comfort but also the operating safety ofthe vehicle. If you retrofit such devices, theirelectromagnetic compatibility must be checkedand verified.If these devices are linked to functions associ-ated with resistance to interference, they musthave type approval. This applies to the device orits interfaces to the vehicle electronics, e.g.charging brackets.The type approval document must adhere toeither Directive 72/245/EEC or Regulation

ECE-R 10, each according to the currently appli-cable version. The type-approved device mustbear the e/E mark. The e/E mark can beobtained from the equipment manufacturer oran authorised testing centre.Devices not linked to functions associated withresistance to interference do not require typeapproval. However, these devices must have adeclaration of compliance for the maintenanceof certain limiting values, according to Directive89/336/EEC or Directive 1995/5/EC. Theselimiting values are defined in Appendix I of thecurrently valid version of the Directive72/245/EEC.A telephone or two-way radio to be installed inthe vehicle must be approved. You can obtainfurther information from any Mercedes-BenzService Centre.When using mobile phones and two-way radios,Mercedes-Benz recommends connection to anapproved exterior aerial. This is the only way toensure optimal reception quality in the vehicleand to minimise potential interference betweenthe vehicle electronics and mobile phones ortwo-way radios.The transmission output of the mobile phone ortwo-way radio may not exceed the followingmaximum transmission output (PEAK):

Frequency range Maximum trans-mission output(PEAK)

Shortwave(f < 50 MHz)

100 W

4 m waveband 30 W

2 m waveband 50 W

Channel group com-munication/Tetra

35 W

70 cm waveband 35 W

GSM/UMTS/LTE 10 W

Vehicle electronics 385

Tech

nica

l dat

a

Identification plates

Vehicle identification plate with vehi-cle identification number (VIN)

Vehicle identification plate on the driver's side B-pillarX Open the driver’s door.

You will see the vehicle identification plate :with the vehicle identification number (VIN)and the permissible weight data.

Vehicle identification plate (example: vehicles witha trailer tow hitch): Vehicle identification plate; Vehicle manufacturer (Daimler AG)= EU general operating permit number (only

for certain countries)? VINA Maximum permissible gross weight (kg)B Maximum permissible gross weight of vehi-

cle/trailer combination (kg) (only for certaincountries)

C Maximum permissible front axle load (kg)D Maximum permissible rear axle load (kg)E Paint code

i The data shown on the vehicle identificationplate is sample data. This data differs for

every vehicle and may deviate from what isshown here. The data valid for your vehiclecan be found on the identification plate ofyour vehicle.

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

VIN in the engine compartmentThe VIN can be found on the vehicle identifica-tion plate (Y page 386).VIN : is also stamped into the longitudinalmember in the engine compartment next to thefuse box.

Engine numberThe engine number is stamped on the crank-case. More information may be obtained at anyqualified specialist workshop.

Service products and capacities

Important safety notes

G WARNINGService product can be poisonous and haz-ardous to health. There is a risk of injury.Observe the instructions on the respectiveoriginal container when using, storing and dis-posing off service products. Always store ser-vice products in the sealed original container.Always keep service products out of the reachof children.

386 Service products and capacitiesTe

chni

cal d

ata

H Environmental noteDispose of service products in an environ-mentally-responsible manner.

When handling, storing and disposing of anyservice products, please observe the relevantregulations.Service products include the following:RFuelsRExhaust gas aftertreatment additives, e.g.

AdBlue®

RLubricants, e.g. engine oil, transmission oilRCoolantRBrake fluidRWasher fluidRClimate control system refrigerantsApproved service products comply with thehighest quality standards and are listed in theMercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Prod-ucts. Only use service products approved for thevehicle. This is an important condition for theimplied warranty.You will recognise the service productsapproved by Mercedes-Benz by the followinginscription on the containers:RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 228.5)RMB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 228.5)Other identifications and recommendationsrefer to a quality level or a specification accord-ing to an MB Sheet Number (e.g. MB 228.5).They are therefore not necessarily approved byMercedes-Benz.Further information can be obtained from anyMercedes-Benz qualified specialist workshop oron the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.Additives for approved service products are nei-ther required nor permitted. Approved fuel addi-tives are the exception. Additives can causeengine damage and must therefore not beadded to the service products.The use of additives is always the responsibilityof the vehicle operator. The use of additives mayresult in the restriction or loss of your impliedwarranty entitlements.

Fuel

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. Improper handing offuel creates a risk of fire and explosion.Avoid fire, naked flames, smoking and creat-ing sparks under all circumstances. Switch offthe engine and, if applicable, the auxiliaryheating before refuelling.

G WARNINGFuels are poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a danger of injury.Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contactwith skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale fuelvapours. Keep fuels out of the reach of chil-dren.If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash the fuel off any affected areas of skin

with water and soap immediately.RIf you get fuel in your eyes, rinse them thor-

oughly with clean water immediately. Seekimmediate medical attention.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek immediate medi-

cal attention. Do not induce vomiting.RChange any clothing that has come into

contact with fuel immediately.

When handling, storing and disposing of fuels,please observe the relevant regulations.

Tank capacityVehicles with a diesel engine:Depending on equipment, the total capacity ofthe fuel tank may vary.

Total capacity Approximately 57 l

of which reserve fuel

Approximately 10 l

Service products and capacities 387

Tech

nica

l dat

a

Z

Total capacity Approximately 70 l

of which reserve fuel

Approximately 10 l

Vehicles with a petrol engine:Depending on equipment, the total capacity ofthe fuel tank may vary.

Model Total capacity

V 250 Approximately70 l

Model of whichreserve fuel

V 250 Approximately13 l

Diesel

Fuel gradeG WARNINGIf you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the flashpoint of this fuel mixture is lower than that ofpure diesel fuel. When the engine is running,components in the exhaust system may over-heat unnoticed. There is a risk of fire.Never refuel with petrol. Never add petrol todiesel fuel.

! Only refuel using commercially-availableautomotive diesel fuel that conforms to theEuropean standard EN 590 (or equivalentnational fuel standards). Fuels such as alter-native fuels (bio-diesel), marine diesel, heat-ing oil etc. are not permitted.Do not use fuel additives. There is otherwise arisk of impaired engine performance orengine and catalytic converter damage.

! Vehicles with diesel particle filters: incountries outside the EU, only use low sulphurEuro diesel with a sulphur content of under50 ppm. Otherwise, the emission control sys-tem could be damaged.

! Vehicles without a diesel particle filter:in countries where only diesel fuel with a highsulphur content is available, you will need tocarry out your vehicle's oil change at shorter

intervals. More information about the intervalfor oil change can be obtained from any quali-fied specialist workshop.

! If you are using drums or canisters to refuelthe vehicle, you should filter the fuel beforeadding it.This will prevent malfunctions in the fuel sys-tem due to contaminated fuel.

Information about current country-specific fuelsulphur content is available:Rfrom any Mercedes Benz Service CentreRon the Internet at

http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com under thespecifications on Sheet No. 136.2.

i Usually you will find information about thefuel grade on the filling pump. Otherwise, askthe filling station attendant.

Diesel at very low outside temperaturesG WARNINGIf you heat fuel system components, e.g. witha hot-air gun or naked flame, these compo-nents could be damaged. This can cause fuelto escape and ignite. Depending on the typeof damage, fuel may also not escape until theengine is running. There is a risk of fire andexplosion.Never heat fuel system components. Contacta qualified specialist workshop to rectify themalfunction.

At very low outside temperatures, paraffin mayseparate from the diesel fuel resulting in inade-quate flow characteristics.Malfunctions resulting from paraffin separationcan only be rectified by heating the entire fuelsystem. Park the vehicle in a heated garage, forexample.To prevent operating problems, diesel with bet-ter flow qualities is offered during the wintermonths.Winter diesel fuels in the Federal Republic ofGermany and other Central European countriesare reliable up to an outside temperature ofÒ22 †. Winter diesel, which can be used withoutdifficulties at the temperatures normallyencountered, is available in most countries.

388 Service products and capacitiesTe

chni

cal d

ata

Fuel additives! Do not use any fuel additive. Fuel additives

may cause malfunctions and engine failure.Do not add any petrol, kerosene or flowimprovers to diesel fuel to improve its flowcharacteristics. Flow improvers actuallyimpair the lubricity of the diesel fuel. This cancause damage to the injection system, forexample.

Information on fuel consumption

H Environmental noteCO2 (carbon dioxide) is the gas which scien-tists believe to be principally responsible forglobal warming (the greenhouse effect). Yourvehicle's CO2 emissions are directly related tofuel consumption and therefore depend on:Refficient use of the fuel by the engineRdriving styleRother non-technical factors, such as envi-

ronmental influences, road conditions ortraffic flow

You can minimise your vehicle's CO2 emis-sions by driving carefully and having it serv-iced regularly.

Only for certain countries: the respective cur-rent consumption and emission values of yourvehicle can be found in the COC papers (ECCERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY). These docu-ments are supplied when the vehicle is deliv-ered.Consumption figures were found in the currentlyvalid respective version:Rfor vehicles up to and including the Euro 4

standard according to EU Directive80/1268/EECRfor vehicles from the Euro 5 standard accord-

ing to regulation (EC) no. 715/2007Rfor vehicles from the Euro 6 standard accord-

ing to regulation (EC) no. 595/2009Fuel consumption depends on:Rthe type of vehicleRthe style of drivingRthe operating conditionsRthe type or quality of the fuel used

The vehicle will use more fuel than usual in thefollowing situations:Rat very low outside temperaturesRin urban trafficRduring short journeysRin mountainous terrainRwhen towing a trailerObserve the advice in the "Protection of theenvironment" section to keep fuel consumptionlow (Y page 29).The following components of the different vehi-cle versions influence fuel consumption:Rtyre sizes, tyre tread, tyre pressure, tyre con-

ditionRtransmission ratios for the drive assembliesRadditional equipment (e.g. air-conditioning

system, auxiliary heating system)For these reasons, the actual consumption fig-ures for your vehicle may deviate from the con-sumption figures determined according to EUDirective 80/1268/EEC.Details on fuel consumption can be called up inthe on-board computer (Y page 249).

AdBlue®

Important safety notesAdBlue® is the reducing agent used for theexhaust gas aftertreatment in BlueTec® vehi-cles. AdBlue® is:Rnon-toxicRcolourlessRwater-solubleRnon-flammableIf you open the AdBlue® tank, small amounts ofammonia vapour may be released.Ammonia vapours have a pungent smell and areparticularly irritating to skin, mucous mem-branes and eyes. You may experience a burningsensation in your nose, throat and eyes. Youmay also experience coughing and watery eyes.Do not inhale ammonia vapours. Only fill theAdBlue® tank in well-ventilated areas.Comply with the important safety notes for ser-vice products when handling AdBlue®

(Y page 386).

Service products and capacities 389

Tech

nica

l dat

a

Z

Low ambient temperaturesAdBlue freezes at a temperature of approx-imately -11 †. The vehicle is equipped with anAdBlue® preheating system at the factory. Win-ter operation can thus be guaranteed even attemperatures below -11 †.If you top up AdBlue® at temperatures under-11 †, the AdBlue® level in the multifunctiondisplay may not be displayed correctly.Rif AdBlue® is frozen, drive for at least

20 minutesRsubsequently, park the vehicle for at least

30 seconds so that the level is displayed cor-rectly

Additives! Only use AdBlue® which meets the

ISO 22241 standard.Do not mix AdBlue® with any additives and donot dilute AdBlue® with water. Exhaust gasaftertreatment may otherwise not functioncorrectly and its components may be dam-aged.

Purity! Contamination of the AdBlue®, e.g. by other

service products, cleaning agents or dust, canlead to:Rincreased emission valuesRdamage to the catalytic converterRengine damageRmalfunctions in exhaust gas aftertreatment

Assuring the purity of AdBlue® is particularlyimportant. This is the only way to avoid exhaustgas aftertreatment malfunctions and damage tothe system's components.If AdBlue® is pumped out of the AdBlue® tank,e.g. during repair work, do not use this fluid torefill the tank. The purity of the fluid can no lon-ger be guaranteed.

CapacitiesThe total capacity of the AdBlue® tank may vary,depending on the vehicle equipment.

Model Total capacity

All models 11.5 lor

25 l

Engine oil

General notes

When handling engine oil, observe the importantsafety notes on service products (Y page 386).The quality of the engine oil used is of decisiveimportance for the engine's functionality andoperating life. Mercedes-Benz continuallyapproves engine oils based on complex experi-ments according to the latest technologicalstandards.Therefore, only Mercedes-Benz approvedengine oils may be used in Mercedes-Benzengines. Mercedes-Benz recommends havingthe oil changed at a qualified specialist work-shop.Information about approved engine oils can beobtained:Rfrom any Mercedes Benz Service CentreRon the Internet at

http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com by enteringthe designation, e.g. 229.5

Mercedes-Benz approval is indicated on the oilcontainer by the inscription „MB-Freigabe“ or„MB Approval“ and the corresponding designa-tion, e.g. MB-Freigabe or MB Approval 229.5.

390 Service products and capacitiesTe

chni

cal d

ata

Designations of the approved engine oils foryour vehicle

Petrol engines MB Approval

V 250 229.5

Diesel engines MB Approval

All models 228.51, 229.31,229.51, 229.52

i In certain countries, different engine oilscan be used, provided that the maintenanceintervals are reduced. For more information,please contact a qualified specialist work-shop.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only useapproved multi-grade engine oils of the SAEclasses SAE 0W-30 and SAE 0W-40 orSAE 5W-30 and SAE 5W-40. These engine oilsensure optimum lubrication even at very lowoutside temperatures (Y page 391).When topping up, we recommend that you onlyuse engine oil of the same grade (MB-Freigabeor MB Approvaldesignation) and SAE class asthe oil filled at the last oil change.

i If the engine oils listed in the table are notavailable, you may add the following engineoils until the next oil change:RMB-Freigabe or MB Approval 228.5, 229.3,

229.5 or ACEA C3This must only be added once and the amountmust not be greater than 1.0 l.Subsequently, have the engine oil changed atthe earliest possible opportunity.

! Using engine oils of another grade quality isnot permitted.

Capacities! Do not add too much oil. Topping up with too

much engine oil can result in damage to theengine or to the catalytic converter. Haveexcess engine oil siphoned off.

Oil change including oil filter

Petrol engines Replacementamount

V 250 Approximately 7.7 l

Diesel engines Replacementamount

All models Approximately 10.5 l

Additives! Do not use any additives with the engine oil.

This could damage the engine.

Engine oil viscosity! Select the engine oil according to its SAE

class (viscosity), depending on the seasonand the average outside temperature. If theSAE class of the engine oil does not suit theoutside temperature, change the engine oil ingood time, before on the onset of the coldseason. Using an engine oil that does not haveadequate temperature characteristics canlead to engine damage.The temperature range information of the SAEclassification always refers to that of fresh oil.The temperature characteristics of the engineoil may deteriorate significantly as a result ofageing during vehicle operation, especially atlow outside temperatures.For this reason, Mercedes-Benz recommendsthat the engine oil be changed before theonset of the cold season. Use an approvedengine oil of the specified SAE class.

Engine oil SAE classificationViscosity indicates the flow characteristics of afluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity, thismeans that it is thick; a low viscosity means thatit is thin.Depending on the respective outside tempera-tures, select an engine oil according to SAEclassification (viscosity). The table displays theSAE classification to be used. The low temper-ature characteristics of engine oils can notice-

Service products and capacities 391

Tech

nica

l dat

a

Z

ably deteriorate during operation, e.g. from age-ing, soot and fuel accretion. For this reason,regular oil changes using an approved engine oilfrom the suitable SAE classification are urgentlyrecommended.

Oil changeOil change intervals depend on the vehicle'soperating conditions and the quality of theengine oil used. The on-board computer auto-matically shows the date for the next oil changeas an event message in the display.Mercedes-Benz recommends having the oilchanged at a qualified specialist workshop.

Information about oil consumptionDepending on the driving style, the vehicle con-sumes a maximum of 1.0 l of engine oil every1000 km.Oil consumption may be higher if:Rthe vehicle is newRyou mainly operate the vehicle under arduous

operating conditionsRyou frequently drive at high engine speedsRegular maintenance is one of the preconditionsfor moderate rates of consumption.You can only estimate the oil consumption afteryou have driven a considerable distance.Check the engine oil level on a regular basis, e.g.weekly or each time you refuel (Y page 338).

Brake fluid

G WARNINGThe brake fluid continuously absorbs mois-ture from the air. This results in the boilingpoint of the brake fluid lowering. If the boilingpoint of the brake fluid is too low, vapourpockets may form when the brakes are sub-jected to a heavy load. This would impair brak-ing efficiency. There is a risk of an accident.Have the brake fluid renewed at the prescri-bed intervals.

! Brake fluid corrodes paint, plastic and rub-ber. If brake fluid comes into contact withpaint, plastic or rubber, rinse with waterimmediately.

When handling, storing and disposing of brakefluid, please observe the relevant regulationsand the important safety notes for service prod-ucts (Y page 386).Over a period of time, the brake fluid absorbsmoisture from the air. This reduces its boilingpoint.Have the brake fluid replaced at specified inter-vals by a qualified specialist workshop.

i There is usually a notice in the engine com-partment to remind you when the next brakefluid change is due.

Use only approved brake fluids that comply withthe Mercedes-Benz Specifications for ServiceProducts. Always check for the identificationDOT 4 plus.Information about approved brake fluids can beobtained:Ron the Internet at

http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

Coolant

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf antifreeze comes into contact with hot com-ponents in the engine compartment, it mayignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Let the engine cool down before you top upthe antifreeze. Make sure that antifreeze isnot spilled next to the filler neck. Thoroughlyclean the antifreeze from components beforestarting the engine.

! Take care not to spill any coolant on paintedsurfaces. You could otherwise damage thepaintwork.

When handling, storing and disposing of coolantand antifreeze, please observe the relevant reg-ulations and the important safety notes for ser-vice products (Y page 386).

392 Service products and capacitiesTe

chni

cal d

ata

Coolant additive with corrosion andantifreeze protectionThe coolant is a mixture of water and antifreezeand corrosion inhibitor. It performs the followingtasks:Rcorrosion protectionRantifreeze protectionRraising the boiling pointWhen the vehicle is first delivered, it is filled witha coolant mixture that ensures adequate anti-freeze and corrosion protection. Coolant mustremain in the engine cooling system all yearround to ensure corrosion protection and ahigher boiling point – even in countries with highoutside temperatures.Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze andcorrosion inhibitor that meets the requirementsin the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for ServiceProducts Sheet Number 325.5.Information about antifreeze and corrosioninhibitors approved by Mercedes-Benz is avail-able:Rfrom any Mercedes Benz Service CentreRon the Internet at

http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com under thespecifications on Sheet No. 325.5

Check the corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze con-centration in the coolant every six months.The percentage of antifreeze and corrosioninhibitor in the engine cooling system should:Rbe at least 50%. This way, the engine cooling

system is protected against freezing down toapproximately -37 †.Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection down

to -45 †). Otherwise, heat will not be dissi-pated as effectively.

If there has been coolant loss, do not refill onlywith water. If the vehicle has lost coolant, top upwith equal parts water and antifreeze and cor-rosion inhibitor. The water used as part of thecoolant mixture must fulfil certain require-ments; these are usually fulfilled by drinkingwater. If the water quality is not sufficient, youmust treat the water.Further information may be obtained at anyqualified specialist workshop.

Maintenance intervalHave the coolant replaced at specified intervalsby a qualified specialist workshop.

CapacitiesEngine cooling system

Vehicles Coolant

All models Approx. 10.4 l

Approx. 13.4 lon vehicles with aux-

iliary heating

Washer fluid

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf windscreen washer concentrate comes intocontact with hot components of the engine orthe exhaust system, it can ignite. There is arisk of fire and injury.Make sure the windscreen washer concen-trate does not come into contact with the fillerneck.

! Only use washer fluid that is suitable forplastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit or MBWinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluid could dam-age the plastic lenses of the headlamps.

When handling washer fluid, observe the impor-tant safety notes on service products(Y page 386).

Mixing ratioAdd windscreen washer concentrate to thewasher fluid all year round. Adapt the mixingratio to the outside temperatures.At temperatures above freezing:X Top up the washer fluid reservoir with a mix-

ture of water and windscreen washer concen-trate, e.g. Summerwash to prevent smearing.

At temperatures below freezing:X Top up the washer fluid reservoir with a mix-

ture of water and windscreen washer concen-

Service products and capacities 393

Tech

nica

l dat

a

Z

trate, e.g. Winterwash if there is a danger offrost.This prevents washer fluid from freezing onthe windscreen.

CapacitiesWindscreen washer system with/without heating

Washer fluid reser-voir

Washer fluid

Unheated Approx. 3.5 litres

Heated Approx. 6.0 litres

Vehicle data

General notesThe following section contains important tech-nical data for your vehicle. Additional vehicle-specific and equipment-dependent technicaldata, such as vehicle weights, can be found inyour vehicle registration papers.Current technical data can also be found onlineat: http://www.mercedes-benz.com

EngineThe technical data was determined in accord-ance with the relevant EU Directives. All dataapplies to the vehicle's standard equipment.The data may therefore differ for vehicles withoptional equipment.You can obtain further information from anyMercedes-Benz Service Centre.You will find information about the vehicle'snoise level and exhaust gas standard in the vehi-cle documents.V 200 d / V 200 d 4MATIC

Rated output 100 kW(136 HP)

At engine speed 3800 rpm

Rated torque 330 Nm

At engine speed 1200 –2400 rpm

Number of cylinders 4

Valves per cylinder 4

Displacement 2143 cm3

Maximum engine speed 4550± 50 rpm

V 220 d / V 220 d 4MATIC

Rated output 120 kW(163 HP)

At engine speed 3800 rpm

Rated torque 380 Nm

At engine speed 1400 –2400 rpm

Number of cylinders 4

Valves per cylinder 4

Displacement 2143 cm3

Maximum engine speed 4550± 50 rpm

V 250 d / V 250 d 4MATIC

Rated output 140 kW(190 HP)

At engine speed 3800 rpm

Rated torque 440 Nm

At engine speed 1400 –2400 rpm

Number of cylinders 4

Valves per cylinder 4

Displacement 2143 cm3

Maximum engine speed 4550± 50 rpm

V 250

Rated output 155 kW(211 HP)

At engine speed 5500 rpm

Rated torque 350 Nm

394 Vehicle dataTe

chni

cal d

ata

At engine speed 1250 –4000 rpm

Number of cylinders 4

Valves per cylinder 4

Displacement 1991 cm3

Maximum engine speed 6300± 150 rpm

DimensionsThe dimensions specified vary according to:RtyresRloadRcondition of the suspensionRoptional equipment

All models

Opening height of the tail-gate

2153 mm

Opening range of the tail-gate

1047 mm

Load width 1205 mm

Load heightCompact versionLong versionExtra-long body

1327 mm1326 mm1297 mm

Vehicle lengthCompact versionLong versionExtra-long body

4895 mm5140 mm5370 mm

Vehicle widthIncluding exterior mirrorsExcluding exterior mirrors

2249 mm1928 mm

WheelbaseCompact versionLong versionExtra-long body

3200 mm3200 mm3430 mm

Lashing points and carrier systems

Lashing points

General notes! Observe the notes regarding the maximum

load capacity of individual lashing points.If you combine several lashing points tosecure a load, you must always observe themaximum loading capacity of the weakestlashing point.For example, when the brakes are fullyapplied, forces act which can be many timesthat of the weight force of the load. To dis-tribute the load evenly, always use severallashing points. Load the lashing points asevenly as possible.

You will find further information about lashingpoints in the "Securing loads" section(Y page 330).

Guide railsThe maximum tensile load of the lashing pointsof a guide rail is 350 daN if:Rthe load on the load compartment floor is

secured to two lashing points on the rail andRthe distance to the nearest load-securing

point on the same rail is approximately 1 m

Maximum roof load

G WARNINGIf you use openings in the bodywork ordetachable parts as steps, you could:Rslip and/or fallRdamage the vehicle and cause yourself to

fall.There is a danger of injury.Always use secure climbing aids, e.g. a suita-ble ladder.

! Do not use the lower guide on the slidingdoor (carriage) as a step. You could otherwisedamage its trim and/or the mechanism of thesliding door

G WARNINGWhen a load is transported on the roof, thevehicle's centre of gravity rises and the han-

Vehicle data 395

Tech

nica

l dat

a

Z

dling changes. If you exceed the maximumroof load, the handling as well as steering andbraking characteristics are severely affected.There is a risk of an accident.Always observe the maximum roof load andadapt your driving style.

! The weight of any load carried on the roof,including the roof carrier, must not exceedthe maximum permissible roof load.The roof carrier supports must be arranged atequal distances.Fit the basic rail carrier bars in front of andbehind the intermediate support.

! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use roof carrier systemswhich have been tested and approved forMercedes-Benz. This will help to avoid dam-age.

Maximum roof load 150 kgwith at least threepairs of supportpoints

The data is valid for a load distributed evenlyover the entire roof area.Reduce the load on shorter roof carriers pro-portionately. The maximum load per pair of roofcarrier supports is 50 kg. The maximum load ofa rail carrier bar is 100 kg.Loading guidelines and other information con-cerning load distribution and load securing canbe found in the "Transporting" section(Y page 328).

Trailer tow hitch

Installation dimensions! The distance of the trailer coupling from the

road surface when the vehicle is unladendepends on the model and equipment fittedon the vehicle. It is therefore not possible togive a specific figure.Observe securing points on the chassis framewhen retrofitting the trailer coupling.You can obtain further information on retro-fitting from a qualified specialist workshop.

: Securing points; Distance from road surface (350 – 420 mm,

laden)The distance from the road surface depends onthe vehicle model.Only use a trailer tow hitch which has been tes-ted and specially approved by Mercedes-Benzfor your vehicle.

Trailer loadsWhen towing a trailer, the permissible grossvehicle weight is increased by 100 kg for vehi-cles with passenger vehicle approval. The per-missible gross vehicle weight must be observed.The road speed of the vehicle must be limited toa maximum of 100 km/h in accordance withDirective 92/21/EEC.The following values vary and are dependentupon:Rtype of vehicleRthe permissible gross vehicle weightRrear axle ratioRother possible optional equipmentYou must therefore observe the entries in thevehicle documentation regarding operation witha trailer. The relevant permissible values (thatshould not be exceeded) can be found there.These specifications can also be found on thetype plates of the trailer tow hitch of the trailerand the vehicle. If the values differ, the lowestvalue applies.When driving in mountainous areas, note thatthe power output of the engine, and with it the

396 Vehicle dataTe

chni

cal d

ata

gradient climbing capability of the vehicle,decrease with increasing altitude.

Maximum permissi-ble gross weight of vehicle/trailer combinationat 12% gradient

4800 – 5700 kg

Permissible trailer load, brakedat 12% gradient

2000 – 2500 kg

Permissible trailer load, unbraked

750 kg

Permissible nose weight

100 kg

Vehicle data 397

Tech

nica

l dat

a

Z

398

399

400

Legal informationInternet

Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehi-cles and about Daimler AG can be found on thefollowing websites:http://www.mercedes-benz.comhttp://www.daimler.com

Editorial office

You are welcome to forward any queries or sug-gestions you may have regarding these Operat-ing Instructions to:Daimler AG, HPC: CAC, Customer Service,70546 Stuttgart, Germany© Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated orotherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, with-out the written permission of Daimler AG.

Vehicle manufacturer

Daimler AGMercedesstraße 13770327 StuttgartGermany

SymbolsG WARNINGWarning notes make you aware of dangerswhich could pose a threat to your health orlife, or to the health and life of others.

H Environmental noteEnvironmental notes provide you with infor-mation on environmentally aware actions ordisposal.

! Notes on material damage alert you to dan-gers that could lead to damage to your vehi-cle.

i These symbols indicate useful instructionsor further information that could be helpful toyou.

X This symbol designates an instruc-tion you must follow.

X Several consecutive symbols indi-cate an instruction with severalsteps.

(Y page) This symbol tells you where you canfind further information on a topic.

Y Y This symbol indicates a warning or aninstruction that is continued on thenext page.

Display This text indicates a message on thedisplay.

Parts of the software in the vehicle are protectedby copyright © 2005 The Free Type Projecthttp://www.freetype.org. All rights reserved.

As at 27.10.2016

V-ClassOperating Instructions

Mercedes-BenzOrder no. 6463 7351 02 Part no. 447 584 17 03 Z102 Edition 03-17

É4475841703Z1028ËÍ4475841703Z102

V-Clas

s